Reinforced Concrete Design PDF

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete
Design
Structural System Overview
Dr. E. Sandt
Summer 2003 Semester
Presentation Overview
1.
2.
3.
4.
Building system primary functions

Types of load
RC structural systems
RC structural members

Design
1. Basic Building System

Functions
Support gravity loads for strength and
serviceability during:
1. Normal use (service) conditions
2. Maximum considered use conditions
3. Environmental loading of varying
intensities
Design
Vertical deflection (sag)
Dead, Live, etc.
Lateral deflection (sway)
Wind or
earthquakes
Performance-Based Design: Control displacements

within acceptable limits during service loading, factored
loaded, and varying intensities of environmental loading
Design
2. Types of Load
Gravity:
Dead
Live
Impact
Snow
Rain/floods
Lateral
Wind
Earthquake
Soil lateral pressure
Thermal
Centrifugal

Design
3. RC Structural Systems
A. Floor Systems
B. Lateral Load Systems

Design
A. Floor Systems
Flat plate
Flat slab (w/ drop panels and/or
capitals)
One-way joist system
Two-way waffle system

Design
Flat Plate Floor System

Slab-column frame system in two-way bending
Elevation
Plan
Design
Flat Plate Floor System

Advantages:
Simple construction
Flat ceilings (reduced finishing costs)
Low story heights due to shallow floors
Typical Applications:
Short-to-medium spans with light loading
For LL=50 psi, 15 - 30 spans
For LL=100 psi, 15 25 spans
Design
Flat Plate w/Spandrel Beam

System
Elevation
Plan
Design
10
Flat Plate w/Spandrel Beam

System
Advantages:
Same as flat plate system, plus
Increased gravity and lateral load resistance
Increased torsional resistance
Decreased slab edge displacements

Same as flat plate systems

Design
11
Flat Plate w/Beams Floor

System
Two-way bending
Gravity and lateral

load frames

Design
12
Flat Plate w/Beams Floor

System
Advantages:
Increased gravity and lateral load resistance
Simple construction
Flat ceilings (reduced finishing costs)
Medium spans with light loading
For LL=50 psi, 25 - 30 spans
Design
13
Flat Slab Floor System

Flat plate with drop panels,shear capitals, and/or column capitals
Elevation
Plan
Design
14
Flat Slab Floor System

Advantages:
Reduced slab displacements
Increased slab shear resistance
Relatively flat ceilings (reduced finishing costs)
Low story heights due to shallow floors
Medium spans with moderate to heavy loading
Design
15
One-Way Joist Floor System

Rib (joist) slab : (One-way bending)
2D gravity or
lateral frames
2D lateral frames
Floor joists, type

Design
16

Rib (joist) slab with beams: (One-way bending)
Lateral space frame

Floor joists, type

Design
17

Typical Joist
Top of Slab
8-24 for 30 Modules
16-24 for 53 Modules
1:12 Slope, type
14-24 for 66 Modules .
Width varies
4, 6 or larger
2 or 3 cc. Joists
4 or 6 cc. Skip joists
5 or 6 cc Wide-module joists
Design
18

Advantages:
Longer spans with heavy loads
Reduced dead load due to voids
Electrical, mechanical etc. can be placed between
voids
Good vibration resistance
Medium-to-long spans with heavy loading
For 30 modules, 35 40 spans
For 53 & 66 modules, 35 50 spans
Design
19
Two-Way Joist Floor System

Waffle slab : (Two-way bending)
2D lateral frames
Waffle pans, type

Design
20
Two-Way Joist Floor System

Advantages:
Longer spans with heavy loads
Reduced dead load due to voids
Electrical, mechanical etc. can be placed in voids
Good vibration resistance
Attractive Ceiling
Long spans with heavy loading
For 3, 4, and 5 modules, 40 50 spans and
beyond
Design
21
Floor System Effective Cost
Live Load, psf
(PCA 2000)
100
Flat Plate
Flat Slab
One-way joist
50
25
30
35
Bay Spacing, ft
Design
50
22
B. Lateral Load Systems

Frame Overview
Flat plate (& slab)-column (w/ and w/o
drop panels and/or capitals) frame
systems
Beam-column frame systems
Shear wall systems (building frame and
bearing wall)
Dual systems (frames and shear walls)
Design
23
Frame:
Coplanar system of beam (or slab)

and column elements dominated by flexural
deformation
Planar (2D)
Space (3D)
Design
24
Basic Behavior
Gravity Load
Lateral Loading
Design
25
2D vs. 3D Frames (Plan)

2 or 4 frames , 2 frames
4 frames , 4 frames
Floor joists, type

Planar
Space
Design
26
Frame Advantages
Optimum use of floor space, ie. optimal for office
buildings, retail, parking structures where open space
is required.
Relatively simple and experienced construction
process
Generally economical for low-to mid-rise construction
(less than about 20 stories)
In Houston, most frames are made of reinforced
concrete.

Design
27
Frame Disadvantages
Generally, frames are flexible structures and lateral
deflections generally control the design process for
buildings with greater than about 4 stories. Note
that concrete frames are about 8 times stiffer than
steel frames of the same strength.
Span lengths are limited when using normal
reinforced concrete (generally less than about 40 ft,
but up to about 50 ft). Span lengths can be
increased by using pre-stressed concrete.

Design
28
Frame Lateral Load Systems

Flat plate-column frame:
Effective
slab width
Elevation
Plan
Design
29

Beam-column frame:
Elevation
Design
30

Diaphragm (shear) element: Carries lateral loading to the
lateral load resisting system
Lateral load
frame, type.
Plate element
Deformed shape Lateral load distributes
to frames proportional
to tributary area
Design
31

For relatively square plans, diaphragms are generally
considered rigid
Space frame with
square plan
Deformed shape has constant
lateral displacement - No
diaphragm flexibility, ie. lateral
load distributes to frame
proportional to frame stiffness
Design
32
Shear Wall Lateral Load

Systems
Shear wall
Interior gravity
frames
Edge column
Shear deformations
generally govern
Elevation
Design
33
Shear Wall Lateral Load

Systems
Elevator shaft configuration
Gravity frames
Shear walls
Hole
Coupling beams

Design
34
Dual Lateral Load Systems

Wall-Frame Dual System:
Lateral frames
25% of lateral
load, minimum
Hole
Shear walls

Design
35
4. Structural Members
Beams
Columns
Slabs/plates/shells/folded plates
Walls/diaphragms

Design
36
Beam Elements
Defn: Members subject to bending and shear
L
M
V
M
1,1
E,I,A
2,2
Elastic Properties:
kb = f ( EI/Ln) (bending)
= My/I (normal stress)
ks = GA/L (shear)
v = VQ/Ib (shear stress)
b = f (load, support conditions, L, E, I) (bending)

Design
37
Column Elements
Defn: Members subject to bending, shear,
and axial
L
F
M
E,I,A
F
1,1
M
Elastic Properties:
ka = EA/L (axial)
a = F/A (normal stress)
kb = f ( EI/Ln) (bending)
b = My/I (normal stress)
ks = GA/L (shear)
v = VQ/Ib (shear stress)
2,2
b = f (load, support conditions, L, E, I, A) (normal)

Design
38
Slab/Plate Elements
Defn: Members subject to bi-directional bending &
shear
Mx, My, and Vz

x
x, y, and z
Design
39
Wall/Diaphragm Elements
Defn: Members subject to shear
y
Vx and Vx
x
x and y
Design
40
Lecture 2 - Fundamentals
June 4, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Design Process
Limit states
Design Philosophy
Loading
Concrete Properties
Steel Properties
Design Process
Phase 1: Definition of clients needs and
priorities.
Functional requirements
Aesthetic requirements
Budgetary requirements
Design Process
Phase 2: Development of project
concept
Develop possible layouts

Approximate analysis preliminary members
sizes/cost for each arrangement
Design Process
Phase 2: Development of project
concept
Selection most desirable structural system

Appropriateness
Economical/Cost
Maintainability
Design Process
Phase 3: Design of individual system
Structural analysis (based on preliminary

design)
Moments
Shear forces
Axial forces
Design Process
Phase 3: Design of individual system(cont.)
Member design
Prepare construction days and
specifications.
Proportion members to resist forces
aesthetics
constructability
maintainability
Limit States and Design

Limit State:
Condition in which a structure or structural
element is no longer acceptable for its
intended use.
Major groups for RC structural limit states
Ultimate
Serviceability
Special
Ultimate Limit State

Ultimate limit state
structural collapse of all or part of the

structure ( very low probability of
occurrence) and loss of life can occur.
Loss of equilibrium of a part or all of a
structure as a rigid body (tipping, sliding of
structure).
Ultimate Limit States

Ultimate limit state
Rupture of critical components causing

partial or complete collapse. (flexural,
shear failure).

Progressive Collapse
Minor local failure overloads causing

adjacent members to failure entire structure
collapses.
Structural integrity is provided by tying the
structure together with correct detailing of
reinforcement provides alternative load paths
in case of localized failure

Formation of a plastic mechanism - yielding
of reinforced forms plastic hinges at enough
sections to make structure unstable.
Instability cased by deformations of structure
causing buckling of members.
Fatigue - members can fracture under
repeated stress cycles of service loads (may
cause collapse).
Serviceability Limit States

Functional use of structure is disrupted, but
collapse is not expected
More often tolerated than an an ultimate
limit state since less danger of loss of life.
Excessive crack width
leakage
corrosion of reinforcement
gradual deterioration of structure.

More often tolerated than an an ultimate limit
state since less danger of loss of life.
Excessive deflections for normal service

caused by possible effects
malfunction of machinery
visually unacceptable

More often tolerated than an an ultimate limit
Excessive deflections for normal service

caused by possible effects
damage of nonstructural elements
changes in force distributions
ponding on roofs
collapse of roof

More often tolerated than an ultimate limit
Undesirable vibrations
vertical
floors/ bridges
lateral/torsional
tall buildings
Change in the loading
Special Limit States

Damage/failure caused by abnormal conditions
or loading.
Extreme earthquakes
Floods
damage/collapse
damage/collapse
Special Limit States

Damage/failure caused by abnormal conditions
or loading.
Effects of fire,explosions, or vehicular

collisions.
Effects of corrosion, deterioration
Long-term physical or chemical instability
Limit States Design

Identify all potential modes of failure.
Determine acceptable safety levels for normal
structures building codes
load
combination/factors.
Limit States Design

Consider the significant limits states.
Members are designed for ultimate limit
states
Serviceability is checked.
Exceptions may include
water tanks (crack width)
monorails (deflection)
ACI Building Codes

Whenever two different materials , such as steel and
concrete, acting together, it is understandable that the
analysis for strength of a reinforced concrete member
has to be partial empirical although rational. These
semi-rational principles and methods are being
constant revised and improved as a result of
theoretical and experimental research accumulate. The
American Concrete Institute (ACI), serves as clearing
house for these changes, issues building code
requirements.
Design Philosophy
Two philosophies of design have long prevalent.
Working stress method focuses on conditions
at service loads.
Strength of design method focusing on
conditions at loads greater than the service
loads when failure may be imminent.
The strength design method is deemed conceptually
more realistic to establish structural safety.
Strength Design Method

In the strength method, the service loads are
increased sufficiently by factors to obtain the load at
which failure is considered to be imminent. This
load is called the factored load or factored service
load.
strength required to
strength provided
carry factored loads
Strength Design Method

Strength provide is computed in accordance with
rules and assumptions of behavior prescribed by the
building code and the strength required is obtained by
performing a structural analysis using factored loads.
The strength provided has commonly referred to as
ultimate strength. However, it is a code defined
value for strength and not necessarily ultimate.
The ACI Code uses a conservative definition of
strength.
Safety Provisions
Structures and structural members must always be
designed to carry some reserve load above what is
expected under normal use.
Safety Provisions
There are three main reasons why some sort of
safety factor are necessary in structural design.
[1] Variability in resistance.
[2] Variability in loading.
[3] Consequences of failure.
Variability in Resistance
Variability of the strengths of concrete
and reinforcement.
Differences between the as-built
dimensions and those found in
structural drawings.
Effects of simplification made in the
derivation of the members resistance.
Comparison of
measured and
computed failure
moments based on
all data for reinforced
concrete beams with
fc > 2000 psi.
Variability in Loading
Frequency distribution
of sustained component
of live loads in offices.
Consequences of Failure
A number of subjective factors must be
considered in determining an acceptable level of
safety.
Potential loss of life.
Cost of clearing the debris and replacement
of the structure and its contents.
Cost to society.
Type of failure warning of failure, existence of
alternative load paths.
Margin of Safety
The distributions
of the resistance
and the loading
are used to get a
probability of
failure of the
structure.
Margin of Safety
The term
Y=R-S
is called the safety
margin.
The probability of failure is defined as:
Pf = Pr obability of [Y < 0]
and the safety index is
Loading
SPECIFICATIONS
Cities in the U.S. generally base their
building code on one of the three model
codes:
Uniform Building Code

Basic Building Code (BOCA)
Standard Building Code
Loading
These codes have been consolidated in
the 2000 International Building Code.
Loadings in these codes are mainly
based on ASCE Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE

7-98) has been updated to ASCE 7-02.
Dead Loading
Weight of all permanent construction
Constant magnitude and fixed location
Dead Loads
Examples:
Weight of the Structure

(Walls, Floors, Roofs, Ceilings, Stairways)
Fixed Service Equipment
(HVAC, Piping Weights, Cable Tray,
Etc.)
Can Be Uncertain.
pavement thickness
earth fill over underground structure
Live Loads
Loads produced by use and occupancy of
the structure.
Maximum loads likely to be produced by
the intended use.
Not less than the minimum uniformly
distributed load given by Code.
Live Loads
See Table 2-1 from ASCE 7-98
Stairs and exitways: 100 psf
Storage warehouses: 125 psf (light)
250 psf (heavy)
Minimum concentrated loads are also given in
the codes.
Live Loads
Live Loads
ASCE 7-95 allows reduced live loads for members
with influence area (AI) of 400 sq. ft. or more:
L = L o 0 . 25 +
where Lo
15
AI
0.50 Lo for members

supporting one floor
0.40 Lo otherwise
Live Loads
AI determined by raising member to be designed
by a unit amount. Portion of loaded area that is
raised = AI
Beam:
Column:
Two-Way Slab:
AI = 2 * tributary area
AI = 4 * tributary area
AI = panel area
Load Reduction
Environmental Loads
Snow Loads
Earthquake
Wind
Soil Pressure
Ponding of Rainwater
Temperature Differentials
Classification of Buildings for Wind,

Snow and Earthquake Loads
Based on Use Categories (I through IV)
I Buildings and other structures that represent
a low hazard to human life in the event of a
failure (such as agricultural facilities)
II Buildings/structures not in categories I, III,
and IV
Classification of Buildings for

Wind, Snow and Earthquake Loads
III Buildings/structures that represent a
substantial hazard to human life in the event
of a failure (assembly halls, schools,
colleges, jails, buildings containing
toxic/explosive substances)
Classification of Buildings for

Wind, Snow and Earthquake Loads
IV Buildings/structures designated essential
facilities (hospitals, fire and police stations,
communication centers, power-generating
stations)
Snow Loads
The coefficients
of snow loads are
defined in weight.
Snow Loads
Ground Snow Loads (Map in Fig. 6, ASCE 7):
Based on historical data (not always the
maximum values)
Basic equation in codes is for flat roof snow
loads
Additional equations for drifting effects, sloped
roofs, etc.
Use ACI live load factor
No LL reduction factor allowed
Wind Loads
Wind pressure is proportional to velocity
squared (v2 )
Wind velocity pressure = qz
qz = 0.00256 Kz kzt V I
2
Wind Loads
qz = 0.00256 Kz kzt V I
2
where
0.00256 reflects mass density of air and unit conversions.
V = Basic 3-second gust wind speed (mph) at a height of
33 ft. above the ground in open terrain. (1:50
chance of exceedance in 1 year)
Kz = Exposure coefficient (bldg. ht., roughness of terrain)
kzt = Coefficient accounting for wind speed up over hills
I = Importance factor
Wind Loads
Design wind pressure,
p = qz * G * Cp
G=
Cp =
Gust Response Factor

External pressure coefficients (accounts for
pressure directions on building)
Earthquake Loads
Inertia forces caused by earthquake motion
F=m*a
Distribution of forces can be found using
equivalent static force procedure (code, not
allowed for every building) or using dynamic
analysis procedures
Earthquake Loads
Inertia forces caused by earthquake motion.
Equivalent Static Force Procedure for example,
in ASCE 7-95:
V = Cs * W
where
V = Total lateral base shear
Cs = Seismic response coefficient
W = Total dead load
Earthquake Loads
Total Dead Load, W:
1.0 * Dead Load
+ 0.25 * Storage Loads
+ larger of partition loads or 10 psf
+ Weight of permanent equipment
+ contents of vessels
+ 20% or more of snow load
Earthquake Loads
1 .2 C v
2 .5 C a
C s = smaller of
and
2/3
R
R T
where
Cv = Seismic coefficient based on soil profiled and Av
Ca = Seismic coefficient based on soil profiled and Aa
R = Response modification factor (ability to deform in
inelastic range)
T = Fundamental period of the structure
Earthquake Loads
1 .2 C v
2 .5 C a
C s = smaller of
and
2/3
R
R T
where
T = Fundamental period of the structure
T = CT hn 3/4
where CT = 0.030 for MRF of concrete
0.020 for other concrete buildings.
hn = Building height
Earthquake Map
Roof Loads
Ponding of rainwater
Roof must be able to support all rainwater that could
accumulate in an area if primary drains were
blocked.
Ponding Failure:
Rain water ponds in area of maximum deflection
increases deflection
allows more accumulation of water cycle
continues potential failure
Roof Loads
Roof loads are in addition to snow loads
Minimum loads for workers and construction
materials during erection and repair
Construction Loads
Construction materials
Weight of formwork supporting weight
of fresh concrete
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Concrete: Composite material composed of
portland cement, fine aggregate (sand),
coarse aggregate (gravel/stone), and water;
with or without other additives.
Hydration: Chemical process in which the
cement powder reacts with water and sets
and hardens into a solid mass, bonding the
aggregates together
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Heat of Hydration: Heat is released during the
hydration process.
In large concrete masses heat is dissipated
slowly
temperature rises and
volume expansion
later cooling
causes contraction.
Use special
measures to control cracking.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
1. Proportioning: Goal is to achieve mix with
Adequate strength
Proper workability for placement
Low cost
Low Cost:
Minimize amount of cement
Good gradation of aggregates (decreases
voids and cement paste required)
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Water-Cement Ratio (W/C)

Increased W/C: Improves plasticity and
fluidity of the mix.
Increased W/C: Results in decreased
strength due to larger volume of voids in
cement paste due to free water.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Water-Cement Ratio (W/C) (cont..)

Complete hydration of cement requires
W/C ~ 0.25.
Need water to wet aggregate surfaces,
provide mobility of water during
hydration and to provide workability.
Typical W/C = 0.40-0.60
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Water/Concrete table
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Proportions have been given by volume or

weight of cement to sand to gravel (ie.
1:2:4) with W/C specified separately
Now customary to specify per 94 lb. Bag of
cement: wt. Of water, sand & gravel
Batch quantity: wt. per cubic yard of each
component
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
2. Aggregates
70-75% of volume of hardened concrete

Remainder = hardened cement paste,
uncombined water, air voids
More densely packed aggregate give better
strength
weather resistance (durability)
Economical
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
2. Aggregates
Fine aggregate: sand (passes through a

No. 4 sieve; 4 openings per inch)
Coarse aggregate: gravel
Good gradation:
2-3 size groups of sand
Several size groups of gravel
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Maximum size of coarse aggregate in RC

structures: Must fit into forms and between
reinforcing bars:(318-99, 3.3.2)
1/5 narrowest form dimension
1/3 depth of slab
3/4 minimum distance between
reinforcement bars
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Aggregate Strength
Strong aggregates: quartzite, felsite
Weak aggregates: sandstone, marble
Intermediate strength: limestone, granite
Lecture 3 - Fundamentals
June 6, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Concrete Properties
Steel Properties
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
In the design of concrete mixes, three principal
requirements for concrete are of importance:
Quality
Workability
Economical
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Quality of concrete is measured by its
strength and durability. The principal factors

affecting the strength of concrete , assuming
a sound aggregates, W/C ratio, and the
extent to which hydration has progressed.
Durability of concrete is the ability of the
concrete to resist disintegration due to
freezing and thawing and chemical attack.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Workability of concrete may be defined as a
composite characteristic indicative of the ease

with which the mass of plastic material may
deposited in its final place without
segregation during placement, and its ability
to conform to fine forming detail.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Economical takes into account effective use
of materials, effective operation, and ease of

handling. The cost of producing good quality
concrete is an important consideration in the
overall cost of the construction project.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
The influence of ingredients on properties
of concrete.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
3. Workability
Workability measured by slump test

slump
12
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2
3
4
Layer 1: Fill 1/3 full. 25 stokes
Layer 2: Fill 2/3 full. 25 stokes
Layer 3: Fill full. 25 stokes
Lift cone and measure slump (typically 2-6 in.)
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Slump test - The measurement of the consistency of the
mix is done with the slump-cone test. The recommend
consistency for various classes of concrete structures .
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
4. Admixtures
Applications:
Improve workability
Accelerate or retard setting and
hardening
Aid in curing
Improve durability
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
4. Admixtures
Air-Entrainment: Add air voids with bubbles

Help with freeze/thaw cycles, workability,
etc.
Decreases density: reduces strength, but
also decreases W/C
Superplasticizers: increase workability by
chemically releasing water from fine
aggregates.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
5. Types of Cement
Type I: General Purpose

Type II: Lower heat of hydration than
Type I
Type III: High Early Strength
Higher heat of hydration
quicker strength (7 days vs. 28 days for
Type I)
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
5. Types of Cement
Type IV: Low Heat of Hydration

Gradually heats up, less distortion
(massive structures).
Type V: Sulfate Resisting
For footings, basements, sewers, etc.
exposed to soils with sulfates.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Failure Mechanism of Concrete
Shrinkage
Microcracks are the
initial shrinkage cracks
due to carbonation
shrinkage, hydration
shrinkage, and drying
shrinkage.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Bond Microcracks
are extensions of
shrinkage microcracks,
as the compression
stress field increases,
the shrinkage
microcracks widen but
do not propagates into
the matrix. Occur at
15-20 % ultimate
strength of concrete.
Concrete Mixing and

Proportioning
Matrix Microcracks - are
microcracks that occur in
the matrix. The propagate
from 20% fc. Occur up to
30-45 % ultimate strength
of concrete. Matrix
microcracks start bridge one
another at 75%. Aggregate
microcracks occur just
before failure (90%).
Concrete Properties
1. Uniaxial Stress versus Strain Behavior in
Compression
fc
Ec
12
fc
0.45fc
No
Nu
N
c
Concrete Properties
The standard strength test generally uses a
cylindrical sample. It is tested after 28 days to test
for strength, fc. The concrete will continue to
harden with time and for a normal Portland cement
will increase with time as follows:
Concrete Properties
Compressive Strength, fc
Normally use 28-day strength for design
strength
fc
Ec
fc
Poissons Ratio,
~ 0.15 to 0.20 0.45fc
Usually use = 0.17
No
Nu
N
c
Concrete Properties
Modulus of Elasticity, Ec
Corresponds to secant modulus at 0.45 fc
ACI 318-02 (Sec. 8.5.1):
( psi ) = 33
1 .5
f ' c ( psi )
where w = unit weight (pcf)

90 pcf < wc <155 pcf
( psi ) = 57 , 000
f ' c ( psi )
For normal weight concrete

(wc 145 pcf)
Concrete Properties
Compute Ec for fc = 4500 psi for normal
weight (145 pcf) concrete using both ACI
equations:
( psi ) = 33
( psi ) = 57 , 000
1 .5
f ' c ( psi )
f ' c ( psi )
Concrete Properties
Concrete strain at max. compressive stress,

No
For typical N curves in compression
No varies between 0.0015-0.003
For normal strength concrete, No ~ 0.002
fc
Ec
fc
0.45fc
No
Nu
Concrete Properties
Maximum useable strain, Nu

ACI Code: Nu = 0.003
Used for flexural and axial compression
fc
Ec
fc
0.45fc
No
Nu
Concrete Properties
Typical Concrete Stress-Strain Curves in
Compression
Concrete Properties
Types of compression failure
There are three
modes of failure.
[a] Under axial
compression concrete
fails in shear.
[b] the separation of the specimen into columnar
pieces by what is known as splitting or columnar
fracture.
[c] Combination of shear and splitting failure.
Concrete Properties
2. Tensile Strength
Tensile strength ~ 8% to 15% of fc

Modulus of Rupture, fr
For deflection calculations, use:
Test:
= 7 .5
f ' c ( psi )
P
Mmax = P/2*a
ACI Eq. 9-10
unreinforced
concrete beam
fr
Mc 6 M
= 2
fr =
I
bh
Concrete Properties
2. Tensile Strength (cont.)
Splitting Tensile Strength, fct

Split Cylinder Test
P
Concrete Cylinder
Poissons
Effect
Concrete Properties
2. Tensile Strength (cont.)
2P
f ct =
ld
f ct = (5 to 7) f 'c ( psi )
(Not given in
ACI Code)
Concrete Properties
3. Shrinkage and Creep
Shrinkage: Due to water loss to atmosphere
(volume loss).
Plastic shrinkage occurs while concrete is still
wet (hot day, flat work, etc.)
Drying shrinkage occurs after concrete has set
Most shrinkage occurs in first few months (~80%
within one year).
Cycles of shrinking and swelling may occur as
environment changes.
Reinforcement restrains the development of
shrinkage.
Concrete Properties
Shrinkage of an Unloaded Specimen
Fig. 3-21, MacGregor (1997)
* 80% of shrinkage occurs in first year
Concrete Properties
Shrinkage is a function of
W/C
ratio (high water content reduces

amount of aggregate which restrains
shrinkage)
Aggregate type & content (modulus of
Elasticity)
Volume/Surface Ratio
Concrete Properties
Shrinkage is a function of
Type of cement (finely ground)
Admixtures
Relative humidity (largest for
relative humidity of 40% or
less).
Typical magnitude of strain:
(200 to 600) * 10-6
or (200 to 600 microstrain)
Concrete Properties
Creep
Deformations (strains) under sustained loads.

Like shrinkage, creep is not completely
reversible.
P
L, elastic
L, creep
N=L/L
Concrete Properties
Magnitude of creep strain is a function of all
the above that affect shrinkage, plus
magnitude of stress
age at loading
Concrete Properties
Creep strain develops over time
Absorbed water layers tend to become
thinner between gel particles that are
transmitting compressive stresses
Bonds form between gel particles in their
deformed position.
Concrete Properties
Tri-axial Compression
Confined Cylinder
Improved strength and ductility versus
uniaxial compression
F1
Example: spiral reinforced
1 = f 'c + 4.1 3
F3
where,
F1 = longitudinal stress at failure
F3 = lateral pressure
F1
Concrete Properties
Tri-axial Compression
Fig. 3-15, MacGregor (1997)
Steel Reinforcement
1. General
Standard
Reinforcing Bar
Markings
Steel Reinforcement
1. General
Most common types for non-prestressed
members:
hot-rolled deformed bars
welded wire fabric
Steel Reinforcement
Areas, Weights, Dimensions
Steel Reinforcement
2. Types
ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for
Deformed and Plain-Billet Steel Bars
Grade 60: fy = 60 ksi, #3 to #18
most common in buildings and bridges
Grade 40: fy = 40 ksi, #3 to #6
most ductile
Grade 75: fy = 75 ksi, #6 to #18
Steel Reinforcement
2. Types
ASTM A616 - Rail-Steel Bars

ASTM A617 - Axle-Steel Bars
ASTM A706 - Low-Alloy-Steel Bars
more ductile GR60 steel
min. length of yield plateau = sh/y = 5
Steel Reinforcement
3. Stress versus Strain
Stress-Strain curve
for various types of
steel reinforcement
bar.
Steel Reinforcement
Es = Initial tangent
modulus = 29,000
ksi (all grades)
GR 60 (less ductile)
GR 40
Stress
Es
Note:
GR40 has a
longer yield
plateau
1
0.20
Strain
Class of Structures
Class of Structures
Class of Structures
Class of Structures
Retaining Wall
Abutment
Class of Structures
Deformed Frame
Reinforced Frame
Lecture 4 - Flexure
June 9, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Basic Concepts
Rectangular Beams
Flexural Stress
The beam is a structural
member used to support
the internal moments and
shears. It would be
called a beam-column if
a compressive force
existed.
C=T
M = C*(jd)
= T*(jd)
Flexural Stress
The stress in the block
is defined as:
= (M*y) / I
Sxx = I / (ymax)
The equation for Sxx
modulus for calculating
maximum compressive
stress.
Flexural Stress
There are 5 stages the concrete through which the beam
goes.
Stage 1: No external
loads self weight.
Flexural Stress
goes.
Stage 2: the external
load P cause the bottom
fibers to equal to
modulus of rupture of
the concrete. Entire
concrete section was
effective, steel bar at
tension side has same
strain as surrounding
concrete.
Flexural Stress
goes.
Stage 3: The tensile
strength of the concrete
exceeds the rupture fr and
cracks develop. The
neutral axis shifts upward
and cracks extend to
neutral axis. Concrete
loses tensile strength and
steel starts working
effectively and resists the
entire tensile load.
Flexural Stress
goes.
Stage 4: The
reinforcement yields.
Stage 5: Failure of the
beam.
Flexural Stress
The three stages of
the beam.
Stage 1: No external
loads acting on the
beam.
Stage 3: Service
loading on the beam.
Stage 5: Beam
failure.
Flexural Stress
The moment-curvature
diagram show the five
stages of the beam. The
plot is of the curvature
angle, , verse the
moment.
= ( / y) = [ / E ] / y
= [(My / I) / E] / y
=M/(EI)
Flexural Stress
The beam fails first in shear and the second beam fails
in bending moment.
Flexural Stress
There are three types of flexural failure of a structural
member.
Steel may reach its yield strength before the concrete
reaches its maximum. (Under-reinforced section).
Steel reaches yield at same time as concrete reaches
ultimate strength. (Balanced section).
Concrete may fail before the the yield of steel due to
the presence of a high percentage of steel in the
section. (Over-reinforced section).
Flexural Stress
Steel may reach its yield strength before the concrete
reaches its maximum. (Under-reinforced section).
Flexural Stress
Steel reaches yield at same time as concrete reaches
ultimate strength. (Balanced section).
Flexural Stress
Concrete may fail before the the yield of steel due to the
presence of a high percentage of steel in the section.
(Over-reinforced section).
Flexural Stress
The flexural strain and stress distribution of beam from a
test beam.
Flexural Stress
Strain measured in test of eccentrically loaded
columns for a tied and spiral columns.
Flexural Stress-Example
Example
Consider a simple rectangular beam( b x h )
reinforced with steel reinforcement of As.
(1) Determine the centroid ( neutral axis, NA ) and
moment of inertia Izz of the beam for an ideal
beam (no cracks).
(2) Determine the NA and moment of inertia, Izz, of
beam if the beam is cracked and tensile forces
are in the steel only.
Example-Definitions
Ec Modulus of Elasticity - concrete
Es Modulus of Elasticity - steel
As Area of steel
d distance to steel
b width
h height
Es
n=
Ec
Example Mechanics of
Materials Properties
ynA
Centroid (NA)
y=
n A
I = n I + ( y y ) n A Moment of Inertia
i
i i
Example (uncracked)
Concrete
Steel
Area
yi
y iA
yi - y
(y i -y)2 A
bh
(n-1)A s
h/2
d
bh2/2
d(n-1)A s
bh3/12
---
(h/2-y)
(d-y)
(h/2-y)2bh
(d-y)2(n-1)A s
bh 2
+ ( n 1) As d
y
A
i i
y=
= 2
Ai bh + ( n 1) As
I = I i + ( yi y )
bh h
2
Ai =
+ y bh + ( d y ) ( n 1) As
12 2
Example - (cracked)
For a cracked section the
concrete is in compression
and steel is in tension.
The strain in the beam is
linear.
1
C = yb f c
2
T = As fs
Example - (cracked)
Using Equilibrium
T =C
1
As f s = yb f c
2
yb
fs =
fc
2 As
Example - (cracked)
Using Hookes law
f = E
yb
c Es 2 As 2nAs
Es s =
=
Ec c
=
yb
s Ec yb
2 As
However, this is an indeterminate problem to
find y . We will need to use a compatibility
condition.
Example - (cracked)
Using a compatibility
condition.
c
y
= =
s d y
d y y
Substitute into the first equation.
Example - (cracked)
Substitute in for the strain relationship.
2nAs
y
=
dy
yb
Rearrange the equation into a quadratic equation.
2nAs
2nAs
y +
y
d = 0
b
b
2
Example - (cracked)
Use a ratio of areas of concrete and steel.
As
=
bd
y + 2n d y 2n d = 0
2
Modify the equation to create a non-dimensional ratio.

2
y
y
+ 2n 2n = 0
d
d
Example - (cracked)
Use the quadratic formula
y 2n ( 2n ) + 8n
=
2
d
2
y
= ( n ) + 2n n
d
2
Solve for the centroid by multiplying the result by d.
Example - (cracked)
The moment of inertia using the parallel axis
I = I i + ( yi y ) Ai
2
by y
2
=
+ by + ( d y ) nAs
12 2
3
by
2
=
+ ( d y ) nAs
3
3
Example
For the following example find centroid and moment
of inertia for an uncracked and cracked section and
compare the results.
Es = 29000 ksi
Ec = 3625 ksi
d = 15.5 in b = 12 in. h = 18 in.
Use 4 # 7 bars for the steel.
Example
E s 29000 ksi
n=
=
=8
Ec
3625 ksi
A #7 bar has an As = 0.6 in2
As = 4 ( 0.6 in
) = 2.4 in
Example
The uncracked centroid is
bh 2
+ ( n 1) As d
y= 2
bh + ( n 1) As
(12 in )(18 in )
=
+ ( 8 1) ( 2.4 in 2 ) (15.5 in )
2
2
(12 in )(18 in ) + (8 1) ( 2.4 in )
2204.4 in 3
=
= 9.47 in
2
232.8 in
Example
The uncracked moment of inertia
2
bh h
2
I=
+ y bh + ( d y ) ( n 1) As
12 2
12 in )(18 in )
(
=
12
18 in
+
9.47 in (12 in )(18 in )
2
+ (15.5 in 9.47 in ) ( 8 1) ( 2.4 in

2
= 6491 in 4
Example
The cracked centroid is defined by:
2
As
2.4 in
=
=
= 0.0129
bd (12 in )(15.5 in )
y
=
d
=
( n )
+ 2n n
( (8)( 0.0129 ) )
2 ( 8 )( 0.0129 ) ( 8 )( 0.0129 )
= 0.3627
y = 0.3627 (15.5 in ) = 5.62 in
Example
The cracked moment of inertia is
3
by
2
I=
+ ( d y ) nAs
3
1
3
= (12 in )( 5.62 in )
3
+ (15.5 in 5.62 in ) ( 8 ) ( 2.4 in

2
= 2584.2 in
Example
Notice that the centroid changes from 9.47 in. to
5.62 in. and the moment of inertia decreases from
6491 in4 to 2584 in4 . The cracked section loses
more than half of its strength.
Flexural Stress
Basic Assumptions in Flexure Theory
Plane sections remain plane ( not true
for deep beams h > 4b)
The strain in the reinforcement is equal
to the strain in the concrete at the
same level, i.e. s = c at same level.
Stress in concrete & reinforcement may
be calculated from the strains using
curves for concrete & steel.
Flexural Stress
Additional Assumptions for design (for simplification)
Tensile strength of concrete is neglected for
calculation of flexural strength.
Concrete is assumed to fail in compression,
when c (concrete strain) = cu (limit state) =
0.003
Compressive relationship for concrete
may be assumed to be any shape that results
in an acceptable prediction of strength.
Flexural Stress
The concrete may exceed the c at the outside edge
of the compressive zone.
Flexural Stress
The compressive force is modeled as Cc = k1k3fc b*c
at the location x = k2*c
Flexural Stress
The compressive
coefficients of the stress
block at given for the
following shapes.
k3 is ratio of maximum
stress at fc in the
compressive zone of a
beam to the cylinder
strength, fc (0.85 is a
typical value for common
concrete) (ACI 10.2.7)
Flexural Stress
The compressive zone is modeled with a equivalent
stress block.
Flexural Stress
The equivalent rectangular concrete stress distribution
has what is known as a 1 coefficient is proportion of
average stress distribution covers. (ACI 10.2.7.3)
1 = 0.85 for f c 4000 psi

f c 4000
1 = 0.85 0.05 *
0.65
1000
Flexural Stress
Requirements for analysis of reinforced concrete beams
[1] Stress-Strain Compatibility Stress at a point in
member must correspond to strain at a point.
[2] Equilibrium Internal
forces balances with
external forces
Flexural Stress
Example of rectangular reinforced concrete beam.
(1) Setup equilibrium.
=0
T=C
As f s = 0.85 f c ab
a
M = 0 T d 2 = M n
Flexural Stress
(2) Find flexural capacity.
T = As fs
C = 0.85 f c ab
As fs
a=
0.85 f cb
Flexural Stress
M n = T ( moment arm )
a
= As fs d
2
Flexural Stress
(3) Need to confirm s > y
y =
c=
y
Es
a
(
d c)
s =
c > y
c
Lecture 5 - Flexure
June 11, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Rectangular Beams
Safety factors
Loading and Resistance
Balanced Beams
Flexural Stress
The compressive zone is modeled with a equivalent
stress block.
Flexural Stress
The equivalent rectangular concrete stress distribution
has what is known as a 1 coefficient is proportion of
average stress distribution covers.
1 = 0.85 for f c 4000 psi

f c 4000
1 = 0.85 0.05 *
0.65
1000
Flexural Stress
Requirements for analysis of reinforced concrete beams
[1] Stress-Strain Compatibility Stress at a point in
member must correspond to strain at a point.
[2] Equilibrium Internal
forces balances with
external forces
Flexural Stress
(1) Setup equilibrium.
=0
T=C
As f s = 0.85 f c ab
a
M = 0 T d 2 = M n
Flexural Stress
T = As fs
C = 0.85 f c ab
As fs
a=
0.85 f cb
Flexural Stress
M n = T ( moment arm )
a
= As fs d
2
Flexural Stress
(3) Need to confirm s > y
y =
c=
y
Es
a
(
d c)
s =
c > y
c
Flexural Stress
Rectangular Example
Given a rectangular beam
fc = 4000 psi
fy = 60 ksi (4 #7 bars)
b = 12 in. d = 15.5 in. h= 18 in.
Find the neutral axis.
Find the moment capacity of the beam.
Flexural Stress
Rectangular Example
Determine the area of steel, #7 bar has 0.6 in2.
As = 4 ( 0.6 in
) = 2.4 in
The value is 1 = 0.85 because the concrete

has a fc =4000 psi.
1 = 0.85 for f c 4000 psi
Flexural Stress
Rectangular Example
From equilibrium (assume the steel has yielded)
C =T
0.85 f cba = f y As
a=
f y As
0.85 f cb
2
60
ksi
2.4
in
(
)(
)
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(12 in )
= 3.53 in.
The neutral axis is

a 3.53 in.
=
= 4.152 in.
c=
1
0.85
Flexural Stress
Rectangular Example
Check to see whether or not the steel has yielded.
fy
60 ksi
y =
=
= 0.00207
E s 29000 ksi
Check the strain in the steel
d c
s =
( 0.003)
Steel yielded!
c
15.5 in. 4.152 in.

=
( 0.003) = 0.0082 > 0.000207
4.152 in.
Flexural Stress
Rectangular Example
Compute moment capacity of the beam.
M n = As f y d
2
3.53 in.
= ( 2.4 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 15.5 in.
= 1979 k-in. 164.8 k-ft.

2
Flexural Stress
Non-Rectangular Example
For a non-rectangular beam
For the given beam with concrete
rated at fc = 6 ksi and the steel is
rated at fs = 60 ksi. d = 12.5 in.
(a) Determine the area of the steel for a
balanced system for shown area of concrete.
(b) Determine the moment capacity of the
beam. Mn
(c) Determine the NA.
Flexural Stress
For a non-rectangular beam
The area of the concrete section is
Ac = ( 6 in.)( 3 in.) + (10 in.)( 2 in.)

= 38 in
The force due to concrete forces.
C = 0.85 f c Ac
= 0.85 ( 6 ksi ) ( 38 in 2 )
= 193.8 kips.
Flexural Stress
Using equilibrium, the area of the steel can be found
T =C
0.85 f c Ac
fs As = 0.85 f c Ac As =
fs
193.8 kips
2
As =
= 3.23 in
60 ksi
Flexural Stress
Find the center of the area
of concrete area
yA
y=
A
i
6 in.)( 3 in.)(1.5 in.) + (10 in.)( 2 in.)( 4 in.)

(
=
( 6 in.)( 3 in.) + (10 in.)( 2 in.)
= 2.8158 in.
Flexural Stress
The moment capacity of the beam is
Mn = T (d y )
= 193.8 kips (12.5 in. 2.8158 in.)
= 1869 k-in. 155.75 k-ft.
Flexural Stress
Compute the 1 value
f c 4000 psi
1 = 0.85 0.05*
1000 psi
6000 psi 4000 psi
= 0.85 0.05*
1000 psi
= 0.75
Flexural Stress
Find the neutral axis
c=
5.0 in.
=
= 6.67 in.
0.75
Safety Provisions
Structures and structural members must always be
designed to carry some reserve load above what is
expected under normal use.
Safety Provisions
There are three main reasons why some sort of safety
factor are necessary in structural design.
[1] Consequences of failure.
[2] Variability in loading.
[3] Variability in resistance.
Consequences of Failure
A number of subjective factors must be considered
in determining an acceptable level of safety.
Potential loss of life.
Cost of clearing the debris and replacement of the
structure and its contents.
Cost to society.
Type of failure warning of failure, existence of
alternative load paths.
Variability in Loading
Frequency distribution
of sustained component
of live loads in offices.
Variability of the strengths of concrete and
reinforcement.
Differences between the as-built dimensions
and those found in structural drawings.
Effects of simplification made in the
derivation of the members resistance.
Comparison of
measured and
computed failure
moments based on
all data for
reinforced
concrete beams
with fc > 2000 psi.
Margin of Safety
The distributions of
the resistance and
the loading are used
to get a probability
of failure of the
structure.
Margin of Safety
The term
Y=R-S
is called the safety
margin. The probability
of failure is defined as:
Pf = Pr obability of [Y < 0]
and the safety index is
=
Loading
SPECIFICATIONS
Cities in the U.S. generally base their building
code on one of the three model codes:
Uniform Building Code

Basic Building Code (BOCA)
Standard Building Code
Loading
These codes have been consolidated in the
2000 International Building Code.
Loadings in these codes are mainly based on
ASCE Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures has been updated to
ASCE 7-02.
Loading
The loading variations are taken into
consideration by using a series of load factors
to determine the ultimate load, U.
U = 1.4 ( D + F )
U = 1.2 ( D + F + T ) + 1.6 ( L + H ) + 0.5 ( Lr or S or R )
U = 1.2 D + 1.6W + 0.5 L + 1.0 ( Lr or S or R )
U = 1.2 D + 1.0 E + 1.0 L + 0.2 S
M= etc.
Loading
The equations come from ACI code 9.2 on
loading (4.6 in your book),
D Dead Load
L Live Load
F Fluid Pressure
E Earthquake Load
S Snow Load
W Wind Load
Lr Roof Load
R Rain Load
T Temperature Load
H Soil Load
Loading
The most general equation for the ultimate load,
U (Mu) that you will see is going to be:
U = 1.2 D + 1.6 L
Resistance
The load factors will generate the ultimate load,
which is used in the design and analysis of the
structural member.
Mu = Mn
Mu Ultimate Moment
Mn Nominal Moment
Strength Reduction Factor
Resistance
The strength reduction factor, , varies from member
to member depending whether it is in tension or
compression or the type of member. The code has
been setup to determine the reduction.
Three possibilities in Inelastic

Behavior
Compression Failure - (over-reinforced
beam)
Tension Failure - (under-reinforced beam)
Balanced Failure - (balanced reinforcement)
Inelastic Behavior
Compression Failure
The concrete will crush
before the steel yields.
This is a sudden
failure.
The beam is known as
an over-reinforced
beam.
Inelastic Behavior
Tension Failure
The reinforcement
yields before the
concrete crushes. The
concrete crushes is a
secondary
compression failure.
an under-reinforced
beam.
Inelastic Behavior
Balanced Failure
The concrete crushes
and the steel yields
simultaneously.
an balancedreinforced beam.
Inelastic Behavior
Which type of failure is the most desirable?
The under-reinforced
beam is the most
desirable.
fs = f y
s >> y
You want ductility
system deflects and
still carries load.
Balanced Reinforcement Ratio, bal

bal = unique value to get simultaneous c = 0.003
& s = y
Use similar triangles:
y
0.003
=
cb
d cb
Balanced Reinforcement
Ratio, bal
The equation can be rewritten to find cb
0.003d 0.003c b = y c b
c b ( 0.003 + y ) = 0.003d
0.003d
cb =
( 0.003 + y )
cb
0.003
=
d ( 0.003 + y )
c b 0.003 E s
87000
=
=
d ( 0.003 + y ) E s ( 87000 + f y )
Nominal Moment Equation

The equation can be rewritten in the form:
C =T
a=
0.85 f cba = A s f y
f y As
0.85 f cb
M n = As f y d
2

The equation can be rewritten in the form:
f y Asd
As b 2
Mn = fy d d
1.7 f cbd
bd d
Use the ratio r = b/d and
fy d
Mn = ( fy ) ( r ) d d
1.7 f c

Use = fy/fc and
3
M n = ( r ) f cd 1
= ( r ) f c (1 0.59 ) d
1.7
3
Use the ratio r = b/d and R
M n = Rbd
R = f c (1 0.59 )
Strain Limits Method for

Analysis
The strength
reduction factor, ,
will come into the
calculation of the
strength of the beam.
Limitations on Reinforcement
Ratio,
The selection of the steel will be determined by the
Lower Limit on
As(min)
ACI 10.5.1
3 f c
200
=
* bw d
* bw d
fy
fy
fc & fy are in psi
ACI Eqn. (10-3)
Ratio,
Lower Limit on
min
ACI 10.5.1
3 f c
200
=
fy
fy
Lower limit used to avoid Piano Wire beams.

Very small As ( Mn < Mcr )
s is huge (large deflections)
when beam cracks ( Mn > Mcr ) beam fails right
away because Mn < Mcr
Additional Requirements for

Lower Limit on
If As (provided) 4/3 As (required) based on
analysis, then As (min) is not required.
4
Mn Mu
3
See ACI 10.5.3
for As (provided)
Additional Requirements for

Lower Limit on
Temperature and Shrinkage reinforcement in
structural slabs and footings (ACI 7.12) place
perpendicular to direction of flexural reinforcement.
GR 40 or GR 50 Bars: As (T&S) = 0.0020 Ag
GR 60 or Welded Wire Fabric (WWF):
As (T&S) = 0.0018 Ag
Ag - Gross area of the concrete
Example
Given:
fc = 3 ksi & fy = 40 ksi
and As = 4 in2
Determine:
(1) Determine if the beam will
satisfy ACI code.
(2) If fc = 6 ksi?
Example
Given:
fc = 3 ksi & fy = 40 ksi and As = 4 in2
As
4 in 2
=
=
= 0.0333
bd ( 8 in.)(15 in.)
The minimum steel ratio is
min
3 3000
=
=0.00411
40000
min = 0.005
200
= 0.005
40000
0.0333 > 0.005 OK!
Example
Given:
fc = 3 ksi & fy = 40 ksi and As =4 in2
a=
f y As
0.85 f cb
2
40
ksi
4
in
(
)(
)
0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 8 in )
= 8.743 in.
The neutral axis is
8.743 in.
c 9.23 in.
=
= 9.23 in. =
= 0.615
c=
1
0.85
d 15 in.
Example
The strain in the steel is
d c
15 in. 7.843 in.
t =
( 0.003) =
( 0.003)
7.843 in.
c
= 0.0027
There for the beam is in the compression zone and

would be 0.65, however c/d ratio is greater than
0.375 so the beam will need to be redesigned.
Example
c/d=0.615
Example
Given:
As
4 in 2
=
=
= 0.0333
bd ( 8 in.)(15 in.)
The minimum steel ratio is
min
3 6000
=
=0.00581
40000
200
= 0.005
40000
min = 0.00581 0.0333 > 0.00581 OK!
Example
Given:
a=
f y As
0.85 f cb
2
40
ksi
4
in
(
)(
)
0.85 ( 6 ksi )( 8 in )
= 3.922 in.
The neutral axis is at
3.922 in.
c 5.22 in.
=
= 5.22 in. =
= 0.349
c=
1
0.75
d 15 in.
Example
The strain in the steel will be
d c
15 in. 5.22 in.
t =
( 0.003) =
( 0.003)
5.22 in.
c
= 0.0056
There for the beam is in the tension zone and will

be 0.9.
Example
c/d=0.349
Lecture 6 - Flexure
June 13, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Doubly Reinforced beams
T Beams and L Beams
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced

Sections
Effect of Compression Reinforcement on the Strength
and Behavior
Less concrete is needed to
resist the T and thereby
moving the neutral axis
(NA) up.
T = As f y
C =T
Analysis of Doubly
Reinforced Sections
Effect of Compression Reinforcement on the Strength
and Behavior
Singly Reinforced
a1
C = Cc ; M n = As f y d
2
Doubly Reinforced
a2
C = Cc + Cs ; M n = As f y d
2
and (a2 < a1 )
Reasons for Providing

Compression Reinforcement
Reduced sustained load deflections.
Creep of concrete in compression zone

transfer load to compression steel
reduced stress in concrete
less creep
less sustained load deflection

Effective of compression reinforcement on sustained
load deflections.

Increased Ductility
reduced
stress block
depth
increase in steel strain

larger curvature are
obtained.

Effect of compression reinforcement on strength and
ductility of under reinforced beams.
< b

Change failure mode from compression
to tension. When > bal addition of As
strengthens.
Compression
zone
allows tension steel to

yield before crushing of
concrete.
Effective reinforcement ratio = ( )

Eases in Fabrication
- Use corner bars to hold & anchor stirrups.
Effect of Compression
Reinforcement
Compare the strain distribution in two beams
with the same As
Effect of Compression
Reinforcement
Section 1:
T = As f s
T = Cc1 = 0.85 f c ba = 0.85 f c b1c1
As f s
c1 =
0.85 f c b1
Section 2:
T = As f s
T = Cs + Cc1
= As f s + 0.85 f c ba2
= As f s + 0.85 f c b1c2
As f s As f s
c2 =
0.85 f c b1
Addition of As strengthens compression zone so that less

concrete is needed to resist a given value of T.
NA
goes up (c2 <c1) and s increases (s2 >s1).
Doubly Reinforced Beams

Four Possible Modes of Failure
Under reinforced Failure
( Case 1 ) Compression and tension steel yields

( Case 2 ) Only tension steel yields
Over reinforced Failure
( Case 3 ) Only compression steel yields

( Case 4 ) No yielding Concrete crushes

Rectangular Sections
Strain Compatibility Check
Assume s using similar
triangles
0.003
=
c
( c d ')
c d ')
(
=
* 0.003
s

Strain Compatibility
Using equilibrium and find a
T = Cc + Cs a =
( As As ) f y
0.85 f cb
( As As ) f y ( ') d f y
=
=
c=
1 1 ( 0.85 f cb ) 1 ( 0.85 f c)
a

The strain in the compression
steel is
s = 1 cu
c
1 ( 0.85 f c) d
= 1
0.003
'
d
f
(
) y

Confirm
s y =
fy
Es
s y
1 ( 0.85 f c) d
fy
fy
=
s = 1
0.003
E s 29 x 10 ksi
( ') d f y

Confirm
1 ( 0.85 f c) d f y 87
87
( ') d f y
1 ( 0.85 f c) d 87
( ')
87 f
d
f
y
y

Find c
As f y + 0.85 f c ba = As f y
c=
( Ass As ) f y
0.85 f c b 1
a = 1c
confirm that the tension steel has yielded
fy
d c
s =
cu y =
Es
c

If the statement is true than
M n = ( As As ) f y d + As f y ( d d )
2
else the strain in the compression steel
f s = E s

Return to the original equilibrium equation
As f y = As f s + 0.85 f cba
= AsEs s + 0.85 f cb 1c
d
= AsEs 1 cu + 0.85 f cb 1c
c

Rearrange the equation and find a quadratic equation
As f y = AsEs 1 cu + 0.85 f cb 1c
c
2
0.85 f cb 1c + ( AsEs cu As f y ) c AsEs cu d = 0
Solve the quadratic and find c.

Find the fs
d
d
fs = 1 Es cu = 1 87 ksi
c
c
Check the tension steel.
fy
d c
s =
cu y =
Es
c

Another option is to compute the stress in the
compression steel using an iterative method.
0.85
f
d
(
)
1
c
3
fs = 29 x 10 1
0.003
'
d
f
(
)
y

Go back and calculate the equilibrium with fs
Af
(
T = C + C a =
s y
c=
As fs )
0.85 f cb
Iterate until the c value is

adjusted for the fs until the
stress converges.
d
fs = 1 87 ksi
c

Compute the moment capacity of the beam
M n = ( As f y As fs) d + As fs( d d )
2
Limitations on Reinforcement Ratio

for Doubly Reinforced beams
Lower limit on
min
3 f c
200
=
fy
fy
same as for single reinforce beams.
(ACI 10.5)
Example: Doubly Reinforced

Section
Given:
fc= 4000 psi fy = 60 ksi
As = 2 #5 As = 4 #7
d= 2.5 in. d = 15.5 in
h=18 in. b =12 in.
Calculate Mn for the section for the given
compression steel.

Section
Compute the reinforcement coefficients, the
area of the bars #7 (0.6 in2) and #5 (0.31 in2)
As = 4 ( 0.6 in 2 ) = 2.4 in 2
As = 2 ( 0.31 in 2 ) = 0.62 in 2
As
2.4 in 2
=
=
= 0.0129
bd (12 in.)(15.5 in.)
As
0.62 in 2
=
=
= 0.0033
bd (12 in.)(15.5 in.)

Section
Compute the effective reinforcement ratio and
minimum
eff = = 0.0129 0.0033 = 0.00957
200
200
=
=
= 0.00333
60000
fy
or
3 fc
fy
3 4000
=
= 0.00316
60000
min 0.0129 0.00333 OK!

Section
minimum
1 ( 0.85 f c) d 87
( ')
d fy
87 f y
0.85 ( 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ) ( 2.5 in.) 87
= 0.0398
87 60
60
ksi
15.5
in.
(
)
0.00957 0.0398
Compression steel has not

yielded.

Section
Instead of iterating the equation use the quadratic
method
0.85 f cb 1c 2 + ( AsEs cu As f y ) c AsEs cu d = 0
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.85 ) c 2 +
+ ( 0.62 in 2 ) ( 29000 ksi )( 0.003) ( 2.4 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) c
( 0.62 in 2 ) ( 29000 ksi )( 0.003)( 2.5 in.) = 0

34.68c 2 90.06c 134.85 = 0
c 2 2.5969c 3.8884 = 0

Section
Solve using the quadratic formula
c 2.5969c 3.8884 = 0
2
c=
2.5969
c = 3.6595 in.
( 2.5969 )
2
4 ( 3.8884 )

Section
Find the fs
2.5 in.
d
fs = 1 Es cu = 1
87 ksi
c
3.659 in.
= 27.565 ksi
Check the tension steel.
15.5 in. 3.659 in.

s =
0.003 = 0.00971 0.00207
3.659 in.

Section
Check to see if c works
c=
As f y As fs
0.85 f c 1b
2
2
2.4
in
60
ksi
0.62
in
) (
(
)(
) ( 27.565 ksi )
c = 3.659 in.
The problem worked
0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 0.85 )(12 in.)

Section
M n = As f y As f s d + As fs ( d d )
2
( 2.4 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi )
0.85 ( 3.659 in.)
=
15.5 in.
0.62
in
27.565
ksi
(
)
(
)
+ ( 0.62 in 2 ) ( 27.565 ksi )(15.5 in. 2.5 in.)
= 1991.9 k - in. 166 k - ft

Section
If you want to find the Mu for the problem
c 3.66 in.
=
= 0.236
d 15.5 in.
From ACI (figure R9.3.2)or figure (pg 100 in your

text)
c
0.375 >
= 0.9
The resulting ultimate moment is
M u = M u = 0.9 (166 k - ft )
= 149.4 k - ft
Analysis of Flanged
Section
Floor systems with slabs and beams are placed
in monolithic pour.
Slab acts as a top flange to the beam; Tbeams, and Inverted L(Spandrel) Beams.
Analysis of Flanged
Sections
Positive and Negative Moment Regions in a T-beam
Analysis of Flanged Sections

If the neutral axis falls
within the slab depth
analyze the beam as a
rectangular beam,
otherwise as a T-beam.

Effective Flange Width
Portions near the webs are more highly stressed than
areas away from the web.

Effective width (beff)
beff is width that is stressed uniformly to give the same
compression force actually developed in compression
zone of width b(actual)
ACI Code Provisions for

Estimating beff
From ACI 318, Section 8.10.2
T Beam Flange:
L
beff
4
16hf + bw
bactual

Estimating beff
Inverted L Shape Flange
L
beff
+ bw
12
6hf + bw
bactual = bw + 0.5* ( clear distance to next web )

Estimating beff
From ACI 318, Section 8.10
Isolated T-Beams
bw
hf
2
beff 4bw
Various Possible Geometries of

T-Beams
Single Tee
Twin Tee
Box
Lecture 7 - Flexure
June 16, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Doubly Reinforced beams
T Beams and L Beams
Pan Joist
Analysis of Flanged
Section
Floor systems with slabs and beams are placed
in monolithic pour.
Slab acts as a top flange to the beam; Tbeams, and Inverted L(Spandrel) Beams.
Analysis of Flanged
Sections
Positive and Negative Moment Regions in a T-beam

If the neutral axis falls
within the slab depth
analyze the beam as a
rectangular beam,
otherwise as a T-beam.

Effective Flange Width
Portions near the webs are more highly stressed than
areas away from the web.

Effective width (beff)
beff is width that is stressed uniformly to give the same
compression force actually developed in compression
zone of width b(actual)

Estimating beff
T Beam Flange:
L
beff
4
16hf + bw
bactual

Estimating beff
Inverted L Shape Flange
L
beff
+ bw
12
6hf + bw

Estimating beff
From ACI 318, Section 8.10
Isolated T-Beams
bw
hf
2
beff 4bw
Various Possible Geometries of

T-Beams
Single Tee
Twin Tee
Box
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 1:
a hf
Same as rectangular section
Assume s y f s = f y
Check
a hf
Steel is yielding
under reinforced
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 1:
a hf
Equilibrium
As f y
T =Ca=
0.85f c beff
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 1: a hf
Confirm
s y
c=
d c
s =
cu y
c
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 1:
a hf
Calculate Mn
M n = As f y d
2
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 2:
a > hf
Assume steel yields
Cf = 0.85 f c(b bw )hf

Cw = 0.85 f c bw a
T = As f y
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 2:
a > hf
Assume steel yields
0.85 f c ( b bw ) hf
Asf =
fy
The flanges are considered to be equivalent
compression steel.
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 2:
a > hf
Equilibrium
T = Cf + Cw a =
( As Asf ) f y
0.85 f cbw
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 2:
Confirm
a > hf
a > hf
c=
d c
s =
cu 0.005
c
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 2:
Confirm
a > hf
fy
=
f c
hf
1.18 d
or hf a
Analysis of T-Beam
Case 2:
a > hf
Calculate nominal
moments
M n = M n1 + M n2
a
M n1 = ( As Asf ) f y d
2
hf
M n2 = Asf f y d
2
Analysis of T-Beams
The definition of Mn1 and Mn2 for the T-Beam are given
as:
Analysis of T-Beams
The ultimate moment Mu for the T-Beam are given as:
Mu = Mn
c For a T-Beam with the

= f
tension steel yielded using a
d
function c/d
for Flange Beams
Lower Limits
Flange in compression
min
3 f c
As
fy
=
= larger of
bw d
200
fy
for Flange Beams
Lower Limits
6 f c
bw d
Flange in tension
fy
3 f c
As(min) = smaller of
beff d
larger of f y
200
beff d
f y
for Flange Beams
Lower Limits
If As(provided) 4/3 As(reqd) based on analysis

then As(min) is not required (i.e.)
Mn 4/3Mu for As(provided)
See ACI 10.5.3
Example - T-Beam
Find Mn and Mu for T-Beam.
beff = 54 in. hf = 3 in. b = 7 ft.
d = 16.5 in. As = 8.5 in2
fy = 50 ksi fc = 3 ksi
bw= 12 in
L = 18 ft
Example of L-Beam
Confirm beff
12 in.
18 ft
L
ft.
=
= 54 in.
beff
4
4
16hf + bw = 16 ( 3 in.) + 12 in.=60 in.
12 in.
b = 7 ft.
= 84 in.
ft.
Example - T-Beam
Compute the equivalent c value and check the strain
in the steel, s
8.5 in 2 ) ( 50 ksi )
As f y
(
=
= 3.09 in.
a=
0.85f c b eff 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 54 in.)
3.09 in
=
= 3.63 in.
c=
0.85
1
a
d
16.5 in.
1 0.003 = 0.0106 > 0.005
s = 1 0.003 =
c
3.63 in.
Steel will yield in the tension zone.
Example - T-Beam
Compute the reinforcement and check to make sure it
is greater than min
2
8.5
in
(
)
As
=
=
= 0.0429
b w d (12 in.)(16.5 in.)
min
200
200
=
= 0.004
fy
50000
=
min = 0.004
3 f c = 3 3000 = 0.00329
fy
50000
0.0429 > 0.004
Section works for minimum

reinforcement.
Example - T-Beam
Compute and check that the c value is greater than hf
fy
50 ksi
= = 0.0429
= 0.7155
f c
3 ksi
hf
1.18 d
1.18 ( 0.7155 )(16.5 in.)

3 in.
= 16.388
0.85
hf a 3 in. 3.09 in.
Analysis the beam as a T-beam.
Example - T-Beam
0.85 f c ( beff bw ) hf 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 54 in. 12 in.)( 3 in.)
Asf =
=
fy
( 50 ksi )
= 6.426 in 2
Compute a
a=
( As Asf ) f y
0.85 f c bw
= 3.889 in.
2
2
8.5
in
6.426
in
(
) ( 50 ksi )
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12 in.)
Example - T-Beam
Compute nominal moment components
a
M n1 = ( As Asf ) f y d
2
3.889 in.
2
2
= ( 8.5 in 6.426 in ) ( 50 ksi ) 16.5 in.
= 1535.34 k-in.
M n2
hf
= Asf f y d
2
= 4819.5 k-in.
3 in.
2
= ( 6.426 in ) ( 50 ksi ) 16.5 in.
Example - T-Beam
Compute nominal moment
M n = M n1 + M n2
= 1535.34 k-in. + 4819.5 k-in.
= 6354.84 k-in. 529.57 k-ft.
Compute ultimate moment

M u = M n = 0.9 ( 529.57 k-ft.)
= 416.6 k-ft.
Example of L-Beam
Determine the
effective b for the
spandrel beam and
do the analysis.
Use 4 #9 bars and
find the ultimate
moment capacity.
fy=50 ksi, fc = 3 ksi
Example of L-Beam
Compute beff
L
beff
+ bw
12
6hf + bw
Example of L-Beam
Compute beff
12 in.
20 ft
L
ft
+ bw =
+ 12 in. =32 in.
beff
12
12
6hf + bw = 6 ( 6 in.) + 12 in. = 48 in.
12 in.
= 12 in. + 0.5* 7 ft
= 54 in.
ft
Example of L-Beam
The value beff and As
beff = 32 in.
As = 4 (1.0 in
) = 4.0 in
Example - L-Beam
Compute the equivalent c value and check the strain
in the steel, s
2
4.0
in
(
) ( 50 ksi )
As f y
=
= 2.45 in.
a=
0.85f c b eff 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 32 in.)
2.45 in
=
= 2.88 in.
c=
1
0.85
a
d
24 in.
1 0.003 = 0.0220 > 0.005

s = 1 0.003 =
c
2.88 in.
Steel will yield in the tension zone.
Example - L-Beam
Compute the reinforcement and check to make sure it
is greater than min
2
4.0
in
(
)
As
=
=
= 0.0139
b w d (12 in.)( 24 in.)
min
200
200
=
= 0.004
fy
50000
=
min = 0.004
3 f c = 3 3000 = 0.00329
f
50000
y
0.0139 > 0.004
Section works for minimum

reinforcement.
Example - L-Beam
fy
50 ksi
= = 0.0139
= 0.2315
f c
3 ksi
hf
1.18 d
1.18 ( 0.2315 )( 24 in.)

6 in.
= 7.71 in.
0.85
hf a 6 in. 2.45 in.
False!
Analysis the beam as a Singly reinforced beam.
Example - L-Beam
Compute a
4.0 in ) ( 50 ksi )
As f y
(
a=
=
0.85 f c b 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 32 in.)
2
= 2.451 in.
Example - L-Beam
Compute nominal moment
M n = As f y d
2
2.451 in.
= ( 4.0 in ) ( 50 ksi ) 24.0 in.
= 4554.9 k-in. 379.58 k-ft.

2
Example - L-Beam
Compute ultimate moment
M u = M n = 0.9 ( 379.58 k-ft.)

= 341.62 k-ft.
Pan Joist Floor Systems
View of Pan Joist Slab from Below
Walter P. Moore & Assoc.
View of Double Skip Joist Slab from Below
Pan Joist Floor

Systems
Placing Reinforcement
for a Pan Joist Slab

General framing layout of
the pan joist system.
Pan Joist Floor

Systems
Pouring a Pan Joist Slab

Definition: The type of slab is also called a
ribbed slab. It consists of a floor slab, usually
2-4 in. thick, supported by reinforced
concrete ribs. The ribs are usually tapered
and uniformly spaced at distances that do not
exceed 30 in. The ribs are supported on
girders that rest on columns. In some ribbed
slabs, the space between ribs may be filled
with permanent fillers to provide a horizontal
slab soffit.
One-Way Joist
Construction
Definition: Pan joist floor
systems are series of closely
spaced cast-in-place T-beams
or joists used for long-span
floors with relatively light
loads. Typically removable
metal forms (fillers or pans)
are used to form joists.
MacGregor, Fig. 10-28
One-Way Joist Construction

Details of ribbed floor
with removable steel
pans.
Ribbed-floor cross
sections.
One-Way Joist
Construction
The design of a ribbed floor
with steel pan forms and
average weight of the floor.

The design of a ribbed floor with steel pan forms and
average weight of the floor.
Joist Details

ACI Requirements for Joist Construction
(Sec. 8.11, ACI 318-02)
Slabs and ribs must be cast monolithically.
Ribs must be spaced consistently
Ribs may not be less than 4 inches in width

ACI Requirements for Joist Construction (cont.)
(Sec. 8.11.2, ACI 318-02)
Depth of ribs may not be more than 3.5
times the minimum rib width
Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed
30 inches.
** Ribbed slabs not meeting these
requirements are designed as slabs and
beams. **

Slab Thickness
(ACI Sec. 8.11.6.1)

t 2 in. for joints formed with 20 in. wide
pans
t
2.5 in. for joints formed with 30 in. wide

pans (1/12 distance)

Slab Thickness (cont.)
Building codes give minimum fire resistance

rating:
1-hour fire rating: in. cover, 3-3.5 slab
thickness
2-hour fire rating: 1 in. cover, 4.5 slab
thickness
Pan Joist Floor

Systems
Standard
Removable Form
Dimensions
Note the shapes

Standard Removable Form Dimensions
Standard Widths: 20 in. & 30 in.

(measured at bottom of ribs)
Standard Depths: 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 or
20 in.

(cont.)
End Forms: one end is closed (built-in) to

form the supporting beam
Tapered End Forms: provide additional shear
capacity at ends of joists by tapering ends to
increase rib width.
Pan Joist
Slabs
Standard Pan Joist
Form Dimensions
Ref. CECO Concrete
Construction Catalog
Pan Joist
Slabs
Standard Pan Joist
Form Dimensions
Ref. CECO Concrete Construction
Catalog

Laying Out Pan Joist Floors
Rib/slab thickness
Governed by strength, fire rating,
available space
Overall depth and rib thickness
Governed by deflections and shear

Laying Out Pan Joist Floors (cont.)
Typically no stirrups are used in joists

Reducing Forming Costs:
Use constant joist depth for entire floor
Use same depth for joists and beams
(not always possible)

Distribution Ribs
Placed perpendicular to joists*
Spans < 20 ft.: None
Spans 20-30 ft.: Provided a midspan
Spans > 30 ft.: Provided at third-points
At least one continuous #4 bar is provided at top
and bottom of distribution rib.
*Note: not required by ACI Code, but typically used
in construction
Member Depth
ACI provides minimum member depth and
slab thickness requirements that can be used
without a deflection calculation (Sec. 9.5 ACI
318)
Useful for selecting preliminary member

sizes
Member Depth
ACI 318 - Table 9.5a:
Min. thickness, h (for beams or ribbed one-way

slab)
For beams with one end continuous: L/18.5
For beams with both ends continuous: L/21
L is span length in inches
Table 9.5a usually gives a depth too shallow for
design, but should be checked as a minimum.
Member
Depth
ACI 318-99: Table 9.5a
Member Depth
Rule of Thumb:
hb (in.) ~ L (ft.)
Ex.) 30 ft. span -> hb ~ 30 in.
May be a little large, but okay as a start to
calc. DL
Another Rule of Thumb:
wDL (web below slab) ~ 15% (wSDL+ wLL)
Note: For design, start with maximum
moment for beam to finalize depth.
Select b as a function of d
b ~ (0.45 to 0.65) (d)
Lecture 8 - Flexure
June 18, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Pan Joist
One-way Slab
Pattern Loading

ACI Requirements for Joist Construction
(Sec. 8.11, ACI 318-02)
Slabs and ribs must be cast monolithically.
Ribs must be spaced consistently
Ribs may not be less than 4 inches in width

ACI Requirements for Joist Construction (cont.)
(Sec. 8.11.2, ACI 318-02)
Depth of ribs may not be more than 3.5
times the minimum rib width
Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed
30 inches.
** Ribbed slabs not meeting these
requirements are designed as slabs and
beams. **

Slab Thickness
(ACI Sec. 8.11.6.1)

t 2 in. for joints formed with 20 in. wide
pans
t
2.5 in. for joints formed with 30 in. wide

pans (1/12 distance)

Slab Thickness (cont.)
Building codes give minimum fire resistance

rating:
1-hour fire rating: in. cover, 3-3.5 slab
thickness
2-hour fire rating: 1 in. cover, 4.5 slab
thickness
Pan Joist Floor

Systems
Standard
Removable Form
Dimensions
Note the shapes

Standard Widths: 20 in. & 30 in.

(measured at bottom of ribs)
Standard Depths: 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 or
20 in.

(cont.)
End Forms: one end is closed (built-in) to

form the supporting beam
Tapered End Forms: provide additional shear
capacity at ends of joists by tapering ends to
increase rib width.
Pan Joist
Slabs
Standard Pan Joist
Form Dimensions
Ref. CECO Concrete
Construction Catalog
Pan Joist
Slabs
Standard Pan Joist
Form Dimensions
Ref. CECO Concrete Construction
Catalog

Laying Out Pan Joist Floors
Rib/slab thickness
Governed by strength, fire rating,
available space
Overall depth and rib thickness
Governed by deflections and shear

Laying Out Pan Joist Floors (cont.)
Typically no stirrups are used in joists

Reducing Forming Costs:
Use constant joist depth for entire floor
Use same depth for joists and beams
(not always possible)

Distribution Ribs
Placed perpendicular to joists*
Spans < 20 ft.: None
Spans 20-30 ft.: Provided a midspan
Spans > 30 ft.: Provided at third-points
At least one continuous #4 bar is provided at top
and bottom of distribution rib.
*Note: not required by ACI Code, but typically used
in construction
Member Depth
ACI provides minimum member depth and
slab thickness requirements that can be used
without a deflection calculation (Sec. 9.5 ACI
318)
Useful for selecting preliminary member

sizes
Member Depth
ACI 318 - Table 9.5a:
Min. thickness, h (for beams or ribbed one-way

slab)
For beams with one end continuous: L/18.5
For beams with both ends continuous: L/21
L is span length in inches
Table 9.5a usually gives a depth too shallow for
design, but should be checked as a minimum.
Member
Depth
ACI 318-99: Table 9.5a
Member Depth
Rule of Thumb:
hb (in.) ~ L (ft.)
Ex.) 30 ft. span -> hb ~ 30 in.
May be a little large, but okay as a start to
calc. DL
Another Rule of Thumb:
wDL (web below slab) ~ 15% (wSDL+ wLL)
Note: For design, start with maximum
moment for beam to finalize depth.
Select b as a function of d
b ~ (0.45 to 0.65) (d)
Approximate Analysis of Continuous

Beam and One-Way Slab Systems
ACI Moment and Shear Coefficients
Approximate moments and shears
permitted for design of continuous
beams and one-way slabs
Section 8.3.3 of ACI Code

ACI Moment and Shear Coefficients Requirements:
Two or more spans
Approximately Equal Spans
Larger of 2 adjacent spans not greater than
shorter by > 20%
Uniform Loads
LL/DL 3 (unfactored)

ACI Moment and Shear Coefficients Requirements: ( cont.)
Prismatic members
Same A, I, E throughout member length
Beams must be in braced frame without
significant moments due to lateral forces
Not state in Code, but necessary for
coefficients to apply.
** All these requirements must be met to use the
coefficients!**

ACI Moment and Shear Coefficients Methodology:
M u = Cm ( wu ln )
2
wu ln
Vu = Cv
wu = Total factored dead and live

load per unit length
Cm = Moment coefficient
Cv = Shear coefficient
ln = Clear span length for span in
question for Mu at interior
face of exterior support, +Mu
and Vu
ln = Average of clear span length
for adjacent spans for Mu at
interior supports

ACI Moment and
Shear
Coefficients
See Section
8.3.3 of ACI
Code
Example
Design the eight-span east west
in figure. A typical 1-ft wide
design strip is shaded. A
partial section through this
strip is shown. The beams are
assumed to be 14 in. wide.
The concrete strength is 3750
psi and the reinforcement
strength is 60 ksi. The live
load is 100 psf and dead load
of 50 psf.
Example One-way Slab

Use table 9.5(a) to determine the minimum
thickness of the slab.
12 in
End bay:
l = 15 ft
= 180 in
ft
l 180 in.
min . h =
=
= 7.5 in.
24
24
Interior bays:
Use 7.5 in.
l 180 in.
min h =
=
= 6.43 in.
28
28

Compute the trial factored loads based on thickness.
lb
lb
1 ft
wD = 7.5 in
150 3 = 93.75 2
ft
ft
12 in
Factored load
wu = 1.2 wD + 1.6 wL = 1.2 ( 50 psf + 93.75 psf ) + 1.6 (100 psf )

= 332.5 psf
Check ratio for 8.3.3
wL 3wD
OK!

Compute factored external moment.
wU L 332.5 psf (15 ft )
MU =
=
= 6801. lb-ft/ft
C
11
= 81.61 k-in/ft
Nominal moment
2
MU
81.61 k-in/ft
MN =
=
= 90.68k-in/ft
0.9

The thickness is 7.5 in. so we will assume that the bar
is located d = 7.5in 1.0 in. = 6.5 in. (From 3.3.2 ACI
318 0.75 in + ~0.25 in( 0.5*diameter of bar) = 1.0 in
Assume that the
a
moment arm is 0.9d

M N = T d As f y ( 0.9d )
2
MN
90.68 k-in/ft
2
As =
=
= 0.258 in /ft
f y ( 0.9d ) 60 ksi ( 0.9 ( 6.5 in ) )

Recalculate using As = 0.2 in2
As f y
0.258 in. ( 60 ksi )
=
= 0.405 in.
a=
0.85 f cb 0.85 ( 3.75 ksi )(12 in )
MN
a
M N = As f y d As =
a
2
fy d
2
90.68 k-in/ft
As =
0.405 in.
( 60 ksi ) 6.5 in.
= 0.240 in 2 /ft

Check the yield of the steel
0.405 in.
c=
=
= 0.476 in.
0.85
1
a
d c
6.5 in. 0.476 in.
t =
cu =
0.003
0.476 in.
c
= 0.038 0.005
Steel has yielded so

we can use = 0.9

Check to minimum requirement for every foot
As
0.24 in.
=
=
= 0.00301
bd (12 in.)( 6.5 in.)
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
=
min = 0.00333
3 f c = 3 3750 = 0.0031
f
60000
y
Problem!

What we can do is rework the spacing between the bars
by change b Use a #4 bar As = 0.2 in2
As
As
0.2 in 2
=
b=
=
= 9.23 in.
bd
d ( 0.00333)( 6.5 in.)
Use b = 9 in.

Check for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement for
min = 0.0018 As = minbh from 7.12.2.1 ACI
As = min bd = 0.0018 (12 in.)( 7.5 in.) = 0.162 in /ft
2
0.2 in 2
spacing =
12 in.) =14.8 in.
2 (
0.162 in
Use 1 # 4 bar every 9 in.
Pattern Loads
Using influence lines to determine pattern
loads
Largest moments in a continuous beam or

frame occur when some spans are loaded
and others are not.
Influence lines are used to determine which
spans to load and which spans not to load.
Pattern Loads
Influence Line: graph of variation of
shear, moment, or other effect at one
particular point in a structure due to a unit
load moving across the structure.
Pattern
Loads
Quantitative
Influence
Lines
Ordinate are
calculated
(exact)
MacGregor (1997)
Pattern Loads
Qualitative Influence Lines
Mueller-Breslau Principle
Used to provide a qualitative guide to

the shape of the influence line
Pattern Loads
Qualitative Influence Lines (cont.)
For moments
Insert pin at location of interest
Twist beam on either side of pin
Other supports are unyielding, so
distorted shape may be easily drawn.
For frames, joints are assumed free to
rotate, assume members are rigidly
connected (angle between members
does not change)

The Mueller-Breslau principle
can be stated as follows:
If a function at a point on a
structure, such as reaction, or
shear, or moment is allowed to
act without restraint, the
deflected shape of the structure,
to some scale, represents the
influence line of the function.
Pattern Loads
Fig. 10-7 (b,f) from MacGregor (1997)
Pattern Loads
Frame Example:
Maximize +M at point B.
Draw qualitative
influence lines.
Resulting pattern load:
checkerboard pattern
Pattern Loads
Arrangement of Live Loads (ACI 31802, Sec. 8.9.1)
It shall be permitted to assume that:

The live load is applied only to the floor
or roof under consideration, and
The far ends of columns built integrally
with the structure are considered to be
fixed.
Pattern Loads
Arrangement of Live Loads ACI 31899, Sec. 8.9.2:
It shall be permitted to assume that the

arrangement of live load is limited to
combinations of:
Factored dead load on all spans with full
factored live load on two adjacent
spans.
Factored dead load on all spans with full
factored live load on alternate spans.
Lecture 9 - Flexure
June 20, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Load Envelopes
Resistance Factors and Loads
Design of Singly Reinforced Rectangular
Beam
Unknown section dimensions

Known section dimensions
Moment
Envelopes
The moment envelope
curve defines the extreme
boundary values of
bending moment along the
beam due to critical
placements of design live
loading.
Fig. 10-10; MacGregor (1997)
Moment
Envelopes Example
Given following beam with a dead load of 1 k/ft and
live load 2 k/ft obtain the shear and bending moment
envelopes
Moment
Envelopes Example
Use a series of shear and bending moment diagrams
5
Wu = 1.2wD + 1.6wL
kips
4
3
2
1
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
(ft)
80
150
60
100
40
50
0
0
-20 0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
k-ft
kips
20
-50 0
10
15
20
25
30
-100
-40
-150
-60
-200
-80
-250
ft
Shear Diagram
ft
Moment Diagram
35
40
Moment
Envelopes Example
1.4
Wu = 1.2wD + 1.6wL
1.2
k/ft
(Dead Load Only)
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
ft
20
40
15
20
10
0
-5 0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
k-ft
kips
10
15
20
25
30
-20
-40
-10
-60
-15
-20
-80
ft
Shear Diagram
ft
Moment Diagram
35
40
Moment
Envelopes Example
k/ft
Wu = 1.2wD + 1.6wL
5
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
25
30
35
40
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10 0
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
200
150
100
50
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
k-ft
kips
ft
0
-50 0
10
15
20
-100
-150
-200
ft
Shear Diagram
ft
Moment Diagram
Moment
Envelopes Example
The shear envelope
Shear Envelope
80
Minimum Shear
60
Maximum Shear
40
kips
20
0
-20 0
10
20
-40
-60
-80
ft
30
40
Moment
Envelopes Example
The moment envelope
Moment Envelope
200
k-ft
100
0
-100
10
15
20
25
30
-200
-300
ft
Minimum Moment
Maximum Moment
35
40
Flexural Design of Reinforced

Concrete Beams and Slab Sections
Analysis:
Design:
Analysis Versus Design:

Given a cross-section, fc , reinforcement
sizes, location, fy
compute
resistance or capacity
Given factored load effect (such as Mu)
select suitable section(dimensions, fc,
fy, reinforcement, etc.)

ACI Code Requirements for Strength Design
Basic Equation: factored resistance
Ex.
Mn Mu
factored load
effect
ACI Code Requirements for Strength

Design
Mn Mu
Mu = Moment due to factored loads (required

ultimate moment)
Mn = Nominal moment capacity of the cross-section
using nominal dimensions and specified
material strengths.
= Strength reduction factor (Accounts for
variability in dimensions, material strengths,
approximations in strength equations.

Required Strength (ACI 318, sec 9.2)
U = Required Strength to resist factored loads
D = Dead Loads
L = Live loads
W = Wind Loads
E = Earthquake Loads

H = Pressure or Weight Loads due to soil,ground
water,etc.
F = Pressure or weight Loads due to fluids with
well defined densities and controllable
maximum heights.
T = Effect of temperature, creep, shrinkage,
differential settlement, shrinkage compensating.
Factored Load Combinations

U = 1.2 D +1.6 L
U
U
U
U
U
Always check even if other load

types are present.
= 1.2(D + F + T) + 1.6(L + H) + 0.5 (Lr or S or R)

= 1.2D + 1.6 (Lr or S or R) + (L or 0.8W)
= 1.2D + 1.6 W + 1.0L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
= 0.9 D + 1.6W +1.6H
= 0.9 D + 1.0E +1.6H
Resistance Factors, ACI Sec

9.3.2 Strength Reduction Factors
[1] Flexure w/ or
w/o axial tension
The strength
reduction factor, ,
will come into the
calculation of the
strength of the
beam.

[2] Axial Tension
= 0.90
[3] Axial Compression w or w/o flexure

(a) Member w/ spiral reinforcement
(b) Other reinforcement members
= 0.70
= 0.65
*(may increase for very small axial loads)

[4] Shear and Torsion
= 0.75
[5] Bearing on Concrete
= 0.65
ACI Sec 9.3.4
factors for regions of high

seismic risk
Background Information for

Designing Beam Sections
1. Location of Reinforcement
locate reinforcement where cracking occurs
(tension region) Tensile stresses may be due to :
a ) Flexure
b ) Axial Loads
c ) Shrinkage effects

2. Construction
formwork is expensive - try to reuse at several
floors

3. Beam Depths
ACI 318 - Table 9.5(a) min. h based on
l (span) (slab & beams)
Rule of thumb: hb (in)
l (ft)
Design for max. moment over a support to set

depth of a continuous beam.

4. Concrete Cover
Cover = Dimension between the surface of the
slab or beam and the reinforcement

4. Concrete Cover
Why is cover needed?
[a] Bonds reinforcement to concrete
[b] Protect reinforcement against corrosion
[c] Protect reinforcement from fire (over
heating causes strength loss)
[d] Additional cover used in garages, factories,
etc. to account for abrasion and wear.

Minimum Cover Dimensions (ACI 318 Sec 7.7)
Sample values for cast in-place concrete
Concrete cast against & exposed to earth - 3 in.
Concrete (formed) exposed to earth & weather
No. 6 to No. 18 bars
- 2 in.
No. 5 and smaller
- 1.5 in

Concrete not exposed to earth or weather
- Slab, walls, joists
No. 14 and No. 18 bars - 1.5 in
No. 11 bar and smaller - 0.75 in
- Beams, Columns
- 1.5 in

5. Bar Spacing Limits
(ACI 318 Sec. 7.6)
- Minimum spacing of bars

- Maximum spacing of flexural reinforcement
in walls & slabs
3t
Max. space = smaller of
18 in.
Minimum Cover Dimension

Interior beam.

Reinforcement bar arrangement for two layers.

ACI 3.3.3
Nominal maximum
aggregate size.
- 3/4 clear space
- 1/3 slab depth
- 1/5 narrowest dim.
Example - Singly Reinforced

Beam
Design a singly reinforced beam, which has
a moment capacity, Mu = 225 k-ft, fc = 3 ksi,
fy = 40 ksi and c/d = 0.275
Use a b = 12 in. and determine whether or
not it is sufficient space for the chosen
tension steel.

Beam
From the calculation of Mn
Mn = C d
2
a 1 a
= 0.85 f cba d = 0.85 f cbd d 1
2
d 2 d
a
c
1
2
= 0.85 f cbd k 1 k where, k = = 1
d
2
d
1 2
= 0.85 f c k 1 k bd
{
2
1 4 44 2 4 4 43 size
Ru

Beam
Select c/d =0.275 so that =0.9. Compute k and
determine Ru
c
k = 1 = 0.85 ( 0.275 )
d
= 0.23375
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
0.23375
= 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 0.23375 ) 1
= 0.5264 ksi

Beam
Calculate the bd 2
MU

MN
2
=
bd =
Ru
Ru
12 in
225 k-ft ft
0.9
3
=
= 5699 in
0.5264 ksi

Beam
Calculate d, if b = 12 in.
3
5699
in
d2 =
= 440.67 in 2 d = 21.79 in.
12 in
Use d =22.5 in., so that h = 25 in.
c = 0.275d = 0.275 ( 22.5 in ) = 6.1875 in.

Beam
Calculate As for the beam
0.85 f cb 1c
As =
fy
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.85 )( 6.1875 in.)

=
40 ksi
2
= 4.02 in

Beam
Chose one layer of 4 #9 bars
As = 4 (1.0 in
) = 4.00 in
Compute
As
4.00 in 2
=
=
bd (12.0 in )( 22.5 in )
= 0.014815

Beam
Calculate min for the beam
min
200
200
=
= 0.005
f
40000
y
=
min = 0.005
3 f c = 3 3000 = 0.00411
fy
40000
0.014815 > 0.005
The beam is OK for

the minimum

Beam
Check whether or not the bars will fit into the beam.
The diameter of the #9 = 1.128 in.
b = 4d b + 3s + 2 cover + dstirrup
= 4 (1.128 in.) + 3 (1.128 in.) + 2 [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.]

= 11.65 in
So b =12 in. works.

Beam
Check the height of the beam.
db
h = d + + cover + dstirrup
2
1.128 in.)
(
= 22.5 in. +
+ [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.]
2
= 24.94 in
Use h = 25 in.

Beam
Find a
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
2
4.0
in
(
) ( 40 ksi )
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12.0 in.)
= 5.23 in.
Find c
5.23 in.
c=
=
0.85
1
= 6.15 in.

Beam
d c
22.5 in. 6.15 in.
t =
cu =
( 0.003)
6.15 in.
c
= 0.00797 0.005
c 6.15 in.
=
= 0.2733
d 22.5 in.
Therefore, is 0.9

Beam
Compute the Mn for the beam
a
M N = As f y d
2
5.23 in.
= ( 4.0 in ) ( 40 ksi ) 22.5 in.
= 3186.6 k-in
Calculate Mu
2
MU = MN
= 0.9 ( 3186.6 k-in ) = 2863.4 k-in

Beam
Check the beam Mu = 225 k-ft*12 in/ft =2700 k-in
2863.4 2700
*100% = 6.05%
2700
Over-designed the beam by 6%
c
6.15 in.
=
= 0.2733
d ( 22.5 in.)
Use a smaller c/d

ratio
Lecture 10 Design
Reinforced Beams
June 23, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Examples of Singly Reinforced
Rectangular Beam

Design of Doubly Reinforced Beams

Example - Singly RC Beam

(Unknown Dimensions I)
Design a singly reinforced beam, which has a
moment capacity, Mu = 250 k-ft, fc = 4.5 ksi,
and fy = 50 ksi.
Use a b = 0.55d and determine whether or not
it is sufficient space for the tension steel.

f c 4000 psi
Select a c/d ratio
1 = 0.85 0.05
for the tension

1000 psi
component to
4500
psi
4000
psi
dominate. Chose
= 0.85 0.05
1000 psi
c/d=0.25
= 0.825
c
k = 1
d
= 0.825 ( 0.25 ) = 0.20675

Calculate Ru for the beam
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
( 0.20675 )
= 0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )( 0.20675 ) 1
= 0.7076 ksi

Calculate the b d 2
MU

MN
2
=
bd =
Ru
Ru
12 in
250 k-ft ft
0.9
3
=
= 4711 in
0.7076 ksi

Calculate d, if b = 0.55d
3
4711 in
0.55d = 4711 in d =
= 20.46 in.
0.55
3
If b = 0.55(20.46 in.) = 11.25 in., so use b = 12 in.

and d = 20.5 in. and h = 23 in.
c = 0.25d = 0.25 ( 20.5 in ) = 5.125 in.

0.85 f cb 1c
As =
fy
0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.825 )( 5.125 in.)
=
50 ksi
2
= 3.88 in

Look at a series of bars and calculate As for the
beam for a single layer.
b = ( 2n 1) d b + 2 cover + dstirrup
The cover is 1.5 in. and use d = 3/8 in. stirrup.

depth
cover
stirrup
20.5
1.5 in.
0.375 in.
Bar
Area (in 2)
diameter (in)
# of bars
As(in 2)
single
spacing(in)
6
7
8
9
10
11
0.44
0.6
0.79
1
1.27
1.56
0.75
0.875
1
1.128
1.27
1.41
9
7
5
4
3
3
3.96
4.2
3.95
4
3.81
4.68
16.5
15.125
12.75
11.646
10.1
10.8
h (in)
22.75
22.81
22.88
22.94
23.01
23.08

= ( 2 ( 3) 1) (1.41 in.) + 2 [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.] = 10.8 in.
So b =12 in. works for 3#11 or 3#10 or 4#9 to fit

into the beam.

db
2
1.41 in.)
(
= 20.5 in. +
+ [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.] = 23.08 in
2
To be exact, use d = 20.5 in 0.08 in. = 20.42 in.,
but in reality use d = 20.5 in.

Find a
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
2
4.68
in
(
) ( 50 ksi )
0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(12.0 in.)
= 5.10 in.
Find c
5.10 in.
c=
=
0.825
1
= 6.18 in.

Compute
As
4.68 in 2
=
=
bd (12.0 in )( 20.5 in )
= 0.019024

min
200
200
=
= 0.004
fy
50000
=
min = 0.004025
3 f c = 3 4500 = 0.004025
f
50000
y
0.019024 > 0.004025
The beam is OK for

the minimum

d c
20.5 in. 6.18 in.
t =
cu =
( 0.003)
6.18 in.
c
= 0.00695 0.005
Therefore, is 0.9

M n = As f y d
2
5.10 in.
= ( 4.68 in ) ( 50 ksi ) 20.5 in.
= 4200.6 k-in
Calculate Mu
2
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 4200.6 k-in ) = 3780.5 k-in

3780.5 3000
*100% = 26.02%
3000
c 6.18 in.
=
= 0.301
d 20.5 in.

Check out the other bars
Bar
# of bars
As(in 2)
c (in)
c/d
Mn (k-in)
Error
%
9
10
11
4
3
3
4.00
3.81
4.68
5.28
5.03
6.18
0.258
0.245
0.301
0.01626
0.01549
0.01902
3664.30
3509.90
4200.60
9.93
5.30
26.02
Choosing between the #9 an #10 depend on the

selection of development length, availability,etc.

(Unknown Dimensions II)
Select a b,d and h and the reinforcement for a
24 ft. span continuous beam. The beam will
support its own dead load plus a superimposed
serve deal load of 1.25 k/ft plus uniform service
load of 2 k/ft. Design for the negative moment
of an interior beam with multiple spans (>2).
Use fc = 4 ksi, and fy = 60 ksi.

Assume that depth of the beam to be 8 to 10
percent of the L and b = 0.5 d.
12 in.
h = 0.08 24 ft
= 23.04 in. 23.0 in.
ft
12 in.
h = 0.1 24 ft
= 28.8 in. 29.0 in.
ft

Compute the weight of the beam = 0.150 k/ft3.
23 in. ft.
ft.
2
bh =
23
in.
=
1.84
ft
12 in
2 12 in
29 in. ft.
ft.
2
bh =
29
in.
=
2.92
ft
12 in
2 12 in
2
3
bh
=
1.84
ft
0.150
k/ft
( ) (
)(
) = 0.276 k/ft
2
3
bh
=
2.92
ft
0.150
k/ft
( ) (
)(
) = 0.438 k/ft

Chose w = 0.438 k/ft
U = 1.2 ( 0.438 k/ft + 1.25 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 2.00 k/ft )
= 5.23 k/ft
From ACI 318 02, look at 8.3.3

5.23 k/ft ( 24 ft )
MU =
=
11
11
= 273.86 k-ft 3286.4 k-in
U L

Calculate Ru for the beam, assume a c/d =0.275
k =
1c
= ( 0.85 )( 0.275 )
d
= 0.23375
Ru = 0.85 f c k (1 0.5k )
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 0.23375 ) (1 0.5 ( 0.23375 ) )

= 0.7019 ksi

Calculate the bd2
MU

MN
2
bd =
=
Ru
Ru
3286.4 k-in
0.9
3
=
= 5202.7 in
0.7019 ksi

3
5202.7 in
0.5d = 5202.7 in d =
= 21.83 in.
0.5
3
If b = 12 in., then d = 22.5 in. and we would need

to use a single layer of steel. h=25 in.
c = 0.275d = 0.275 ( 22.5 in ) = 6.1875 in.

Check the weight of the beam.
ft.
ft.
2
bh = 12 in.
25
in.
2.08
ft
=
12 in
12 in
2
3
bh
2.08
ft
0.150
k/ft
=
( ) (
)(
) = 0.3125 k/ft
You would go back and re-compute the problem

with the new weight. Assume that the beam will
work.

Chose w = 0.3125 k/ft
U = 1.2 ( 0.3125 k/ft + 1.25 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 2.00 k/ft )
= 5.075 k/ft
5.075 k/ft ( 24 ft )
MU =
=
11
11
= 265.75 k-ft 3189 k-in
U L

Calculate Ru for the beam, assume a c/d =0.275
k =
1c
= ( 0.85 )( 0.275 )
d
= 0.23375
Ru = 0.85 f c k (1 0.5k )
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 0.23375 ) (1 0.5 ( 0.23375 ) )

= 0.7019 ksi

Calculate the bd2
MU

MN
2
bd =
=
Ru
Ru
3189 k-in
0.9
3
=
= 5048.1 in
0.7019 ksi

3
5048.1 in
0.5d = 5048.1 in d =
= 21.61 in.
0.5
3
If b = 12 in., then d = 22.5 in. and we would need

to use a single layer of steel. h=25 in.
c = 0.275d = 0.275 ( 22.5 in ) = 6.1875 in.

0.85 f cb 1c
As =
fy
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.85 )( 6.1875 in.)
=
60 ksi
2
= 3.58 in

The cover is 1.5 in. and use d = 3/8 in. stirrup.

Bar
6
7
8
9
10
11
Area (in2) diameter (in)

0.44
0.625
0.60
0.875
0.79
1.000
1.00
1.128
1.27
1.270
1.56
1.410
# of bars
8
6
4
4
3
3
As (in2)
3.52
3.60
3.16
4.00
3.81
4.68
single
spacing (in)
13.125
13.375
10.750
11.646
10.100
10.800

= ( 2 ( 4 ) 1) (1.00 in.) + 2 [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.] = 10.75 in.
So b =12 in. works.

db
2
1.00 in.)
(
= 22.5 in. +
+ [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.] = 24.875 in
2
Use d = 22.5 in. and h = 25 in.

Find a
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
2
3.16
in
(
) ( 60 ksi )
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(12.0 in.)
= 4.65 in.
Find c
4.65 in.
=
c=
0.85
1
= 5.47 in.

d c
22.5 in. 5.47 in.
t =
cu =
( 0.003)
5.47 in.
c
= 0.009347 0.005
c 5.47 in.
=
= 0.243
d 22.5 in.
Therefore, is 0.9

a
M N = As f y d
2
4.65 in.
= ( 3.16 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 22.5 in.
= 3825.5 k-in
Calculate Mu
2
MU = MN
= 0.9 ( 3825.5 k-in ) = 3442.9 k-in

Check the beam Mu =3189 k-in
3442.9 3189
*100% = 7.96%
3189
Over-designed the beam by 8 %
As
3.16 in 2
=
=
= 0.0117
bd (12 in.)( 22.5 in.)

min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.003333
y
=
min = 0.003333
3 f c = 3 4000 = 0.00316
f
60000
y
0.0117 > 0.00333
The beam is OK for

the minimum
Doubly Reinforced
Concrete Beams
Doubly Reinforced Beams Design

Procedure when section dimensions
are known
1 Calculate controlling value for the design
moment, Mu.
2 Calculate d, since h is known

d h 2.5 in. For one layer of reinforcement.
d h 3.5 in. For two layers of reinforcement.

are known
3 Estimate a c/d value, which will cause a
strain, t >0.005 and find the area As1 for a

singly reinforced section. Compute c from d

are known
4 Find nominal moment capacity provided by As1
0.85 f c ba
As1 =
fy
a1
M f1 = As1 f y d
2

are known
5 Find nominal moment capacity that must be
provided by the web.
M =
Mu
M f1

are known
Mu
M =
M f1
If M 0 , compression steel is not

required to resist Mu /.
If M > 0 , go to step 6.
Note: Use = 0.9 for flexure without axial
load, which will be dependent on
the strain in the tension steel.
(ACI 318-02 Sec. 9.3)

are known
6 Determine As required to resist M
(assume s
y)
As( req'd )
M
=
( d d ) ( f y )

are known
7 Calculate total tension reinforcement
required.
As( req'd ) = As1 + As( req'd )

are known
8 Select reinforcing bars so As(provided)
As(reqd)
and As As(reqd). Confirm that the bars will fit

within the cross section.

are known
9 Confirm that s
y. If not go back to step

6 and substitute fs = Es s for fy to get correct
value of As(reqd)

are known
10 Calculate the actual Mn for the section
dimensions and reinforcement selected.
Check strength, Mn Mu. (keep
overdesign within 10 % )

are known
11 Check whether provided is within
allowable limits.
Lecture 11 Design
Reinforced Beams
June 25, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Design of Doubly Reinforced Beams


are known
moment, Mu.
2 Calculate d, since h is known

d h 2.5 in. For one layer of reinforcement.
d h 3.5 in. For two layers of reinforcement.

are known
3 Estimate a c/d value, which will cause a
strain, t >0.005 and find the area As1 for a

singly reinforced section. Compute c from d

are known
4 Find nominal moment capacity provided by As1
0.85 f c ba
As1 =
fy
a1
M f1 = As1 f y d
2

are known
5 Find nominal moment capacity that must be
provided by the web.
M =
Mu
M f1

are known
Mu
M =
M f1
If M 0 , compression steel is not

required to resist Mu /.
If M > 0 , go to step 6.
Note: Use = 0.9 for flexure without axial
load, which will be dependent on
the strain in the tension steel.
(ACI 318-02 Sec. 9.3)

are known
6 Determine As required to resist M
(assume s
y)
As( req'd )
M
=
( d d ) ( f y )

are known
7 Calculate total tension reinforcement
required.
As( req'd ) = As1 + As( req'd )

are known
As(reqd)


are known
9 Confirm that s
y. If not go back to step

6 and substitute fs = Es s for fy to get correct
value of As(reqd)

are known
Check strength, Mn Mu. (keep
overdesign within 10 % )

are known
allowable limits.
Example - Doubly RC Beam

(Known Dimensions)
Doubly reinforced beam with known dimensions,
fc = 3000 psi & fy = 50 ksi.
Using estimated values h = 22 in. , b =10 in.
Max + Mu = 265 k-ft
Use a double layer at the bottom of the beam

(Known Dimensions)
Assume that the tension steel has exceed t >0.005.
Calculate d for the beam. Assume that the beam will
need a double layer of steel.
d = h 3.5 in.
d = 22 in. 3.5 in. = 18.5 in.
d = 2.5 in.

(Known Dimensions)
Select a k factor (c/d), which will cause the tension
steel to yield.
c
0.375
d
Select c/d = 0.325
c
= 0.325 c = 0.325d = 0.325 (18.5 in.) = 6.01 in.
d

(Known Dimensions)
Design the beam as a single reinforced beam with
a = 1c = 0.85 ( 6.01 in.) = 5.11 in.

Use equilibrium to find the As1
C =T

(Known Dimensions)
Use equilibrium to find the As1
C =T
0.85 f cba
0.85 f cba = As1 f y As1 =
fy
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(10 in.)( 5.11 in.)

2
As1 =
= 2.61 in
( 50 ksi )

(Known Dimensions)
Calculate the Mn1 for a singly reinforced beam:
M n1 = As1 f y d
2
5.11 in.
= ( 2.61 in ) ( 50 ksi ) 18.5 in.
= 2078 k-in.
2

(Known Dimensions)
Calculate the residual Mn2 needed to find the As
for the beam:
M N = M n1 + M n2 M n2 = M N M n1
M n2 =
MU
M n1
Assume = 0.9 and MU = 265 k-ft

(Known Dimensions)
Calculate the residual Mn needed to find the As for
the beam:
M n2 =
MU
M n1
12 in.
265 k-ft
ft
=
2078 k-in.
0.9
= 1422 k-in.

(Known Dimensions)
Check to see if the compression steel has yielded
c
d
6.01 in. 2.5 in.
s =
cu =
( 0.003)
6.01 in.
c
= 0.00175
fy
50 ksi
y =
=
= 0.00172
E s 29000 ksi
0.00175 0.00172
Compression steel has

yielded!

(Known Dimensions)
Compute the As for the compression steel.
M n2
M
n2
= As f y ( d d ) As =
f y ( d d )
1422
k-in
As =
( 50 ksi )(18.5 in. 2.5 in.)
= 1.78 in

(Known Dimensions)
Determine the total steel for the tension zone.
As = As1 + As
= 2.61 in 2 + 1.78 in 2
= 4.39 in
Select the bars so that the areas are greater than the
required compression steel and tension steel.

(Known Dimensions)
Select 6 #8 bars (0.79 in2) for the tension steel, and 3 #7
bars (0.6 in2) for the compression steel.
As = 6 ( 0.79 in 2 ) = 4.74 in 2
As = 3 ( 0.60 in 2 ) = 1.80 in 2
The tension steel 4.74 in2 - 1.80 in2 = 2.94 in2 > 2.61 in2
The compression steel 1.80 in2 > 1.78 in2

(Known Dimensions)
Check the
As
4.74 in 2
=
=
= 0.0256
bd (10 in.)(18.5 in.)
2
As
1.80 in
=
= 0.00973
=
bd (10 in.)(18.5 in.)
( ) = 0.0256 0.00973 = 0.01587

(Known Dimensions)
minimum
1 ( 0.85 f c) d 87000
( ')

d fy
87000 f y
0.85 ( 0.85 ( 3 ksi ) ) ( 2.5 in.) 87
= 0.01377
87 50
50
ksi
18.5
in.
(
)
0.01587 0.01377
Compression steel has yielded.

(Known Dimensions)
Compute the a values
A A) f
(
a=
s
0.85 f cb
2
2
4.74
in
1.80
in
(
) ( 50 ksi )
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(10 in.)
a = 5.76 in.
5.76 in.
=
= 6.78 in.
c=
1
0.85
a

(Known Dimensions)
Compute the k value and compare
c 6.78 in.
k= =
= 0.366 0.375
d 18.5 in.
The tension steel will be in the tension controlled zone.

(Known Dimensions)
Another check is compute the strain in the two steels
d c
18.5 in. 6.78 in.
t =
cu =
( 0.003)
6.78 in.
c
= 0.00519 0.005
The compression steel

c d
6.78 in. 2.5 in.
s =
cu =
( 0.003)
6.78 in.
c
= 0.00189 0.00172

(Known Dimensions)
Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam
M N = As f y As fs d + As fs ( d d )
2
5.76 in.)
(
= ( 4.74 in 1.80 in ) ( 50 ksi ) 18.5 in.
+ (1.80 in 2 ) ( 50 ksi )(18.5 in. 2.5 in.)
= 3736.1 k - in.

(Known Dimensions)
MU = MN
= 0.9 ( 3736.1 k - in.)

= 3362.5 k - in. 280.2 k - ft.
280.2 k - ft. 265 k - ft. OK!

(Known Dimensions)
Compute the effective reinforcement ratio and min
eff = = 0.0256 0.00973 = 0.01587
200
200
=
= 0.004
f
50000
y
min =
min = 0.004
3 f c = 3 3000 = 0.00329
f
50000
y
min 0.0159 0.004 OK!

(Known Dimensions)
The beam is over-designed by:
280.2 k - ft. 265 k - ft.
Error =
*100%
265 k - ft.
= 5.7%
Using 6 #8 bars in a double layer configuration for the

tension steel and 3 #7 bars in the compression steel.
Example Problem
What would have happened if we selected another k
factor (c/d)
c
0.375
d
Select c/d = 0.3
c
= 0.3 c = 0.3d = 0.3 (18.5 in.) = 5.55 in.
d
Example Problem
Design the beam as a single reinforced beam with
a = 1c = 0.85 ( 5.55 in.) = 4.72 in.

Use equilibrium to find the As
C =T
Example Problem
Use equilibrium to find the As
C =T
0.85 f cba
0.85 f cba = As1 f y As1 =
fy
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(10 in.)( 4.72 in.)
As1 =
( 50 ksi )
= 2.41 in
Example Problem
Calculate the Mn for a singly reinforce beam:
a
M n1 = As1 f y d
2
4.72 in.
= ( 2.41 in ) ( 50 ksi ) 18.5 in.
= 1941.6 k-in.
2
Example Problem
Calculate the residual Mn needed to find the As for
the beam:
MU
M n1
M n2 =
12 in.
265 k-ft
ft
=
1941.6 k-in.
0.9
= 1558.4 k-in.
Example Problem
c
d
5.55
in.
2.5
in.
s =
cu =
( 0.003)
5.55 in.
c
= 0.00165
fy
50 ksi
y =
=
= 0.00172
E s 29000 ksi
0.00165 0.00172

not yielded!
Example Problem
Compute the strength of the compression steel:
fs = Es s
= ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00165 ) = 47.8 ksi
Example Problem
Compute the As for the compression steel.
M n2
= As fs( d d ) As =
As =
M n2
fs( d d )
1558.4 k-in
( 47.8 ksi )(18.5 in. 2.5 in.)
= 2.04 in 2
Example Problem
Determine the total steel for the tension zone.
As = As + As
= 2.41 in + 2.04 in
2
= 4.45 in 2
Select the bars so that the areas are greater than the
required compression steel and tension steel.

Section
bars (0.79 in2) for the compression steel.
As = 6 ( 0.79 in 2 ) = 4.74 in 2
As = 3 ( 0.79 in 2 ) = 2.37 in 2
The tension steel 4.74 in2 2.37 in2 = 2.37 in2 > 2.41 in2
This scheme will not work!

Section
bars (0.60 in2) and 2 #6 bars (0.44 in2) for the
compression steel.
As = 6 ( 0.79 in 2 ) = 4.74 in 2
As = 2 ( 0.60 in 2 ) + 2 ( 0.44 in 2 ) = 2.08 in 2
The tension steel 4.74 in2 2.08 in2 = 2.66 in2 > 2.41 in2
The compression steel 2.08 in2 > 2.04 in2

Section
Check the
As
4.74 in 2
=
=
= 0.0256
bd (10 in.)(18.5 in.)
As
2.04 in 2
=
= 0.0110
=
bd (10 in.)(18.5 in.)
( ) = 0.0256 0.0110 = 0.01457

Section
1 ( 0.85 f c) d 87000
( ')
d fy
87000 f y
0.85 ( 0.85 ( 3 ksi ) ) ( 2.5 in.) 87
= 0.01377
87 50
50
ksi
18.5
in.
(
)
0.01457 0.01377 Compression steel has yielded?

Section
Compute the a values
A A) f
(
a=
s
0.85 f cb
2
2
4.74
in
2.08
in
(
) ( 50 ksi )
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(10 in.)
a = 5.22 in.
a 5.22 in.
c=
=
= 6.14 in.
0.85
1

Section
Compute the k value and compare
c 6.14 in.
k= =
= 0.332 0.375
d 18.5 in.
The tension steel will be in the tension
controlled zone.

Section
Another check is compute the strain in the two steels
d c
18.5 in. 6.14 in.
t =
cu =
( 0.003)
6.14 in.
c
= 0.00604 0.005
The compression steel

c d
6.14 in. 2.5 in.
s =
cu =
( 0.003)
6.14 in.
c
= 0.001779 0.00172

Section
2
5.22 in.)
(
= ( 4.74 in 2.08 in ) ( 50 ksi ) 18.5 in.
+ ( 2.08 in 2 ) ( 50 ksi )(18.5 in. 2.5 in.)
= 3777.4 k - in.

Section
MU = MN
= 0.9 ( 3777.4 k - in.)

= 3399.6 k - in. 283.3 k - ft.
283.3 k - ft. 265 k - ft. OK!

Section
Check to see if the steel will fit into the beam
If we assume the largest diameter for the compression

steel
b = ( 2 ( 4 ) 1) ( 0.875 in.) + 2 [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.]
= 9.875 in. < 10 in.

Section
This shows that compression steel will not fit into the
beam. So lets take a closer look at the value.
b = 2 ( 0.875 in.) + 2 ( 0.875 in.) +
+2 ( 0.75 in.) + ( 0.75 in.) + 2 [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.]
= 9.5 in. < 10 in.
So the compression steel will fit in a single layer

Section
The beam is over designed by:
283.3 k - ft. 265 k - ft.
Error =
*100%
265 k - ft.
= 6.9%
Using 6 #8 bars in a double layer configuration

for the tension steel and 2 #7 bars and 2 #6 bars
in the compression steel.

are unknown
moment, Mu.
2 Compute Ru with a selected c/d ratio for a

singly reinforced member.
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2

are unknown
3 Select a b = 0.45d to 0.65d
Mu
bd =
2
Solve for d and b.
Ru

are unknown
4 Assume that the compression steel is a
percentage of the net steel, As = 0.4Anet to

0.6Anet d
c = kd
Astotal
0.85 f c b1c
=
fy

are unknown
5 Compute the amount of steel in the
compression zone.
As =
Astotal
percentage
1 +
of Anet

are unknown
As(total)


are unknown
7 Confirm that s
y =
fy
y.
Es
( c d )
s =
cu
c
If the strain is does not yield

are unknown
Compute the equilibrium.
( c d )
+ 0.85 f cb1c
As f y = As E s
cu
c

A E
(
c +
2
s cu
As f y
0.85 f cb1
) c A E
s
s cu
0.85 f cb 1
=0
Compute the quadratic to find the c value

are unknown
Compute a and fs to compute the moment of
the beam and check 0.375 c/d for the
selection of = 0.9
a = 1c
c d
fs = Es
cu
c

are unknown
Compute the moment of the beam
M n = As f y As fs d
2
+ As fs ( d d )

are unknown
Check strength, Mn Mu. (keep overdesign within 10 % ) Go back to c/d step
4 and adjust the compression steel.

are unknown
allowable limits.
Example Problem
Doubly reinforced beam with known dimensions,
fc = 6000 psi & fy = 60 ksi.
Max + Mu = 435.0 k-ft
Use a double layer at the bottom of the beam
Example Problem
Select a k factor (c/d), which will cause the tension
steel to yield.
c
0.375
Select c/d = 0.35
f c 4000
1 = 0.85 0.05
1000
6000 4000
= 0.85 0.05
= 0.75
1000
Example Problem
Compute Ru
k = 1k = 0.75 ( 0.35 ) = 0.2625

k
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
0.2625
= 0.85 ( 6 ksi )( 0.2625 ) 1
= 1.163 ksi
Example Problem
Compute bd2
Mu
Ru bd =
2
Mu
bd =
2
Ru
12 in.
435 k-ft ft.
2
3
0.9
bd =
= 4989 in
1.163 ksi
Example Problem
Assume that b =0.6d
3
4989
in
2
3
bd = 4989 in d = 3
= 20.256 in.
0.6
b = 0.6 ( 20.256 in.) = 12.154 in.
Use d = 20.5 in. and b = 12 in.
Example Problem
Calculate the Atotal for a singly reinforced beam:
c = 0.35d = 0.35 ( 20.5 in.) = 7.175 in.

Atotal
0.85 f cb 1c
=
fy
0.85 ( 6 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.75 )( 7.175 in.)
=
( 60 ksi )
= 5.48 in 2
Example Problem
Assume As=0.45Anet
Atotal
As =
(1 + % Anet )
2
5.48 in
2
=
= 1.70 in
(1 + 0.45)
Anet = 5.48 in 1.70 in = 3.78 in
2
Example Problem
Select the steel to meet the requirements. Chose 4#9
and 2#8 bars for the tension steel and 3#7 in
compression steel.
Atotal = 4 (1.00 in 2 ) + 2 ( 0.79 in 2 ) = 5.58 in 2
2
2
As = 3 ( 0.60 in ) = 1.8 in
Anet = Atotal As
= 5.58 in 2 1.8 in 2 = 3.78 in 2

Section
Check the
2
As
5.58 in
=
=
= 0.02268
bd (12 in.)( 20.5 in.)
As
1.80 in 2
=
=
= 0.00732
bd (12 in.)( 20.5 in.)
( ) = 0.02268 0.00732 = 0.01537

Section
minimum
1 ( 0.85 f c) d 87000
( ')
d fy
87000 f y
0.75 ( 0.85 ( 6 ksi ) ) ( 2.5 in.) 87
= 0.02505
87 60
60
ksi
20.5
in.
(
)
0.01587 0.02505 Compression steel has yielded.
Example Problem
Compute c for the new beam and assume compression
steel has yielded
a=
( Atotal As ) f y
0.85 f cb
3.78 in ) ( 60 ksi )
(
=
2
0.85 ( 6 ksi )(12 in.)
3.71 in.
= 3.71 in. c =
=
= 4.94 in.
1
0.75
a
Example Problem
c
d
4.94
in.
2.5
in.
s =
cu =
( 0.003)
4.94 in.
c
= 0.00148
fy
60 ksi
y =
=
= 0.00207
E s 29000 ksi
0.00148 0.00207
not yielded!
Example Problem
Compute the actual c value
A E
(
0=c +
2
s cu
As f y
0.85 f cb1
) c A E
s cu
0.85 f cb 1
( (1.8 in ) (87 ksi ) ( 5.58 in ) ( 60 ksi ) )

2
0 = c2 +
0.85 ( 6 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.75 )
2
1.8
in
(
) (87 ksi )( 2.5 in.)
0.85 ( 6 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.75 )
0 = c 2 3.8824c 8.5294
Example Problem
Compute the actual c value
b b 2 4ac
c=
2a
=
3.8824
c = 5.448 in.
( 3.8824 )
2
4 ( 8.5294 )
Example Problem
Compute a and fs
c 5.448 in.
=
= 0.2724 0.375
d 20.5 in.
a = 1c = 0.75 ( 5.448 in.) = 4.086 in.
c d
fs = Es
cu
c
5.448 in. 2.5 in.
= 29000 ksi
( 0.003)
5.448 in.
= 47.08 ksi

Section
2
4.09 in.)
(
= ( 5.58 in ( 60 ksi ) 1.80 in ( 47.08 ksi ) ) 20.5 in.
+ (1.80 in 2 ) ( 47.08 ksi )( 20.5 in. 2.5 in.)
= 6140.7 k - in.

Section
Compute the moment capacity of the beam:
MU = MN
= 0.9 ( 6140.7 k - in.)

= 5526.6 k - in. 460.6 k - ft.
460.6 k - ft. 435 k - ft. OK!

Section
eff = = 0.02268 0.00732 = 0.01537
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
min =
min = 0.00387
3 f c = 3 6000 = 0.00387
fy
60000
min 0.0154 0.00387 OK!

Section
The beam is over designed by:
460.6 k - ft. 435 k - ft.
Error =
*100%
435 k - ft.
= 5.87%
Using 4 #9 & 2 #8 bars in a double layer configuration

for the tension steel and 3 #7 bars in the compression
steel.
Lecture 12 Analysis and

Design
February 10, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Resistance Factors and Loads
Design of Singly Reinforced Rectangular
Beam


Analysis:
Design:
Analysis Versus Design:

Given a cross-section, fc , reinforcement
sizes, location, fy
compute
resistance or capacity
Given factored load effect (such as Mu)
select suitable section(dimensions, fc,
fy, reinforcement, etc.)

ACI Code Requirements for Strength Design
Basic Equation: factored resistance
Ex.
Mn Mu
factored load
effect
ACI Code Requirements for Strength

Design
Mn Mu
Mu = Moment due to factored loads (required

ultimate moment)
Mn = Nominal moment capacity of the cross-section
using nominal dimensions and specified
material strengths.
= Strength reduction factor (Accounts for
variability in dimensions, material strengths,
approximations in strength equations.

U = Required Strength to resist factored loads
D = Dead Loads
L = Live loads
W = Wind Loads
E = Earthquake Loads

H = Pressure or Weight Loads due to soil,ground
water,etc.
F = Pressure or weight Loads due to fluids with
well defined densities and controllable
maximum heights.
T = Effect of temperature, creep, shrinkage,
differential settlement, shrinkage compensating.
Factored Load Combinations

U = 1.2 D +1.6 L
U
U
U
U
U
Always check even if other load

types are present.
= 1.2(D + F + T) + 1.6(L + H) + 0.5 (Lr or S or R)

= 1.2D + 1.6 (Lr or S or R) + (L or 0.8W)
= 1.2D + 1.6 W + 1.0L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
= 0.9 D + 1.6W +1.6H
= 0.9 D + 1.0E +1.6H

[1] Flexure w/ or
w/o axial tension
The strength
reduction factor, ,
will come into the
calculation of the
strength of the
beam.

[2] Axial Tension
= 0.90
[3] Axial Compression w or w/o flexure

(a) Member w/ spiral reinforcement
(b) Other reinforcement members
= 0.70
= 0.65
*(may increase for very small axial loads)

[4] Shear and Torsion
= 0.75
[5] Bearing on Concrete
= 0.65
ACI Sec 9.3.4
factors for regions of high seismic risk

1. Location of Reinforcement
locate reinforcement where cracking occurs
(tension region) Tensile stresses may be due to :
a ) Flexure
b ) Axial Loads
c ) Shrinkage effects

2. Construction
formwork is expensive - try to reuse at several
floors

3. Beam Depths
ACI 318 - Table 9.5(a) min. h based on
l (span) (slab & beams)
Rule of thumb: hb (in)
l (ft)
Design for max. moment over a support to set

depth of a continuous beam.

4. Concrete Cover
Cover = Dimension between the surface of the
slab or beam and the reinforcement

4. Concrete Cover
Why is cover needed?
[a] Bonds reinforcement to concrete
[b] Protect reinforcement against corrosion
[c] Protect reinforcement from fire (over
heating causes strength loss)
[d] Additional cover used in garages, factories,
etc. to account for abrasion and wear.

Sample values for cast in-place concrete
Concrete cast against & exposed to earth - 3 in.
Concrete (formed) exposed to earth & weather
No. 6 to No. 18 bars
- 2 in.
No. 5 and smaller
- 1.5 in

Concrete not exposed to earth or weather
- Slab, walls, joists
No. 14 and No. 18 bars - 1.5 in
No. 11 bar and smaller - 0.75 in
- Beams, Columns
- 1.5 in

5. Bar Spacing Limits
(ACI 318 Sec. 7.6)
- Minimum spacing of bars

- Maximum spacing of flexural reinforcement
in walls & slabs
3t
Max. space = smaller of
18 in.

Interior beam.

Reinforcement bar arrangement for two layers.

ACI 3.3.3
Nominal maximum
aggregate size.
3/4 clear space.,
1/3 slab depth,
1/5 narrowest
dim.

Beam
Design a singly reinforced beam, which has
a moment capacity, Mu = 225 k-ft, fc = 3 ksi,
fy = 40 ksi and c/d = 0.275
Use a b = 12 in. and determine whether or
not it is sufficient space for the chosen
tension steel.

Beam
From the calculation of Mn
a
Mn = C d
2
a
a 1 a
= 0.85 f cba d = 0.85 f cbd d 1

d 2 d
2
a
c
1
2
= 0.85 f cbd k 1 k where, k = = 1
d
2
d
1 2
= 0.85 f c k 1 k bd
{
2
1 4 44 2 4 4 43 size
Ru

Beam
Compute k and determine Ru
k = 1 = 0.85 ( 0.275 )
d
= 0.23375
k
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
0.23375
= 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 0.23375 ) 1
= 0.5264 ksi

Beam
Calculate the bd 2 and by selecting c/d =0.275 =0.9
MU

MN
2
=
bd =
Ru
Ru
12 in
225 k-ft ft
0.9
3
=
= 5699 in
0.5264 ksi

Beam
Calculate d, if b = 12 in.
3
5699
in
d2 =
= 440.67 in 2 d = 21.79 in.
12 in
Use d =22.5 in., so that h = 25 in.
c = 0.275d = 0.275 ( 22.5 in ) = 6.1875 in.

Beam
0.85 f cb 1c
As =
fy
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.85 )( 6.1875 in.)

=
40 ksi
2
= 4.02 in

Beam
Chose one layer of 4 #9 bars
As = 4 (1.0 in
) = 4.00 in
Compute
As
4.00 in 2
=
=
bd (12.0 in )( 22.5 in )
= 0.014815

Beam
min
200
200
=
= 0.005
f
40000
y
=
min = 0.005
3 f c = 3 3000 = 0.00411
fy
40000
0.014815 > 0.005
The beam is OK for

the minimum

Beam
b = 4d b + 3s + 2 cover + dstirrup
= 4 (1.128 in.) + 3 (1.128 in.) + 2 [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.]

= 11.65 in
So b =12 in. works.

Beam
db
2
1.128 in.)
(
= 22.5 in. +
+ [1.5 in. + 0.375 in.]
2
= 24.94 in
Use h = 25 in.

Beam
Find a
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
2
4.0
in
(
) ( 40 ksi )
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12.0 in.)
= 5.23 in.
Find c
5.23 in.
c=
=
0.85
1
= 6.15 in.

Beam
d c
22.5 in. 6.15 in.
t =
cu =
( 0.003)
6.15 in.
c
= 0.00797 0.005
c 6.15 in.
=
= 0.2733
d 22.5 in.
Therefore, is 0.9

Beam
M N = As f y d
2
5.23 in.
= ( 4.0 in ) ( 40 ksi ) 22.5 in.
= 3186.6 k-in
Calculate Mu
2
MU = MN
= 0.9 ( 3186.6 k-in ) = 2863.4 k-in

Beam
2863.4 2700
*100% = 6.05%
2700
c
6.15 in.
=
= 0.2733
d ( 22.5 in.)
Use a smaller c/d

ratio
Homework
Problem 5.4, 5.5
Lecture 13- Bar

Development
July 2, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Slab design reinforcement
Bar Development
Hook development
Flexural Reinforcement in
Slabs
For a 1 ft strip of slab is designed like a beam
As (reqd) is in units of (in2/ft)
12 in
As / ft = Ab
bar spacing in inches
The table will allow

to determine the
amount of steel per
each foot of slab.
Flexural Reinforcement in
Slabs
The minimum spacing of the bars is given as:
( ACI Sec. 7.6.5)
Smax
3t ( slab thickness )
= smaller of
18 in.
Also, check crack control - important for exterior

exposure (large cover dimensions) - The spacing S of
reinforcement closest to the surface in tension ACI
Sec. 10.6.4
12 ( 36 )
540
s=
2.5cc
fs
fs
Flexural Reinforcement in Slabs

Maximum & Minimum reinforcement requirements
Thin slabs shrink more rapidly than deeper beams.
Temperature & shrinkage (T&S) steel is provided
perpendicular to restrain cracks parallel to span.
(Flexural steel restrains cracks perpendicular to
span)

Maximum & Minimum reinforcement requirements
T&S Reinforcement (perpendicular to span)
ACI Sec 7.12.2
As (min ) = 0.0020 * (12")* t

= 0.0018 * (12")* t
60
= 0.0018 * * (12")* t
f
y
0.0014 * (12 ")* t
f y = 40 or 50 ksi
f y = 60 ksi
f y 60 ksi

T&S Reinforcement (perpendicular to span)
ACI Sec 7.12.2.2
S max
5t
= smaller of
18"
t thickness of the slab

Flexural Reinforcement (parallel to span)
ACI Sec 10.5.4
As( min ) = As( min )T&S
S max
3t
= smaller of
18"
Smax from reinforced spacing
Reinforcement Development Lengths, Bar

Cutoffs, and Continuity Requirements
A. Concept of Bond Stress and Rebar Anchorage
Internal Forces in a beam
Forces developed in the beam by loading.

A. Concept of Bond Stress and Rebar Anchorage
Forces in Rebar
Bond stresses provide mechanism of force transfer
between concrete and reinforcement.

Equilibrium Condition for Rebar
F = 0 T Bond Force = 0
d b2
4
ld =
f y d b lb = 0
f y db
4
Note: Bond stress is zero at cracks
= bond stress
(coefficient of
friction) k
fc
k = f (bar )

Sources of Bond Transfer
(1) Adhesion between concrete & reinforcement.
(2) Friction
Note: These properties are quickly lost for tension.

(3)Mechanical Interlock.
The edge stress concentration causes
cracking to occur.

(3) Mechanical Interlock (cont).
Force interaction between the steel and concrete.

Splitting cracks result in loss of bond transfer.
Reinforcement can be used to restrain these
cracks.

Splitting Load is Affected by:
1. Minimum edge distance and spacing of bars
( smaller distance = smaller load )
2. Tensile strength of concrete.
3. Average bond stress along bar. ( Increase in
bond stress
larger wedging forces. )

Typical Splitting Failure Surfaces.

Typical Splitting Failure Surfaces.

General splitting of
concrete along the
bars,either in vertical
planes as in figure (a) or
in horizontal plane as in
figure (b). Such splitting
comes largely from
wedging action when the
ribs of the deformed bar
bear against the concrete.
The horizontal type of splitting frequently begins at a diagonal
crack. The dowel action increases the tendency toward splitting.
This indicates that shear and bond failure are often intricately
interrelated.
Reinforcement Development Lengths

B. ACI Code expression for development length for
bars in tension/in compression.
Development Length, ld
Shortest length of bar in which the bar stress can
increase from zero to the yield strength, fy.
( ld used since bond stresses, , vary along a bar in
a tension zone)
Reinforcement Development
Lengths
Development Length, ld
( ld used since bond
stresses, , vary along a
bar in a tension zone)
Development Length for Bars in Tension

Development length, ld 12 ACI 12.2.1
fc 10000 psi for Ch. 12 provisions for development length in ACI Codes.
Development length, ld (simplified expression from ACI 12.2.2)

No. 6 and smaller No. 7 and larger
bars and deformed bars
wires
Clear spacing of bars being developed or
spliced not less than db, clear cover not less
than db, and stirrups or ties throughout ld not
less than the code minimum
or
Clear spacing of bars being developed or
spliced not less than 2db and clear cover not
less than db.
f y
ld
=
d b 25 f c
f y
ld
=
d b 20 f c
38
47.5

Development length, ld 12 ACI 12.2.1
fc 10000 psi for Ch. 12 provisions for development length in ACI Codes.
Development length, ld (simplified expression from ACI 12.2.2)

No. 6 and smaller No. 7 and larger
bars and deformed bars
wires
Other cases
ld 3 f y
=
d b 50 f c
57
fc = 4 ksi fy = 60 ksi , ,, = 1.0
ld 3 f y
=
d b 40 f c
71

Development length, ld
ACI 12.2.3
ld
3 fy
=
d b 40 f c c + K ct
db
c + K ct
where,
db
< 2.5
2.5 limit to safeguard against pullout type failure.
Factors used in expressions for

Development Length (ACI 12.2.4)
= reinforcement location factor
where < 1.7
Horizontal reinforcement so placed that

more than 12 in of fresh concrete is cast
in the member below the development
length or splice
Other reinforcement
1.3
1.0

= coating factor (epoxy prevents adhesion &
friction between bar and concrete.)
Epoxy-coated bars or wires with cover less
than 3db or clear spacing less than 6db
1.5
All other epoxy-coated bars or wires
1.2
Uncoated reinforcement
1.0
where < 1.7

= reinforcement size factor (Reflects more favorable
performance of smaller
bars)
No.6 and smaller bars and deformed wire
0.8
No. 7 and larger bars
1.0

= lightweight aggregate concrete factor (Reflects
lower tensile strength of lightweight concrete, &
resulting reduction in splitting resistance.)
When lightweight aggregate concrete is used.
1.3
However, when fct is specified, shall be

permitted to be taken as 6.7 f c f ct but not
less than
1.0
When normal weight concrete is used
1.0

c = spacing or cover dimension, in.
Use the smaller of either
(a) the distance from the center of the bar or wire to
the nearest concrete surface.
or
(b) one-half the center-to-center spacing of the bar or
wires being developed.

Ktr = transverse reinforcement index (Represents the
contribution of confining reinforcement across
potential splitting planes.)
K tr =
Atr f yt
1500 * s * n
The transverse reinforcement is the development

length in a column.

Atr =
Total cross-section area of all transverse

reinforcement within the spacing s, which
crosses the potential plane of splitting along
the reinforcement being developed with in the
development length, in2.
fyt =
Specified yield strength of transverse

reinforcement, psi.

s = maximum center-to-center spacing of
transverse reinforcement within ld in.
n = number of bars or wires being developed
along the plane of splitting.
Note:
Note It is permitted to use Ktr = 0 as a design
simplification even if transverse reinforcement
is present.
Excess Flexural Reinforcement

Reduction (ACI 12.2.5)
Reduction = (As reqd ) / (As provided )
- Except as required for seismic design (see ACI
21.2.1.4)
- Good practice to ignore this provision, since use
of structure may change over time.
- final ld 12 in.
Reduction =
Mu
M n (req'd )
M n (provided )
M n (provided )
Development Length for Bars in

Compression (ACI 12.3)
Compression development length,
ldc = ldbc * applicable reduction factors 8 in.
Basic Development Length for Compression, ldbc
ldbc
0.02 d b f y
= larger of
fc
0.0003 d b f y

Reduction Factors (ACI 12.3.3)
- Excessive Reinforcement Factor
= A(s reqd ) / A(s provided)
- Spiral and Ties
If reinforcement is enclosed with spiral
reinforcement 0.25 in. diameter and
4 in. pitch or within No. 4 ties
according to 7.10.5 and spaced 4 in.
on center. Factor = 0.75
Example - Development
For the cross section of a simply
supported beam reinforced with
4 #8 bars that are confined with
#3 stirrup spaced at 6 in.
Determine the development
length of the bars if the beam is
made of normal weight concrete
fc = 3 ksi and fy= 60 ksi
Check if conditions for spacing and concrete
cover are met:
For #8 bars, db = 1.0 in.
Clear cover = 2.5 in - 0.5 in.= 2.0 in. > db
Clear spacing
between bars
b 2*cover ( n 1) d b
=
spaces
12 in. 2 ( 2.5 in.) 3 (1.0 in.)
=
3
= 1.33in. d b
Bars are confined with #3 stirrups. The conditions are
met.
ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
(for bars > #7)
Determine the factors; = 1.0 (bottom bars), =1.0

(no coating) and = 1.0 (normal weight concrete) and
f c = 54.8 psi < 100 psi
ld (1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 ) 60000
=
= 54.8
db
20 3000
So ld = 54.8(1.0 in.) = 54.8 in.
more general formula Ktr = 0.0
55 in. Using the
ld 3 f y
=
d b 40 f c c + K tr
db
= = = = 1.0. Also
c = smaller of distance from center of bar to the nearest
concrete surface c1 or one-half the center-to-center
of bars spacing c2
b 2*cover
c2 = 0.5
spaces
c1 = 2.5 in.
12 in. 5 in.
= 0.5
= 1.17 in.
3
c = 1.17 in. controls
c + K tr
If
< 1.5 use 1.5. 1.17/1.0 = 1.17
db
ld 3 60000 1.0
=
= 54.8
d b 40 3000 (1.5 )
So ld = 55 in.
1.5
If the same beam is made of light
weight aggregate concrete and
the bars are epoxy coated and As
required for analysis is 2.79 in2
The conditions are met.
ld Rs f y
=
db
20 f c
(for bars > #7)
Determine the factors; = 1.0 (bottom bars), =1.5

(epoxy coating) and = 1.3 (lightweight aggregate
concrete) and Rs = (As(req) / As(provided) ) = 2.79/3.16 = 0.89.
The value of is 1.5 because the concrete cover is less
than 3db = 3 in.
Check that =1.0(1.5) = 1.5 < 1.7
ld 0.89 (1.5 )(1.3) 60000

=
= 95.1
db
20 3000
So ld = 95.1(1.0 in.) = 95.1 in.
96 in.
Critical Sections in Flexural

Members
The critical sections for development of reinforcement in
flexural members are:
1. At points of maximum stress;
2. At points where tension bars within span are
terminated or bent;
3. At the face of the support;
4. At points of inflection at which moment
changes sign.
Critical Sections in Negative

Moment Reinforcement
Three sections are critical for
the negative moment
reinforcement:
Section 1 is at the face of the
support, where the negative
moment as well as stress are at
maximum value. Two
development lengths, x1 and x2
must be checked.

Section 2 is the section where
part of the negative reinforcement
bar can be terminated. To
develop full tensile force, the bars
should extend a distance x2
before they can be terminated
Once part of the bars are
terminated the remaining bars
develop maximum stress.

Section 3 is a point of inflection
The bars shall extend a distance x3
beyond section 3: x3 must be
equal to or greater than the
effective depth d, 12db or 1/16 the
span, which ever is greater. At
least 1/3 of the total reinforcement
provided for negative moment at
support shall extend a distance x3
beyond the point of inflection.
Critical Sections in Positive

Section 4 is that of maximum
positive moment and maximum
stresses. Two development
lengths x1 and x2 have to be
checked. The length x1 is the
development length ld specified by
the ACI Code Section 12.11. The
length x2 is equal to or greater
than the effective depth d, 12db .

Section 5 is where part of the positive
reinforcement bars may be terminated.
To develop full tensile force, the bars
should extend a distance x2. The
remaining bars will have a maximum
stress due to the termination of part of the
bars. At the face of the support section 1,
at least 1/4 of the positive moment
reinforcement in continuous members shall expend along the
same face of the member into the support, according to ACI
12.11.1. For simple members at least 1/3 of the reinforcement
shall extend into the support

Section 6 is at the points of
inflection limits are according to
section 12.11.3 of the ACI Code.
Lecture 14- Bar

Development
July 9, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Critical Sections
Hook Development
Bar Cutoff
Critical Sections in Flexural Members

The critical sections for development of reinforcement in
flexural members are:
1. At points of maximum stress;
2. At points where tension bars within span are
terminated or bent;
3. At the face of the support;
4. At points of inflection at which moment
changes sign.

Three sections are critical for
the negative moment
reinforcement:
Section 1 is at the face of the
support, where the negative
moment as well as stress are at
maximum value. Two
development lengths, x1 and x2
must be checked.

Section 2 is the section where
part of the negative
reinforcement bar can be
terminated. To develop full
tensile force, the bars should
extend a distance x2 before
they can be terminated Once
part of the bars are terminated
the remaining bars develop
maximum stress.

Section 3 is a point of inflection
The bars shall extend a distance
x3 beyond section 3: x3 must be
equal to or greater than the
effective depth d, 12db or 1/16
the span, which ever is greater.
At least 1/3 of the total
reinforcement provided for
negative moment at support
shall extend a distance x3
beyond the point of inflection.

Section 4 is that of maximum
positive moment and
maximum stresses. Two
development lengths x1 and
x2 have to be checked. The
length x1 is the development
length ld specified by the ACI
Code Section 12.11. The
length x2 is equal to or
greater than the effective
depth d, 12db .

Section 5 is where part of
the positive reinforcement
bars may be terminated. To
develop full tensile force,
the bars should extend a
distance x2. The remaining
bars will have a maximum
stress due to the termination
of part of the bars.

Section 5 At the face of the
support section 1, at least 1/4
of the positive moment
reinforcement in continuous
members shall expend along
the same face of the member
into the support, according
to ACI 12.11.1. For simple
members at least 1/3 of the
reinforcement shall extend
into the support

Section 6 is at the points of
inflection limits are
according to section 12.11.3
of the ACI Code.
Example Problem Bar Details

The bending moments for maximum positive and
negative moments are given. We must check the
development lengths at all critical sections. fc = 3 ksi
fy = 40 ksi , b =12 in.,d= 18 in. and the span L = 24 ft.

A continuous beam has
the bar details shown.

The critical sections are at the face of the support for
tension and compression reinforcement, at points
where tension bars are terminated within the span and
at point of inflection and at midspan.
Development length for negative moment
x1 = 4.5 ft from face of support where as 3
bars extend to a distance of 6 ft.
ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
(for bars > #7)

The development length is (d =1.128 in.):
f y
ld
=
d b 20 f c
(if spacing and cover

conditions are met)
1.128 in.
cover = 2.5 in.
= 1.94 in. d b
2
12 in. 5 in.
1.128 in.
Clear space =
2
= 2.37 in. 2d b

The bars are at the top so =1.3 and the development
length is
ld f y (1.3) 40000
=
=
= 47.5
d b 20 f c
20 3000
ld = 47.5 (1.128 in.) = 53.5 in.
So ld =54 in. = 4.5 ft > 12 in. (minimum)

The development length x2 shall extend beyond the
point where 3 # 9 bars are not needed either d =18 in.
or 12db = 12(1.128 in.) =13.6 in., whichever is greater.
Thus x2 = 18 in. The required
length is x4 = 4.5 ft similar
to x1 total length required is
x1 + 1.5 ft = 6.0 ft.

Beyond the inflection point 3 #9 bars extend a length
x3 = 72 in.39 in. = 33 in. ACI code requires that at
least 1/3 of the bars should extend beyond the
inflection point. Three #9 bars
are provided. The required
development length x3 is
greater of d= 18 in.
12db=13.6-in. or L/16 = 24ft/16 =1.5 ft (18in.) , which is
less than x3 provided

Compressive reinforcement at the face of the support
#8 bars, the development length x5 is equal to
0.2 f y
ld 0.2 f y
=
ld =
db
db
fc
fc
ld =
0.2 ( 40000 )
3000
= 14.6 in.
(1.0 in.)

So ld = 15 in.
Minimum ld = 0.003d b f y
= 0.003 ( 40000 )(1.0 in.) = 12 in.
It can not be less than 8 in. The length 15 in.
controls. For #8 bars db =1 in. ld provided is 15 in.
which is greater than that required.

The development length for positive moment
reinforcement; 3 # 8 bars extend 6 ft beyond the
centerline, and the other bars extend to the support.
The development length x6 from center line is
ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
40000
=
= 36.5
20 3000
ld = 36.5 (1.0 in.) = 36.5 in.

The ld is 37 in. But it can not
be less than 12 in.. So x6
provided is 6 ft = 72 in. > 37 in.
The length x7 is equal to d or
12 db, and 18 in. is provided.

Reduction Factors (ACI 12.3.3)
Note
ldc < ld (typically) because
- Beneficial of end bearing is considered
- weakening effect of flexural tension cracks is
not present for bars in compression.
Hooked Bar at Discontinuous Ends

(ACI 12.5.4)
If side cover and top (or bottom cover) 2.5 in.
Enclose hooked bar w/ ties or stirrup-ties:
Spacing 3db
db = of hooked bar
Note: Multiplier for ties or
stirrups (ACI 12.5.3)
is not applicable for
this case.
Hooked Bar at Discontinuous Ends

(ACI 12.5.4)
- Basic Development lengths
Others
Mechanical Anchorage
ACI (12.6)
Welded Wire Fabric
ACI (12.7)
Bundled Bars
ACI (12.4)
Standard Hooks for

Tension Anchorage
C. Use of Standard Hooks for Tension Anchorage
Hooks provide additional anchorage when
there is insufficient length available to
develop a bar.
Note: Hooks are not allowed to developed
compression reinforcement.
Standard Hooks for

Tension Anchorage
Standard hooks are
defined in ACI 7.1.
Hooks resists tension by

bond stresses on bar
surface and bearing on on
concrete inside the hook.
Design of Standard Hooks for

Tension Anchorage (ACI 12.5)
Development length for hooked bar, ldb.
ldh = lhd * multipliers

where, ldb 8 d b and ldb 6 in.
Basic development length for hooked bar = lhd
when fy = 60,000 psi
lhd 1200
=
db
fc

Conditions
Bar Yield Strength Bars with fy other
than 60,000 psi
Concrete Cover for 180 Degree Hooks
For No. 11 bars and smaller. Side cover
(normal to plane of hook) 2.5 in.
Multiplier
fy /60,000
0.7

Conditions
Concrete Cover for 90 Degree Hooks

For No. 11 bars and smaller. Side cover
(normal to plane of hook) 2.5 in. Cover
on bar extension beyond hook tail 2 in.
Multiplier
0.7

Conditions
Multiplier
Excessive Reinforcement
Where anchorage or development
for fy is not specified required.
As(reqd) /
As(provided)
Lightweight Aggregate Concrete
1.3

Conditions
Ties or Stirrups
For No. 11 bar and smaller.
Hook enclosed vertically or horizontally
within ties or stirrup-ties spaced along
full ldh no farther apart than 3db, where
db is diameter of hooked bar.
Multiplier
0.8

Conditions
Epoxy-coated Reinforcement
Hooked bars with epoxy coating
Multiplier
1.2
Standard Hooks
A hook is used at the end of a
bar when its straight
embedment length is less
than the necessary length, ld.
The minimum diameter of
bend, measured on the inside
of the main bar of a standard
hook D is
Standard Hooks
The stress distribution for a 90o hook under a force
P is shown.
Standard Hooks
The basic development length lhb must be multiplied
one of the following factors.
1. Yield strength of the steel, fy/60ksi.
2. When #11 bars or smaller are used and the
hook is enclosed vertically or horizontally
within stirrups or ties spaced greater than 3
times the diameter of the hooked bar, the basic
development length is multiplied by 0.8.
Standard Hooks
3. When #11 bars or smaller are used and the side
concrete cover, normal to the plane of the hook
is not less than 2.5 in, the basic development
length is multiplied by 0.7. The same factor
applied for a 90o hook when the concrete cover
on bar extension beyond the hook is not less
than 2 in.
Standard Hooks
4. When a bar anchorage is not required, the
basic development length for reinforcement in
excess of that required is multiplied by the
ratio.
As( required )
As( provided )
Standard Hooks
5. For lightweight aggregate concrete a modified
factor of 1.3 must be used.
6. When standard hooks with less than a 2.5 in.
concrete cover on the side and top or bottom
are used at a discontinuous end of a member,
the hooks shall be enclosed by ties or stirrups
spaced at no greater than 3db. Moreover, the
factor 0.8 given in 2 shall not be used.
Example- Hook
Compute the development length required for the top #8
bar of the cantilever beam that extend into the column
support if the bars are
a) Straight.
b) Have a 90o hook
c) Have a 180o hook
The bars are confined by #3 stirrups spaced at 6 in.,
and clear cover = 1.5 in., and clear spacing = 2.0 in.
and fc =4 ksi and fy =60 ksi
Example- Hook straight bar

Straight bars: For #8 bar db =1.0 in., because the
clear spacing =2db and clear cover is greater than db
with the bars confined condition (a) and (b) are met.
For top bars =1.3
ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
1.3) 60000
(
=
= 61.7
20 4000
ld = 61.7 (1.0 in.) = 61.7 in.
Example- 90
o Hook
Bar with 90o hook: For #8 bar db =1.0 in., the basic
equation is
lhb 1200 1200

=
=
= 18.97
db
fc
4000
lhb = 18.97 (1.0 in.) = 18.97 in. 19 in.
No modification apply, than ldh = 19 in. > 8db = 8 in.
or 6 in. The factor =1.3 does not apply to hooks.
Example- 180 o Hook

Bar with 180o hook: For #8 bar db =1.0 in., the basic
equation is
lhb 1200 1200

=
=
= 18.97
db
fc
4000
lhb = 18.97 (1.0 in.) = 18.97 in. 19 in.
No modification apply, than ldh = 19 in. > 8db = 8 in.
or 6 in. The factor =1.3 does not apply to hooks.
Example- Hook summary

The basic summary of the results for the two hooks:
Example Development Length

Design anchorage of
4 #8 top bars in
column. 4 # 11 bars
in the transverse
direction.
f c = 3000 psi
f y = 60000 psi

Try a straight bar for the development Use 12.2.2
Spacing between bars 4#8

s=
16 in. 4d b 2 dstirrup + cover
( # bar 1)
16 in. 4 (1.0 in.) 2 [ 0.375 in. + 1.5 in.]
=
= 2.75 in.
3

The spacing 2.75 in. > db = 1.0 in. So use
f y
ld
=
d b 20 f c

The coefficients need to be determined for the
reinforcement coefficient, . There is more than 12 in.
of concrete below the bar.
= 1.3
Uncoated bar so the
coating factor is:
= 1.0

The coefficient for aggregate is
= 1.0
The development length of the bar
f y 60000 (1.3)(1.0 )(1.0 )

ld
=
=
= 71.2
d b 20 f c
20 3000
ld = 71.2 * d b = 71.2 (1.0 in.) = 71.2 in.

The development of the bar going out into the beam.
Check the development length into the column.
3 fy
ld
=
d b 40 f c c + K tr
db

The clear space between the bars are
Edge
db
1.0 in.
c = cover + dstirrup +
= 1.5 in. + 0.375 in. +
2
2
= 2.375 in.
Center to center
space + d b 2.75 in. + 1.0 in.

=
c=
2
2
= 1.875 in.

The transverse steel area of the column is comprised of
4#11 bars (As =1.56 in2 & db=1.41 in.) and the
coefficient Ktr is defined as:
K tr =
Atr f yt
1500*s
There are 4 transverse bars
Atr = 4 (1.56 in
) = 6.24 in

The transverse coefficient is:
K tr =
Atr f yt
1500*n*s
There are 4 transverse bars
s = 24 in. dstirrup + d b + cover
= 24 in. [ 0.375 in. + 1.41 in. + 1.5 in.] = 20.75 in.

The transverse coefficient is:
6.24 )( 60000 )
(
K tr =
=
= 3.00
1500*n*s 1500 ( 4 )( 20.75 )
Atr f yt
The coefficient
c + K tr 1.875 + 3.00
=
= 4.88
db
1.0 in.
4.88 > 2.5 Use 2.5

The development length is:
3 fy
3 ( 60000 ) 1.3 (1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 )
ld
=
=
2.5
d b 40 f c c + K tr 40 3000
db
= 42.7 ld = 42.7d b = 42.7 (1.0 in.) = 42.7 in.
ACI 12.2.3 gives a significantly small ld = 42.7 in. verses
71.2 in, however ld 42.7 in. > 24 in. (width of column)

Use a hook anchorage
1200d b 1200 (1.0 in.)
lhd =
=
= 21.9 in.
fc
3000
Compute the coefficients for the column.
Side coverage.

The side coverage for a 90o hook.
s = 4 in. + 1.5 in. + 0.375 in. = 5.9 in. 2.5 in.

Top coverage is
s = 1.5 in. + 0.375 in. = 1.9 in. 2.0 in.

The multiplier is 1.0 ACI 12.5

Additional ties per ACI 12.5.4 not require only min ties
spacing > 3 db. Multiplier is 1.0
ldh = lhd *1.0*1.0 = 21.9 in. 8d b and 6 in. 8.0 in.

The available length
l = 24 in. 1.5 in. 0.375 in. = 22.1 in. 21.9 in.

The hook extension
4d b + 12d b = 16.0 in.

The side coverage for a 180o hook.
s = 4 in. + 1.5 in. + 0.375 in. = 5.9 in. 2.5 in.

The multiplier is 0.7
ldh = lhd *1.0*0.7 = ( 21.9 in.)(1.0 )( 0.7 )

= 15.33 in.
Bar Cutoff -Introduction
Bar Cutoff Points

Why do you want to put in cut off points?
Cost!
Bar Cutoff Points

Factors Affecting Bar Cut-off Points
1.) Bars no longer needed to resist tensile forces or
remaining bars are adequate (Use moment and
shear envelopes)
2.) Bars must be extended on each side of section to
develop bar force at that section.
Bar Cutoff Points

3.) Major stress concentrations occur when tension
bars are cutoff in regions of moderate to high
shear forces.
Leads to cracking.
4.) Code specified construction requirements (good
practice)
Bar Cut of Points

5.) Load Uncertainties (Seismic Considerations)
Keep Cutoffs to a minimum
Simplify design
& Construction
Determining Locations of
Flexural Cutoffs
Given a simply
supported beam with a
distributed load.
Flexural Cutoffs
Note:
Total bar length =
Fully effective length
+ Development length
Flexural Cutoffs
ACI 12.10.3
All longitudinal tension bars
must extend a min. distance
= d (effective depth of the
member) or 12 db (usually
larger) past the theoretical
cutoff for flexure (Handles
uncertainties in loads, design
approximations,etc..)
Lecture 15- Bar

Development
July 11, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Bar Cut-off Points
Splice
Tension Splice
Compression Splice
Flexural Cutoffs
Given a simply
supported beam with a
distributed load.
Flexural Cutoffs
Note:
Total bar length =
Fully effective length
+ Development length
Flexural Cutoffs
ACI 12.10.3
All longitudinal tension bars
must extend a min. distance
= d (effective depth of the
member) or 12 db (usually
larger) past the theoretical
cutoff for flexure (Handles
uncertainties in loads, design
approximations,etc..)
Flexural Cutoffs
Development of flexural
reinforcement in a typical
continuous beam.
ACI 318R-02 - 12.10 for
flexural reinforcement
Bar Cutoffs - General Procedure

1. Determine theoretical flexural cutoff points for
envelope of bending moment diagram.
2. Extract the bars to satisfy detailing rules (from
ACI Section 7.13, 12.1, 12.10, 12.11 and 12.12)
3. Design extra stirrups for points where bars are
cutoff in zone of flexural tension (ACI 12.10.5)
Bar Cutoffs - General Rules

All Bars
Rule 1.
Bars must extend the longer of d or 12db past

the flexural cutoff points except at supports
or the ends of cantilevers (ACI 12.11.1)
Rule 2.
Bars must extend at least ld from the point

of maximum bar stress or from the flexural
cutoff points of adjacent bars (ACI 12.10.2
12.10.4 and 12.12.2)

Positive Moment Bars
Rule 3. Structural Integrity
Simple Supports At least one-third of the
positive moment reinforcement must be extend 6
in. into the supports (ACI 12.11.1).
Continuous interior beams with closed stirrups.
At least one-fourth of the positive moment
reinforcement must extend 6 in. into the support
(ACI 12.11.1 and 7.13.2.3)

Continuous interior beams without closed
stirrups. At least one-fourth of the positive
moment reinforcement must be continuous or
shall be spliced near the support with a class A
tension splice and at non-continuous supports be
terminated with a standard hook. (ACI 7.13.2.3).

Continuous perimeter beams. At least onefourth of the positive moment reinforcement
required at midspan shall be made continuous
around the perimeter of the building and must be
enclosed within closed stirrups or stirrups with
135 degree hooks around top bars. The required
continuity of reinforcement may be provided by
splicing the bottom reinforcement at or near the
support with class A tension splices (ACI
7.13.2.2).

Beams forming part of a frame that is the
primary lateral load resisting system for the
building. This reinforcement must be anchored
to develop the specified yield strength, fy, at the
face of the support (ACI 12.11.2)

Rule 4. Stirrups
At the positive moment point of inflection and
at simple supports, the positive moment
reinforcement must be satisfy the following
equation for ACI 12.11.3. An increase of 30 %
in value of Mn / Vu shall be permitted when the
ends of reinforcement are confined by
compressive reaction (generally true for simply
supports).

Rule 4.
Mn
ld
+ la
Vu

Negative Moment Bars
Rule 5.
Negative moment reinforcement must be
anchored into or through supporting columns or
members (ACI Sec. 12.12.1).

Interior beams. At least one-third of the
negative moment reinforcement must be
extended by the greatest of d, 12 db or ( ln / 16 )
past the negative moment point of inflection
(ACI Sec. 12.12.3).

Perimeter beams. In addition to satisfying rule 6a,
one-sixth of the negative reinforcement required at
the support must be made continuous at mid-span.
This can be achieved by means of a class A tension
splice at mid-span (ACI 7.13.2.2).
Moment Resistance Diagrams

Moment capacity of a beam is a function of its depth,
d, width, b, and area of steel, As. It is common
practice to cut off the steel bars where they are no
longer needed to resist the flexural stresses. As in
continuous beams positive moment steel bars may be
bent up usually at 45o, to provide tensile
reinforcement for the negative moments over the
support.

The nominal moment capacity of an under-reinforced
concrete beam is
M n = As f y d
2
where, a =
As f y
0.85 f cb
To determine the position of the cutoff or bent point

the moment diagram due to external loading is drawn.

The ultimate moment resistance of one bar, Mnb is
M nb
= Abs f y d
2
where, Abs area of bar
The intersection of the moment resistance lines with

the external bending moment diagram indicates the
theoretical points where each bar can be terminated.

Given a beam with the 4 #8 bars and
fc=3 ksi and fy=50 ksi and d = 20 in.

The moment diagram is
Moment Diagram
3000
2500
k-in
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0
10
ft
12
14
16
18
20

The moment resistance of one bar is
a
M nb = Asb f y d
2
a=
M nb
M ub
As f y
0.85 f cb
3.16 in ) ( 50 ksi )
(
=
= 5.2 in.
2
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12 in.)
5.2 in.
= ( 0.79 in ) ( 50 ksi ) 20 in.

= 688 k-in.
= M nb = 0.9 ( 688 k-in.) = 620 k-in.

2

The moment diagram and crossings
Moment Diagram
3000
2480 k-in
2500
1860 k-in
k-in
2000
1240 k-in
1500
1000
620 k-in
500
0
0
10
ft
12
14
16
18
20

The ultimate moment resistance is 2480 k-in. The
moment diagram is drawn to scale on the basis A bar
can be terminated at a, two bars at b and three bars at c.
These are the theoretical termination of the bars.
Moment Diagram
3000
2480 k-in
2500
1860 k-in
k-in
2000
1500
1240 k-in
1000
620 k-in
500
0
0
10
ft
12
14
16
b
18
20

Compute the bar development length is
la = 12d b or d
= 12 (1.0 in.) or 20 in. 20 in.
ld =
f y d b
20 f c
50000 )(1.0 in.)

(
=
20 3000
= 45.6 in. 46 in.
Moment Resistance
Diagrams
The ultimate moment
resistance is 2480 k-in.
The moment diagram
is drawn to scale on
the basis A bar can be
terminated at a, two
bars at b and three bars
at c. These are the
theoretical termination
of the bars.

It is necessary to develop
part of the strength of the bar
by bond. The ACI Code
specifies that every bar
should be continued at least
a distance d, or 12db , which
ever is greater, beyond the
theoretical points a, b, and c.
Section 12.11.1 specify that
1/3 of positive moment
reinforcement must be
continuous.

Two bars must extend
into the support and
moment resistance
diagram Mub must
enclose the external
bending moment
diagram.
Example Cutoff
For the simply
supported beam with
b=10 in. d =17.5 in.,
fy=40 ksi and fc=3 ksi
with 4 #8 bars. Show
where the reinforcing
bars can be terminated.
Example Cutoff
Determine the moment capacity of the bars.
a=
M nb
As f y
0.85 f cb
2
3.16
in
(
) ( 40 ksi )
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(10 in.)
= 4.93 in.
4.93 in.
= ( 0.79 in ) ( 40 ksi ) 17.5 in.
= 427.7 k-in. 35.64 k-ft.

2
Example Cutoff
Determine the location of the bar intersections of
moments.
1 bar = 35.64 k-ft.

2 bar = 71.3 k-ft.
3 bar = 107 k-ft.

4 bar = 142.6 k-ft.
M ( x ) = M 0 mx
Example Cutoff
moments.
1 bar = 35.64 k-ft.

2 bar = 71.3 k-ft.
3 bar = 107 k-ft.

4 bar = 142.6 k-ft.
132.5 k-ft. 87.5 k-ft.

107 k-ft. = 132.5 k-ft.
x
6 ft.
x = 3.4 ft. 40.8 in. or 41 in.
Example Cutoff
moments.
1 bar = 35.64 k-ft.

2 bar = 71.3 k-ft.
3 bar = 107 k-ft.

4 bar = 142.6 k-ft.
87.5 k-ft. 0.0 k-ft.

71.3 k-ft. = 87.5 k-ft.
x
5 ft.
x = 0.93 ft. 11.1 in. or 11 in.

or 11 in. + 72 in. = 83 in. from center
Example Cutoff
The minimum distance is
la = 12d b or d
= 12 (1.0 in.) or 17.5 in. 18 in.
ld =
f y d b
20 f c
40000 )(1.0 in.)

(
=
20 3000
= 36.6 in. 37 in.
Example Cutoff
The minimum amount of bars are As/3 or two bars
Example Cutoff
The cutoff for the first bar is 41 in. or 3 ft 5 in. and 18 in
or 1 ft 6 in. total distance is 41 in.+18 in. = 59 in. or 4 ft
11 in.
Note error it is 4-11 not 5-11
Example Cutoff
The cutoff for the second bar is 83 in. + 18 in. 101 in. or
8 ft 5 in. (37-in+5-in+18-in+41-in= 101-in.)
Note error it is 4-11 not 5-11
Example Cutoff
The moment diagram is the blue line and the red line is
the envelope which encloses the moment diagram.
Bar Splices
Why do we need bar splices? -- for long spans
Types of Splices
1.
Butted &Welded
2.
Mechanical Connectors
3.
Lay Splices
Must develop 125%

of yield strength
ACI 12.14.3.2 and
ACI 12.14.3.4
Tension Lap Splices

Why do we need bar splices? -- for long spans
Types of Splices
1.
Contact Splice
2.
Non-Contact Splice (distance between the

bars 6 and 1/5 of the splice length
ACI 12.14.2.3)
Splice length (development length) is the distance

the two bars are overlapped.
Types of Splices
Class A Splice
(ACI
12.15.2)
As (provided )
When
2 over entire splice
As (req'd )
length.
and 1/2 or less of total reinforcement is
spliced win the reqd lay length.
Types of Splices
Class B Splice
(ACI 12.15.2)
All tension lay splices not meeting

requirements of Class A Splices
Tension Lap Splice (ACI 12.15)
where As (reqd)
ld
= determined for bending

= development length for bars (not
allowed to use excess reinforcement
modification factor)
ld must be greater than or equal to 12 in.
Tension Lap Splice (ACI 12.15)
Lap Splices shall not be used for bars larger than No. 11.
(ACI 12.14.2)
Lap Splices should be placed in away from regions of
high tensile stresses -locate near points of inflection
(ACI 12.15.1)
Compression Lap Splice (ACI 12.16)

Lap, reqd = 0.0005fy db
Lap, reqd = (0.0009fy -24) db
Lap, reqd 12 in
for fy 60000 psi

for fy > 60000 psi
For fc 3000 psi, required lap splice shall be multiply

by (4/3) (ACI 12.16.1)
Compression Lap Splice (ACI 12.17.2)

In tied column splices with effective tie area throughout
splice length 0.0015 hs factor = 0.83
In spiral column splices, factor = 0.75
The final splice length must be
12 in.
Example Splice Tension

Calculate the lap-splice length for 6 #8 tension bottom
bars in two rows with clear spacing 2.5 in. and a clear
cover, 1.5 in., for the following cases
a. When 3 bars are spliced and As(provided) /As(required) >2
b. When 4 bars are spliced and As(provided) /As(required) < 2
c. When all bars are spliced at the same location.
fc= 5 ksi and fy = 60 ksi

For #8 bars, db =1.0 in and = = = =1.0
3 fy
ld
=
d b 40 f c c + K tr
db
3 ( 60000 )
1.0
=
= 42.4 43 in.
40 5000 1.5 in. + 0
1.0 in.

The As(provided) /As(required) > 2, class A splice applies;
therefore lst = 1.0 ld >12 in., so lst = 43 in. > 12 in.
The bars spliced are less than half the number
The As(provided) /As(required) < 2, class B splice applies;
therefore lst = 1.3 ld >12 in., so lst = 1.3(42.4 in.) = 55.2 in.
use 56 in. > 12 in..
Class B splice applies and lst = 56 in. > 12 in.
Example Splice Compression

Calculate the lap splice length for a # 10 compression
bar in tied column when fc= 5 ksi and
a) fy = 60 ksi
b) fy = 80 ksi

For #10 bars, db =1.27 in.
ld 0.02 f y
=
0.003 f y
db
fc
=
0.02 ( 60000 )
= 16.97 or 18
5000
ld = 18 (1.27 in.) = 22.86 in. ld = 23 in.
Check ls > 0.005 db fy = 38.1 in. So ls = 39 in.

For #10 bars, db =1.27 in. The ld = 23 in.
Check ls > (0.0009 fy 24) db
=(0.0009(80000)-24)(1.27in.) = 61 in.
So use ls = 61 in.
Lecture 16 Shear Design

July 14, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Class Project
Shear
Shear Design
Class Project
The structural floor plan of a three-story
(ground floor, two suspended floors, and
a roof) office building is shown on the
next page. The roof covers the hole
used for the elevator shaft and stairwells.
The new building will be located in
Houston, Texas. The floor systems
consist of one-way pan joists slabs
supported in one direction by beams
located on column lines A through F. In
addition, beams are located on column
lines 1 and 4 as part of the lateral force
resisting system.
A
1
0.75L
B
0.75L
2
C
2
Hole for
Elevator
shafts and
stairwells
D
2
0.75L
Pan joist rib

direction
(typ)
0.75L
0.75L
F
L
0.85L
Plan
View
Class Project
The design loads for the floor (in
addition to the self-weight) include a
superimposed dead load (SDL) of 20 psf
to account for moveable partitions,
ceiling panels, etc. and a superimposed
live load (LL) to be determined from
ASCE 7-95. In addition, a 0.5 kip/ft.
wall load is applied around the building
perimeter. The design loads for the roof
(in addition to the self-weight) include a
superimposed dead load (SDL) of 10
psf.
A
1
0.75L
B
0.75L
2
C
2
Hole for
Elevator
shafts and
stairwells
D
2
0.75L
Pan joist rib

direction
(typ)
0.75L
0.75L
F
L
0.85L
Plan
View
Class Project
Overview of Required Design:
A
Design the continuous beams of the first floor on column lines D

and E of the second suspended floor assuming that they support
the one-way pan joist floor system (3 parts).
Design the slab of the second suspended floor as a one-way pan
joist system supported in one direction on column lines A through
F (3 parts).
Design and detail the columns for all three stories for the location
where column lines E and 2 intersect (1 part).
Design the roof system as a two-way slab without beams (1 part).
Design the footing for the column on column lines E and 2 (1 part).
Class Project
3
A
1
0.75L
B
0.75L
2
C
2
Hole for
Elevator shafts
and stairwells
0.75L
D
2
Pan joist - rib

direction
(typ)
0.75L
E
0.75L
F
L
0.85L
Plan
View
Class Project
The Joist detail for section 1-1
The beam detail for section 2-2
Class
Project
Team Performance
It is expected that all assignments related to the project will be done in teams.
Each assignment must contain computations that are initialed by the
calculators (or originators) and initialed by the checker(s). Members of the
team will rotate between calculation and checking tasks. It is recommended
that two persons calculate for each assignment (i.e., In a four-person team,
two persons should provide calculation services on odd numbered
assignments and checking services on even number assignments. In a threeperson team, each person should rotate so that they are checking every third
assignment.) Those not performing calculations are responsible for
checking them and must be afforded ample time to thoroughly check the
calculations.
If revisions are necessary, those performing the
calculations must make the corrections. Each sheet must be initialed by
the originator and checker. A cover sheet with the signature of each team
member must be included with each assignment. Assignments that are not
signed or initialed by all team members will not be accepted.
Class Project
Peer Evaluation
Peer evaluation is a common practice in the engineering community. Critical
evaluation is a necessary component of improving the engineering
profession. It is generally believed that honors and awards granted by peers
are the highest possible honors. After all, it is our peers who know best what
is required to do an adequate, good, or outstanding job. Your individual
project grade will depend on an evaluation by your peers at the end of the
semester. The evaluation form will have a format similar to the one provided
on the back of this sheet. Evaluation forms will also be collected during the
middle of the semester for an unofficial assessment of group performance.
Class Project
Uncracked Elastic Beam Behavior

Look at the shear and bending moment diagrams. The
acting shear stress distribution on the beam.

The acting stresses distributed across the
cross-section.
VQ
=
Ib
The shear stress
acting on the
rectangular beam.

The equation of the shear stress for a rectangular beam
is given as:
3
bh
I=
Moment of Inertia
VQ
12
=
2
bh h bh
Ib
Q max = * =
8
2 4
Note: The maximum
3 V
1st moment occurs at max = * = 1.5 ave
2
bh
the neutral axis (NA).

The ideal shear stress distribution can be described as:
VQ
=
Ib

A realistic description of the shear distribution is shown
as:

The shear stress acting along the beam can be described
with a stress block:
Using Mohrs circle, the stress block can be

manipulated to find the maximum shear and the crack
formation.
Inclined Cracking in Reinforced

Concrete Beams
Typical Crack Patterns for a deep beam

Concrete Beams
Flexural-shear crack Starts out as a flexural
crack and propagates due
to shear stress.
Flexural cracks in beams
are vertical
(perpendicular to the
tension face).

Concrete Beams
For deep beam the cracks are given as:
The shear cracks
Inclined (diagonal) intercept crack
with longitudinal bars plus vertical or inclined
reinforcement.

Concrete Beams
For deep beam the cracks
are given as:
The shear cracks fail due

two modes:
- shear-tension failure
- shear-compression
failure
Shear Strength of RC Beams

without Web Reinforcement
Total Resistance = vcz + vay + vd (when no stirrups are used)
vcz - shear in compression
zone
va - Aggregate Interlock
forces
vd = Dowel action from
longitudinal bars
Note: vcz increases from
(V/bd) to (V/by) as crack
forms.
Strength of Concrete in Shear

(No Shear Reinforcement)
(1) Tensile Strength of concrete
affect inclined
cracking load

(2) Longitudinal Reinforcement Ratio, w
As
w =
bw d
(restrains cracks)
for 0.0075 w 0.0025 : Vc 2 f cbw d

(3) Shear span to depth ratio, a/d
Deep shear spans

2 more detail design
d
required
a
d
> 2 Ratio has little

effect
(M/(Vd))

(4) Size of Beam
Increase Depth
Reduced shear stress at

inclined cracking

(5) Axial Forces
- Axial tension
Decreases inclined cracking load
- Axial Compression
Increases inclined cracking
load (Delays flexural
cracking)
Function and Strength of

Web Reinforcement
Function: Web Reinforcement is provided to ensure that
the full flexural capacity can be developed.
(desired a flexural failure mode - shear failure
is brittle)
- Acts as clamps to keep shear cracks from
widening

Web Reinforcement
Uncracked Beam
Shear is resisted uncracked

concrete.
Flexural Cracking Shear is resisted by vcz, vay, vd
Vcz Shear in compression zone

Vay Verticalcomponentof AggregateInterlockforce
Vd Dowl Action from longitudinal bars.

Web Reinforcement
Flexural Cracking
Shear is resisted by
vcz, vay, vd and vs
Vs increases as cracks
widen until yielding of
stirrups then stirrups
provide constant
resistance.
Designing to Resist Shear

Shear Strength (ACI 318 Sec 11.1)
Vn Vu
capacity demand
Vu = factored shear force at section
Vn = Nominal Shear Strength
= 0.75 ( shear ) strength reduction factor
Designing to Resist Shear

Shear Strength (ACI 318 Sec 11.1)
Vn = Vc + Vs
=
Vc =
Nominal shear resistance provided by concrete
Vs =
Nominal shear provided by the shear reinforcement
Shear Strength Provided by Concrete

Bending only
Simple formula
Vc = 2 f c bw d
Eqn [11.3]
3.5 f c bw d
More detailed
Note:
V d
u 1
Mu
Vc
V d
u
b
d
= 1.9 f c + 2500 w
w
M u
Eqn [11.5]
3.5 f c bw d
Shear Strength Provided by Concrete

Bending and Axial Compression
Simple formula
Vc
Nu is positive for
compression and
Nu/Ag are in psi.
Nu
= 2 1 +
f c bw d
2000 A
g Eqn [11.4]
3.5 f c bw d 1 +
Nu
500 Ag
Eqn [11.7]
Typical Shear Reinforcement

Stirrup - perpendicular to axis of members
(minimum labor - more material)
Vs =
Av f y d (sin + cos )
s
ACI Eqn 11-15
= 90 Vs =
o
Av f y d
s
Typical Shear Reinforcement

Bent Bars (more labor - minimum material) see reqd
in 11.5.6
Vs =
Av f y d (sin + cos )
s
ACI 11-5.6
= 45 Vs =
o
1.41Av f y d
s
Stirrup Anchorage Requirements

Vs based on assumption stirrups yield
Stirrups must be well anchored.

Refer to Sec. 12.13 of ACI 318 for development of web
reinforcement. Requirements:
each bend must enclose a long bar
# 5 and smaller can use standard hooks 90o,135o, 180o
#6, #7,#8( fy = 40 ksi )
#6, #7,#8 ( fy > 40 ksi ) standard hook plus a
minimum embedment
Also sec. 7.10 requirement for minimum stirrups

in beams with compression reinforcement,
beams subject to stress reversals, or beams
subject to torsion
Design Procedure for Shear

(1) Calculate Vu
(2) Calculate Vc Eqn 11-3 or 11-5 (no axial force)
(3) Check
If
yes,
add
web
reinforcement
(go
to
4)
1
Vu Vc
If no, done.
2

(4) If
Vc Vu Vc Provide minimum
shear reinforcement
2
bw s
Av (min ) = 50
fy
Also:
(Done)
smax
Av f ys
or smax =
for min Av
50bw
d
24"
2
(11.5.4 )

(5)
If Vu Vc , calulate Vs (req' d)
Vu Vn = Vc + Vs
Vs = Vu Vc Vs =
Vu
Vc
Check:
Vs 8 f c bw d
(otherwise, illegal)
(11.5.4 )

(6) Solve for required stirrup spacing(strength)
Assume # 3, #4, or #5 stirrups
Av f ys d
Vs
from 11-15

(7) Check minimum steel requirement (eqn 11-13)
smax =
Av f ys
50bw

(8) Check maximum spacing requirement (ACI 11.5.4)
d
If Vs 4 f c bw d smax 24"
2
d
If Vs 4 f c bw d smax 12"
4
Note : If Vs 8 f c bw d (illegal)

(9) Use smallest spacing from steps 6,7,8
Note: A practical limit to minimum stirrup

spacing is 4 inches.
Location of Maximum Shear for

Beam Design
Non-pre-stressed members:
Sections located less than a distance d from face of
support may be designed for same shear, Vu, as the
computed at a distance d.
Compression fan
carries load directly
into support.

Beam Design
When:
1. The support reaction introduces compression
into the end regions of the member.
2. No concentrated load occurs with in d from
face of support .

Beam Design
Compression from support at bottom of

beam tends to close crack at support
Lecture 17 Shear Design

July 16, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Shear beam example for a beam
Shear design for slab
Slab design example
Example: Design of Stirrups to

Resist Shear
From flexural design:
will use either a #3 or #4 stirrup
fc
fy
wsdl
wll
fys
wb
= 4000 psi
= 60 ksi
= 1.2 k/ft
= 1.8 k/ft
= 40 ksi
= 0.5 k/ft

Resist Shear
Consider the pattern loading on the beam and
determine the envelope of absolute maximum shear
along the beam for a symmetric beam with uniformly
distributed loads, a straight line drawn between the
maximum at the end and midspan is adequate.
Vu ( max )
wu ln
=
2

Resist Shear
The maximum shear is
Vu ( max )
wu ln
=
2
where,
wu = 1.2wD + 1.6wL
= 1.2 (1.2 k/ft + 0.5 k/ft ) + 1.6 (1.8 k/ft )

= 4.92 k/ft

Resist Shear
Vu ( max )
4.92 k/ft )( 35 ft )
(
=
2
= 86.1 k
Note: Multiply by 1.15 for end moments @ face of
1st internal support when using ACI shear
coefficient 1.15 Vumax (section 8.3)
Vu ( max ) = 1.15 ( 86.1 k ) = 99.02 k

Resist Shear
The wall is an interior section so the coefficient is 1.0.
For shear the reduction factor, , is 0.75.
Vn =
Vu
86.1 k
=
= 114.8 k
0.75
How do you get maximum shear the center?

Resist Shear
There is no pattern
load for dead loads
Vdl =0 @ center

Resist Shear
There is a pattern load for
live loads at the center of
the beam
Vu ( max )
1.6 (1.8 k/ft )( 35 ft )

=
8
= 12.6 k

Resist Shear
Compute the Vu max at the center
Vn =
Vu ( max )
12.6 k
=
= 16.8 k
0.75

Resist Shear
The shear envelope can be constructed using the values
of two maximum at the two location end and the
center.

Resist Shear
Calculate the equation of the line to bound the shear
force and
Vn ( x ) = mx + V0
Vcenter V0
m=
L
0
2
The slope of the

shear forces.

Resist Shear
1 Calculate the equation of the line to bound the shear
force and
16.8 k 114.8 k
m=
= 5.6 k/ft
17.5 ft 0
V0 = 114.8 k
Vn ( x ) = 5.6 x + 114.8

Resist Shear
2 Calculate the capacity of the concrete
Vc = 2 f c bw d
1 kip
= 2 4000 (15 in.)( 26.2 in.)
1000
= 49.7 k

Resist Shear
2 Calculate 0.5 of Vc to check to see if shear
reinforcement is needed.
Vc 49.7 k
=
= 24.9 k
2
2
114.8 k > 0.5*Vc
Need shear reinforcement

Resist Shear
3 Determine the stirrup spacing requirement, Av for
the calculations
The area, Av, is
twice the area of the
bars Ab
#3 :
#4:
Av = 2 ( 0.11 in
Av
) = 0.22 in
= 2 ( 0.20 in ) = 0.40 in
2

Resist Shear
3 The minimum spacing (11.5.5.3 ACI)
Av f y
50bw
.=
2
0.22
in
(
) ( 40000 psi )
50 (15 in )
= 11.7 in. for #3
0.40 in ) ( 40000 psi )

(
= 21.3 in.
.=
2
50 (15 in )
for #4

Resist Shear
3 The allowable maximum spacing
smax
26.2 in )
(
d
=
= 13.1 in.
2
2
24 in.
The maximum spacing is 13.1 in.

Resist Shear
4 Check the maximum allowable steel shear force
Vs 4 f c bw d
1 kip
4 4000 (15 in.)( 26.2 in.)
1000
99.4 k

Resist Shear
4 Check the maximum allowable steel shear force
Vs + Vc = Vn Vn Vc 4 f c bw d
65.1 k 99.4 k
Reinforcements can be used for shear
reinforcement. The beam does not need to be
redesigned.

Resist Shear
Strength requirement is given as:
Av f ys d
Vs
Av f ys d
(Vn Vc )
Instead of solving for s, we can plot the Vc + Vs,

where
d
Vs = Av f ys
s

Resist Shear
Using this technique (ACI 11.3.1), various Av and
spacing s can be used.
The maximum V is determined at the distance,d
from the wall.
1 ft
Vn ( x ) = 5.6 k/ft 26.2 in.
+ 114.8 k
12 in.
= 102.6 k

Resist Shear
The shear force are
Shear Design
140
Shear Force (kips)
120
102.6 k
100
80
60
Vc
40
Vc / 2
20
16.8 k
V req
0
0
10
Distance (ft)
15
20

Resist Shear
This is one possibly form to check
Bars
#4
#4
#4
#3
number
1
8
6
8
A
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.11
spacing (in)
4
7
9
12

Resist Shear
There always going to be a shear reinforcement close
to the support. Use the minimum spacing, 4 in., so
that the first stirrup has 4 in. Spacing can be
computed as:
Vn = 102.6 k and Vc = 49.7 k

s
Av f ys d
Vs
0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 26.2 in )

(
=
s 7.92 in.
(102.6 k 49.7 k )

Resist Shear
If we are using 8 #4 stirrups @ 7 in. spacing, (7 in.
is less than 7.92 in.) So,
26.2 in )
(
d
2
Vs = Av f ys = ( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )
s
7 in.
Vs = 59.9 k
Vn = Vs + Vc = 59.9 k + 49.7 k = 109.6 k
102.6 k 109.6 k

Resist Shear
Compute the location of the point and find
x = 4 in. + 8 ( 7 in.) = 60 in. 5 ft.

Compute Vn
Vn ( x ) = 5.6 k/ft ( 5 ft.) + 114.8 k

= 86.8 k

Resist Shear
Compute the next spacing
Vn = 86.8 k and Vc = 49.7 k

s
Av f ys d
Vs
0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 26.2 in )

(
=
2
(86.8 k 49.7 k )
s 11.3 in.
Use s = 9 in., which is find for #4 bar. Trying to fit
the reinforcement inside the beam.

Resist Shear
If we are using 6 #4 stirrups @ 9 in. spacing, 9 in. is
less than 11.3 in. So,
26.2 in )
(
d
2
Vs = Av f ys = ( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )
s
9 in.
Vs = 46.6 k
Vn = Vs + Vc = 46.6 k + 49.7 k = 96.3 k
86.8 k 96.3 k

Resist Shear
x = 60 in. + 6 ( 9 in.) = 114 in. 9.5 ft.

Compute Vn
Vn ( x ) = 5.6 k/ft ( 9.5 ft.) + 114.8 k

= 61.6 k

Resist Shear
Use a # 3 bar for
Vn = 61.6 k and Vc = 49.7 k

s
Av f ys d
Vs
0.22 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 26.2 in )

(
=
2
( 61.6 k 49.7 k )
s 19.4 in.
Use s = 12 in., because the smax is 13.1 in.

Resist Shear
If we are using 8 #3 stirrups @ 12 in. spacing, 12 in.
is less than 13.1 in. So,
26.2 in )
(
d
2
Vs = Av f ys = ( 0.22 in ) ( 40 ksi )
s
12 in.
Vs = 19.2 k
Vn = Vs + Vc = 19.2 k + 49.7 k = 68.9 k
61.6 k 68.9 k

Resist Shear
x = 114 in. + 8 (12 in.) = 210 in. 17.5 ft.

This is at the middle of the beam. Under Vc/2 no
stirrups are need other than the minimum.

Resist Shear
Shear Design
140
8 #4 @ 7 in. V n = 109.6 k
Shear Force (kips)
120
6 #4 @ 9 in. V n = 96.3 k
100
80
8 #3 @ 12 in. V n = 68.9 k
Vs + Vc
60
Vc
40
Vc / 2
20
V req
0
0
10
Distance (ft)
15
20

Resist Shear
There is a mistake for the problem! What is the
error?
The spacing of the #3 bar is 12 in. and the
max spacing between bars is 11.7 in., so
go back and redesign. Easy way would
be to use #4 instead of #3 bars.

Resist Shear
Shear Design
140
8 #4 @ 7 in. V n = 109.6 k
Shear Force (kips)
120
6 #4 @ 9 in. V n = 96.3 k
100
80
8 #4 @ 12 in. V n = 84.6 k
Vs + Vc
60
Vc
40
Vc / 2
20
V req
0
0
10
Distance (ft)
15
20
Discontinuities at Bar Cutoff

ACI 12.10.5 Prohibits flexural bar cutoffs in zone of
flexural tension, unless 1 of the following
is satisfied.
(1) V @ cutoff 2 * V = 2 * (V + V )
u
n
c
s
(2) Extra stirrups are provided at the cutoff points.

(See Sec. 12.10.5.2 for details)
Discontinuities at Bar Cutoff

ACI 12.10.5 Prohibits flexural bar cutoffs in zone of
flexural tension, unless 1 of the
following is satisfied.
(3) For No 11 bars & smaller
As (provided )
As (required )
2 for continuing reinforcement
3
3
and Vu @ cutoff * Vn = * (Vc + Vs )
4
4
Increase shear strength is required
when bars are cutoff in a tension zone.
Joist Design
Refer to earlier notes for general information on
joist layout. ACI Sec. 8.11
Joist construction
requirements
(1) Flat slab reinforcement is calculated for
bending or minimum reinforcement for
shrinkage and temperature.
(ACI Sec 7.12.2 ) GR 40 or GR 50 0.0020 Ag
GR 60
0.0018 Ag
Joist Design
(2) Shear Design of Joist Ribs (Joist - Section 8.11)
(a) Allowable Vc = 1.10*Vc
Vc = (1.1) 2 f c
bw d = 2.2 f c bw d
(b) Shear strength may be increased using

shear reinforcement or by widening the
ends of the ribs (not typical)
Joist Design
(3) ACI shear and moment coefficients may be used
if requirements in ACI Sec 8.3.3 are met.
(4) Ribs are designed as T- Sections. Main positive

reinforcement includes at least 2 bars.
Joist Design
(5) Tie beams.
(a) one, if L is 15 ft. - 20 ft.
(b) two, if L is 20 ft. - 30 ft.
At least 1- #4 T-B (continuous)
(6) Cover
Not exposed to
weather
#11 and smaller

# 14, # 18
3/4 in.
1 1/2 in.
One-Way Slab Design

Design of one slabs is like design of parallel 12 beams.
Thickness of One-Way Slabs
Minimum thickness for solid one-way slabs not

supporting or attached or attached to partitions,
etc. Likely to be damaged by large deflections:
ACI Table 9.5(a)
One-Way Slab Design

The table calculates
the minimum
thickness t ( l = span
length in inches)
(normal weight
concrete fy = 60 ksi
see code for
modification factors)
One-Way Slab Design

Thickness of One-Way Slabs Table A-14
tmin, when damage to non-structural components
may occur
One-Way Slab Design

Fire Rating
This is equal to the number of hours for unexposed
surface to rise a set amount usually 250 o F
3.50 in.
5.00 in.
6.25 in.
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
Cover for Slab Reinforcement

ACI Sec. 7.7.1 (min. cover for corrosion protection)
( 1.) Concrete exposed to earth or weather.
#5 and smaller
= 1.5 in.
#6 and larger
= 2.0 in.
( 2.) Concrete not exposed to earth or weather.

#11 and smaller
= 0.75 in.
Min. covers for fire ratings should also be considered.
One-Way Slab Design

Reinforcement
Typical Reinforcement in a one-way slab:
One-Way Slab Design

Cutoffs
If requirements for use of ACI Moment Coefficients:
Figure 10.9 text one-way slab (ref. ACI Committee 315

ACI Detail Manual 1980)
One-Way Slab Design

Need to confirm thickness is adequate for one-way
shear. Difficult to place shear reinforcement in a slab.
Minimum area of shear reinforcement required in slabs
if
Vu Vc
ACI Sec. 11.5.5.1
Usual use
Vc = 2 f c bw d
ACI Eqn. 11-3
One-Way Slab Example

The cross section of a continuous one-way solid slab
in a building is shown. The slabs are supported by
beams that span 24 ft. Between simple supports.
The dead load on the slabs is that due to self-weight
plus 60 psf; The live load is 120 psf. Design the
continuous slab and draw a detailed section. Given:
fc = 3 ksi, fy = 40 ksi.

Determine the thickness of the slab.
12 ft.
Minimum thickness
of interior bay:
12 in.
12 ft
L
1 ft.
h=
=
= 5.14 in.
28
28

Use h= 6 in.
db
d = h coverage
2
0.5 in.
= 6 in. 0.75 in.
= 5.0 in.
2
Dead weight
DL = h + DLsl
1 ft
3
2
= 6 in.
(150 lb/ft ) + 60 lb/ft
12 in.
= 135 lb/ft 2

Determine the load on the floor
U = 1.2 DL + 1.6 LL
= 1.2 (135 lb/ft 2 ) + 1.6 (120 lb/ft 2 )
= 354 lb/ft 0.354 k/ft
2
For slab design is seldom > 0.01. Use c/d = 0.2

1 k
Ru = 0.85 f c 1k 1
( 0.85 )( 0.2 )
= 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 0.85 )( 0.2 ) 1
= 0.397 ksi
2

Find the coefficient of the moment diagram
The maximum moment is
0.354 k/ft (11 ft.)

wl
Mu =
=
10
10
= 4.28 k-ft/ft
2
u n

Find the design d for a one-foot strip
12 in.
4.28 k-ft/ft
Mu
ft
2
0.9
bd =
=
Ru
0.397 ksi
= 143.9 in 3 / ft
If b =12-in. then d = 3.46-in., which for c/d = 0.2,

so d = 5-in., the slab is OK.

Find the coefficient of the shear
wu l
Vu = Cv
= 1.15
2
= 2.24 k/ft
0.354 k/ft 2 (11 ft.)

2

Check the shear capacity of the slab
(
= 0.75 ( 2
Vu = 0.75 2 f c bw d
3000 (12 in.)( 5 in.) = 4930 lb.
= 4.93 k > 2.24 k

Use h = 6-in., d = 5-in. and wu = 0.354 k/ft

Minimum about of steel is (use ACI 7.12 )
As ( min ) = 0.0020bh = 0.002 (12 in.)( 6 in.)

= 0.144 in
Moment capacity of the slab (12-in. beam)
Assume
M u = As f y d
2
a
d 0.925d = 0.925 ( 5 in.) = 4.625 in.
2

Compute the moments
Moment capacity of the beam

A
ln
11 ft.
11 ft.
11 ft.
11 ft.
11 ft.
M coe f
1/24
1/14
1/10
1/11
1/16
Mu
1.78 k-ft
3.06 k-ft
4.28 k-ft
3.89 k-ft
2.68 k-ft
Am in
0.144 in2
0.144 in2
0.144 in2
0.144 in2
0.144 in2
As
0.128 in2
0.221 in2
0.309 in2
0.280 in2
0.193 in2

Compute the moments
Mu =
0.354 k/ft (11 ft )

24
= 1.78 k-ft
Mu
Mu
As =
a f y ( 0.925d )
fy d
2
12 in.
1.78 k-ft
ft
=
= 0.129 in 2
0.9 ( 40 ksi )( 4.625 in.)

Check the assumption
0.129 in 2 ( 40 ksi )
a=
= 0.168 in.
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12 in.)
a
0.168 in.
d = 5 in.
= 4.92 in.
2
2
12 in.
1.78 k-ft
ft
As =
0.9 ( 40 ksi )( 4.92 in.)
= 0.121 in 2
Assumption will work!

Use #4 bar Ab = 0.2 in2 The maximum spacing ACI 7.6.4
3h = 3 ( 6 in.) = 18 in.
maximum spacing
The spacing on the first location
Ab
12 in.
Ab
= Areq s = 12 in.
s
Areq
0.2 in
s = 12 in.
= 16.67 in.
2
0.144 in
2

Select 15 in. for the spacing to calculate the
provided area.
As( provided )
12 in.
= Ab
s
2 12 in.
= ( 0.2 in )
15 in.
2
= 0.16 in

Actual spacing.
A
16.67 in
10.68 in
7.77 in
8.57 in
12.43 in
s chos e n
15 in.
9 in.
6 in.
6 in.
9 in.
4 @ 15 in. 4 @ 9 in. 4 @ 6 in. 4 @ 6 in. 4 @ 9 in.
Aprovide d
0.16 in2
0.267 in2
0.4 in2
0.4 in2
0.267 in2
As (re q)
0.144 in2
0.221 in2
0.309 in2
0.280 in2
0.193 in2

Summary
Lecture 18 Design
July 18, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Slab design example
Total beam design

The cross section of a continuous one-way solid slab
in a building is shown. The slabs are supported by
beams that span 24 ft. Between simple supports.
The dead load on the slabs is that due to self-weight
plus 60 psf; The live load is 120 psf. Design the
continuous slab and draw a detailed section. Given:
fc = 3 ksi, fy = 40 ksi.

Determine the thickness of the slab.
12 ft.
Minimum thickness
of interior bay:
12 in.
12 ft
L
1 ft.
h=
=
= 5.14 in.
28
28

Use h= 6 in.
db
d = h coverage
2
0.5 in.
= 6 in. 0.75 in.
= 5.0 in.
2
Dead weight
DL = h + DLsl
1 ft
3
2
= 6 in.
(150 lb/ft ) + 60 lb/ft
12 in.
= 135 lb/ft 2

Determine the load on the floor
U = 1.2 DL + 1.6 LL
= 1.2 (135 lb/ft 2 ) + 1.6 (120 lb/ft 2 )
= 354 lb/ft 0.354 k/ft
2
For slab design is seldom > 0.01. Use c/d = 0.2

1 k
Ru = 0.85 f c 1k 1
( 0.85 )( 0.2 )
= 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 0.85 )( 0.2 ) 1
= 0.397 ksi
2

Find the coefficient of the moment diagram
0.354 k/ft (11 ft.)

wl
Mu =
=
10
10
= 4.28 k-ft/ft
2
u n

Find the design d for a one-foot strip
12 in.
4.28 k-ft/ft
Mu
ft
2
0.9
bd =
=
Ru
0.397 ksi
= 143.9 in 3 / ft
If b =12-in. then d = 3.46-in., which for c/d = 0.2,

so d = 5-in., the slab is OK.

Find the coefficient of the shear
wu l
Vu = Cv
= 1.15
2
= 2.24 k/ft
0.354 k/ft 2 (11 ft.)

2

Check the shear capacity of the slab
(
= 0.75 ( 2
Vu = 0.75 2 f c bw d
3000 (12 in.)( 5 in.) = 4930 lb.
= 4.93 k > 2.24 k

Use h = 6-in., d = 5-in. and wu = 0.354 k/ft

Minimum about of steel is (use ACI 7.12 )
As ( min ) = 0.0020bh = 0.002 (12 in.)( 6 in.)

= 0.144 in
Moment capacity of the slab (12-in. beam)
Assume
M u = As f y d
2
a
d 0.925d = 0.925 ( 5 in.) = 4.625 in.
2

Compute the moments
Moment capacity of the beam

A
ln
11 ft.
11 ft.
11 ft.
11 ft.
11 ft.
M coe f
1/24
1/14
1/10
1/11
1/16
Mu
1.78 k-ft
3.06 k-ft
4.28 k-ft
3.89 k-ft
2.68 k-ft
Am in
0.144 in2
0.144 in2
0.144 in2
0.144 in2
0.144 in2
As
0.128 in2
0.221 in2
0.309 in2
0.280 in2
0.193 in2

Compute the moments
Mu =
0.354 k/ft (11 ft )

24
= 1.78 k-ft
Mu
Mu
As =
a f y ( 0.925d )
fy d
2
12 in.
1.78 k-ft
ft
=
= 0.129 in 2
0.9 ( 40 ksi )( 4.625 in.)

Check the assumption
0.129 in 2 ( 40 ksi )
a=
= 0.168 in.
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12 in.)
a
0.168 in.
d = 5 in.
= 4.92 in.
2
2
12 in.
1.78 k-ft
ft
As =
0.9 ( 40 ksi )( 4.92 in.)
= 0.121 in 2
Assumption will work!

Use #4 bar Ab = 0.2 in2 The maximum spacing ACI 7.6.4
3h = 3 ( 6 in.) = 18 in.
maximum spacing
The spacing on the first location
Ab
12 in.
Ab
= Areq s = 12 in.
s
Areq
0.2 in
s = 12 in.
= 16.67 in.
2
0.144 in
2

Select 15 in. for the spacing to calculate the
provided area.
As( provided )
12 in.
= Ab
s
2 12 in.
= ( 0.2 in )
15 in.
2
= 0.16 in

Actual spacing.
A
16.67 in
10.68 in
7.77 in
8.57 in
12.43 in
s chos e n
15 in.
9 in.
6 in.
6 in.
9 in.
4 @ 15 in. 4 @ 9 in. 4 @ 6 in. 4 @ 6 in. 4 @ 9 in.
Aprovide d
0.16 in2
0.267 in2
0.4 in2
0.4 in2
0.267 in2
As (re q)
0.144 in2
0.221 in2
0.309 in2
0.280 in2
0.193 in2

Summary
Example - Design
Determine the
lengths of top and
bottom bars for
the external span
of the continuous
beam. Concrete is normal weight and bars are Grade 60.
Total uniformly distribution factored gravity load on
beam is wu = 6.0 k/ft (including weight of beam). The
beam has fc = 4 ksi, fy= 60 ksi, b =16 in., h =22 in., and
concrete cover =1.5 in.
Example - Design
Preliminary design for the moment and shear
reinforcement. From (ACI 8.3.3)
M u = CM wl
2
n
wln
and Vu = CV
2
Compute the values Cm = 1/16,1/14, and 1/10 and

CV =1.0 and 1.15
Example - Design
Interior face of
1 2
2
exterior support M u = 16 wln = ( 6 k/ft )( 25 ft ) /16 = 234.4 k-ft
End span positive M u = 1 wln2 = ( 6 k/ft )( 25 ft )2 /14 = 267.9 k-ft
14
Exterior face of
1 2
2
first interior
M u = wln = ( 6 k/ft )( 25 ft ) /10 = 375 k-ft
10
support
Exterior face of Vu = 1.15 wln = 1.15 ( 6 k/ft )( 25 ft ) / 2 = 86.3 kips
2
first interior
support
Example - Design
Determine required flexural reinforcement using
procedure for beams. With 1.5 in. cover, #4 stirrup
and #9 or 10 flexural bar, d = 19.5 in.
M
2 u

k 2
2
M u = 0.85 f c k 1 bd k 2k +
=0
2
0.85 f cbd
2
234.4 k-ft 12 in
2
0.9
ft
k 2 2 k +
= 0 k = 0.165
2
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in )(19.5 in )
k
0.165
k=
=
= 0.194 Use k = 0.2
1 0.85
Example - Design
Compute required steel and 1= 0.85 for 4 ksi concrete
k = 0.2 c = 0.2d = 0.2 (19.5 in.) = 3.9 in.

T =C
0.85 f cba 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.)( 0.85 )( 3.9 in.)
As =
=
fy
( 60 ksi )
As = 3.01 in
Example - Design
Use 4 #8 bars As = 3.16 in2
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
2
3.16
in
(
) ( 60 ksi )
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.)
= 3.49 in.
M u = As f y d
2
3.49 in.
2
= 0.9 ( 3.16 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 19.5 in.
= 3030 k-in. 252.5 k-ft.
Example - Design
The over-design of the beam:
252.5 k-ft 234.4 k-ft
*100% = 7.7%
234.4 k-ft
The resulting beam layout:

k=c/d
Mu
A s(req)
Bars
A s(prov ided)
Overdesign
0.200
0.225
0.330
234.4 k-ft
267.9 k-ft
375.0 k-ft
3.01 in2
3.38 in2
4.96 in2
4#8
2 #8 & 2 #9
4 # 10
3.16 in2
3.58 in2
5.08 in2
7.70%
5.40%
1.80%
Example - Design
The general design
for the flexural steel
is given as:
Example - Design
Determine required shear reinforcement. Find the Vu at
the a distance d from the support.
1 ft
Vu = Vmax wd = 86.3 k ( 6 k/ft ) 19.5 in.
12 in.
= 76.6 k
Vc = 2 f c bd
1k
= 0.75 2 4000 (16 in.)(19.5 in.)
1000 lb
= 29.6 k
Example - Design
The maximum spacing is d/2 = 19.5 in./2 = 9.75 in.
Use a #4 bar Av = 0.4 in2 and spacing 6 in.
2
0.4 in ) ( 60 ksi )(19.5 in.)

(
Av f y d
Vs =
= 0.75
6 in.
s
= 58.5 k
Vn = Vc + Vs = 29.6 k + 58.5 k = 88.1 k > 76.6 k OK!
Example - Design
Distance from support where stirrup not required:
Vc
29.6 k
Vu <
=
= 14.8 k
2
2
Vu = 86.3 k ( 6 k/ft ) x x = 11.9 ft 1/ 2 span
Use #4 stirrups @ 6 in. spacing.
Example - Design
The bar length for bottom reinforcement
a. One-fourth of As must be extended at least 6 in.

into the supports with a longitudinal bar required at
each corner of the stirrup (12.13.3) at least 2 bars
should be extended full length. Extend the 2 #8
bars full span length plus 6 in. into the support and
cut the 2 #9 bars within the span.
b. Determine cut-off for 2 #9 bars and check other
development requirements.
Example Design
Shear and moment
diagrams are loading
condition cause maximum
factored positive moment
are shown.
2
x
267.9 k-ft = 234.4 k-ft + Pu x 6 k/ft
2
Pu = 6 k/ft x x = 12.95 ft. and Pu = 77.6 k
Inflection points 3.5 ft and 22.4 ft
Example - Design
The moment of the 2 #8 bars from the 2#8 and 2#9 bars
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
3.58 in ) ( 60 ksi )
(
=
= 3.95 in.
2
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.)
3.95 in.
2
M n = 0.9 ( 3.58 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 19.5 in.
= 3388 k-in. 282.3 k-ft.

3.95 in.
2
M n = 0.9 (1.58 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 19.5 in.
= 1495 k-in. 124.6 k-ft.
Example - Design
The positive moment portion of Mu diagram is
shown, which including the design moment strengths
of Mn for the positive As (2 #8 and 2 #9) and for
2#8 separately; and necessary dimensions. For 2 #8
and 2 #9, Mn =282.3 k-ft; for 2 #8 Mn= 124.6 k-ft
The location of the point is
124.6 k-ft = 234.4 k-ft + 77.6 k x 6 k/ft
x = 6.1 ft. and 19.8 ft.
x
2
Example - Design
The distance to go beyond either d or 12 db
d = 19.5 in. (1.6 ft.) Controls
or = 12 (1.128 in.) = 13.5 in.
The cutoff of the #9 bar is 6.1 ft - 1.6 ft. = 4.5 ft

and 19.8 ft + 1.6 ft =21.5 ft.
Example - Design
The 2 # 8 bars extend full
span length plus 6 in. into
the supports. The 2 #9
bars are cutoff tentatively
at 4.5 ft and 3.5 ft. from
exterior and interior
supports.
Example - Design
Within the development length ld, only 2 #8 bars are
being developed in the length 8.45 ft.
fy
60000
ld =
d=
(1.0 in.) = 47.4 in. or 48 in. 4 ft.
20 f c
20 4000
Dimension (3) 6.6 ft > 4 ft

Dimension (4) 5.7 ft > 4 ft
Example - Design
Check required development length ld for 2 #9 bars.
Note 2 #8 bars are already developed in length 4 ft
from bar end. The clear spacing between bars
(16 in 2 (1.5 in.) 2 ( 0.5 in.) 2 (1.0 in.) 2 (1.128 in.) )
clear space =
= 2.58 in. or 2.29d b
The development length

fy
60000
ld =
d=
(1.128 in.)
20 f c
20 4000
= 53.5 in. or 54 in. 4.5 ft. < 8.45 ft.
Example - Design
For # 8 bars, check development requirements at
points of inflection PI
Mn
ld
+ la
Vu
The inflection point Mn = 124.6 k-ft/0.9=138.4 k-ft
and Vu = 56.6 k and la = greater of 12db or d = 19.5 in.
12 in.
138.4 k-ft
ft
ld
+ 19.5 in. = 48.9 in.
56.6 k
48 in. 48.9 in.
Example - Design
With tentative cutoff points located in a zone of flexural
tension, one of the three conditions of (ACI 12.10.5)
must be satisfied. At left cutoff point (4.5 ft)
Vu = 77.6 k ( 6 k/ft )( 4.5 ft.) = 50.6 k

The Vn =88.1 k (#4 @ 6 in. spacing)
2
2
Vn = ( 88.1 k ) = 58.7 k 50.6 k OK
3
3
Example - Design
Check the other conditions
4.5 ft.
M u = 234.4 k-ft + 77.6 k 4.5 ft. 6 k/ft
2
= 54 k-ft
The required area is
M n = As f y d
2
3.49 in.
54 k-ft = 0.9 ( As )( 60 ksi ) 19.5 in.
As = 0.68 in 2
Example - Design
For 2 No. 8 bars As = 1.58 in2
1.58 in 2 2 ( 0.68 in 2 ) = 1.36 in 2 OK

3
3
Vn = ( 88.1 k ) = 66.1 k 50.6 k OK
4
4
At the right cutoff point 3.5 ft from support
Vu = 77.6 k ( 6 k/ft )( 3.5 ft.) = 51.4 k

2
2
Vn = ( 88.1 k ) = 58.7 k 51.4 k OK
3
3
Example Design
Shear and moment
diagrams are loading
condition cause maximum
factored negative moment
are shown.
375 k-ft = 234.4 k-ft + Pu 25 ft 6 k/ft

Pu = 69.4 k
Inflection points 4.1 ft and 19.0 ft
25 ft
2
Example - Design
The moment of the two #8 bars from the 4 #8 bars
2
3.16
in
( 60 ksi )
As f y
(
)
a=
=
= 3.49 in.
0.85f cb 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.)
3.49 in.
2
M n = 0.9 ( 3.16 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 19.5 in.
= 3030 k-in. 252.5 k-ft.

3.49 in.
2
M n = 0.9 (1.58 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 19.5 in.
= 1515 k-in. 126.2 k-ft.
Example - Design
The moment of the two #10 bars from the 4 #10 bars
2
5.08
in
( 60 ksi )
As f y
(
)
a=
=
= 5.60 in.
0.85f cb 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.)
5.60 in.
2
M n = 0.9 ( 5.08 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 19.5 in.
= 4581 k-in. 381.7 k-ft.

5.60 in.
2
M n = 0.9 ( 2.54 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 19.5 in.
= 2290 k-in. 190.9 k-ft.
Example - Design
The negative moment portion of Mu diagram is
shown, which including the design moment strengths
of Mn for the negative As at each support(4 #8) and
for 4#10 separately; and necessary dimensions. For
4#8, Mn =252.5 k-ft; for 2 #8 Mn= 126.3 k-ft and
4#10, Mn =381.7 k-ft; for 2 #10 Mn= 190.9 k-ft
The location of the point is
x
M u = 234.4 k-ft + 69.4 k x 6 k/ft
2
Example - Design
For the #8 bars
x
126.3 k-ft = 234.4 k-ft + 69.4 k x 6 k/ft
2
x = 1.68 ft
For the #10 bars

x
190.9 k-ft = 234.4 k-ft + 69.4 k x 6 k/ft
2
x = 22.49 ft
Example - Design
The required number of bars to be extended. One
third of As provided at support must be extended
beyond the point of inflection a distance equal to the
greater d, 12 db or ln/16.
d = 19.5 in. (1.6 ft.)
Controls
or = 12 (1.0 in.) = 13.5 in.

12 in.
25 ft
ft
or =
= 18.75 in.
16
Example - Design
Since the inflection point is located only 4.1 ft from
the support, total length #8 bars will be relatively
short even with the required 1.6 ft extension beyond
the point of inflection. Check required development
length ld for a cut off location 4.1 ft + 1.6 ft 5.75 ft
from face of support.
Example - Design
With 4 #8 bars being developed at same location
(face of support) For a top bar effect =1.3
f y
60000 (1.3)(1)(1)(1)
ld =
1.0 in.)
d =
(
20 f
20 4000
= 62.4 in. 5.2 ft.
For #8 top bars, ld =5.2 ft < 5.7 ft OK
Example - Design
Anchorage into exterior column.
The #8 bars can be anchored into the column with a
standard end hook.
1200
1200
lhd =
1.0 in.) = 19.0 in.
d =
(
f
4000
c
For a 90o hook with side cover 2.5 in. and end
cover 2 in. A modification factor of 0.7 applies
(ACI 12.5.3.2)
Example - Design
Anchorage into exterior column.
Therefore, the required total embedment length ldh
ldh = 0.7 (19.0 in.) = 13.3 in.

Overall depth of the column required would be 16 in.
The required ldh for the hook could be reduced by 1 in.
(a refinement) if excess reinforcement is considered
Example - Design
The area relationship
As required
As provided
3.01 in 2
=
= 0.95
2
3.16 in
ldh = 0.95 (13.3 in.) = 12.6 in.
Example - Design
The required number of bars to be extended for the
4#10 bars. One third of As provided at support must
be extended beyond the point of inflection a distance
equal to the greater d, 12 db or ln/16.
d = 19.5 in. (1.6 ft.)
Controls
or = 12 (1.27 in.) = 15.4 in.

12 in.
25 ft
ft
or =
= 18.75 in.
16
Example - Design
For #10 bars
16 in
(
clear spacing =
2 (1.5 in.) 2 ( 0.5 in.) 4 (1.27 in.) )

3
= 2.31 in. or 1.82d b > d b

center-to-center spacing = 2.31 in. + 1.27 in. = 3.58 in. or 2.82d b > d b
cover = 1.5 in. + 0.5 in. = 2.00 in. or 1.57d b
Distance from center to concrete surface = 1.57d b + 0.5d b = 2.07d b
Example - Design
Since the inflection point is located only 6.0 ft from
the support, total length #10 bars will be relatively
short even with the required 1.6 ft extension beyond
the point of inflection. Check required development
length ld for a cut off location 6.0 ft + 1.6 ft 7.6 ft
from face of support.
Example - Design
With 4 #10 bars being developed at same location
(face of support) For a top bar effect =1.3
f y
60000 (1.3)(1)(1)(1)
ld =
1.27 in.)
d =
(
20 f
20 4000
= 78.3 in. 6.52 ft.
For #10 top bars, ld = 6.52 ft < 7.6 ft OK
Example - Design
Summary: Selected bar lengths for the top and bottom
reinforcement shown
Note: The stirrup spacing should be #4 @ 6 in.
Example - Design
Supplementary Requirements:
If the beam were part of a primary lateral load

resisting system, the 2#8 bottom bars extending into
the support would have to be anchored to develop the
bar yield strength at the face of supports. At the
exterior column, anchorage can be provided by a
standard end hook. (ACI 12.11.2)
Example - Design
Minimum width of support (overall column depth)
required for anchorage of the #8 bar with a standard
hook is a function of the basic development length lhd
and appropriate modification factors.
ldh = 0.7 (19.0 in.) = 13.3 in.
-for 90o hook with 2 in.

end cover on hook
(ACI 12.5.3.2)
Example - Design
Minimum width of support (overall column depth)
required for anchorage of the #8 bar with a standard
hook is a function of the basic development length lhd
and appropriate modification factors.
ldh = 0.7 ( 0.8 )(19.0 in.) = 10.7 in.

-for 90o hook with 2 in. end cover and hook enclosed
within ties or stirrup ties spaced not greater than 3 db
(ACI 12.5.3.3)
Example - Design
At the interior column, 2 #8 bars could be

extended ld distance beyond the face of support
into the adjacent span or lap spliced with
extended bars from adjacent span. Consider a
Class A lay splice adequate to satisfy the intent
of ACI 12.11.2
Lecture 19 - One-way Slab

Design
July 21, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
One-way slab design
Joist
Slab
Example: One-way Slab

Design
Design a one way slab with a clear span of 10 ft. Use 12
in. wide segment bw. fy = 40 ksi, fc = 3 ksi and a live load
of 325 psf.

Design
Determine the preliminary slab depth for an internal
section
l correction
h *
28 factor
f y 60 ksi

Design
The correction factor is: CF = 0.4 + (fy/100)
12 in.
10 ft
40
ft
h
* 0.4 +
= 3.43 in. 3.5 in.
28
100
Self-weight of the element for a 1 ft. segment
wDL
1 ft
3
= 3.5 in.
(1.0 ft ) *0.15 k/ft = 0.04375 k/ft
12 in.

Design
The factored load
wu = 1.2wDL + 1.6wLL
= 1.2 ( 0.04375 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 0.325 k/ft )

= 0.5725 k/ft
Factored moments demanded

2
w
l
M u+ = u
16
2
w
l
M u = u critical
11

Design
The factored moment
0.5725 k/ft )(10 ft )

(
wu l
M =
=
= 5.205 k-ft
11
11
= 62.5 k-in.
The depth of the reinforcement (assume #6 bar) is
db
0.75 in.
d = h cover = 3.5 in. 0.75 in.
2
2
= 2.375 in.

Design
Obtain a set of the equations to find (c/d)
Mu
= Ru bd 2
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
2 ( M u / ) 1c
k = 1 1
=
2
0.85 f cbd
d

Design
Find (c/d) for the given slab
k = 1 1
2 ( 62.5 k-in / 0.9 )

0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12 in.)( 2.375 in.)
= 0.558
c 0.558
=
= 0.657
d 0.85
Therefore, the slab is in the compression control region.

Design
Need the steel to be in the tension controlled region. So
chose an arbitrary k, k=0.3 and k=0.255
( 0.255 )
Ru = 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 0.255 ) 1
= 0.567 ksi
2
Mu
Ru bd =
2
Mu
d =
62.5 k-in.
0.9
=
= 3.19 in.
Ru b
( 0.567 ksi )(12 in.)

Design
Determine the depth of the slab with the new d.
db
0.75 in.
h = d + cover +
= 3.19 in. + 0.75 in. +
2
2
= 4.318 in. Use 5 in.
with h =5 in., then d= 3.875 in. Go back and check (c/d) ratio

Design
The new factored load is
wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL
= 1.2 ( 0.0625 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 0.325 k/ft )

= 0.595 k/ft
0.595 k/ft )(10 ft )

(
wu l
M =
=
= 5.409 k-ft
11
11
= 64.9 k-in.

Design
Determine the new value for k and (c/d)
k = 1 1
2 ( 64.9 k-in / 0.9 )

0.85 ( 3 ksi )(12 in.)( 3.875 in.)
= 0.172
c 0.172
=
= 0.202
d
0.85
Therefore, the slab is in the tension controlled region.

Design
Determine the area of the steel
Mu
k
= As f y d 1 As =
2
f y d 1
2
64.9 k-in
0.9
As =
= 0.509 in 2
0.172
( 40 ksi )( 3.875 in.) 1
Mu

Design
The area of steel is 0.509 in2 per foot. Calculate the maximum
allowable spacing
3h = 3 ( 5 in.) = 15 in. governs

s = smaller
18 in.
Select bars and spacing. Use #6 (0.44 in2) per 9 in.

As 12 in. 0.44 in 2 12 in.
2
= 0.587 in per foot

spacing ft
9 in. ft

Design
Transverse reinforcement is due to temperature and shrinkage
so Amin is
Amin = 0.002bh = 0.002 ( 5 in.)(12 in.)

= 0.12 in
As 12 in. 0.11 in 12 in.

2
=
=
0.12
in
per foot
spacing ft
11 in. ft
2
Example 2: One-way Slab

Design
Determine the required depth and reinforcement for the one-way
joist system shown. The joist are 6 in. wide and are space 36 in.
o.c. The slab is 3.5 in. thick.
fc = 4 ksi fy = 60 ksi
DL = 130 psf (include selfweight)
LL= 60 psf

Design
Width of spandrel beam = 20 in.
Width of interior beam = 36 in.
Column: interior = 18 in. x 18 in.
exterior = 16 in. x 16 in.
Story height = 13 ft.

Design
Compute the factored moments at the faces of the supports and
determine the depth
= 1.2 ( 0.13 k/ft 2 ) + 1.6 ( 0.06 k/ft 2 )

= 0.252 k/ft 2
The tributary area is 3 ft wide on the joists
wu = ( 0.252 k/ft 2 ) ( 3 ft )
= 0.756 k/ft

Design
Compute the moments for all of the sections; the
1 ft
external length is 30 ft (1104 in.4 2+ 4184in.
)
= 27.67 ft
3
beam widths
External section:
0.756 k/ft )( 27.67 ft )
(
wl
Mu =
=
= 24.1 k-ft
24
24
2
u n
wu ln2 ( 0.756 k/ft )( 27.67 ft )

+
Mu =
=
= 41.3 k-ft
14
14
2
0.756 k/ft )( 27.67 ft )

(
wl
Mu =
=
= 57.9 k-ft
10
10
2
u n
12 in.

Design
Compute the moments for the sections; the internal length is
1 ft
30 ft (18 in. + 18 in.)
= 27.0 ft
1 4 4 2 4 4 3 12 in.
beam widths
Internal section:
0.756 k/ft )( 27.0 ft )
wl
(
Mu =
=
= 50.1 k-ft
11
11
2
u n
0.756 k/ft )( 27.0 ft )

(
wl
+
Mu =
=
= 34.4 k-ft
16
16
2
u n

Design
Determine the maximum d for the joist if we use the maximum
moment for (c/d)= 0.3 and k= 0.255, thickness b = 6 in. and a
maximum moment 57.9 k-ft
( 0.255 )
Ru = 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 0.255 ) 1
= 0.567 ksi
2
Ru bd =
2
Mu
d =
12 in.
57.9 k-ft
Mu
ft
0.9
=
= 13.05 in.
Ru b
( 0.567 ksi )( 6 in.)

Design
The additional distance, h = d + 0.75 in (cover)+ db
h = 13.05 in + 0.75 in + 0.5 in.=13.05 in. + 1.25 in.
h = 14.3 in.
From 9.5a (ACI Table 9.5)
12 in.
30 ft )
(
l
ft = 19.45 in.
h=
=
28
28
Use h = 19.5 in. Depth of joist = 19.5in 3.5 in. = 16 in.

Design
Find (c/d) for external column, Mu = 24.1 k-ft (289.2 k-in)
d= 19.5 in. 1.25 in. = 18.25 in.
k = 1 1
2 ( 289.2 k-in / 0.9 )

0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 6 in.)(18.25 in.)
The area can be computed using
0.85 f cbdk
As f y = 0.85 f cba As =
fy
= 0.048

Design
The area of the steel
0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 6 in.)(18.25 in.)( 0.048 )

As =
= 0.30 in 2
( 60 ksi )
The minimum area by definition is
Amin
3 fc
3 4000
bd =
( 6 in.)(18.25 in.) = 0.35 in 2
60000
fy
=
200 bd = 200 ( 6 in.)(18.25 in.) = 0.37 in 2
fy
60000

Design
Calculate the maximum allowable spacing
3h = 3 ( 3.5 in.) = 10.5 in.

s = smaller
18 in.
governs

Design
Use 0.37 in2 distributed over 3 ft section of the joist
2
0.37 in
2
As =
= 0.123 in /ft
3 ft
Use #3 @ 10 in spacing
As 12 in. 0.11 in 12 in.

2
= 0.132 in per foot

spacing 1 ft 10 in. 1 ft
2

Design
Find (c/d) for middle of beam, Mu = 41.3 k-ft (495.6 k-in)
k = 1 1
2 ( 495.6 k-in / 0.9 )

0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 6 in.)(18.25 in.)
0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 6 in.)(18.25 in.)( 0.0846 )

As =
= 0.525 in 2
( 60 ksi )
= 0.0846

Design
Calculate the a value of the beam for the positive moment
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
2
0.525
in
(
) ( 60 ksi )
0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 36 in.)
= 0.26 in. 3.5 in.

Use 2 #5 bars (As = 0.62 in2 )

Design
Find (c/d) for internal column, Mu = 57.9 k-ft (694.8 k-in)
k = 1 1
2 ( 694.8 k-in / 0.9 )

0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 6 in.)(18.25 in.)
= 0.121
0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 6 in.)(18.25 in.)( 0.121)

As =
= 0.75 in 2
( 60 ksi )

Design
Use 0.75 in2 distributed over 3 ft section of the joist
2
0.75 in
As =
= 0.25 in 2 /ft
3 ft
Use #4 @ 9 in spacing
As 12 in. 0.2 in 2 12 in.

2
=
=
0.267
in
per foot
spacing 1 ft
9 in. 1 ft

Design
The summary:
End Span
external negative moment
positive moment
internal negative moment
Mu
Area
Bars
24.1 k-ft
41.3 k-ft
57.9 k-ft
0.37 in2
0.525 in2
0.75 in2
# 3 @ 10 in.
2 # 5 bars
# 4 @ 10 in.
34.4 k-ft
50.1 k-ft
0.44 in2
0.64 in2
2 # 5 bars
# 4 @ 10 in.
Internal Span
positive moment
negative moment

Design
Slab reinforcement normal to the ribs is often located at mid-depth
of the slab to resist both positive and negative moments. The
length between joist is 36 in. 6 in. = 30 in. or 2.5 ft.
= 1.2 3.5 in.
= 0.149 k/ft 2
1 ft
3
2
0.150
k/ft
+
1.6
0.06
k/ft
)
(
)
12 in.

Design
The moment is
0.149 k/ft )( 2.5 ft )

(
wl
Mu =
=
= 0.078 k-ft
12
12
2
u n
The d = 3.5 in. 0.75 in. 0.25 in. = 2.5 in. and the k value
will be
k = 1 1
2 ( 0.931 k-in / 0.9 )

0.85 ( 4 ksi )(12 in.)( 2.5 in.)
= 0.004

Design
The area of steel
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(12 in.)( 2.5 in.)( 0.004 )

As =
= 0.01 in 2
( 60 ksi )
The minimum reinforcement is governed by temperature and
shrinkage from ACI 7.12.2.1
Amin = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 (12 in.)( 3.5 in.)

= 0.08 in 2 /ft

Design
Calculate the maximum allowable spacing (ACI 7.12.2.2)
5h = 5 ( 3.5 in.) = 17.5 in. governs

s = smaller
18 in.
As 12 in. 0.11 in 2 12 in.

2
=
=
0.0825
in
per foot
spacing 1 ft 16 in. 1 ft

Design
Shear at supports must be checked. Since the joists meet the
required in ACI 8.11.8, the contribution of the concrete to the
shear strength, Vc is permitted to be 10% more than that
specified in 11ACI

Design
Design a slab for an interior
span of concrete joist floor
system using 30 in forms.
LL = 80 psf
fc = 4 ksi
fy = 60 ksi
DL = 20 psf (excluding
self-weight)

Design
Assume an initial thickness of 3 in. For a single
slab without ribs.
1 ft
3
2
= 1.2 3 in.
( 0.15 k/ft ) + 0.02 k/ft
12 in.
+ 1.6 ( 0.08 k/ft
= 0.197 k/ft 2

Design
Joist Design: Find the minimum height of the joist
from Table 9.5a in ACI Code
12 in.
26 ft
l
ft
=
= 14.5 in. Use 15.0 in.
h=
21
21
The slab is 3 in. thick so the joist must

extend 15 in. 3 in. = 12 in. below the
slab .

Design
Including the ribs in the calculation of the weight with
with a depth of 12 in.
wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL
1 ft
1 ft 5 in.+7 in.
1 ft
3
= 1.2 3 in.
*35 in.
+
(12 in.)
( 0.15 k/ft )
1 4 4124 in.
44 2 4 4 4 12
4 in.
43 1 4 42 4 4 4 2 4 4 4124 in.
4 3
slab
rib
1 ft
+1.6 ( 0.08 k/ft 2 ) *35 in.
12 in.
1 ft
+1.2 ( 0.02 k/ft ) *35 in.
12 in.
= 0.665 k/ft
2

Design
Compute the moments for the sections; the internal
length is 24.5 ft.
For the rib with a negative moment:
0.665 k/ft )( 24.5 ft )
(
wl
M =
=
= 36.3 k-ft/rib
11
11
u
2
u n
The d = 15 in. cover db/2 = 15 in. 0.75 in. 0.25 in.

d = 14 in. (Guess a # 4 bar with minimum cover)

Design
Find (c/d) for external column, Mu = 36.3 k-ft
(435.6 k-in) d= 14 in
k = 1 1
2 ( 435.6 k-in / 0.9 )

0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 5 in.)(14 in.)
= 0.217
The area can be computed using the equilibrium

equation
0.85 f cbdk
fy

Design
The area of the steel
0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 5 in.)(14 in.)( 0.217 )
2
As =
= 0.65 in
( 60 ksi )
The minimum area required
Amin
3 fc
3 3000
2
bd =
( 5 in.)(14 in.) = 0.19 in
60000
fy
=
200 bd = 200 ( 5 in.)(14 in.) = 0.23 in 2
fy
60000

Design
Use #4 and 2 #5 bars (As = 0.81 in2 ), to find the
neutral axis
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
0.81 in ) ( 60 ksi )
(
=
2
0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 5 in.)
= 3.81 in.
d = 15 in. 0.75 in. 0.3125 in.
= 13.9 in. Use d = 13.5 in.

Design
Determine the moment capacity of the slab
a
3.81 in.
2
M n = As f y d = ( 0.81 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 13.5 in.
2
2
= 563.4 k-in 46.96 k-ft / rib
Compute the factored nominal moment
M n = 0.9 ( 46.96 k-ft ) = 42.3 k-ft 36.3 k-ft

Design
Verification for shear strength
Vu @ d = wu d
2
24.5 ft
1 ft
= ( 0.665 k/ft )
13.5 in.
12 in.
2
= 7.4 kips

Design
Verification for shear strength
Vu
f req =
bd
7.4 kips
0.75
=
( 5 in.)(13.5 in.)
= 0.146 ksi

Design
Compute nominal V
Vn = 2 f c bd f n = 2 f c = 2 3000 = 109.5 psi

Since fn < freq we will need to enlarge the ribs @ the
ends
breq
f req
146 psi
=
( 5 in.) =
( 5 in.) = 6.66 in.
fn
109.5 psi

Design
The shear width at 13.5 in. using a commercial form for
b =6.66 in. and 3 in. over 36 in. So 36 in - 13.5 in =
22.5 in. increase in thickness = 22.5/36(3 in.) =1.875 in.
if it is on both sides 5in +3.75 in. = 8.75 in. > 6.66 in.

Design
Compute the moments for the sections; the internal
length is 24.5 ft.
For the rib with a positive moment:
0.665 k/ft )( 24.5 ft )
(
wl
M =
=
= 25 k-ft/rib
16
16
u
2
u n

Design
Determine the beff of the joist
For the rib positive:
16t + b = 16 ( 3 in.) + 5 in. = 53 in.
governs
beff = smaller
s = 35 in
L 26 ft (12 in/ft )
=
= 78 in.
4
4

Design
Find (c/d) for external column, Mu = 25.0 k-ft
(300 k-in) d= 13.5 in.
k = 1 1
2 ( 300 k-in / 0.9 )

0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 35 in.)(13.5 in.)
a = 0.021(13.5 in.) = 0.28 in. < 3 in.
= 0.021

Design
The minimum k required for the t section
3 fc
3 3000
=
= 0.6444
0.85 f c 0.85 ( 3000 )

=
kmin
200
200 =
= 0.07843
0.85 f
0.85 ( 3000 )
c

Design
The minimum k required is 0.07843
Mu
Mu
k
= As f y d 1 As =
2
f y d 1
2
25 k-ft (12 in./ft )

0.9
As =
= 0.43 in 2
0.07843
( 60 ksi )(13.5 in.) 1
Use 2#5 (As = 0.62 in2) or 2#4 & 1#3 (As=0.51 in2)

Design
Look at the transverse moment along the joist
spacing is 30 in., w = 0.197 k/ft2
2
1 ft
( 0.197 k/ft ) ( 30 in.) 12 in.
= 0.103 k-ft per foot

Md =
12
2
Using an elastic analysis for concrete for the

positive moment
tension in concrete
f r = 7.5 f c
M n ( t / 2 ) 6M n
=
= 2
3
bt
bt
12

Design
The thickness of the slab is checked with an
elastic analysis
6M u /
6M n
7.5 f c = 2 t =
bt
b7.5 f c
0.103 k-ft (12 in./ft ) 1000 lb
6
0.9
kip
= 1.29 in. 3 in.

t=
(12 in.) 7.5 3000
So a 3 in. slab will work

Design
The minimum reinforcement is governed by
temperature and shrinkage from ACI 7.12.2.1
Amin = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 (12 in.)( 3.0 in.)
= 0.065 in 2 /ft
Determine the spacing between the bars

Design
Calculate the maximum allowable spacing
(ACI 7.12.2.2)
3h = 3 ( 3.0 in.) = 9.0 in.
s = smaller
18 in.
governs
Use a wire mesh to get the necessary steel,

because #3 bar is 0.11 in2 and with a
maximum spacing of 9 in. the amount of steel
will still be too large. So use a wire mesh.
Example: Interaction Diagrams

The final design is given for joist 12 in deep and slab
thickness of 3 in.
Lecture 20 Columns
July 23, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Definitions for short columns
Columns
Analysis and Design of

Short Columns
General Information
Column:
Vertical Structural members

Transmits axial compressive loads with
or without moment
transmit loads from the floor & roof to
the foundation

Short Columns
General Information
Column Types:
1. Tied
2. Spiral
3. Composite
4. Combination
5. Steel pipe

Short Columns
Tied Columns - 95% of all columns in
buildings are tied
Tie spacing h (except for seismic)

tie support long bars (reduce buckling)
ties provide negligible restraint to
lateral expose of core

Short Columns
Spiral Columns
Pitch = 1.375 in. to 3.375 in.
spiral restrains lateral (Poissons effect)
axial load
delays failure (ductile)

Short Columns
Elastic Behavior
An elastic analysis using the transformed section
method would be:
For concentrated load, P
P
fc =
Ac + nAst
f s = nf c
uniform stress over section

n = Es / Ec
Ac = concrete area
As = steel area

Short Columns
Elastic Behavior
The change in concrete strain with respect to time will
effect the concrete and steel stresses as follows:
Concrete stress
Steel stress

Short Columns
Elastic Behavior
An elastic analysis does not work, because creep and
shrinkage affect the acting concrete compression strain
as follows:

Short Columns
Elastic Behavior
Concrete creeps and shrinks, therefore we can
not calculate the stresses in the steel and concrete
due to acting loads using an elastic analysis.

Short Columns
Elastic Behavior
Therefore, we are not able to calculate the real
stresses in the reinforced concrete column under
acting loads over time. As a result, an allowable
stress design procedure using an elastic analysis
was found to be unacceptable. Reinforced concrete
columns have been designed by a strength method
since the 1940s.
Note: Creep and shrinkage do not affect the strength
of the member.
Behavior, Nominal Capacity and

Design under Concentric Axial loads
1. Initial Behavior up to Nominal Load - Tied and
spiral columns.


P0 = 0.85 f c * (Ag Ast ) + f y Ast
Let
Ast = area of long steel
Ag = Gross Area = b*h
fc = concrete compressive strength
fy = steel yield strength
Factor due to less than ideal consolidation and curing
conditions for column as compared to a cylinder. It
is not related to Whitneys stress block.

2. Maximum Nominal Capacity for Design Pn (max)
Pn (max ) = rP0
r = Reduction factor to account for accidents/bending
r = 0.80 ( tied )
r = 0.85 ( spiral )
ACI 10.3.6.3

3. Reinforcement Requirements (Longitudinal Steel Ast)
Let
Ast
g =
Ag
- ACI Code 10.9.1 requires 0.01
g 0.08

3. Reinforcement Requirements (Longitudinal Steel Ast)
- Minimum # of Bars ACI Code 10.9.2
min. of 6 bars in circular arrangement
w/min. spiral reinforcement.
min. of 4 bars in rectangular
arrangement
min. of 3 bars in triangular ties

3. Reinforcement Requirements (Lateral Ties)
ACI Code 7.10.5.1
size
# 3 bar if longitudinal bar # 10 bar

# 4 bar if longitudinal bar # 11 bar
# 4 bar if longitudinal bars are bundled

Vertical spacing: (ACI 7.10.5.2)
s
s
s
16 db ( db for longitudinal bars )

48 db ( db for tie bar )
least lateral dimension of column

Arrangement Vertical spacing: (ACI 7.10.5.3)
1.) At least every other longitudinal bar shall have
lateral support from the corner of a tie with an
included angle 135o.
2.) No longitudinal bar shall be more than 6 in.
clear on either side from support bar.

Examples of
lateral ties.

Reinforcement Requirements (Spirals )
ACI Code 7.10.4
size 3/8 dia. (3/8 smooth bar,
#3 bar dll or wll wire)
1 in.
clear spacing
between spirals
3 in.
ACI 7.10.4.3

Reinforcement Requirements (Spiral)
Spiral Reinforcement Ratio, s
Volume of Spiral 4 Asp

=
s =
Volume of Core
Dc s
Asp Dc
from : s =
2
1 4 Dc s

Reinforcement Requirements (Spiral)
A
f
c
g
s = 0.45 * 1 * ACI Eqn. 10-5

f
A
c y
where
Asp = cross - sectional area of spiral reinforcement
Ac = core area =
Dc2
4
Dc = core diameter : outside edge to outside edge of spiral

s = spacing pitch of spiral steel (center to center)
f y = yield strength of spiral steel ( 60,000 psi )

4. Design for Concentric Axial Loads
(a) Load Combination
Gravity:
Pu = 1.2 PDL + 1.6 PLL
Gravity + Wind:
Pu = 1.2 PDL + 1.0 PLL + 1.6 Pw
and
etc.
Pu = 0.9 PDL + 1.3Pw

Check for
tension

(b) General Strength Requirement
Pn Pu
where, = 0.65 for tied columns
= 0.7 for spiral columns

(c) Expression for Design
defined:
Ast
g =
Ag
ACI Code (0.01 g 0.08)

Pn = r Ag (0.85 f c ) + Ast ( f y 0.85 f c ) Pu

1 4 2 4 3 1 4 4 2 4 43
concrete
steel
or
Pn = r Ag [0.85 f c + g ( f y 0.85 f c )] Pu

* when g is known or assumed:
Ag
Pu
r [0.85 f c + g ( f y 0.85 f c )]
* when Ag is known or assumed:
Pu
1
Ag (0.85 f c )
Ast
( f y 0.85 f c ) r
Example: Design Tied Column for

Concentric Axial Load
Design tied column for concentric axial load
Pdl = 150 k; Pll = 300 k; Pw = 50 k
fc = 4500 psi fy = 60 ksi
Design a square column aim for g = 0.03.
Select longitudinal transverse reinforcement.

Determine the loading
Pu = 1.2 Pdl + 1.6 Pll
= 1.2 (150 k ) + 1.6 ( 300 k ) = 660 k
Pu = 1.2 Pdl + 1.0 Pll + 1.6 Pw
= 1.2 (150 k ) + 1.0 ( 300 k ) + 1.6 ( 50 k ) = 560 k
Check the compression or tension in the column
Pu = 0.9 Pdl 1.3Pw
= 0.9 (150 k ) 1.3 ( 50 k ) = 70 k

For a square column r = 0.80 and = 0.65 and = 0.03
Pu
Ag
r 0.85f c + g ( f y 0.85f c )
660 k
0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )
( 0.65)( 0.8)
0.03
60
ksi
0.85
4.5
ksi
(
)
(
)
(
)
2
230.4 in
Ag = d d = 15.2 in. d = 16 in.
2

For a square column, As=Ag= 0.03(15.2 in.)2 =6.93 in2
Pu
1
Ast
r 0.85f c Ag
( f y 0.85fc )
( ( 60 ksi ) 0.85 ( 4.5 ksi ) )

660 k
2
*
0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(16 in )
( 0.65 )( 0.8 )
5.16 in 2
Use 8 #8 bars Ast = 8(0.79 in2) = 6.32 in2

Check P0
P0 = 0.85f c ( Ag Ast ) + f y Ast
= 0.85 ( 4.5 ksi ) ( 256 in 6.32 in
2
) + ( 60 ksi ) ( 6.32 in )
= 1334 k
Pn = rP0 = 0.65 ( 0.8 )(1334 k ) = 694 k > 660 k OK

Use #3 ties compute the spacing
s=
b # d b 2 ( cover + dstirrup )
( # bars 1)
16 in. 3 (1.0 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
2
= 4.625 in. < 6 in. No cross-ties needed

Stirrup design
= 16 in.
16d b = 16 (1.0 in.)
s 48dstirrup = 48 ( 0.375 in.) = 18 in.

smaller b or d
= 16 in.
governs
governs
Use #3 stirrups with 16 in. spacing in the column
Behavior under Combined

Bending and Axial Loads
Usually moment is represented by axial load times
eccentricity, i.e.

Interaction Diagram Between Axial Load and Moment
( Failure Envelope )
Concrete crushes
before steel yields
Steel yields before

concrete crushes
Note: Any combination of P and M outside the

envelope will cause failure.

Axial Load and Moment Interaction Diagram General

Resultant Forces action at Centroid
( h/2 in this case )
Pn = Cs1 + Cc Ts2
14 2 43
compression
is positive
Moment about geometric center
h a
M n = Cs1 * d1 + Cc * + Ts2 * d 2
2
2 2
Columns in Pure Tension

Section is completely cracked (no concrete
axial capacity)
Uniform Strain
y
N
Pn ( tension ) = f y As
i =1
Columns
Strength Reduction Factor, (ACI Code 9.3.2)
(a) Axial tension, and axial tension with flexure.
= 0.9
(b) Axial compression and axial compression with
flexure.
Members with spiral reinforcement confirming
to 10.9.3
= 0.70
Other reinforced members
= 0.65
Columns
Except for low values of axial compression, may be
increased as follows:
when f y 60,000 psi and reinforcement is symmetric
and
(h d d s ) > 0.70
h
ds = distance from extreme tension fiber to centroid of
tension reinforcement.
Then may be increased linearly to 0.9 as Pn

decreases from 0.10fc Ag to zero.
Column
Columns
Commentary:
Other sections:
may be increased linearly to 0.9 as the
strain s increase in the tension steel. Pb
Design for Combined Bending

and Axial Load (Short Column)
Design - select cross-section and reinforcement

to resist axial load and moment.

and Axial Load (Short Column)
Column Types
1) Spiral Column - more efficient for e/h < 0.1,
but forming and spiral expensive
2) Tied Column - Bars in four faces used when
e/h < 0.2 and for biaxial bending
General Procedure
The interaction diagram for a column is
constructed using a series of values for Pn and
Mn. The plot shows the outside envelope of the
problem.
General Procedure for

Construction of ID
Compute P0 and determine maximum Pn in

compression
Select a c value (multiple values)
Calculate the stress in the steel components.
Calculate the forces in the steel and
concrete,Cc, Cs1 and Ts.
Determine Pn value.
Compute the Mn about the center.
Compute moment arm,e = Mn / Pn.
General Procedure for

Construction of ID
Repeat with series of c values (10) to obtain a

series of values.
Obtain the maximum tension value.
Plot Pn verse Mn.
Determine Pn and Mn.
Find the maximum compression level.
Find the will vary linearly from 0.65 to 0.9
for the strain values
The tension component will be = 0.9
Example: Axial Load vs. Moment

Interaction Diagram
Consider an square column (20 in x 20 in.) with 8 #10
( = 0.0254) and fc = 4 ksi and fy = 60 ksi. Draw the
interaction diagram.

Interaction Diagram
Given 8 # 10 (1.27 in2) and fc = 4 ksi and fy = 60 ksi
Ast = 8 (1.27 in
) = 10.16 in
Ag = ( 20 in.) = 400 in
2
Ast 10.16 in 2
=
= 0.0254
=
2
Ag
400 in

Interaction Diagram
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag Ast ) + f y Ast
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ( 400 in 2 10.16 in 2 )

+ ( 60 ksi ) (10.16 in 2 )
= 1935 k
Pn = rP0
= 0.8 (1935 k ) = 1548 k
[ Point 1 ]

Interaction Diagram
Determine where the balance point, cb.

Interaction Diagram
Determine where the balance point, cb. Using similar
triangles, where d = 20 in. 2.5 in. = 17.5 in., one can
find cb
cb
17.5 in.
=
0.003 0.003 + 0.00207
0.003
cb =
17.5 in.
0.003 + 0.00207
cb = 10.36 in.

Interaction Diagram
Determine the strain of the steel
cb 2.5 in.
10.36 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
( 0.003)
cb
10.36 in.
= 0.00228
cb 10 in.
10.36 in. 10 in.
s2 =
cu =
( 0.003)
cb
10.36 in.
= 0.000104

Interaction Diagram
Determine the stress in the steel
fs1 = Es s1 = 29000 ksi ( 0.00228 )

= 66 ksi 60 ksi compression
fs2 = Es s1 = 29000 ksi ( 0.000104 )
= 3.02 ksi compression

Interaction Diagram
Compute the forces in the column
Cc = 0.85 f cb 1c
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 20 in.)( 0.85 )(10.36 in.)

= 598.8 k
Cs1 = As1 ( fs1 0.85 f c )

= 3 (1.27 in
) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )
) ( 3.02 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )
= 215.6 k
Cs2 = 2 (1.27 in
= 0.97 k neglect

Interaction Diagram
Ts = As fs = 3 (1.27 in
) ( 60 ksi )
= 228.6 k
Pn = Cc + Cs1 + Cs2 Ts
= 599.8 k + 215.6 k 228.6 k
= 585.8 k

Interaction Diagram
Compute the moment about the center
h
h a
h
M = Cc + Cs1 d1 + Ts d3
2
2 2
2
20 in. 0.85 (10.85 in.)

= 599.8 k
2
2
20 in.
+ 215.6 k
2.5 in.
2
20 in.
+ 228.6 k 17.5 in.
= 6682.2 k-in 556.9 k-ft

Interaction Diagram
A single point from interaction diagram,
(585.6 k, 556.9 k-ft). The eccentricity of the point is
defined as
M 6682.2 k-in
e=
=
= 11.41 in.
P
585.8 k
[ Point 2 ]

Interaction Diagram
Now select a series of additional points by selecting
values of c. Select c = 17.5 in. Determine the strain
of the steel. (c is at the location of the tension steel)
c 2.5 in.
17.5 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
( 0.003)
17.5 in.
c
= 0.00257 fs1 = 74.5 ksi 60 ksi (compression)

c 10 in.
17.5 in. 10 in.
s2 =
cu =
( 0.003)
c
17.5 in.
= 0.00129 fs2 = 37.3 ksi (compression)

Interaction Diagram
Cc = 0.85 f cb 1c = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 20 in.)( 0.85 )(17.5 in.)

= 1012 k
Cs1 = As1 ( fs1 0.85 f c ) = 3 (1.27 in
) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )
= 216 k
Cs2 = 2 (1.27 in
= 86 k
) ( 37.3 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )

Interaction Diagram
Ts = As fs = 3 (1.27 in
) ( 0 ksi )
=0k
Pn = 1012 k + 216 k + 86 k
= 1314 k

Interaction Diagram
h a
h
M = Cc + Cs1 d1
2 2
2
20 in. 0.85 (17.5 in.)

= 1012 k
2
2
20 in.
+ 216 k
2.5 in.
2
= 4213 k-in 351.1 k-ft

Interaction Diagram
(1314 k, 351.1 k-ft). The eccentricity of the point is
defined as
M 4213 k-in
e=
=
= 3.2 in.
P
1314 k
[ Point 3 ]

Interaction Diagram
Select c = 6 in. Determine the strain of the steel, c =6 in.
c 2.5 in.
6 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
( 0.003)
c
6 in.

c 10 in.
6 in. 10 in.
s2 =
cu =
( 0.003)
6 in.
c
= 0.002 fs2 = 58 ksi (tension)

c 17.5 in.
6 in. 17.5 in.
s3 =
cu =
( 0.003)
6 in.
c
= 0.00575 fs3 = 60 ksi (tension)

Interaction Diagram
Cc = 0.85 f cb 1c
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 20 in.)( 0.85 )( 6 in.)

= 346.8 k
Cs1 = As1 ( fs1 0.85 f c )

= 3 (1.27 in
) ( 50.75 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )
= 180.4 k ( C )
Cs2 = 2 (1.27 in
) ( 58 ksi )
= 147.3 k ( T )

Interaction Diagram
Ts = As fs = 3 (1.27 in
) ( 60 ksi )
= 228.6 k
Pn = 346.8 k + 180.4 k 147.3 k 228.6 k
= 151.3 k

Interaction Diagram
h
h a
h
M = Cc + Cs1 d1 + Ts d3
2
2 2
2
0.85 ( 6 in.)
= 346.8 k 10 in.
+ 180.4 k (10 in. 2.5 in.)

+228.6 k (17.5 in. 10 in.)
= 5651 k-in 470.9 k-ft
Example: Axial Load Vs. Moment

Interaction Diagram
(151 k, 471 k-ft). The eccentricity of the point is
defined as
M 5651.2 k-in
e=
=
= 37.35 in.
P
151.3 k
[ Point 4 ]

Interaction Diagram
Select point of straight tension. The maximum tension
in the column is
Pn = As f y = 8 (1.27 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi )
= 610 k
[ Point 5 ]

Interaction Diagram
Point
c (in)
Pn
Mn
1548 k
20
1515 k
253 k-ft
2 in
17.5
1314 k
351 k-ft
3.2 in
12.5
841 k
500 k-ft
7.13 in
10.36
585 k
556 k-ft
11.42 in
8.0
393 k
531 k-ft
16.20 in
6.0
151 k
471 k-ft
37.35 in
~4.5
0k
395 k-ft
infinity
-610 k
0 k-ft

Interaction Diagram
Use a series of c
values to obtain the
Pn verses Mn.
Column Analysis
2000
1500
P (k)
1000
500
0
0
100
200
300
-500
-1000
M (k-ft)
400
500
600

Interaction Diagram
Max. compression
Column Analysis
1200
1000
Location of the
linearly varying .
800
MPn (k)
600
Cb
400
200
0
-200
100
200
300
-400
Max. tension
-600
-800
Mn (k-ft)
400
500
Lecture 21 Columns
July 25, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Columns Interaction Diagrams
Using Interaction Diagrams

Interaction Diagram
Consider an square column (20 in x 20 in.) with 8 #10
( = 0.0254) and fc = 4 ksi and fy = 60 ksi. Draw the
interaction diagram.

Interaction Diagram
Ast = 8 (1.27 in
) = 10.16 in
Ag = ( 20 in.) = 400 in
2
Ast 10.16 in 2
=
= 0.0254
=
2
Ag
400 in

Interaction Diagram
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag Ast ) + f y Ast
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ( 400 in 2 10.16 in 2 )

+ ( 60 ksi ) (10.16 in 2 )
= 1935 k
Pn = rP0
= 0.8 (1935 k ) = 1548 k
[ Point 1 ]

Interaction Diagram
Determine where the balance point, cb.

Interaction Diagram
Determine where the balance point, cb. Using similar
triangles, where d = 20 in. 2.5 in. = 17.5 in., one can
find cb
cb
17.5 in.
=
0.003 0.003 + 0.00207
0.003
cb =
17.5 in.
0.003 + 0.00207
cb = 10.36 in.

Interaction Diagram
Determine the strain of the steel
cb 2.5 in.
10.36 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
( 0.003)
cb
10.36 in.
= 0.00228
cb 10 in.
10.36 in. 10 in.
s2 =
cu =
( 0.003)
cb
10.36 in.
= 0.000104

Interaction Diagram
Determine the stress in the steel
fs1 = Es s1 = 29000 ksi ( 0.00228 )

= 66 ksi 60 ksi compression
fs2 = Es s1 = 29000 ksi ( 0.000104 )
= 3.02 ksi compression

Interaction Diagram
Cc = 0.85 f cb 1c
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 20 in.)( 0.85 )(10.36 in.)

= 598.8 k
Cs1 = As1 ( fs1 0.85 f c )

= 3 (1.27 in
) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )
) ( 3.02 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )
= 215.6 k
Cs2 = 2 (1.27 in
= 0.97 k neglect

Interaction Diagram
Ts = As fs = 3 (1.27 in
) ( 60 ksi )
= 228.6 k
Pn = Cc + Cs1 + Cs2 Ts
= 599.8 k + 215.6 k 228.6 k
= 585.8 k

Interaction Diagram
h
h a
h
M = Cc + Cs1 d1 + Ts d3
2
2 2
2
20 in. 0.85 (10.85 in.)

= 599.8 k
2
2
20 in.
+ 215.6 k
2.5 in.
2
20 in.
+ 228.6 k 17.5 in.
= 6682.2 k-in 556.9 k-ft

Interaction Diagram
(585.6 k, 556.9 k-ft). The eccentricity of the point is
defined as
M 6682.2 k-in
e=
=
= 11.41 in.
P
585.8 k
[ Point 2 ]

Interaction Diagram
Now select a series of additional points by selecting
values of c. Select c = 17.5 in. Determine the strain
of the steel. (c is at the location of the tension steel)
c 2.5 in.
17.5 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
( 0.003)
17.5 in.
c
= 0.00257 fs1 = 74.5 ksi 60 ksi (compression)

c 10 in.
17.5 in. 10 in.
s2 =
cu =
( 0.003)
c
17.5 in.

Interaction Diagram
Cc = 0.85 f cb 1c = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 20 in.)( 0.85 )(17.5 in.)

= 1012 k
Cs1 = As1 ( fs1 0.85 f c ) = 3 (1.27 in
) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )
= 216 k
Cs2 = 2 (1.27 in
= 86 k
) ( 37.3 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )

Interaction Diagram
Ts = As fs = 3 (1.27 in
) ( 0 ksi )
=0k
Pn = 1012 k + 216 k + 86 k
= 1314 k

Interaction Diagram
h a
h
M = Cc + Cs1 d1
2 2
2
20 in. 0.85 (17.5 in.)

= 1012 k
2
2
20 in.
+ 216 k
2.5 in.
2
= 4213 k-in 351.1 k-ft

Interaction Diagram
(1314 k, 351.1 k-ft). The eccentricity of the point is
defined as
M 4213 k-in
e=
=
= 3.2 in.
P
1314 k
[ Point 3 ]

Interaction Diagram
Select c = 6 in. Determine the strain of the steel, c =6 in.
c 2.5 in.
6 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
( 0.003)
c
6 in.

c 10 in.
6 in. 10 in.
s2 =
cu =
( 0.003)
6 in.
c
= 0.002 fs2 = 58 ksi (tension)

c 17.5 in.
6 in. 17.5 in.
s3 =
cu =
( 0.003)
6 in.
c
= 0.00575 fs3 = 60 ksi (tension)

Interaction Diagram
Cc = 0.85 f cb 1c
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 20 in.)( 0.85 )( 6 in.)

= 346.8 k
Cs1 = As1 ( fs1 0.85 f c )

= 3 (1.27 in
) ( 50.75 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )
= 180.4 k ( C )
Cs2 = 2 (1.27 in
) ( 58 ksi )
= 147.3 k ( T )

Interaction Diagram
Ts = As fs = 3 (1.27 in
) ( 60 ksi )
= 228.6 k
Pn = 346.8 k + 180.4 k 147.3 k 228.6 k
= 151.3 k

Interaction Diagram
h
h a
h
M = Cc + Cs1 d1 + Ts d3
2
2 2
2
0.85 ( 6 in.)
= 346.8 k 10 in.
+ 180.4 k (10 in. 2.5 in.)

+228.6 k (17.5 in. 10 in.)
= 5651 k-in 470.9 k-ft
Example: Axial Load Vs. Moment

Interaction Diagram
(151 k, 471 k-ft). The eccentricity of the point is
defined as
M 5651.2 k-in
e=
=
= 37.35 in.
P
151.3 k
[ Point 4 ]

Interaction Diagram
Select point of straight tension. The maximum tension
in the column is
Pn = As f y = 8 (1.27 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi )
= 610 k
[ Point 5 ]

Interaction Diagram
Point
c (in)
Pn
Mn
1548 k
20
1515 k
253 k-ft
2 in
17.5
1314 k
351 k-ft
3.2 in
12.5
841 k
500 k-ft
7.13 in
10.36
585 k
556 k-ft
11.42 in
8.0
393 k
531 k-ft
16.20 in
6.0
151 k
471 k-ft
37.35 in
~4.5
0k
395 k-ft
infinity
-610 k
0 k-ft

Interaction Diagram
Use a series of c
values to obtain the
Pn verses Mn.
Column Analysis
2000
1500
P (k)
1000
500
0
0
100
200
300
-500
-1000
M (k-ft)
400
500
600

Interaction Diagram
Max. compression
Column Analysis
1200
1000
Location of the
linearly varying .
800
MPn (k)
600
Cb
400
200
0
-200
100
200
300
-400
Max. tension
-600
-800
Mn (k-ft)
400
500

Interaction Diagram Between Axial Load and Moment
( Failure Envelope )
Concrete crushes
before steel yields
Steel yields before
concrete crushes
Note: Any combination of P and M outside the envelope will cause failure.

and Axial Load (short column)
Column Types
3) Tied Column - Bars in 2 faces (furthest from axis
of bending.
- Most efficient when e/h > 0.2
- rectangular shape increases efficiency

Spices
Typically longitudinal bars spliced just above
each floor. (non-seismic)
Type of lap splice depends on state of stress
(ACI 12.17)

Spices
All bars in compression
Use compression lap splice

(ACI 12.16)
0 f s 0.5 f y on tension face
f s > 0.5 f y
(< 1 / 2 bars splice)
Class B
ACI 12.15
(> 1/2 bars spliced)
Class B tension lap splice
Class A tension lap

Column Shear
Recall
Nu
Vc = 21 +
f c bw d
2000 A
g
(ACI 11 - 4)
( Axial
Compression )
If Vu > 0.5Vc Ties must satisfy ACI 11 and

ACI Sec. 7.10.5

Additional Note on Reinforcement Ratio
Recall 0.01 0.08
(ACI 10.9.1)
(ACI 10.8.4 ) For cross-section larger than required for
loading:
Min. reinforcement may be computed for

reduced effective area, Ag, ( 1/2 Ag (total) )
Provided strength from reduced area and
resulting Ast must be adequate for loading.
Non-dimensional Interaction
Diagrams
Pn
f c Ag
versus
Pn
or K n =
f c Ag
Mn
f c Ag h
versus
Pn e
Rn =
f c Ag h
See Figures B-12 to B-26

or ACI Common 340 Design Handbook Vol 2
Columns (ACI 340.2R-91)
Non-dimensional Interaction
Diagrams
Design using Non-dimensional

Interaction diagrams
1.) Calculate factored loads (Pu , Mu ) and e for
relevant load combinations
2.) Select potentially governing case(s)
3.) Use estimate h to calculate h, e/h for governing
case(s)

4.) Use appropriate chart (App. A) target g
Pn
f c Ag
Pu f c
Calculate
Ag =
required
Pn
f
A
c
g
(for each governing case)
Read
5.) Select b & h Ag = b * h

6.) If dimensions are significantly different from
estimated (step 3), recalculate ( e / h ) and redo
steps 4 & 5.
Revise Ag if necessary.
7.) Select steel
Ast = Ag
Design using non-dimensional

interaction diagrams
8.) Using actual dimensions & bar sizes to check all
load combinations ( use charts or exact:
interaction diagram).
9.) Design lateral reinforcement.
Example: Column design using

Interaction Diagrams
Determine the tension and compression
reinforcement for a 16 in x 24 in. rectangular tied
column to support Pu= 840 k and Mu = 420 k-ft. Use
fc = 4 ksi and fy = 60 ksi. Using the interaction
diagram.

Compute the initial components
Pu
840 kips
Pn =
=
= 1292 k
0.65
12 in.
420 k-ft
Mu
ft
en =
=
= 6.0 in.
Pu
840 k

Compute the initial components
h = 24 in. 5.0 in. = 19.0 in.

19.0 in.
=
= 0.79
24 in.

Compute the coefficients of the column
Pn
1292 k
Kn =
=
Ag f c (16 in.)( 24 in.)( 4 ksi )
= 0.84
1292 k )( 6 in.)
(
Pn e
Rn =
=
Ag f c h (16 in.)( 24 in.)( 4 ksi )( 24 in.)
= 0.21

Using an interaction
diagram, B-13
( Rn , K n ) = ( 0.21, 0.84 )
= 0.7
f c = 4 ksi f y = 60 ksi
= 0.042

Using an interaction
diagram, B-14
( Rn , K n ) = ( 0.21, 0.84 )
= 0.9
f c = 4 ksi f y = 60 ksi
= 0.034

Using linear interpolation to find the of the column
= 0.7 +
0.9 0.7
( 0.7 )
( 0.9 0.7 )
0.034 0.042 )
(
= 0.042
( 0.79 0.7 )
( 0.9 0.7 )
= 0.0384

Determine the amount of steel required
Ast = Ag = ( 0.0384 )(16 in.)( 24 in.)

= 14.75 in
Select the steel for the column, using #11 bars
Ast 14.75 in 2
=
= 9.45 bars 10 bars
2
Ab 1.56 in

The areas of the steel:
Ast = 15.6 in
As1 = 7.8 in 2 ,
At = 7.8 in 2
The loading on the column

The compression components are
Cs1 = As1 ( f y 0.85 f c ) = 7.8 in ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) )

2
= 441.5 k
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.)( 0.85 ) c
= 46.24c

The tension component is
T = As1 fs = 7.8 in 2 fs
d c
21.5 in. c
fs = Es
cu = 29000 ksi
( 0.003)
c
c
21.5 in. c
= 87 ksi

Take the moment about the tension steel
Pn ( e ) = Cs1 ( d d ) + Cc d
2
e = 6 in. + 9.5 in.

= 15.5 in.

The first equation related to Pn
Pn (15.5 in.) = 441.5 k ( 21.5 in. 2.5 in.)

0.85c
+ 46.24c 21.5 in.
2
= 8388.5 k-in. + 994.2c 19.65c
Pn = 541.2 k + 64.14c 1.27c

The second equation comes from the equilibrium
equation and substitute in for Pn
Pn = Cs1 + Cc T
541.2 k + 64.14c 1.27c = 441.5 k + 46.24c 7.8 f s
2
7.8 f s = 1.27c 2 17.9c 99.7

f s = 0.1628c 2.282c 12.782
2

Substitute the relationship of c for the stress in the
steel.
21.5 in. c
2
87
=
0.1628
c
2.282c 12.782
The problem is now a cubic solution

c
15 in.
19 in.
19.5 in.
20.0 in.
19.98 in.
fs
37.7
11.45
8.92
6.52
6.62
RHS
-10.38
2.64
4.63
6.70
6.62

Compute Pn
Pn = 541.2 k + 64.14 (19.98 in.) 1.27 (19.98 in.)

= 1313.7 k > 1292 k
Compute Mn about the center
h a
h
h
M n = Cs1 d + Cc + T d
2
2
2 2

Compute Mn about the center
M n = 441.5 k (12 in. 2.5 in.)

0.85 (19.98 in.)
+46.24 (19.98 in.) 12 in.
+ ( 7.8 in
) ( 6.62 ksi )( 21.5 in. 12 in.)
= 4194.25 k-in. + 3241.4 k-in. + 490.54 k-in.

= 7926.2 k-in. 660.5 k-ft.

Check that Mn is greater than the required Mu
M n = 0.65 ( 660.5 k-ft.)

= 429.33 k-ft. 420 k-ft.
Check the Pn is greater than the required Pu
Pn = 0.65 (1313.7 k )
= 853.9 k 840 k

Determine the tie spacing using #4 bars
16d b
spacing = smallest
48dstirrup
smallest dimension
16 (1.41 in.) = 22.56 in.
= 48 ( 0.5 in.) = 24 in.
16 in.
Use 16 in.
Lecture 22 - Biaxial
Columns Design
July 30, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Short Column Biaxial Design
Slender Column Design
Biaxial Bending and Axial

Load
Ref. PCA Notes on ACI 318-95
Unaxial bending
about y-axis
Biaxial Bending and Axial

Load
Ref. PCA Notes on ACI 318-95
The biaxial bending moments

Mx = P*ey
My = P*ex
Approximate Analysis
Methods
Use Reciprocal Failure
surface S2 (1/Pn,ex,ey)
The ordinate 1/Pn on the
surface S2 is
approximated by
ordinate 1/Pn on the
plane S2 (1/Pn ex,ey)
Plane S2 is defined by
points A,B, and C.
Methods
P0 = Axial Load Strength under pure axial compression
(corresponds to point C ) Mnx = Mny = 0
P0x = Axial Load Strength under uniaxial eccentricity, ey
(corresponds to point B ) Mnx = Pney
P0y = Axial Load Strength under uniaxial eccentricity, ex
(corresponds to point A ) Mny = Pnex
Methods
Design: Pu Muy, Mux
P u , P u ex , P u ey
Methods
1
Pn
1
Pn
Pn
P0x
1
P0x
P0y
1
1
P0y
1
P0
1
P0
Pn = Nominal axial load strength at eccentricities, ex

& ey Limited to cases when Pn 0.1 f c Ag
Biaxial Bending in Short

Columns
Analysis Procedure: Reciprocal Load Method
Breslers Formula:
1
Pn
Steps:
1) Calculate P0
1
P0x
1
P0y
1
P0
2) Calculate P0y ( Pn for e = ex, ey = 0 )

3)Calculate P0x ( Pn for ex= 0, e = ey )
4) Calculate Pn (from Breslers Formula )
Biaxial Bending in Short

Columns
Pu Pn
where, = 0.65
Biaxial Column Example

The section of a short tied
column is 16 x 24 in. and is
reinforced with 8 #10 bars as
shown. Determine the
allowable ultimate load on
the section Pn if its acts at
ex = 8 in. and ey = 12 in. Use
fc = 5 ksi and fy = 60 ksi.

Compute the P0 load, compression with no moments
Ast = 8 (1.27 in 2 ) = 10.16 in 2

P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag Ast ) + Ast f y
= 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ( ( 24.0 in.)( 24.0 in.) 10.16 in
+ (10.16 in
) ( 60 ksi )
= 2198.4 k
Pn0 = rP0 = 0.8 ( 2198.4 k ) = 1758.7 k

Compute Pnx, by starting with ey term and assume
that compression controls. Check by
2
2
ey = 12 in. d = ( 21.5 in.) = 14.33 in.
3
3
Compute the nominal load, Pnx and assume second
compression steel does not contribute
assume small
Pn = Cc + Cs1 + Cs2 T

The components of the equilibrium equation are:
Cc = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )(16 in.)( 0.8c ) = 54.4 c
Cs1 = 3.81 in 2 ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ) = 212.4 kips

T = 3.81 in 2 ( f s )
d
21.5 in.
fs = 1 ( 29000 ksi )( 0.003) =
1 ( 87 ksi )
c
c
Use similar triangles to find the stress in the steel, fs

Compute the moment about the tension steel:
where
1c
Pn e = Cc d
+ Cs1 ( d d )
2
e = 9.5 in. + 12 in. = 21.5 in.
Pn ( 21.5 in.) = 54.4c ( 21.5 in. 0.4c )

+ 212.4 k ( 21.5 in. 2.5 in.)
The resulting equation is:
Pn = 54.4c 1.01c + 187.7
2

Combine the two equations and solve for Pn using an
iterative solution
Pn = 54.4c + 212.4 3.81 fs
Pn = 54.4c 1.01c 2 + 187.7
Set the two equation equal to one another and sole for fs
fs = 0.265c 2 + 6.483
and the definition:
21.5 in.
1
fs = 87
c

Combine the two equations and solve for c using
an iterative technique
21.5 in.
87
1 = 0.265c 2 + 6.483
c
You are solving a cubic equation

c (in.)
15
10
13
13.3
13.315
fs (ksi)
37.7
100.05
56.88462
53.6391
53.48066
RHS
66.12819
32.99194
51.28315
53.37471
53.48054

Check the assumption that Cs2 is close to zero
12 in.
12 in.
fs2 = 1
( 87 ksi ) = 1
( 87 ksi )
c
13.315 in.
= 8.59 ksi
Cs2 = 2.54 in 2 ( 8.59 ksi 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) )
= 11.0 kips
This value is small relative to the others

This Cs2 = 11 kips relatively small verses the
overall load, which is
Pn = 54.4c + 212.4 3.81 fs
= 54.4 (13.315 in.) + 212.4 k 3.81( 53.48 ksi )

= 733.0 k
So Pnx = 733.0 kips

Start with ex term and assume that compression
controls.
2
2
ex = 8.0 in. d = (13.5 in.) = 9 in.
3
3
Compute the nominal load, Pny and assume second
compression steel does not contribute
assume small
Pn = Cc + Cs1 + Cs2 T

The components of the equilibrium equation are:
Cc = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 24 in.)( 0.8c ) = 81.6 c
Cs1 = 3.81 in 2 ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ) = 212.4 kips

T = 3.81 in 2 ( fs )
d
13.5 in.
1 ( 87 ksi )
fs = 1 ( 29000 ksi )( 0.003) =
c
c

Compute the moment about the tension steel:
where
1c
Pn e = Cc d
+ Cs1 ( d d )
2
e = 5.5 in. + 8 in. = 13.5 in.
Pn (13.5 in.) = 81.6c (13.5 in. 0.4c )

+ 212.4 k (13.5 in. 2.5 in.)
The resulting equation is:

Pn = 81.6c 2.42c 2 + 173.07

Combine the two equations and solve for Pn using an
iterative solution
Pn = 81.6c + 212.4 3.81 fs
Pn = 81.6c 2.42c 2 + 173.07
Set the two equation equal to one another and sole for fs
fs = 0.634c 2 + 10.324
and the definition:
13.5 in.
fs = 87
1
c

Combine the two equations and solve for c using an
iterative technique
13.5 in.
87
1 = 0.634c 2 + 10.324
c
You are solving a cubic equation

c (in.)
10
8
8.5
8.3
8.31735
fs (ksi)
30.45
59.8125
51.17647
54.50602
54.21084
RHS
73.76371
50.92531
56.15911
54.02753
54.21043

Check the assumption that Cs2 is close to zero
8 in.
fs2 = 1
( 87 ksi )
8.317 in.
= 3.32 ksi
Cs2 = 2.54 in 2 ( 3.32 ksi 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) )
= 2.10 kips
This value is negative so it does not contribute

This Cs2= - 2.1 kips relatively small verses the
overall load, which is
Pn = 81.6c + 212.4 3.81 fs
= 81.6 ( 8.317 in.) + 212.4 k 3.81( 54.21 ksi )

= 684.6 k
So Pnx = 684.6 kips

Compute the nominal load
1
1
1
1
=
+
Pn Pnx Pny Pn0

1
1
1
=
+
733.0 k 684.6 k 1758.7 k

Pn = 443.2 k Pu = Pn = 0.65 ( 443.2 k ) = 288.1 k

Note: the Pnx & Pny include the
corner steel bars in both
calculations a more
conservative solution would be
to use 1/2 the steel in each
direction so As= 2(1.27 in2)
which would reduce Pu .
(Remember fs can not be
greater than 60 ksi, so that Pnx
= 620.3 k and Pny= 578.4 k Pn =
360.7 k and Pu= 234.5 k )
Slender Columns
Columns
Slenderness ratio =
klu
r
Long with a relatively high slenderness ratio

where lateral or shear walls are required
Long with a medium slenderness ration that
will cause a reduction in strength
Short where the slenderness ratio is small
Long Columns
Slender Columns
Slender
Column
Column with a significant reduction in

axial load capacity due to moments
resulting from lateral deflections of the
column (ACI Code: significant
reduction 5%)
Long Columns
Less than 10 % of columns in braced or non-sway
frames and less than half of columns in unbraced or
sway frames would be classified as slender
following ACI Code Procedure.
Effective Length
The effective length - klu
lu - It measures the clear distance between floors.
k - a factor, which represents the ratio of the distance
between points of zero moments in the columns
K Factor
EI / l of columns
=
EI / l of beams
u
A and B are the top and bottom factors of the

column. For a hinged end is infinite or 10 and
for a fixed end is zero or 1
K Factor
For a Braced Frame:(Non-sway)
k = 0.70 + 0.05 ( A + B ) 1.0

k = smaller of
k = 0.85 + 0.05 min 1.0
A and B are the top and bottom factors of the
column.
K Factor
For a Sway Frame:
a) Restrained @both ends
if m = avg
20 m
< 2.0 : k =
1+ m
20
if m 2.0 : k = 0.9 1 + m
b) One hinged or free end
k = 2.0 + 0.3
Non-sway frames: 0 k 1.0
Sway frames:
1.0 k
( typically k=1.5)
K Factor
The general assumptions are
- Structure consists of symmetric rectangular frames
- The girder moment at a joint is distributed to columns
according to their relative stiffness
- All columns reach their critical loads at the same time
General Formulation
Modulus of Elasticity
Ec = 33w1.5 f c
= 57000 f c
Reinforced Moment (ACI 10.11.1)
I = 0.35 I g for a beam

I = 0.70 I g for a column
General Formulation
Area
A = Ag
Moment of inertia shall be divided by (1 + d)

with sustain lateral loads
d =
Max. factored sustain lateral load

Max. factored axial load
K Factor
Use the values to
obtain the K factors
for the columns.
Long Column
Eccentrically loaded pin-ended column.
Lateral deflection increases moment
M = P*( e + )
Long Column
o = first-order deflection due to Mo

a = second-order deflection due to Po
Long Column
OA - curve for end moment
OB - curve for maximum
column moment @ midheight)
Axial capacity is reduced
from A to B due to increase
in maximum moment due to
s (slenderness effects)
Long Columns
From ACI Sec. 12.10.2 , the slenderness effects may
be neglected if
kLu
{r
1
= 34 12
M2
slenderness ratio
k = effective length factor (function of end restraints)

Non-sway frames
0.5 k 1.0
Sway frames
1.0 k
Long Column - Slenderness

Ratio
Slenderness Ratio for
columns
(a) Pinned-Pinned
Connection
(b) Fixed-Fixed
Connection

Ratio
Slenderness Ratio for
columns
(c) Fixed-Pinned
Connection
(d) Partial restrained
Connection

Ratio
Slenderness Ratio for columns in frames

Ratio
Slenderness Ratio for columns in frames
Long Column
lu = Unsupported height of column from top of
floor to bottom of beams or slab in floor
r = Radius of gyration
I
A
= 0.3* overall depth of rectangular columns

= 0.25* overall depth of circular columns
Long Column
M1/M2 = Ratio of moments at two column ends, where
M2 > M1 (-1 to 1 range)
M1
>0
M2
singular curvature
M1
M2
double curvature
<0
Long Columns
M1/M2 = Ratio of moments at two column ends
where M2 > M1 (-1.0 to 1.0 range)
- single curvature
- double curvature
= 0.5
M2
and k = 1.0
M1
is typically conservative
(non-sway frames)
Note Code (10.12.2) M1/M2 -0.5 non-sway frames
Long Column
= +0.5
is typically conservative (non - sway frames)
M2
and k = 1.0
M1
Note: Code 10.12.2
M1
0.5 (non-sway frames)
M2
Possible range of
klu
r
= 22 to 40
Moment Magnification in
Non-sway Frames
If the slenderness effects need to be considered. The
non-sway magnification factor, ns, will cause an
increase in the magnitude of the design moment.
M c = ns M 2
where
Cm
ns =
1.0
Pu
1
0.75 Pc
Non-sway Frames
The components of the equation for an Euler bucking
load for pin-end column
Pc =
EI
2
( klu )
and the stiffness, EI is taken as
EI =
0.2 Ec I g + Es I se
1 + d
{
conservatively
EI =
0.4 Ec I g
1 + d
Non-sway Frames
A coefficient factor relating the actual moment
diagram to the equivalent uniform moment diagram.
For members without transverse loads
M1
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4
0.4
M2
For other conditions, such as members with transverse
loads between supports, Cm = 1.0
Non-sway Frames
The minimum allowable value of M2 is
M 2,min = Pu ( 0.6 + 0.03h )

The sway frame uses a similar technique, see the text
on the components.
Design of Long ColumnsExample

A rectangular braced column of a multistory frame
building has floor height lu =25 ft. It is subjected to
service dead-load moments M2= 3500 k-in. on top and
M1=2500 k-in. at the bottom. The service live load
moments are 80% of the dead-load moments. The
column carries a service axial dead-load PD = 200 k
and a service axial live-load PL = 350 k. Design the
cross section size and reinforcement for this column.
Given A = 1.3 and B = 0.9. Use a d=2.5 in. cover
with an sustain load = 50 % and fc = 7 ksi and fy = 60
ksi.

Compute the factored loads and moments are 80% of
the dead loads
Pu = 1.2 PD + 1.6 PL = 1.2 ( 200 k ) + 1.6 ( 350 k )
= 800 k
M 1u = 1.2M D + 1.6 M L = 1.2 ( 2500 k-in ) + 1.6 ( 0.8 )( 2500 k-in )
= 6200 k-in.
M 2u = 1.2M D + 1.6 M L = 1.2 ( 3500 k-in ) + 1.6 ( 0.8 )( 3500 k-in )
= 8680 k-in.

Compute the k value for the braced compression
members
k = 0.7 + 0.05 ( A + B ) = 0.7 + 0.05 (1.3 + 0.9 )

= 0.81 1.0
k = 0.85 + 0.05 min = 0.85 + 0.05 ( 0.9 )
= 0.895 1.0
Therefore, use k = 0.81

Check to see if slenderness is going to matter. An
initial estimate of the size of the column will be an
inch for every foot of height. So h = 25 in.
kln 0.81( 25 ft )(12 in./ft )
=
= 32.4
r
0.3 ( 25 in.)
6200 k-in.
32.4 34 12
= 25.43
8680 k-in.

So slenderness must be considered. Since frame has
no side sway, M2 = M2ns, s =0 Minimum M2
M 2,min = Pu ( 0.6 + 0.03h ) = 800 k ( 0.6 + 0.03 ( 25 in.) )
= 1080 k-in. M 2 = 8680 k-in.

Compute components of concrete
Ec = 33w
1.5
f c = 33 (150 )
1.5
7000
= 5.07x106 psi 5.07x103 ksi

The moment of inertia is
25 in.)( 25 in.)
(
bh
Ig =
=
12
12
4
= 32552 in
3

Compute the stiffness
EI =
0.4 Ec I g
1 + d
0.4 ( 5.07x10 ksi )( 32552 in

3
= 4.4x10 k-in
7
1 + 0.5
2

The critical load is
Pc =
EI
2
( klu )
= 7354.3 k
( 4.4x10
k-in
12 in.
0.81( 25 ft ) ft
Design of Long Columns- Example

Compute the coefficient
M1
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4
M2
6200 k-in.
= 0.6 + 0.4
= 0.89 0.4
8680 k-in.

The magnification factor
Cm
0.89
ns =
=
Pu
800 k
1
1
0.75 Pc
0.75 ( 7354.3 k )
= 1.04 1.0

The design moment is
M c = ns M 2 = 1.04 ( 8680 k-in.) = 9027.2 k-in.

Therefore the design conditions are
Pc = 800 k & M c = 9027.2 k-in.

9027.2 k-in.
e =
= 11.28 in.
800 k

Assume that the = 2.0 % or 0.020
As = 0.02 ( 25 in.) = 12.5 in

2
Use 14 # 9 bars or 14 in2
As = 7.0 in
Acs = 7.0 in

The column is compression controlled so c/d > 0.6.
Check the values for c/d = 0.6
c = 0.6d = 0.6 ( 22.5 in.) = 13.5 in.

a = 1c = 0.7 (13.5 in.) = 9.45 in.

Check the strain in the tension steel and compression
steel.
c d
13.5 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
0.003
13.5 in.
c
= 0.00244
f cs1 = Es s1 = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00244 )
= 70.76 ksi f cs1 = 60 ksi

The tension steel
d c
22.5 in. 13.5 in.
s =
cu =
0.003 = 0.002
13.5 in.
c
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.002 )

= 58 ksi

Combined forces
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 7 ksi )( 25 in.)( 9.45 in.)
= 1405.7 k
Cs1 = Acs ( f cs 0.85 f c ) = ( 7 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 7 ksi ) )
= 378.35 k
T = As f s = ( 7 in
= 406.0 k
) ( 58 ksi )

Combined force
Pn = Cc + Cs1 T
= 1405.7 k + 378.35 k 406.0 k
= 1378.05 k

Moment is
h
h a
h
M n = Cc + Cs1 d + T d
2
2 2
2
9.45 in.
= 1405.7 k 12.5 in.
+378.35 k (12.5 in. 2.5 in.)
+406.0 k ( 22.5 in. 12.5 in.)

= 18773 k-in

The eccentricity is
M n 18773 k-in
e=
=
Pn
1378.05 k
= 13.62 in.
Since the e = 11.28 in. < 13.62 in. The section is in the
compression controlled region = 0.65. You will
want to match up the eccentricity with the design.

c = 0.66d = 0.66 ( 22.5 in.) = 14.85 in.

a = 1c = 0.7 (14.85 in.) = 10.395 in.

steel.
c d
14.85 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
0.003
14.85 in.
c
= 0.00249
f cs1 = Es s1 = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00249 )
= 72.35 ksi f cs1 = 60 ksi

The tension steel
d c
22.5 in. 14.85 in.
s =
cu =
0.003
14.85 in.
c
= 0.00155
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00155 )
= 44.82 ksi

Combined forces
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 7 ksi )( 25 in.)(10.395 in.)
= 1545.26 k
Cs1 = Acs ( f cs 0.85 f c ) = ( 7 in
= 378.35 k
T = As f s = ( 7 in 2 ) ( 44.82 ksi )
= 313.74 k
) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 7 ksi ) )

Combined force
Pn = Cc + Cs1 T
= 1546.26 k + 378.35 k 313.74 k
= 1610.9 k

Moment is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
10.395 in.
= 1545.26 k 12.5 in.
+378.35 k (12.5 in. 2.5 in.)
+313.74 k ( 22.5 in. 12.5 in.)

= 18205.2 k-in

The eccentricity is
M n 18205.2 k-in
e=
=
Pn
1610.9 k
= 11.30 in.
Since the e 11.28 in. The reduction factor is equal to

= 0.65. Compute the design load and moment.

The design conditions are
Pu = Pn = 0.65 (1610.9 k )
= 1047.1 k > 800 k OK!
M u = M n = 0.65 (18205.2 k-in )
= 11833.4 k-in. > 9027.2 k-in. OK!

Design the ties
Provide #3 ties, spacing will be the minimum of:
48dstirrup = 48 ( 0.375 in.) = 18 in.
s = smallest 16d bar = 16 (1.128 in.) = 18 in. controls
h = 25 in.
Therefore, provide #3 ties @ 18 in. spacing.
Using Interaction
Diagrams
Determine eccentricity.
Estimate column size
required base on axial
load.
Determine e/h and
required Pn/Ag
Determine which chart to
use.
Select steel sizes.

Design ties by ACI
code
Design sketch
Lecture 23 - Slender
Columns and Two-way Slabs
August 1, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Slender Column Design
One-way and two-way slab
Slab thickness, h

A rectangular braced column of a multistory frame
building has floor height lu =25 ft. It is subjected to
service dead-load moments M2= 3500 k-in. on top and
M1=2500 k-in. at the bottom. The service live load
moments are 80% of the dead-load moments. The
column carries a service axial dead-load PD = 200 k
and a service axial live-load PL = 350 k. Design the
cross section size and reinforcement for this column.
Given A = 1.3 and B = 0.9. Use a d=2.5 in. cover
with an sustain load = 50 % and fc = 7 ksi and fy = 60
ksi.

Compute the factored loads and moments are 80% of
the dead loads
Pu = 1.2 PD + 1.6 PL = 1.2 ( 200 k ) + 1.6 ( 350 k )
= 800 k
M 1u = 1.2M D + 1.6 M L = 1.2 ( 2500 k-in ) + 1.6 ( 0.8 )( 2500 k-in )
= 6200 k-in.
M 2u = 1.2M D + 1.6 M L = 1.2 ( 3500 k-in ) + 1.6 ( 0.8 )( 3500 k-in )
= 8680 k-in.

Compute the k value for the braced compression
members
k = 0.7 + 0.05 ( A + B ) = 0.7 + 0.05 (1.3 + 0.9 )

= 0.81 1.0
k = 0.85 + 0.05 min = 0.85 + 0.05 ( 0.9 )
= 0.895 1.0
Therefore, use k = 0.81

Check to see if slenderness is going to matter. An
initial estimate of the size of the column will be an
inch for every foot of height. So h = 25 in.
kln 0.81( 25 ft )(12 in./ft )
=
= 32.4
r
0.3 ( 25 in.)
6200 k-in.
32.4 34 12
= 25.43
8680 k-in.
We need to be concerned with slender columns

So slenderness must be considered. Since frame has
no side sway, M2 = M2ns, s = 0 Calculate the
minimum M2 for the ratio computations.
M 2,min = Pu ( 0.6 + 0.03h ) = 800 k ( 0.6 + 0.03 ( 25 in.) )
= 1080 k-in. M 2 = 8680 k-in.

Compute components of concrete
Ec = 33w
1.5
f c = 33 (150 )
1.5
7000
= 5.07x106 psi 5.07x103 ksi

The moment of inertia of the column is
25 in.)( 25 in.)
(
bh
Ig =
=
12
12
4
= 32552 in
3

Compute the stiffness, EI
EI =
0.4 Ec I g
1 + d
0.4 ( 5.07x10 ksi )( 32552 in

3
= 4.4x10 k-in
7
1 + 0.5
2

The critical load (buckling), Pcr, is
Pcr =
EI
2
( klu )
( 4.4x10 k-in
2
= 7354.3 k
12 in.
0.81( 25 ft ) ft

Compute the coefficient, Cm, for the magnification
coefficient
M1
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4
M2
6200 k-in.
= 0.6 + 0.4
= 0.89 0.4
8680 k-in.

The magnification factor
ns =
Cm
Pu
1
0.75 Pcr
= 1.04 1.0
0.89
800 k
1
0.75
7354.3
k
(
)

The design moment is
M c = ns M 2 = 1.04 ( 8680 k-in.) = 9027.2 k-in.

Therefore, the design conditions are
Pc = 800 k & M c = 9027.2 k-in.

9027.2 k-in.
e =
= 11.28 in.
800 k

Assume that the = 2.0 % or 0.020
As = 0.02 ( 25 in.) = 12.5 in

2
Use 14 # 9 bars or 14 in2
As = 7.0 in
Acs = 7.0 in

The column is compression controlled so c/d > 0.6.
c = 0.6d = 0.6 ( 22.5 in.) = 13.5 in.

a = 1c = 0.7 (13.5 in.) = 9.45 in.

steel.
c d
13.5 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
0.003
13.5 in.
c
= 0.00244
f cs1 = Es s1 = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00244 )
= 70.76 ksi f cs1 = 60 ksi

The tension steel is
d c
22.5 in. 13.5 in.
s =
cu =
0.003
13.5 in.
c
= 0.002
f s = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.002 )
= 58 ksi

Combined forces are
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 7 ksi )( 25 in.)( 9.45 in.)
= 1405.7 k
Cs1 = Acs ( f cs 0.85 f c ) = ( 7 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 7 ksi ) )
= 378.35 k
T = As f s = ( 7 in
= 406.0 k
) ( 58 ksi )

Combined force is
Pn = Cc + Cs1 T
= 1405.7 k + 378.35 k 406.0 k
= 1378.05 k

Moment is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
9.45 in.
= 1405.7 k 12.5 in.
+378.35 k (12.5 in. 2.5 in.)

+406.0 k ( 22.5 in. 12.5 in.)
= 18773 k-in.

The eccentricity is
M n 18773 k-in
e=
=
Pn
1378.05 k
= 13.62 in.
Since the e = 11.28 in. < 13.62 in. The section is in the
compression controlled region = 0.65. You will
want to match up the eccentricity with the design.

We need to match up the eccentricity of the problem.
This done varying the c/d ratio to get the eccentricity to
match. Check the values for c/d = 0.66
c = 0.66d = 0.66 ( 22.5 in.) = 14.85 in.

a = 1c = 0.7 (14.85 in.) = 10.395 in.

steel.
c d
14.85 in. 2.5 in.
s1 =
cu =
0.003
14.85 in.
c
= 0.00249
f cs1 = Es s1 = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00249 )
= 72.35 ksi f cs1 = 60 ksi

The tension steel is
d c
22.5 in. 14.85 in.
s =
cu =
0.003
14.85 in.
c
= 0.00155
f s = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00155 )
= 44.82 ksi

Combined forces are
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 7 ksi )( 25 in.)(10.395 in.)
= 1545.26 k
Cs1 = Acs ( f cs 0.85 f c ) = ( 7 in
= 378.35 k
T = As f s = ( 7 in 2 ) ( 44.82 ksi )
= 313.74 k
) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 7 ksi ) )

Combined force is
Pn = Cc + Cs1 T
= 1546.26 k + 378.35 k 313.74 k
= 1610.9 k

Moment is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
10.395 in.
= 1545.26 k 12.5 in.
+378.35 k (12.5 in. 2.5 in.)
+313.74 k ( 22.5 in. 12.5 in.)

= 18205.2 k-in

The eccentricity is
M n 18205.2 k-in
e=
=
Pn
1610.9 k
= 11.30 in.
Since the e 11.28 in. The reduction factor is equal to
= 0.65. Compute the design load and moment.

The design conditions are
Pu = Pn = 0.65 (1610.9 k )
= 1047.1 k > 800 k OK!
M u = M n = 0.65 (18205.2 k-in )
= 11833.4 k-in. > 9027.2 k-in. OK!
The problem matches the selection of the column.

Design the ties for the column
Provide #3 ties, spacing will be the minimum of:
48dstirrup = 48 ( 0.375 in.) = 18 in.
s = smallest 16d bar = 16 (1.128 in.) = 18 in. controls
h = 25 in.
Therefore, provide #3 ties @ 18 in. spacing.
Using Interaction Diagrams

Determine eccentricity.
Estimate column size
required base on axial load.
Determine e/h and required
Pn/Ag, Mn/(Agh)
Determine which chart to use
from fc, fy and . Determine
from the chart.
Select steel sizes.

Check values.
Design ties by ACI code
Design sketch
Two-way Slabs
Comparison of One-way and

Two-way slab behavior
One-way slabs carry
load in one direction.
Two-way slabs carry
load in two directions.

One-way and two-way
slab action carry load
in two directions.
One-way slabs: Generally,

long side/short side > 1.5

Flat slab
Two-way slab with beams

For flat plates and slabs the column connections
can vary between:

Flat Plate
Waffle slab

The two-way ribbed slab and waffled slab system:

General thickness of the slab is 2 to 4 in.
Comparison of One-way and Twoway slab behavior Economic

Choices
Flat Plate suitable span 20 to 25 ft with LL= 60 -100 psf
Advantages
Low cost formwork
Exposed flat ceilings
Fast
Disadvantages
Low shear capacity
Low Stiffness (notable deflection)

Choices
Flat Slab suitable span 20 to 30 ft with LL= 80 -150 psf
Advantages
Low cost formwork
Exposed flat ceilings
Fast
Disadvantages
Need more formwork for capital and panels

Choices
Waffle Slab suitable span 30 to 48 ft with LL= 80 150 psf
Advantages
Carries heavy loads
Attractive exposed ceilings
Fast
Disadvantages
Formwork with panels is expensive

Choices
One-way Slab on beams suitable span 10 to 20 ft with
LL= 60-100 psf
Can be used for larger spans with relatively higher
cost and higher deflections
One-way joist floor system is suitable span 20 to 30 ft
with LL= 80-120 psf
Deep ribs, the concrete and steel quantities are
relative low
Expensive formwork expected.

ws =load taken by short direction
wl = load taken by long direction
A = B
5ws A4
384 EI
ws
wl
B4
A4
5wl B 4
384 EI
For B = 2A ws = 16wl
Rule of Thumb: For B/A > 2,

design as one-way slab
Two-Way Slab Design

Static Equilibrium of Two-Way Slabs
Analogy of two-way slab to plank and beam floor

Section A-A:
Moment per ft width in planks
Total Moment
M =
M f = (wl2 )
l12
8
wl12
k - ft
k - ft/ft
Two-Way Slab Design


wl1
k/ft
Uniform load on each beam
2
wl1 l22
k - ft
M lb =
Moment in one beam (Sec: B-B)
2 8
Two-Way Slab Design

Total Moment in both beams
M = (wl1 )
l22
k - ft
8
Full load was transferred east-west by the planks and then was
transferred north-south by the beams;
The same is true for a two-way slab or any other floor system.
General Design Concepts

(1) Direct Design Method (DDM)
Limited to slab systems to uniformly distributed
loads and supported on equally spaced columns.
Method uses a set of coefficients to determine the
design moment at critical sections. Two-way slab
system that do not meet the limitations of the ACI
Code 13.6.1 must be analyzed more accurate
procedures
General Design Concepts

(2) Equivalent Frame Method (EFM)
A three-dimensional building is divided into a
series of two-dimensional equivalent frames by
cutting the building along lines midway between
columns. The resulting frames are considered
separately in the longitudinal and transverse
directions of the building and treated floor by
floor.
Equivalent Frame Method (EFM)
Longitudinal
equivalent frame
Transverse equivalent
frame
Equivalent Frame Method (EFM)
Elevation of the frame
Perspective view
Method of Analysis
(1) Elastic Analysis
Concrete slab may be treated as an elastic
plate. Use Timoshenkos method of analyzing
the structure. Finite element analysis
Method of Analysis
(2) Plastic Analysis
The yield method used to determine the limit state of
slab by considering the yield lines that occur in the
slab as a collapse mechanism.
The strip method, where slab is divided into strips
and the load on the slab is distributed in two
orthogonal directions and the strips are analyzed as
beams.
The optimal analysis presents methods for
minimizing the reinforcement based on plastic
analysis
Method of Analysis
(3) Nonlinear analysis
Simulates the true load-deformation characteristics
of a reinforced concrete slab with finite-element
method takes into consideration of nonlinearities of
the stress-strain relationship of the individual
members.
Column and Middle Strips

The slab is broken
up into column
and middle strips
for analysis
Minimum Slab Thickness for

Two-way Construction
The ACI Code 9.5.3 specifies a minimum slab thickness
to control deflection. There are three empirical
limitations for calculating the slab thickness (h), which
are based on experimental research. If these limitations
are not met, it will be necessary to compute deflection.

(a) For 0.2 m 2
f
y
ln 0.8 +
200,000
h=
36 + 5 ( m 0.2 )
fy in psi. But not less than 5 in.

(b) For 2 < m
f
y
ln 0.8 +
200,000
h=
36 + 9
fy in psi. But not less than 3.5 in.

(c) For m < 0.2
Use the following table 9.5(c)

Slabs without interior
beams spanning
between supports and
ratio of long span to
short span < 2
See section 9.5.3.3
For slabs with beams
spanning between
supports on all sides.

two-way construction
The definitions of the terms are:
h = Minimum slab thickness without interior beams
ln = Clear span in the long direction measured face to
face of column
= the ratio of the long to short clear span
m= The average value of for all beams on the sides
of the panel.
Definition of Beam-to-Slab Stiffness

Ratio,
Accounts for stiffness effect of beams located along
slab edge
reduces deflections of panel
adjacent to beams.
flexural stiffness of beam

flexural stiffness of slab

Ratio,
=
4E cb I b / l
4E cs I s / l
E cb I b
E cs I s
E cb = Modulus of elasticity of beam concrete

E sb = Modulus of elasticity of slab concrete
I b = Moment of inertia of uncracked beam
I s = Moment of inertia of uncracked slab
With width bounded laterally by centerline of

adjacent panels on each side of the beam.
Beam and Slab Sections for

calculation of

calculation of

calculation of
Definition of beam cross-section

Charts may be used to calculate

Slabs without drop panels meeting 13.3.7.1 and 13.3.7.2,
tmin = 5 in
Slabs with drop panels meeting 13.3.7.1 and 13.3.7.2,
tmin = 4 in
Example - Slab
A flat plate floor system with
panels 24 by 20 ft is supported on
20 in. square columns.
Determine the minimum slab
thickness required for the interior
and corner panels. Use fc = 4 ksi
and fy = 60 ksi
Example - Slab
Slab thickness, from table 9.5(c) for fy = 60 ksi
and no edge beams
ln
hmin =
30
20 in. 1 ft.
ln = 24 ft. 2
= 22.33 ft.
2 12 in.
12 in.
22.33 ft.
1 ft.
= 8.93 in. 9 in.

hmin =
30
Example - Slab
Slab thickness, from table 9.5(c) for fy = 60 ksi
and no edge beams for = m = 0 (no beams)
hmin
hmin
ln
=
33
12 in.
22.33 ft.
1 ft.
=
= 8.12 in. 8.5 in.
33
Example Calculations
The floor system consists of
solid slabs and beams in two
directions supported on 20-in.
square columns. Determine the
minimum slab thickness, h,
required for the floor system.
Use fc = 4 ksi and fy = 60 ksi
The cross-sections are:
To find h, we need to find m therefore Ib, Islab and
for each beam and slab in long short direction.
Assume slab thickness h = 7 in. so that x = y < 4 tf
22 in. 7 in. = 15 in. < 4tf = 4 ( 7 in.) = 28 in.
be = 16 in. + 2 (15 in.) = 46 in.
Compute the moment of inertia and centroid
I beam = 22453 in
I slab
Flange
Beam
1 3 1
3
12 in.
= bh = 20 ft
( 7 in.)
12
12
1 ft.
= 6860 in 4
b
7
15
h
46
16
Ai (in2)
322
240
y i (in)
3.5
14.5
562
ybar
I
=
=
y iAi (in3)
1127
3480
I (in4)
d2A (in4)
d (in)
1314.833 -4.69751 7105.442
4500
6.302491 9533.135
4607
5814.833
8.197509
22453.41
in
in4
16638.58
Compute the coefficient for the long direction
long
EI beam 22453 in 4
=
=
4
EI slab
6860 in
= 3.27
Short side of the moment of inertia
I slab
1 3 1
3
12 in.
= bh = 24 ft
( 7 in.)
12
12
1 ft.
= 8232 in 4
Compute the coefficient for short direction
short
EI beam 22453 in 4
=
=
4
EI slab
8232 in
= 2.73
The average m for an interior panel is
avg =
2 long + 2 short
= 3.0
2 ( 3.27 ) + 2 ( 2.73)
4
Compute the coefficient
20 in. 1 ft.
24 ft. 2
llong
2 12 in.
=
=
= 1.22
lshort
20 in. 1 ft.
20 ft. 2
2 12 in.
Compute the thickness for m > 2
fy
12
in.
60000
ln 0.8 +
22.33 ft.
0.8 +
200000
1 ft.
200000
=
h=
36 + 9
36 + 9 (1.22 )
= 6.28 in. Use slab thickness, 6.5 in. or 7 in.
Compute the moment of inertia and centroid for the
L-beam
I L-beam = 15302 in 4
I slab
Flange
Beam
1 3 1
3
12 in.
= bh = 10 ft
( 7 in.)
12
12
1 ft.
= 3430 in 4
b
7
15
h
27
12
Ai (in2)
189
180
y i (in)
3.5
14.5
369
ybar
I
=
=
I (in4)
y iAi (in3)
661.5
2610
771.75
3375
3271.5
4146.75
8.865854
15302.36
in
in4
d2A (in4)
d (in)
-5.36585 5441.761
5.634146 5713.849
11155.61
Compute the m coefficient for long direction
long
EI L-beam 15302 in 4
=
=
4
EI slab
3430 in
= 4.46
Short side of the moment of inertia
I slab
1 3 1
3
12 in.
= bh = 12 ft
( 7 in.)
12
12
1 ft.
= 4116 in 4
Compute the m coefficient for the short direction
short
EI L-beam 15302 in
=
=
4
EI slab
4116 in
= 3.72
Compute the m coefficient for the edges and corner
4.46 + 2.73 + 3.27 + 2.73

m =
4
= 3.30
3.72 + 3.27 + 2.73 + 3.27
m =
4
= 3.25
Compute the m coefficient for the edges and corner
3.72 + 4.46 + 2.73 + 3.27

m =
4
= 3.55
Compute the largest length ln of the slab/beam, edge to
first interior column.
20 in. 1 ft. 12 in. 1 ft.

ln = 24 ft.
2 12 in. 2 12 in.
= 22.67 ft.
Compute the thickness of the slab with m > 2
fy
12
in.
60000
ln 0.8 +
22.67 ft.
0.8 +
200000
1 ft.
200000
=
h=
36 + 9
36 + 9 (1.22 )
= 6.37 in. Use slab thickness, 6.5 in. or 7 in.
The overall depth of the slab is 7 in.
Lecture 24 - Design of
Two-Way Floor Slab System
August 4, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Shear Strength of Slabs
Shear Example
Direct Design Method

In two-way floor systems, the slab must have adequate
thickness to resist both bending moments and shear
forces at critical section. There are three cases to look at
for shear.
1. Two-way Slabs supported on beams
2. Two-Way Slabs without beams
3. Shear Reinforcement in two-way slabs
without beams.

Two-way slabs supported on beams
The critical location is found at d distance from the
column, where
Vc = 2 f c bd
The supporting beams are stiff and are capable of

transmitting floor loads to the columns.

The shear force is calculated using the triangular and
trapezoidal areas. If no shear reinforcement is provided,
the shear force at a distance d from the beam must equal
Vud Vc 2 f c bd
where,
l2
Vud = wu d

Two-Way Slabs without beams
There are two types of shear that need to be addressed
1. One-way shear or beam shear at distance d
from the column
2. Two-way or punch out shear which occurs
along a truncated cone.
1. One-way shear or beam shear at distance d from

the column
2. Two-way or punch out shear which occurs along a
truncated cone.

One-way shear considers critical section a distance d
from the column and the slab is considered as a wide
beam spanning between supports.
Vud Vc = 2 f c bd

Two-way shear fails along a a truncated cone or pyramid
around the column. The critical section is located d/2 from
the column face, column capital, or drop panel.

If shear reinforcement is not provided, the shear strength
of concrete is the smaller of:
Vc = 2 + f c bo d 4 f c bo d
c
bo = perimeter of the critical section

c = ratio of long side of column to short side

If shear reinforcement is not provided, the shear
strength of concrete is the smaller of:
s
+ 2 f c bo d
Vc =
bo
s is 40 for interior columns, 30 for edge

columns, and 20 for corner columns.

Shear Reinforcement in two-way slabs without beams.
For plates and flat slabs, which do not meet the condition
for shear, one can either
- Increase slab thickness
- Add reinforcement
Reinforcement can be done by shearheads, anchor bars,
conventional stirrup cages and studded steel strips.

Shearhead consists of steel I-beams or channel welded
into four cross arms to be placed in slab above
a column. Does not apply to external columns
due to lateral loads and torsion.

Anchor bars consists of steel reinforcement rods or
bent bar reinforcement

Conventional stirrup cages

Studded steel strips

The reinforced slab follows section 11.12.4 in the
ACI Code, where Vn can not
Vn = Vc + Vs 6 f c bo d
Vc = 4 f c bo d
Vs =
The spacing, s, can not exceed d/2.

If a shearhead reinforcement is provided
Vn 7 f c bo d
Av f y d
s
Example Problem
Determine the shear
reinforcement required for an
interior flat panel considering
the following: Vu= 195k, slab
thickness = 9 in., d = 7.5 in.,
fc = 3 ksi, fy= 60 ksi, and
column is 20 x 20 in.
Example Problem
Compute the shear terms find b0 for
Vc = 4 f c b0 d
column
b0 = 4
+ d = 4 ( 20 in. + 7.5 in.)
width
= 110 in.
Example Problem
Compute the maximum allowable shear
Vc = 4 f c b0 d
= 0.75 ( 4 )
1k
3000 (110 in.)( 7.5 in.)
1000 lbs
= 135.6 k
Vu =195 k > 135.6 k Shear reinforcement is need!
Example Problem
Compute the maximum allowable shear
Vc = 6 f c b0 d
= 0.75 ( 6 )
1k
3000 (110 in.)( 7.5 in.)
1000 lbs
= 203.3 k
So Vn >Vu Can use shear reinforcement
Example Problem
Use a shear head or studs as
in inexpensive spacing.
Determine the a for
Vc = 2 f c b0 d
column
b0 = 4
+ 2a
width
Example Problem
Determine the a for
Vu = 2 f c b0 d
((
19500 lb = 0.75 ( 2 ) 3000 4 20 in. + 2a
)) ( 7.5 in.)
a = 41.8 in.
The depth = a+d
= 41.8 in. +7.5 in. = 49.3 in. 50 in.
Example Problem
Determine shear reinforcement
Vs = Vu Vc
= 195 k 135.6 k
= 59.4 k
The Vs per side is Vs / 4 = 14.85 k
Example Problem
Determine shear reinforcement
14.85 k
Vs =
= 19.8 k
0.75
Use a #3 stirrup Av = 2(0.11 in2) = 0.22 in2
Vs =
Av f y d
s
s=
Av f y d
Vs
Example Problem
Determine shear reinforcement spacing
s=
Av f y d
Vs
0.22 in ) ( 60 ksi )( 7.5 in.)

(
=
2
19.8 k
= 5.0 in.
Maximum allowable spacing is
d 7.5 in.
=
= 3.75 in.
2
2
Example Problem
Use s = 3.5 in.
50 in.
# of stirrups =
= 14.3 Use 15 stirrups
3.5 in.
The total distance is 15(3.5 in.)= 52.5 in.
Example Problem
The final result:
15 stirrups at total distance of
52.5 in. So that a = 45 in. and
c = 20 in.
Direct Design Method for Twoway Slab

Method of dividing total static moment Mo into
positive and negative moments.
Limitations on use of Direct Design method
1.Minimum of 3 continuous spans in each direction.
(3 x 3 panel)
2.Rectangular panels with long span/short span 2

3. Successive span in each direction shall not differ by
more than 1/3 the longer span.
4. Columns may be offset from
the basic rectangular grid of
the building by up to 0.1
times the span parallel to the
offset.

5. All loads must be due to gravity only (N/A to
unbraced laterally loaded frames, from mats or
pre-stressed slabs)
6. Service (unfactored) live load 2 service dead
load

7. For panels with beams between supports on all
sides, relative stiffness of the beams in the 2
perpendicular directions.
2
1 2
2
2 1
Shall not be less than 0.2 nor greater than 5.0

Ratio,
Accounts for stiffness effect of beams located along
slab edge
reduces deflections of panel
adjacent to beams.
flexural stiffness of beam

flexural stiffness of slab

Ratio,
=
4E cb I b / l
4E cs I s / l
4E cb I b
4E cs I s
E cb = Modulus of elasticity of beam concrete

E sb = Modulus of elasticity of slab concrete
I b = Moment of inertia of uncracked beam
I s = Moment of inertia of uncracked slab
With width bounded laterally by centerline of adjacent
panels on each side of the beam.
Two-Way Slab Design

Section A-A:
Moment per ft width in planks M =
Total Moment
M f = (wl2 )
l12
8
wl12
k - ft 8
k - ft/ft
Two-Way Slab Design


wl1
k/ft
Uniform load on each beam
2
wl1 l22
k - ft
M lb =
Moment in one beam (Sec: B-B)
2 8
Two-Way Slab Design

Total Moment in both beams
M = (wl1 )
l22
k - ft
8
Full load was transferred east-west by the planks and then was
transferred north-south by the beams;
The same is true for a two-way slab or any other floor system.
Basic Steps in Two-way Slab

Design
1. Choose layout and type of slab.
2. Choose slab thickness to control deflection. Also,
check if thickness is adequate for shear.
3. Choose Design method
Equivalent Frame Method- use elastic frame
analysis to compute positive and negative
moments
Direct Design Method - uses coefficients to
compute positive and negative slab moments
Basic Steps in Two-way Slab

Design
4. Calculate positive and negative moments in the slab.
5. Determine distribution of moments across the width of
the slab. - Based on geometry and beam stiffness.
6. Assign a portion of moment to beams, if present.
7. Design reinforcement for moments from steps 5 and 6.
8. Check shear strengths at the columns

two-way construction
Maximum Spacing of Reinforcement
At points of max. +/- M:
s 2t (ACI 13.3.2 )
and s 18 in. (ACI 7.12.3)
Min Reinforcement Requirements
As( min ) = As( T&S) from ACI 7.12
( ACI
13.3.1)
Distribution of Moments
Slab is considered to be a series of frames in two
directions:
Slab is considered to be a series of frames in two
directions:
Total static Moment, Mo
M0 =
wu l2ln2
(ACI 13 - 3)
8
where wu = factored load per unit area
l2 = transverse width of the strip
ln = clear span between columns
(for circular columns, calc. ln using h = 0.886d c )
Column Strips and Middle

Strips
Moments vary across width of slab panel
Design moments are averaged over

the width of column strips over the
columns & middle strips between
column strips.

Strips
Column strips Design
w/width on either side of
a column centerline equal
to smaller of 0.25 l
2
0.25 l1
l1= length of span in
direction moments are
being determined.
l2= length of span
transverse to l1

Strips
Middle strips: Design
strip bounded by two
column strips.
Positive and Negative Moments in

Panels
M0 is divided into + M and -M Rules given in ACI
sec. 13.6.3
Moment Distribution
Positive and Negative Moments in

Panels
M0 is divided into + M and -M Rules given in ACI
sec. 13.6.3
M u + M u (avg ) M 0 =
2
u 2 n
wll
8
Longitudinal Distribution
of Moments in Slabs
For a typical interior panel, the total static moment is
divided into positive moment 0.35 Mo and negative
moment of 0.65 Mo.
For an exterior panel, the total static moment is
dependent on the type of reinforcement at the outside
edge.
Distribution of M0
Moment Distribution
The factored components
of the moment for the
beam.
Transverse Distribution of
Moments
The longitudinal moment values mentioned are for the
entire width of the equivalent building frame. The
width of two half column strips and two half-middle
stripes of adjacent panels.
Moments
Transverse distribution
of the longitudinal
moments to middle and
column strips is a
function of the ratio of
length l2/l1,1, and t.
Moments
Transverse distribution of the longitudinal moments to
middle and column strips is a function of the ratio of
length l2/l1,1, and t.
1 =
Ecb I b
Ecs I s
t =
EcbC
2 Ecs I s
0.63 x x 3 y
torsional constant
C = 1
y 3
Distribution of M0
ACI Sec 13.6.3.4
For spans framing into a common support negative
moment sections shall be designed to resist the larger
of the 2 interior Mus
ACI Sec. 13.6.3.5
Edge beams or edges of slab shall be proportioned to
resist in torsion their share of exterior negative
factored moments
Factored Moment in
Column Strip
1= Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam to stiffness of
slab in direction l1.
t= Ratio of torsional stiffness of edge beam to
flexural stiffness of slab(width= to beam length)
Factored Moment in an
Interior Strip
Exterior Panel
Exterior Panel
Factored Moment in
Column Strip
Factored Moment in Column

Strip
Factored Moment in Column

Strip
Factored Moments
Factored Moments in beams (ACI Sec. 13.6.3)

Resist a percentage of column strip moment plus
moments due to loads applied directly to beams.
Factored Moments
Factored Moments in Middle strips (ACI Sec. 13.6.3)
The portion of the + Mu and - Mu not resisted
by column strips shall be proportionately
assigned to corresponding half middle strips.
Each middle strip shall be proportioned to
resist the sum of the moments assigned to its 2
half middle strips.
ACI Provisions for Effects of

Pattern Loads
The maximum and minimum bending moments at
the critical sections are obtained by placing the live
load in specific patterns to produce the extreme
values. Placing the live load on all spans will not
produce either the maximum positive or negative
bending moments.
ACI Provisions for Effects of

Pattern Loads
1. The ratio of live to dead load. A high ratio will
increase the effect of pattern loadings.
2. The ratio of column to beam stiffness. A low ratio
will increase the effect of pattern loadings.
3. Pattern loadings. Maximum positive moments
within the spans are less affected by pattern loadings.
Reinforcement Details Loads

After all percentages of the static moments in the
column and middle strip are determined, the steel
reinforcement can be calculated for negative and
positive moments in each strip.
a
2
M u = As f y d
= Ru bd
Reinforcement Details Loads

Calculate Ru and determine the steel ratio , where
=0.9. As = bd. Calculate the minimum As from
ACI codes. Figure 13.3.8 is used to determine the
minimum development length of the bars.
Ru = wu f c (1 0.59 wu )
wu =
fy
fc
Minimum extension for

reinforcement in slabs without
beams(Fig. 13.3.8)
Moment Distribution
beam.
Moments
The longitudinal moment values mentioned are for the
entire width of the equivalent building frame. The
width of two half column strips and two half-middle
stripes of adjacent panels.
Lecture 25 - Design of
Two-Way Floor Slab System
August 6, 2003
CVEN 444
Lecture Goals
Example of DDM
Panel Design
Example 1
Design an interior panel of the two-way
slab for the floor system.The floor
consists of six panels at each direction,
with a panel size 24 ft x 20 ft. All
panels are supported by 20 in square
columns. The slabs are supported by
beams along the column line with cross
sections. The service live load is to be
taken as 80 psf and the service dead
load consists of 24 psf of floor
finishing in addition to the self-weight.
Use fc = 4 ksi and fy = 60 ksi
Example 1 Previous Example

The cross-sections are:
h = 7 in.

The resulting cross section:

The thickness was calculated in an earlier example.
Generally, thickness of the slab is calculated at the
for the external corner slab. So use h = 7 in.
Example 1- Loading
The weight of the slab is given as.
lb
lb
lb
1 ft
DL = 24 2 + 7.0 in.
150 3 = 111.5 2
ft
ft
ft
12 in.
lb
lb
wu = 1.2 DL + 1.6 LL = 1.2 111.5 2 + 1.6 80 2
ft
ft
lb
kips
= 262 2 0.262 2
ft
ft
Example 1 calculation d
Compute the average depth, d for the slab. Use an
average depth for the shear calculation with a #4 bar
(d = 0.5 in)
d = h cover d b / 2
d = 7.0 in. 0.75 in. ( 0.5 in./ 2 ) = 6.0 in.
Example 1 One-way shear

The shear stresses in the slab are not
critical. The critical section is at a
distance d from the face of the beam.
Use 1 ft section.
beam width
Vu = wu 12 ft.
d (1 ft.)
2
1 ft
16 in.
1
ft
12
in.
6 in.
= ( 0.262 k/ft 2 ) 12 ft.
(1 ft.)
2
12 in.
= 2.84 k
Example 1 One-way shear

The one way shear on the face of the beam.
Vc = 2 f c bd
)
)
1 kip
= 0.75 2 3000 (12 in.)( 6 in.)
1000 lb
= 5.92 k > 2.84 k OK.
Example 1 Strip size

Determine the strip sizes for the column and middle
strip. Use the smaller of l1 or l2 so l2 = 20 ft
l=
l2
20 ft
= 5 ft
4
4
Therefore the column strip b = 2( 5 ft) = 10 ft (120 in)
The middle strips are
bl = 20 ft 2(5 ft ) = 10 ft (120 in )
bs = 24 ft 2(5 ft ) = 14 ft (168 in )
Example 1 Strip Size

Calculate the strip sizes
Example 1 Static
Moment Computation
Moment Mo for the two directions.
long direction
20 in. 1 ft.
ln = 24 ft. 2
= 22.333 ft.
2 12 in.
M ol
short direction
wu l2 ) l
(
=
2
n
0.262 k/ft ( 20 ft.) ) ( 22.333 ft.)

(
=
2
8
= 326.7 k-ft
20 in. 1 ft.
ln = 20 ft. 2
= 18.333 ft.
2 12 in.
M os
wu l2 ) l
(
=
2
n
8
= 264.2 k-ft
2
0.262
k/ft
( 24 ft.) ) (18.333 ft.)
(
Example 1 Internal Panel

Moment distribution
Interior panel
0.35Mo
0.65Mo
Example 1 Moments (long)

beam (long).
Negative - Moment
0.65 ( 326.7 k-ft ) = 212.4 k-ft
Positive + Moment
0.35 ( 326.7 k-ft ) = 114.4 k-ft
Example 1- - Moment (long)
Coefficients
The moments of inertia about beam, Ib = 22,453 in4 and

Is = 6860 in4 (long direction) are need to determine the
distribution of the moments between the column and
middle strip.
l2 20 ft
= =
= 0.8333
l1 24 ft
l =
Eb Ib
Es Is
l2
l1
22453 in
= 3.27
6860 in 4
= 3.27 * (0.8333) = 2.71
Example 1- Moment (long)

Factors (negative)
Need to interpolate to
determine how the
negative moment is
distributed.
(
0.9 0.75)
(0.8333 0.5)
Factor = 0.9 +
(0.5 1.0)
= 0.8
Example 1 - Moment (long)

Factors (positive)
Need to interpolate
to determine how
the positive moment
is distributed.
(
0.9 0.75)
(0.8333 0.5)
Factor = 0.9 +
(0.5 1.0)
= 0.8
Example 1 - Moment (long)

column/middle strips
Components on the beam (long).

Column Strip
Negative Moment
Positive + Moment
Middle Strip
Negative Moment
Positive + Moment
0.80 ( 212.4 k-ft ) = 169.9 k-ft

0.80 (114.4 k-ft ) = 91.5 k-ft
0.20 ( 212.4 k-ft ) = 42.5 k-ft
0.20 (114.4 k-ft ) = 22.9 k-ft
Example 1 - Moment (long)-
beam/slab distribution (negative)

When 1 (l2/l1) > 1.0, ACI Code Section 13.6.5 indicates
that 85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned
to the beam and balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab
in the column strip.
Column Strip - Negative Moment (169.9 k-ft)
Beam Moment
0.85 ( 169.9 k-ft ) = 144.4 k-ft
Slab Moment
0.15 ( 169.9 k-ft ) = 25.5 k-ft
Example 1 - Moment (long)-
beam/slab distribution (positive)
When 1 (l2/l1) > 1.0, ACI Code Section 13.6.5

indicates that 85 % of the moment in the column strip
is assigned to the beam and balance of 15 % is
assigned to the slab in the column strip.
Column Strip - Positive Moment (91.5 k-ft)
Beam Moment
0.85 ( 91.5 k-ft ) = 77.8 k-ft
Slab Moment
0.15 ( 91.5 k-ft ) = 13.7 k-ft
Example 1- Moment (short)

beam (short).
Negative Moment
0.65 ( 264.2 k-ft ) = 171.7 k-ft
Positive + Moment
0.35 ( 264.2 k-ft ) = 92.5 k-ft
Example 1 - Moment (short)
coefficients
The moments of inertia about beam, Ib = 22,453 in4 and

Is = 8232 in4 (short direction) are need to determine the
distribution of the moments between the column and
middle strip.
l
24 ft
l2
20 ft
= 1.22222
4
Eb I b 22453 in
1 =
=
= 2.73
4
Es I s
8232 in
l1
1 = 2.73* (1.2222 ) = 3.333
l2
Factors (negative)
Need to interpolate
to determine how
the negative
moment is
distributed.
(
0.75 0.45)
(1.2222 1.0)
Factor = 0.75 +
(1.0 2.0)
= 0.6833
Factors (positive)
Need to interpolate
to determine how
the positive
moment is
distributed.
(
0.75 0.45)
(1.2222 1.0)
Factor = 0.75 +
(1.0 2.0)
= 0.6833
Example 1- Moment (short)

column/middle strip
Components on the beam (short).

Column Strip
Negative Moment
0.683 ( 171.7 k-ft ) = 117.3 k-ft
Positive + Moment
0.683 ( 92.5 k-ft ) = 63.2 k-ft
Middle Strip
Negative Moment
0.317 ( 171.7 k-ft ) = 54.4 k-ft
Positive + Moment
0.317 ( 92.5 k-ft ) = 29.3 k-ft
beam/slab distribution (negative)

When 1 (l2/l1) > 1.0, ACI Code Section 13.6.5 indicates
that 85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned
to the beam and balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab
in the column strip.
Column Strip - Negative Moment (117.3 k-ft)
Beam Moment
0.85 ( 117.3 k-ft ) = 99.7 k-ft
Slab Moment
0.15 ( 117.3 k-ft ) = 17.6 k-ft
beam/slab distribution (positive)

When 1 (l2/l1) > 1.0, ACI Code Section 13.6.5
indicates that 85 % of the moment in the column strip
is assigned to the beam and balance of 15 % is
assigned to the slab in the column strip.
Column Strip - Positive Moment (63.2 k-ft)
Beam Moment
0.85 ( 63.2 k-ft ) = 53.7 k-ft
Slab Moment
0.15 ( 63.2 k-ft ) = 9.5 k-ft
Example 1 - Summary
Example 1- Reinforcement
calculation
Use same procedure to do the reinforcement on the

concrete. Calculate the bars from the earlier
version of the problem.
Example 1 - Reinforcement
calculation
Computing the reinforcement uses:

Ru =
Mu
bd
R u = (w f c (1 0.59 w)) w 1.70 w +

2
w=
1.7 * R
2
u
1.70 (1.7 ) 4
fc
2
1.7 * R u
fc
w=
=0
f y
fc
wf c
fy
Example 1 - Reinforcement calculation
for long middle strip (negative)
Compute the reinforcement need for the negative moment

in long direction. Middle strip width b =120 in. (10 ft),
d =6 in. and Mu = 42.5 k-ft
12 in.
42.5 k-ft
Mu
1 ft
= 0.118 ksi
Ru = 2 =
2
bd
(120 in.)( 6 in.)
1.7 ( 0.118 ksi )

=0
w 1.70 w +
0.9 ( 3 ksi )
2
Compute the reinforcement need for the negative

moment in long direction. Middle strip width b =120 in.
(10 ft) d =6 in. and Mu = 42.5 k-ft
w=
1.70
(1.7 )
4 ( 0.7433)
= 0.0449
2
wf c 0.0449 ( 3 ksi )
=
= 0.00225
=
fy
60 ksi
The area of the steel reinforcement for a strip width

b =120 in. (10 ft), d = 6 in., and h = 7 in.
As = bd = 0.00225 (120 in.)( 6 in.) = 1.62 in
As( min ) = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 (120 in.)( 7 in.) = 1.52 in

b =120 in. (10 ft), d = 6 in., and As = 1.62 in2. Use a
#4 bar (Ab =0.20 in2 )
2
As 1.62 in
=
= 8.08 Use 9 bars
# bars =
2
Ab 0.2 in
120 in.
s=
= 13.33 in.
9
Use 10 #4
Maximum spacing is 2(h) or

18 in.
So 13.33 in < 14 in. OK!
Example 1 Long Results

Column Strip
The long
direction using
# 4 bars
Middle Strip
Moment (k-ft)
b (in)
d (in)
h (in)
fy (ksi)
Negative
25.5
120
6
7
60
Positive
13.7
120
6
7
60
Negative
42.5
120
6
7
60
Positive
22.9
120
6
7
60
fc (ksi)
Ru (ksi)
w
0.07083
0.02665
0.03806
0.01421
0.11806
0.04491
0.06361
0.02390
0.00133
0.00071
0.00225
0.00119
A s (in2)
0.96
0.51
1.62
0.86
A s(m in) (in2)

# bars req
spacing (in)
Use
# bars (#4)
spacing (in)
1.51
7.56
15.00
1.51
7.56
15.00
1.51
8.08
13.33
1.51
7.56
15.00
10
12
10
12
10
12
10
12
Example 1 Long summary

The long direction
using # 4 bars
Example 1 Short Results

Column Strip
The short
direction
using # 4
bars
Middle Strip
Moment (k-ft)
b (in)
d (in)
h (in)
fy (ksi)
Negative
17.6
120
6
7
60
Positive
9.5
120
6
7
60
Negative
54.4
168
6
7
60
Positive
29.3
168
6
7
60
fc (ksi)
Ru (ksi)
w
0.04889
0.01830
0.02639
0.00983
0.10794
0.04096
0.05813
0.02181
0.00092
0.00049
0.00205
0.00109
A s (in2)
0.66
0.35
2.06
1.10
A s(m in) (in2)

# bars req
spacing (in)
Use
# bars (#4)
spacing (in)
1.51
7.56
15.00
1.51
7.56
15.00
2.12
10.58
15.27
2.12
10.58
15.27
10
12
10
12
14
12
14
12
Example 1 Short Summary

The short direction
using # 4 bars
Example Two-way Slab (Panels)

Using the direct design method,
design the typical exterior flatslab panel with drop down
panels only. All panels are
supported on 20 in. square
columns, 12 ft long. The slab
carries a uniform service live
load of 80 psf and service dead
load that consists of 24 psf of
finished in addition to the slab
self-weight. Use fc = 4 ksi and
fy = 60 ksi

The thickness of the slab is
found using
12 in
20 in
24 *
ln
ft
=
= 8.12 in No panels
33
33
12 in
20 in
24 *
ln
ft
=
= 7.44 in 8.0 in
36
36

From the ACI Code limitation:
1. For panels with discontinuous edges, end beams
with a minimum equal to 0.8 must be used;
otherwise the minimum slab thickness calculated
by the equations must be increased by at least 10%.
2. When drop panels are used without beams, the
minimum slab thickness may be reduced by 10 %.
The drop panels should extend in each direction
from the centerline of support a distance not less
than one-sixth of the span length in that direction
between center to center of supports and also
project below the slab at least h/4.

From the ACI Code limitation:
3. Regardless of the values obtained for the equations,
the thickness of two-way slabs shall not be less
than the following:
1. For slabs without beams or drop panels, 5 in.
2. for slabs without beams but with drop
panels, 4 in.
3. for slabs with beams on all four sides with
m > 2.0, 3.5 in. and for m < 2.0, 5 in. (ACI
Code 9.5.3)

Therefore, the panel thickness is
h+
= 8 in. +
8 in.
= 10 in.
The panel half width are at least L/6 in length.
24 ft
20 ft
= 4 ft
= 3.33 ft 3.5 ft

Therefore, the drop down panel thickness is 10 in.
and has 7 ft x 8 ft.

The load on the slab is given as:
1 ft
3
2
Slab load = 24 lb/ft + ( 8 in.)
150
lb/ft
=
124
lb/ft
12 in.
2
wu = 1.2 (124 lb/ft 2 ) + 1.6 ( 80 lb/ft 2 ) = 276.8 lb/ft 2
The load on the panel is

1 ft
3
2
Panel load = 24 lb/ft + (10 in.)
150
lb/ft
=
149
lb/ft
12
in.
wu = 1.2 (149 lb/ft 2 ) + 1.6 ( 80 lb/ft 2 ) = 306.8 lb/ft 2

The drop panel length is L/3 in each direction, then the
average wu is
2
1
2
2
wu = ( 276.8 lb/ft ) + ( 306.8 lb/ft )
3
3
2
= 286.8 lb/ft

The punch out shear at center column is
d = 10 in. 0.75 in. 0.5 in.

= 8.75 in.
bo = 4(20 in. + 8.75 in.)
= 115 in.

The punch out shear at center column is
2
1
ft
Vu = ( 0.287 k/ft 2 ) ( 24 ft )( 20 ft ) 28.75 in.
12
in.
= 136.1 k
Vc = 4 f c bo d
= 0.75 4 4000 (115 in.)( 8.75 in.)

= 190.9 k > Vu OK.

The punch out shear at panel is
d = 8 in. 0.75 in. 0.5 in.

= 6.75 in.
12 in.
+ 6.75 in.
bo = 2 8 ft.
1 ft.
12 in.
+ 6.75 in.
+ 2 7 ft.
1 ft.
= 387 in.

The punch out shear at panel is
( 24 ft )( 20 ft )
2
Vu = ( 0.287 k/ft )
1 ft
1 ft
102.75 in. 12 in. 90.75 in. 12 in.

= 119.2 k
Vc = 4 f c bo d
= 0.75 4 4000 ( 387 in.)( 6.75 in.)

= 495.6 k > Vu OK.
One way shear is not critical.

Moment Mo for the two directions are:
2
2
Long
0.287 k/ft ( 20 ft ) ) ( 22.33 ft )
(
= 357.9 k-ft
direction M o =
8
2
2
Short
0.287 k/ft ( 24 ft ) ) (18.33 ft )
(
= 289.4 k-ft
direction M o =
8

The column strip will be 10 ft. (20 ft /4 = 5ft),
therefore the middle strips for long section is 10 ft and
the middle strip for the short section will be 14 ft.
The average d for
the panel section
The average d for
the slab section
d = 10 in. 1.5 in.

= 8.5 in.
d = 8 in. 1.5 in.
= 6.5 in.

The factored
components of the
moment for the beam
(long) is similar to an
interior beam.
Negative Moment
0.65 ( 357.9 k-ft ) = 232.6 k-ft
Positive + Moment
0.35 ( 357.9 k-ft ) = 125.3 k-ft

Components on the beam (long) interior.
Column Strip
Negative Moment
0.75 ( 232.6 k-ft ) = 174.5 k-ft
Positive + Moment
0.60 (125.3 k-ft ) = 75.2 k-ft

Components on the beam (long) interior.
Middle Strip
Negative Moment
0.25 ( 232.6 k-ft ) = 58.2 k-ft
Positive + Moment
0.40 (125.3 k-ft ) = 50.2 k-ft

Computing the reinforcement uses:
Ru =
Mu
bd 2
R u = (w f c (1 0.59 w)) w 1.70 w +

2
w=
1.7 * R
2
u
1.70 (1.7 ) 4
fc
2
1.7 * R u
fc
w=
=0
f y
fc
wf c
fy

Compute the reinforcement need for the internal moment
in long direction. Strip width b =120 in. (10 ft) d =8.5 in.
and Mu = 174.5 k-ft
12 in.
174.5 k-ft
Mu
1 ft
Ru = 2 =
= 0.242 ksi
2
bd
(120 in.)( 8.5 in.)
1.7 *0.242 ksi

w 1.70 w +
=0
0.9 ( 4 ksi )
2

Compute the reinforcement need for the internal moment
in long direction. Strip width b =120 in. (10 ft) d =8.5 in.
and Mu = 174.5 k-ft
w=
1.70
(1.7 )
4 ( 0.1141)
= 0.0700
2
wf c 0.0700 ( 4 ksi )
=
=
= 0.00466
60 ksi
fy

b =120 in. (10 ft), d = 8.5 in., and h = 10 in.
As = bd = 0.00466 (120 in.)( 8.5 in.) = 4.76 in
As( min ) = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 (120 in.)(10 in.) = 2.16 in

b =120 in. (10 ft), d = 8.5 in., and As = 4.76 in2. Use
a #5 bar (Ab = 0.31 in2 )
2
As 4.76 in
# bars =
=
= 15.3 Use 16 bars
2
Ab 0.31 in
120 in.
s=
= 7.5 in.
16
Maximum spacing is 2(h)

or 18 in.
So 7.5 in. < 18 in. OK

Column Strip
The long
direction
Middle Strip
Moment (k-ft)
b (in)
d (in)
h (in)
fy (ksi)
Negative
174.5
120
8.5
10
60
Positive
75.2
120
6.5
8
60
Negative
58.2
120
6.5
8
60
Positive
50.2
120
6.5
8
60
fc (ksi)
Ru (ksi)
w
0.24152
0.06997
0.17799
0.05097
0.13775
0.03917
0.11882
0.03367
0.00466
0.00340
0.00261
0.00224
A s (in2)
4.76
2.65
2.04
1.75
A s(m in) (in2)

# bars req
spacing (in)
Use
# bars
spacing (in)
2.16
15.35
7.50
1.73
13.25
8.57
1.73
10.18
10.91
1.73
8.75
13.33
16 #5
7.5
15 #4
8
10 #4
12
10 #4
12

Column Strip
The short
direction
Middle Strip
Moment (k-ft)
b (in)
d (in)
h (in)
fy (ksi)
Negative
141.1
120
8.5
10
60
Positive
60.8
120
6.5
8
60
Negative
47.1
168
6.5
8
60
Positive
40.5
168
6.5
8
60
fc (ksi)
Ru (ksi)
w
0.19529
0.07570
0.14391
0.05508
0.07963
0.03002
0.06847
0.02575
0.00379
0.00275
0.00150
0.00129
A s (in2)
3.86
2.15
1.64
1.41
A s(m in) (in2)

# bars req
spacing (in)
Use
# bars
spacing (in)
2.16
12.45
9.23
1.73
10.74
10.91
2.42
12.10
12.92
2.42
12.10
12.92
16 #5
7.5
12 #4
10
14 #4
12
14 #4
12
Lecture 26 Footings
August 8, 2003
CVEN444
Lecture Goals
Footing Classification
Footing Design
Footing Examples
Footings
Definition
Footings are structural members used to support
columns and walls and to transmit and distribute
their loads to the soil in such a way that the load
bearing capacity of the soil is not exceeded,
excessive settlement, differential settlement,or
rotation are prevented and adequate safety
against overturning or sliding is maintained.
Types of Footings
Wall footings are used to
support structural walls that
carry loads for other floors
or to support nonstructural
walls.
Types of Footings
Isolated or single footings
are used to support single
columns. This is one of the
most economical types of
footings and is used when
columns are spaced at
relatively long distances.
Types of Footings
Combined footings usually
support two columns, or three
columns not in a row.
Combined footings are used
when tow columns are so close
that single footings cannot be
used or when one column is
located at or near a property
line.
Types of Footings
Cantilever or strap footings
consist of two single footings
connected with a beam or a
strap and support two single
columns. This type replaces a
combined footing and is more
economical.
Types of Footings
Continuous footings
support a row of three or
more columns. They have
limited width and continue
under all columns.
Types of Footings
Rafted or mat foundation
consists of one footing usually
placed under the entire building
area. They are used, when soil
bearing capacity is low, column
loads are heavy single footings
cannot be used, piles are not used
and differential settlement must
be reduced.
Types of Footings
Pile caps are thick slabs
used to tie a group of piles
together to support and
transmit column loads to the
piles.
Distribution of Soil Pressure

When the column load P is
applied on the centroid of the
footing, a uniform pressure is
assumed to develop on the soil
surface below the footing area.
However the actual distribution of the soil is not uniform,
but depends on may factors especially the composition of
the soil and degree of flexibility of the footing.
Distribution of Soil Pressure
Soil pressure distribution in

cohesionless soil.
Soil pressure distribution in

cohesive soil.
Design Considerations
Footings must be designed to carry the column loads
and transmit them to the soil safely while satisfying
code limitations.
1. The area of the footing based on the allowable
bearing soil capacity
2. Two-way shear or punch out shear.
3. One-way bearing
4. Bending moment and steel reinforcement
required
Design Considerations
Footings must be designed to carry the column loads
and transmit them to the soil safely while satisfying
code limitations.
1. Bearing capacity of columns at their base
2. Dowel requirements
3. Development length of bars
4. Differential settlement
Size of Footings
The area of footing can be determined from the actual
external loads such that the allowable soil pressure is
not exceeded.
Area of footing =
Total load (including self - weight )

allowable soil pressure
Strength design requirements
qu =
Pu
area of footing
Two-Way Shear (Punching Shear)

For two-way shear in slabs (& footings) Vc is smallest of
4
Vc = 2 + f c b0 d
c
where, c =
b0 =
ACI 11-35
long side/short side of column concentrated

load or reaction area < 2
length of critical perimeter around the
column
When > 2 the allowable Vc is reduced.
Design of two-way shear

1. Assume d.
2. Determine b0.
b0 = 4(c+d)
for square columns

where one side = c
b0 = 2(c1+d) +2(c2+d)
for rectangular
columns of sides c1
and c2.

3. The shear force Vu acts at a
section that has a length
b0 = 4(c+d) or 2(c1+d) +2(c2+d)
and a depth d; the section is
subjected to a vertical downward
load Pu and vertical upward
pressure qu.
Vu = Pu qu ( c + d ) for square columns
2
Vu = Pu qu ( c1 + d )( c2 + d ) for rectangular columns

4. Allowable Vc = 4
Let Vu=Vc
d=
f c b0 d
Vu
4 f c b0
If d is not close to the assumed d,

revise your assumptions
Design of one-way shear

For footings with bending
action in one direction the
critical section is located a
distance d from face of column
Vc = 2 f c b0 d

The ultimate shearing force at
section m-m can be calculated
L c
Vu = qu b d
2 2
If no shear reinforcement is to be
used, then d can be checked

If no shear reinforcement is
to be used, then d can be
checked, assuming Vu = Vc
d=
Vu
2 f c b
Flexural Strength and Footing

reinforcement
The bending moment in each
direction of the footing must be
checked and the appropriate
reinforcement must be provided.
As =
Mu
a
f y d
2

reinforcement
Another approach is to
calculated Ru = Mu / bd2 and
determine the steel percentage
required . Determine As then
check if assumed a is close to
calculated a
a=
f y As
0.85 f c b

reinforcement
The minimum steel percentage
required in flexural members is
200/fy with minimum area and
maximum spacing of steel bars
in the direction of bending shall
be as required for shrinkage
temperature reinforcement.

reinforcement
The reinforcement in one-way footings
and two-way footings must be
distributed across the entire width of
the footing.
Reinforcement in band width
Total reinforcement in short direction
where
+1
long side of footing

short side of footing
Bearing Capacity of Column at

Base
The loads from the column act on the footing at the
base of the column, on an area equal to area of the
column cross-section. Compressive forces are
transferred to the footing directly by bearing on the
concrete. Tensile forces must be resisted by
reinforcement, neglecting any contribution by
concrete.

Base
Force acting on the concrete at the base of the column
must not exceed the bearing strength of the concrete
N1 = (0.85 f c A1 )
where = 0.65 and
A1 =bearing area of column

Base
The value of the bearing strength may be multiplied by a
factor A2 / A1 2.0 for bearing on footing when the
supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded
area.
The modified bearing
strength
N 2 (0.85 f c A1 ) A2 / A1
N 2 2 (0.85 f c A1 )
Dowels in Footings
A minimum steel ratio = 0.005 of the column section
as compared to = 0.01 as minimum reinforcement for
the column itself. The number of dowel bars needed is
four these may be placed at the four corners of the
column. The dowel bars are usually extended into the
footing, bent at the ends, and tied to the main footing
reinforcement. The dowel diameter shall not exceed
the diameter of the longitudinal bars in the column by
more than 0.15 in.
Development length of the

Reinforcing Bars
The development length for compression bars was given
ld = 0.02 f y d b /
fc
but not less than
0.003 f y d b 8 in.
Dowel bars must be checked for proper development
length.
Differential Settlement
Footing usually support the following loads:
1. Dead loads from the substructure and superstructure
2. Live load resulting from material or occupancy
3. Weight of material used in back filling
4. Wind loads
General Requirements for Footing

Design
1. A site investigation is required to determine the
chemical and physical properties of the soil.
2. Determine the magnitude and distribution of
loads form the superstructure.
3. Establish the criteria and the tolerance for the
total and differential settlements of the structure.

Design
4. Determine the most suitable and economic type
of foundation.
5. Determine the depth of the footings below the
ground level and the method of excavation.
6. Establish the allowable bearing pressure to be
used in design.

Design
7. Determine the pressure distribution beneath the
footing based on its width
8. Perform a settlement analysis.
Example Wall
Design a plain concrete footing to support a 16 in.
thick concrete wall. The load on the wall consist of
16 k/ft dead load (including the self-weight of wall)
and a 10 k/ft live load the base of the footing is 4 ft
below final grade. fc = 3 ksi and the allowable soil
pressure = 5 k/ft2
Example - Wall
Assume a depth of footing. (1.5 ft or 18 in.) The
weight of concrete and the soil are:
1 ft.
3
Wc = d = 150 lb/ft *18 in. *
12 in.
2
= 225 lb/ft
1 ft.
Ws = s ds = 100 lb/ft * 4 ft 18 in. *
12 in.
= 250 lb/ft 2
3
Example - Wall
The effective soil pressure is given as:
qeff = qs Wc Ws
= 5000 lb/ft 225 lb/ft 250 lb/ft
2
= 4525 lb/ft 4.525 k/ft

2
Example - Wall
Calculate the size of the footing for 1-ft of wall:
Actual Loads = DL + LL = 16 k/ft + 10 k/ft

= 26 k/ft
26 k/ft
Width of footing =
= 5.75 ft
2
4.525 k/ft
Use 6 ft
Example Wall
Calculate net upward pressure:
Actual Loads = 1.2 DL + 1.6 LL

= 1.2 (16 k/ft ) + 1.6 (10 k/ft )
= 35.2 k/ft
35.2 k/ft
2
Net upward pressure qn =
= 5.87 k / ft
6 ft
Example Wall
Calculate the depth of the reinforcement use # 8 bars
with a crisscrossing layering.
d = h cover 1.5d b
d = 18 in. 3 in 1.5 (1.0 in )

= 13.5 in.
Example Wall
The depth of the footing can be calculated by using
one-way shear
1 ft
16 in
1
ft
12
in
L c
6 ft
13.5 in
d
2
2 2
2
12 in
= 1.21 ft
L c
Vu = qn ( l2 ) d
2 2
2
= 5.87 k/ft (1 ft )(1.21 ft ) = 7.1 k
Example Wall
one-way shear
1000 lb
7.1 k
Vu
1k
=
d=
2 fc b
12 in
0.75 2 3000 1 ft
1 ft
= 7.2 in.
The footing is 13.5 in. > 7.2 in. so it will work.
Example Wall
Calculate the bending moment of the footing at the
edge of the wall
1 ft
16 in
12
in
L c 6 ft
= 2.33 ft
2
2
2
L c

2.33 ft )
(
L c 2 2
2
M u = qn
b = 5.87 k/ft ( 2.33 ft )
(1 ft )
2
2
2 2
= 15.98 k-ft
Example Wall
Calculate Ru for the footing to find of the footing.
12 in.
15.98 k-ft *
Mu
1 ft
Ru = 2 =
= 0.0877 ksi
2
bd
(12 in.) * (13.5 in )
Example Wall
From Ru for the footing the value can be found.
1.7 Ru
Ru = f c (1 0.59 ) 1.7 +
=0
fc
2
0.0877 ksi
1.7 (1.7 ) 4 1.7

0.9 ( 3 ksi )
=
= 0.03312
2
fy
0.03312 ( 3 ksi )
= 0.03312 =
= 0.00166
60 ksi
fc
2
Example Wall
Compute the area of steel needed
12 in.
2
As = bd = 0.00166 1 ft
(13.5 in.) = 0.27 in
1 ft
The minimum amount of steel for shrinkage is
As = 0.0018 bh = 0.0018 (12 in.)(18 in.) = 0.389 in
The minimum amount of steel for flexure is

200
200
2
12
in.
13.5
in.
0.54
in
As =
bd =
=
Use
)(
)
(
fy
60000
Example Wall
Use a #7 bar (0.60 in2) Compute the number of bars
need
As 0.54 in
n=
=
= 0.9 Use 1 bars/ ft
2
Ab 0.60 in
Example Wall
Check the bearing stress. The bearing strength N1, at
the base of the wall, 16 in x 12 in., = 0.65
N1 = ( 0.85 f c A1 ) = 0.65 ( 0.85 ( 3 ksi )(16 in )(12 in ) )
= 318.2 k
The bearing strength, N2, at the top of the footing is

N 2 = N1
A2
A1
2 N1
Example Wall
A2 = ( 6 ft )(1 ft ) = 6 ft 2
1 ft
2
=
A1 = 16 in
1
ft
1.33
ft
( )
12 in.

A2
6 ft 2
=
= 4.5
2
A1
1.33 ft
>
N 2 = 2 N1 = 2 ( 318.2 k ) = 636.4 k
Example Wall
Pu =35.2 k < N1, bearing stress is adequate. The
minimum area of dowels is required.
0.005 A1 = 0.005* (16 in )(12 in ) = 0.92 in 2
Use minimum number of bars is 2, so use 4 # 8 bars

placed at the four corners of the column.
Example Wall
The development length of the dowels in compression
from ACI Code 12.3.2 for compression.
ld =
0.02d b f y
fc
0.02 ( 0.875 in )( 60000 psi )

3000 psi
= 19.17 in Use 20 in
The minimum ld , which has to be greater than 8 in., is

ld = 0.0003d b f y = 0.0003 ( 0.875 in.)( 60000 psi )
= 15.75 in. 8 in.
Example Wall
Therefore, use 4#7 dowels in the corners of
the column extending 20 in. into the column
and the footing. Note that ld is less than the
given d = 15.75 in., which is sufficient
development length.
Example Wall
The development length, ld for the #7 bars for the
reinforcement of the footing.
fy
f y db
ld
=
ld =
d b 20 f c
20 f c
60000 psi )( 0.875 in )
(
=
= 47.9 in
20 3000 psi
There is not adequate development length provided

need to design a hook.
L
c 72 in.
16 in.
ld = cover =
3 in.
= 25 in.
2
2
2
2
Example Square Footing

Design a square footing to support a 18 in. square
column tied interior column reinforced with 8 #9
bars. The column carries an unfactored axial dead
load of 245 k and an axial live load of 200 k. The
base of the footing is 4 ft. below final grade and
allowable soil pressure is 5 k/ft2 Use fc = 4 ksi and
fy = 60 ksi

Assume a depth of footing. (2 ft or 24 in.) The
Wc = d = 150 lb/ft * 24 in. *

3
1 ft.
= 300 lb/ft
12 in.
1
ft.
= 200 lb/ft 2
Ws = s d s = 100 lb/ft * 4 ft 24 in. *
12 in.

qeff = qs Wc Ws
= 5000 lb/ft 300 lb/ft 200 lb/ft
2
= 4500 lb/ft 4.5 k/ft

Calculate the size of the footing:
Actual Loads = DL + LL = 245 k + 200 k = 445 k

Area of footing =
445 k
= 98.9 ft 2
4.5 k/ft 2
Side of footing = 9.94 ft Use 10 ft


= 1.2(245 k ) + 1.6(200 k ) = 614 k
614 k
2
6.14
k
/
ft
=
100 ft 2

d = h cover 1.5d b
d = 24 in. 3 in 1.5(1.0 in )
= 19.5 in.

Calculate perimeter for two-way shear or
punch out shear. The column is 18 in.
square.
bo = 4(c + d )
= 4(18 in. + 19.5 in.) = 150 in.
1 ft
= 3.125 ft
c + d = (18 in. + 19.5 in.)
12 in

Calculate the shear Vu
Vu = Pu qn (c + d )
= 614 k 6.14 k/ft (3.125 ft )

2
= 554 k
The shape parameter
10 ft
10 ft
=1

Calculate d value from the shear capacity according to
11.12.2.1 chose the largest value of d
Vc = 2 + f c b0 d
c
Vc = s + 2 f c b0 d
bo
Vc = 4 f c b0 d
s is 40 for interior, 30 for edge

and 20 for corner column

two way shear
1000 lb
554 k
Vu
1k
d=
=
4 f c b0 0.75 4 4000 (150 in )
= 19.47 in.

The second equation bo is dependent on d so use the
assumed values and you will find that d is smaller and
= 40
Vu
d=
40d
+ 2 f c b0

bo
1000 lb
554 k
1k
=
= 10.81 in.
40(19.5 in )
+ 2 4000 (150 in )
0.75
150 in

The depth of the footing can be calculated
by using one-way shear
1 ft
18 in
L c
1 ft
10 ft
12
in
d =
19.5 in
2
2
2 2
12 in
= 2.625 ft
L c
Vu = qn (l2 ) d
2 2
= 6.14 k/ft 2 (10 ft )(2.625 ft ) = 161.2 k

one-way shear
1000 lb
161.2 k
Vu
1k
d=
=
2 fc b
12 in
0.75 2 4000 10 ft

1 ft
= 14.2 in.

edge of the column
1 ft
18 in
L c 10 ft
12 in = 4.25 ft
=
2
2
2 2
L c

(
4.25 ft )
L c 2 2
(10 ft )
b = 6.14 k/ft (4.25 ft )
M u = qn
2
2
2 2
= 554.5 k - ft

12 in.
554.5 k - ft *
Mu
1 ft
Ru = 2 =
2
bd
(120 in )* (19.5 in )
= 0.1458 ksi

1.7 Ru
=0
Ru = f c (1 0.59 ) 1.7 +
f c
2
0.1458 ksi
1.7 (1.7 ) 41.7

0.9(4 ksi )
=
= 0.04152
2
fy
0.04152(4 ksi )
= 0.04152 =
= 0.00277
60 ksi
fc
2

12 in.
2
(
)
As = bd = 0.0027710 ft
19
.
5
in.
=
6
.
48
in
1 ft

As = 0.0018 bh = 0.0018(120 in.)(24 in.) = 5.18 in 2

200
200
(120 in.)(19.5 in.) = 7.8 in 2
As =
bd =
fy
60000
Use

need
As
7.8 in 2
n=
=
= 13 Use 13 bars
Ab 0.60 in 2
Determine the spacing between bars
s=
L 2 * cover
(n 1)
120 in - 2(3 in )
12
= 9.5 in

the base of the column, 18 in x 18 in., = 0.65
N1 = (0.85 f c A1 ) = 0.65 0.85(4 ksi )(18 in ) = 716 k

2

N 2 = N1
A2
A1
2 N1

A2 = (10 ft ) = 100 ft 2
2
1 ft
2
A1 = 18 in
= 2.25 ft
12 in.

A2
100 ft 2
=
= 6.67 > 2 N 2 = 2 N1 = 2(716 k ) = 1432 k
2
A1
2.25 ft

Pu =614 k < N1, bearing stress is adequate. The
0.005 A1 = 0.005 * (18 in ) = 1.62 in 2
2


ld =
0.02d b f y
fc
0.02(1 in )(60000 psi )
= 18.97 in Use 19 in
4000 psi

ld = 0.0003d b f y = 0.0003(1 in )(60000 psi ) = 18 in 8 in

development length.

fy
f ydb
(
ld
60000 psi )(0.875 in )
=
ld =
=
= 41.5 in
20 f c
20 4000 psi
d b 20 f c
There is adequate development length provided.
ld =
L
2
cover
c
2
120 in
2
3 in
18 in
2
= 48 in

Final Design
Example Restricted Footing

Design a footing to support a 18 in. square column
tied interior column reinforced with 8 #9 bars.
The column carries an unfactored axial dead load
of 245 k and an axial live load of 200 k. The base
of the footing is 4 ft. below final grade and
allowable soil pressure is 5 k/ft2 Use fc = 3 ksi and
fy = 60 ksi. Limit one side of the footing to 8.5 ft.

Assume a depth of footing. (2 ft or 24 in.) The
Wc = d = 150 lb/ft * 24 in. *

3
1 ft.
= 300 lb/ft
12 in.
1
ft.
= 200 lb/ft 2
Ws = s d s = 100 lb/ft * 4 ft 24 in. *
12 in.

qeff = qs Wc Ws
= 5000 lb/ft 300 lb/ft 200 lb/ft
2
= 4500 lb/ft 4.5 k/ft


445 k
2
=
98.9
ft
Area of footing =
2
4.5 k/ft
98.9 ft 2
Side of footing =
= 11.64 ft Use 12 ft
8.5 ft


= 1.2(245 k ) + 1.6(200 k )
= 614 k
6 14 k
(8.5 ft )(12 ft )
= 6.02 k / ft

d = h cover 1.5d b
d = 24 in. 3 in 1.5(1.0 in )
= 19.5 in.

The depth of the footing can be calculated
by using the one-way shear (long direction)
1 ft
18 in
L c
1 ft
12 ft
12
in
d =
19.5 in
2
2
2 2
12 in
= 3.625 ft
Vu =135.5 k in
short direction
L c
Vu = qn (l2 ) d
2 2
= 6.02 k/ft 2 (8.5 ft )(3.625 ft ) = 185.5 k

one-way shear design
1000 lb
185.5 k
Vu
1k
d=
=
2 fc b
12 in
0.75 2 4000 8.5 ft

1 ft
= 19.2 in.

square.
bo = 4(c + d )
= 4(18 in. + 19.5 in.) = 150 in.
1 ft
= 3.125 ft
c + d = (18 in. + 19.5 in.)
12 in

Vu = Pu qn (c + d )
= 614 k 6.02 k/ft (3.125 ft ) = 555.2 k

2
The shape parameter
12 ft
8.5 ft
= 1.41

Calculate d from the shear capacity according to
11.12.2.1 chose the largest value of d.
Vc = 2 + f c b0 d
c
Vc = s + 2 f c b0 d
bo
Vc = 4 f c b0 d


The depth of the footing can be calculated for the
two way shear
1000 lb
555.2 k
Vu
1k
d=
=
4
4
2 + f c b0 0.75 2 +
4000 (150 in )
1.41
= 16.13 in.

The third equation bo is dependent on d so use the
= 40
d=
Vu
40d
+ 2 f c b0

bo
1000 lb
555.2 k
1k
=
40(19.5 in )
0.75
+ 2 4000 (150 in )
150 in
= 10.84 in.

the two way shear
1000 lb
555.2 k
Vu
1k
=
= 19.5 in.
d=
4 f c b0 0.75 4 4000 (150 in )

edge of the column (long direction)
1 ft
18 in
L c 12 ft
12 in = 5.25 ft
=
2
2
2 2
L c

(
5.25 ft )
L c 2 2
(8.5 ft )
M u = qn
b = 6.02 k/ft (5.25 ft )
2
2
2 2
= 705.2 k - ft

12 in.
705.2 k - ft *
Mu
1 ft
Ru = 2 =
bd
12 in
2
8.5 ft
* (19.5 in )
1 ft
= 0.2182 ksi

Use the Ru for the footing to find .
1.7 Ru
Ru = f c (1 0.59 ) 1.7 +
=0
f c
2
0.2182 ksi
1.7 (1.7 ) 41.7

0.9(4 ksi )
=
= 0.06294
2
fy
0.06294(4 ksi )
= 0.06294 =
= 0.004196
60 ksi
fc
2

Compute the amount of steel needed
12 in.
2
(
)
As = bd = 0.004196 8.5 ft
19.5 in. = 8.35 in
1 ft

As = 0.0018 bh = 0.0018(102 in.)(24 in.) = 4.41 in 2

200
200
2
(
As =
bd =
102 in.)(19.5 in.) = 6.63 in
fy
60000

Use As =8.36 in2 with #8 bars (0.79 in2). Compute
the number of bars need
As 9.33 in 2
n=
=
= 11.8 Use 12 bars
Ab 0.79 in 2
s=
L 2 * cover
(n 1)
102 in - 2(3 in )
11
= 8.73 in

edge of the column for short length
1 ft
18 in
L c 8.5 ft
12 in = 3.5 ft
=
2
2
2
2
L c

(
3.5 ft )
L c 2 2
(12 ft )
M u = qn
b = 6.02 k/ft (3.5 ft )
2
2
2 2
= 442.5 k - ft

12 in.
442.5 k - ft *
Mu
1 ft
Ru = 2 =
= 0.0970 ksi
bd
12 in
2
12 ft
* (19.5 in )
1 ft

Use Ru for the footing to find .
1.7 Ru
Ru = f c (1 0.59 ) 1.7 +
=0
f c
2
0.0970 ksi
1.7 (1.7 ) 41.7

0.9(4 ksi )
=
= 0.0274
2
fy
0.0274(4 ksi )
= 0.0274 =
= 0.00183
fc
60 ksi
2

12 in.
2
(
)
As = bd = 0.0018312 ft
19.5 in. = 5.12 in
1 ft

As = 0.0018 bh = 0.0018(144 in.)(24 in.) = 6.22 in 2

200
200
(144 in.)(19.5 in.) = 9.36 in 2
As =
bd =
fy
60000

Use As =9.36 in2 with #6 bar (0.44 in2) Compute the
number of bars need
As 9.36 in 2
n=
=
= 21.3 Use 22 bars
Ab 0.44 in 2
Calculate the reinforcement bandwidth
Reinforcement in bandwidth
= 2 = 2 = 0.83
Total reinforcement
+ 1 1.41 + 1

The number of bars in the 8.5 ft band is 0.83(22)=19 bars .
Total # bars - band bars
outside # bar =
2
22 19
=
= 1.5 Use 2 bars
2
So place 19 bars in 8.5 ft section and 2 bars in each in
(12ft -8.5ft)/2 =1.75 ft of the band.

Determine the spacing between bars for the band of 8.5 ft
s=
(n 1)
102 in
= 5.67 in
18
Determine the spacing between bars outside the band

s=
L cover
n
21 in - 3in
2
= 9 in

N1 = (0.85 f c A1 ) = 0.65 0.85(4 ksi )(18 in ) = 716 k

2

N 2 = N1
A2
A1
2 N1

A2 = (8.5 ft )(12 ft ) = 102 ft 2
2
1 ft
2
=
2
.
25
ft
A1 = 18 in
12 in.

A2
102 ft 2
=
= 6.74 > 2 N 2 = 2 N1 = 2(716 k ) = 1432 k
2
A1
2.25 ft

0.005 A1 = 0.005 * (18 in ) = 1.62 in 2
2


ld =
0.02d b f y
fc
0.02(1 in )(60000 psi )
= 18.97 in Use 19 in
4000 psi


development length.

The development length, ld for the #8 bars
ld
db
fy
fydb
ld =
20 f c
(
60000 psi )(1.0 in )
=
= 47.4 in
20 f c
20 4000 psi

ld =
L
2
cover
c
2
144 in
2
3 in
18 in
2
= 60 in

ld
db
fy
ld =
25 f c
f ydb
(
60000 psi )(0.75 in )
=
= 28.5 in
25 f c
25 4000 psi
ld =
L
2
cover
c
2
102 in
2
3 in
18 in
2
= 39 in

- Final design
23 #6
12 #8
Example Multi-Column Footing

Design a rectangular footing to support two square
columns. The exterior column (I) has a section 16 x
16 in., which carries DL of 180 k and a LL of 120 k.
The interior column (II) has a section of 20 x 20 in.,
which carries a DL of 250 k
and a LL of 140 k. The base of
the footing is 5 ft. below final
grade and allowable soil
pressure is 5 k/ft2 Use fc = 4 ksi
and fy = 60 ksi The external
column is located 2 ft from the
property line.

Determine the location of an equivalent point and
its location select the datum at column I
xF
x=
F
i
16 ft (250 k + 140 k ) + 0 ft (180 k + 120 k )
(250 k + 140 k ) + (180 k + 120 k )
= 9.04 ft. Use 9 ft.
Extend the footing up to the property line, so the length

is l = 9 ft + 2 ft. = 11 ft. So the length of the footing is
2(11 ft.) = 22 ft.

Assume a depth of footing. (36 in.) The weight
of concrete and the soil are:
Wc = d = 150 lb/ft * 36 in. *

3
1 ft.
= 450 lb/ft
12 in.
1
ft.
2
Ws = s d s = 100 lb/ft * 5 ft 36 in. *

= 200 lb/ft
12 in.

qeff = qs Wc Ws
= 5000 lb/ft 450 lb/ft 200 lb/ft
2
= 4350 lb/ft 4.35 k/ft

2


Total Loads = AL1 + AL2 = 390 k + 300 k = 690 k
Area of footing =
690 k
4.35 k/ft
Side of footing =
158.6 ft 2
22 ft
= 158.6 ft
= 7.21 ft Use 7.5 ft


= 1.4(180 k ) + 1.7(120 k )
+ 1.4(250 k ) + 1.7(140 k )
= 456 k + 588 k
= 1044 k
1044 k
(22 ft )(7.5 ft )
= 6.33 k / ft 2

d = h cover 1.5d b
d = 36 in. 3 in 1.5(1.0 in )
= 31.5 in.

Compute the shear and bending moment diagrams.
Shear Forces
V ( x ) = qb ( x ) w
= 6.32 k/ft 2 ( 7.5 ft ) x w
400
358.7 k
300
= 47.454 k/ft ( x ) w
Force (kips)
200
63.3 k
100
0
-100
10
12
16
18
-150.3 k
-200
-300
14
-329.5 k
-400
location (ft)
20
22
The columns are

considered point loads
but shear values are
taken at each side of the
column.

The location of the maximum moment is
1 ft
1 ft
10 in
= 14.5 ft
16 ft 8 in
12 in
12 in
x=
329.5 k
329.5 k + 358.7 k
(14.5 ft ) = 6.9 ft

Compute the shear and bending moment diagrams.
x2
M ( x ) = qb wi ( x xi )
2
Bending Moment
400
Bending Moment (k-ft)
200
42.2 k-ft
0
-200 0
10
12
14
16
18
-400
-600
-800
-1000
-1200
-1278.9 k-ft @ 9.61 ft
-1400
Location (ft)
x2
= 6.32 k/ft ( 7.5 ft ) wi ( x xi )
2
x2
= 47.454 k/ft wi ( x xi )
2
2
249.9 k-ft
20
22
The columns are

considered point loads
but moments are taken
at each side of the
column. It will not
balance because center
is at 9.04 ft

The maximum shear force occurs at the edge of
the 20 in. column. So maximum shear is measured
at distance d from the column.
1 ft
Vmax q (d ) = 358.7 k 47.454 k/ft 31.5 in
12 in
= 234.1 k

one-way shear
1000 lb
234.1 k
Vu
1
k
d=
=
= 24.2 in.
2 fc b
12
in
0.85 2 4000 7.5 ft
1 ft

square.
bo = 4(c + d )
= 4(20 in. + 31.5 in.) = 206 in.
1 ft
= 4.292 ft
c + d = (20 in. + 31.5 in.)
12 in

Vu = Pu qn (c + d )
= 588 k 6.70 k/ft (4.292 ft )

2
= 464.6 k
The other column will not be critical,
Pu = 456 k for the 16 in. column

two way shear
d=
Vu
4 f c b0
1000 lb
464.6 k
1k
0.85 4 4000 (206 in )
= 10.5 in.

12 in.
1278.9 k - ft *
Mu
1 ft = 0.1719 ksi
Ru =
=
2
2
(
)
(
)
bd
90 in * 31.5 in

Ru = f c (1 0.59 ) 1.7 +
2
1.7 Ru
f c
0
.
1719
ksi
2
1.7 (1.7 ) 41.7

0.9(4 ksi )
=0
= 0.04917
fy
fc
= 0.04917 =
0.04917(4 ksi )
60 ksi
= 0.00328

12 in.
(31.5 in.) = 9.29 in 2
As = bd = 0.00277 7.5 ft
1 ft

As = 0.0018 bh = 0.0018(90 in.)(36 in.) = 5.8 3 in 2

200
200
(90 in.)(31.5 in.) = 9.45 in 2
As =
bd =
fy
60000
Use

needed
As 9.45 in 2
n=
=
= 9.45 Use 10 bars
2
Ab 1.0 in
s=
L 2 * cover
(n 1)
90 in - 2(3 in )
9
= 9.33 in

The minimum amount is steel is going to be due to the
flexural restrictions. So below the columns with
positive moment, the reinforcement will be 10 # 9 bars
running longitudinally. The development length will
have to be calculated.

fy
f ydb
(
ld
60000 psi )(1.128 in )
=
ld =
=
= 53.5 in
d b 20 f c
20 f c
20 4000 psi
The bars have more than 12-in. of concrete below
them, therefore ld = 1.3 ld.
ld = 1.3(53.5 in ) = 69.6 in Use 70 in.

To determine the reinforcement in the short direction.
The bandwidth of the two columns must be determined
for the 16 in. column.
1 ft
1 ft
16
in
= 5.3 ft Use 5.5 ft
Band = 16 in + 2 ft
+ 31.5 in
2
12
in.
12
in.
Compute the moment at the edge

qnet =
456 k
7.5 ft
= 60.8 k/ft
L=
7.5 ft
2
1 ft
= 3.08 ft
8 in
12 in

The bending moment will be
M u = qnet
Compute the Ru
(
3.08 ft )
= (60.8 k/ft )
= 289.0 k - ft
12 in.
289 k - ft *
Mu
1 ft
Ru =
=
= 0.053 ksi
12 in
bd 2
2
5.5 ft
* (31.5 in )
1 ft

Ru = f c (1 0.59 ) 1.7 +
2
1.7 Ru
f c
0
.
053
ksi
2
1.7 (1.7 ) 41.7

0.9(4 ksi )
=0
= 0.01484
fy
fc
= 0.01484 =
0.04917(4 ksi )
60 ksi
= 0.001

12 in.
2
(
)
As = bd = 0.001 5.5 ft
31.5 in. = 2.08 in
1 ft

As = 0.0018 bh = 0.0018(66 in.)(36 in.) = 4.28 in 2

200
200
(66 in.)(31.5 in.) = 6.93 in 2
As =
bd =
fy
60000
Use

needed A 6.93 in 2
n= s =
= 6.93 Use 7 bars
2
Ab 1.0 in
s=
L cover
(n 1)
66 in - (3 in )
6
= 10.5 in

To determine the reinforcement in the short direction.
The 20-in. interior column extends beyond 4 ft from the
center therefore the band is 7.5 ft x 7.5 ft. Compute the
moment at the edge
qnet =
588 k
7.5 ft
= 78.4 k/ft
L=
7.5 ft
2
1 ft
= 2.92 ft
10 in
12 in

The bending moment will be
M u = qnet
(
2.92 ft )
= (78.4 k/ft )
Compute the Ru
= 334.3 k - ft
12 in.
334.3 k - ft *
Mu
1 ft
Ru =
=
= 0.045 ksi
12 in
bd 2
2
7.5 ft
* (31.5 in )
1 ft

Ru = f c (1 0.59 ) 1.7 +
2
1.7 Ru
f c
0
.
045
ksi
2
1.7 (1.7 ) 41.7

0.9(4 ksi )
=0
= 0.01257
fy
fc
= 0.01257 =
0.01257(4 ksi )
60 ksi
= 0.00084

12 in.
2
(
)
As = bd = 0.00084 7.5 ft
31.5 in. = 2.38 in
1 ft

As = 0.0018 bh = 0.0018(90 in.)(36 in.) = 5.83 in 2

200
200
(90 in.)(31.5 in.) = 9.45 in 2
As =
bd =
fy
60000
Use

N1 = (0.85 f c A1 ) = 0.7 0.85(4 ksi )(16 in ) = 609 k

2

N 2 = N1
A2
A1
2 N1

2
A2 = (5.5 ft ) = 30.25 ft 2
2
1 ft
2
= 1.78 ft
A1 = 16 in
12 in.

A2
A1
30.25 ft 2
1.78 ft 2
= 4.125 > 2 N 2 = 2 N1 = 2(609 k ) = 1218 k

0.005 A1 = 0.005 * (16 in ) = 1.28 in 2
2

Note if the Pu > N1 the area of steel will be
As
(
Pu N1 )
=
fy
As long as the area of

steel is greater than the
minimum amount.

ld =
0.02d b f y
fc
0.02(0.875 in )(60000 psi )
= 16.6 in Use 17 in
4000 psi

ld = 0.0003d b f y = 0.0003(0.875 in )(60000 psi ) = 15.75 in 8 in

development length.

need
As 9.45 in 2
n=
=
= 9.45 Use 10 bars
2
Ab 1.0 in
s=
L cover
(n 1)
90 in - (3 in )
9
= 9.67 in

N1 = (0.85 f c A1 ) = 0.7 0.85(4 ksi )(20 in ) = 952 k

2

N 2 = N1
A2
A1
2 N1

2
A2 = (7.5 ft ) = 56.25 ft 2
2
1 ft
2
= 2.78 ft
A1 = 20 in
12 in.

A2
A1
56.25 ft 2
2.78 ft 2
= 4.5 > 2 N 2 = 2 N1 = 2(952 k ) = 1904 k

0.005 A1 = 0.005 * (20 in ) = 2.0 in 2
2


ld =
0.02d b f y
fc
0.02(1 in )(60000 psi )
= 18.7 in Use 19 in
4000 psi


development length.
Example Settlement
Determine the footing areas required for equal
settlement (balanced footing design) if the usual live
load is 25% for all footings. The footings are subjected
to dead loads and live loads as indicated by the table.
The net soil pressure is 6 ksf.
Footing Number
Dead Load (kips)

Live Load (kips)
120
180
140
190
210
150
220
200
170
240
Example Settlement
Find the ratio of the live load to dead load, the largest
ratio will control the settlement.
Column 3 has the largest ratio.
Example Settlement
Compute the usual loading for the footing, DL + 0.25LL
Column 3 has the largest ratio.
Example Settlement
Determine the need area for the footing with the
largest LL/DL ratio.
A=
DL + LL
qnet
140 k + 200 k
= 56.67 ft 2
6 k/ft 2
The usual net soil pressure acting on the footing is

qnet
DL + (% live load )(LL ) 140 k + 0.25(200 k )

=
=
= 3.353 k/ft 2
A
56.67 ft 2
Example Settlement
Use the qnet (3.353 k/ft2) to determine need area for
each of the other footings to have the same settlement.
Usual Loading
157.5 k
2
Area =
=
= 46.97 ft
q net
3.353 k/ft 2
Compute the qnet for each of the footings
q net
Total Load (120 k ) + (150 k )

2
=
=
= 5.75 k/ft
2
New Area
46.97 ft
Example Settlement
Use the qnet (3.353 k/ft2) to determine need area for
each of the other footings to have the same settlement.
Footing Number
1
Dead Load (kips)

Live Load (kips)
120
150
180
220
140
200
190
170
210
240
Ratio (LL/DL)
1.25
1.22
1.43
0.89
1.14
Usual Loading (kips)
157.5
235.0
190.0
232.5
270.0
Standard Area (ft 2)
45.00
66.67
56.67
60.00
75.00
New Area(ft2)
46.97
70.09
56.67
69.34
80.53
New qnet
5.75
5.71
6.00
5.19
5.59
Example Combined Loading

A 12-in. x 24 in. column of an unsymmetrical shed is
subjected to an axial load PD of 220 k and MD = 180 k-ft
due to dead load and an an axial load PL = 165 k and a
moment ML= 140 k-ft due to
live load. The base of the
footing is 5 ft below final
grade, and the allowable soil
bearing pressure is 5 k/ft2.
Design the footing using
fc = 4 ksi and fy = 60 ksi

Find the combined actual loads, P0 and M0
P0 = PDL + PLL = 220 k + 165 k = 385 k

M 0 = M DL + M LL = 180 k - ft + 140 k - ft = 320 k - ft
Determine the eccentricity of the footing
12 in
320 k - ft
M0
1
ft
e=
=
= 9.97 in Use 10 in.
P0
385 k

Assume a depth of footing, 24 in. The weight of
concrete and the soil are:
Wc = d = 150 lb/ft * 24 in. *

3
1 ft.
= 300 lb/ft
12 in.
1
ft.
2
Ws = s d s = 100 lb/ft * 5 ft 24 in. *

= 300 lb/ft
12 in.

qeff = qs Wc Ws
= 5000 lb/ft 300 lb/ft 300 lb/ft
2
= 4400 lb/ft 4.4 k/ft

2

Actual Loads = DL + LL = 385 k

Area of footing =
385 k
= 87.5 ft 2
4.4 k/ft 2
Compute the sizes of the footing if width is 9 ft.
Side of footing =
87.5 ft
9 ft
= 9.72 ft Use 10 ft

Use the long section and place the column 10 in.
off-center for the 10 ft segment


= 1.2(220 k ) + 1.6(165 k )
= 528.0 k
528.0 k
(9 ft )(10 ft )
= 5.87 k / ft

d = h cover 1.5d b
d = 24 in. 3 in 1.5(1.0 in )
= 19.5 in.

The depth of the footing can be calculated by using the
one-way shear (long direction)
1 ft
24 in
10 ft
L c
1 ft
1 ft
12
in
d+e =
+ 10 in
19.5 in
2
2
2 2
12 in
12 in
= 3.208 ft
Vu =139.4 k in
short direction
L c
(
)
Vu = qn l2 d + e
2 2
= 5.87 k/ft 2 (9 ft )(3.208 ft ) = 169.4 k

one-way shear design
1000 lb
169.4 k
Vu
1k
= 16.53 in.
=
d=
2 fc b
12 in
0.75 2 4000 9 ft

1 ft

Calculate perimeter for two-way shear or punch out
shear. The column is 12 in. x 24 in.
bo = 2(c1 + d ) + 2(c2 + d )
= 2(12 in. + 19.5 in.) + 2(24 in. + 19.5 in.) = 150 in.
1 ft
= 2.625 ft
c1 + d = (12 in. + 19.5 in.)
12 in
1 ft
= 3.625 ft
c2 + d = (24 in. + 19.5 in.)
12 in

Vu = Pu qn (c + d )
= 528.0 k 5.87 k/ft 2 (2.625 ft )(3.625 ft )

= 472.2 k
The shape parameter
10 ft
9 ft
= 1.11

Calculate d from the shear capacity according to
11.12.2.1 chose the largest value of d.
Vc = 2 + f c b0 d
c
Vc = s + 2 f c b0 d
bo
Vc = 4 f c b0 d


The depth of the footing can be calculated for the
two way shear
1000 lb
472.2 k
Vu
1k
=
d=
4
4
2 + f c b0 0.75 2 +
4000 (150 in )
1.11
= 11.84 in.

The third equation bo is dependent on d so use the
= 40
d=
Vu
40d
+ 2 f c b0
bo
1000 lb
472.2 k
1k
= 9.22 in.
=
40(19.5 in )
0.75
+ 2 4000 (150 in )
150 in

the two way shear
1000 lb
472.2 k
Vu
1k
d=
=
4 f c b0 0.75 4 4000 (150 in )
= 16.59 in.

Calculate the bending moment of the footing at the edge of
the column (long direction)
1 ft
24 in
10 ft
1 ft
L c
12
in
= 4.83 ft
+e =
+ 10 in
2
2
12 in
2 2
L c
+
e
L
c
2 2
M u = qn + e
b
2
2 2
(
4.83 ft )
(9 ft ) = 616.2 k - ft
= 5.87 k/ft (4.83 ft )
2

12 in.
616.2 k - ft *
Mu
1 ft
= 0.1801 ksi
Ru = 2 =
bd
12 in
2
9 ft
* (19.5 in )
1 ft

Use the Ru for the footing to find .
1.7 Ru
=0
Ru = f c (1 0.59 ) 1.7 +
f c
2
0.1801 ksi
1.7 (1.7 ) 41.7

0.9(4 ksi )
=
= 0.05158
2
fy
0.05158(4 ksi )
= 0.05158 =
= 0.00344
60 ksi
fc
2

12 in.
2
(
)
As = bd = 0.00344 9 ft
19.5 in. = 7.24 in
1 ft
As = 0.0018 bh = 0.0018(108 in.)(24 in.) = 4.67 in 2

200
200
(108 in.)(19.5 in.) = 7.02 in 2
As =
bd =
fy
60000

Use As =8.36 in2 with #8 bars (0.79 in2). Compute
the number of bars need
As
8.1 in 2
n=
=
= 10.25 Use 11 bars
Ab 0.79 in 2
s=
L 2 * cover
(n 1)
108 in - 2(3 in )
10
= 10.2 in

edge of the column for short length
1 ft
12 in
L c 9 ft
12 in = 4 ft
=
2
2
2 2
L c

(
4 ft )
L c 2 2
(10 ft )
M u = qn
b = 5.87 k/ft (4 ft )
2
2
2 2
= 469.6 k - ft

12 in.
469.6 k - ft *
Mu
1 ft
Ru = 2 =
bd
12 in
2
10 ft
* (19.5 in )
1 ft
= 0.1235 ksi

Use Ru for the footing to find .
Ru = f c (1 0.59 ) 2 1.7 +
1.7
1.7 Ru
=0
f c
(1.7 )2 41.7 0.1235 ksi
4 ksi
=
= 0.03503
2
fy
0.03503(4 ksi )
= 0.03503 =
= 0.00234
60 ksi
fc

12 in.
2
(
)
As = bd = 0.0023410 ft
19.5 in. = 5.46 in
1 ft

As = 0.0018 bh = 0.0018(120 in.)(24 in.) = 5.18 in 2

As =
200
fy
200
(120 in.)(19.5 in.) = 7.80 in 2
bd =
60000

Use As =9.36 in2 with #6 bar (0.44 in2) Compute the
number of bars need
n=
As
Ab
7.80 in 2
0.44 in
= 17.7 Use 18 bars
Calculate the reinforcement bandwidth

Reinforcement in bandwidth
= 2 = 2 = 0.947
Total reinforcement
+ 1 1.11 + 1

The number of bars in the 9 ft band is 0.947(18)=17 bars .
Total # bars - band bars
outside # bar =
2
18 17
=
= 0.5 Use 1 bars
2
So place 17 bars in 9 ft section and 1 bars in each in

(10ft - 9ft)/2 =0.5 ft of the band.

Determine the spacing between bars for the band of 9 ft
s=
(n 1)
108 in
= 6.75 in
16
Determine the spacing between bars outside the band

s=
L cover
n
6 in - 3in
1
= 3 in

N1 = (0.85 f c A1 ) = 0.65(0.85(4 ksi )(12 in )(24 in )) = 636.5 k

N 2 = N1
A2
A1
2 N1

A2 = 9 ft (10 ft ) = 90 ft
1 ft
1 ft
2
A1 = 12 in
24 in
= 2 ft
12 in.
12 in.

A2
90 ft 2
=
= 6.71 > 2 N 2 = 2 N1 = 2(636.5 k ) = 1273 k
2
A1
2 ft

0.005 A1 = 0.005 * (12 in )(24 in ) = 1.44 in


ld =
0.02d b f y
fc
0.02(1 in )(60000 psi )
= 18.97 in Use 19 in
4000 psi


development length.

ld
db
fy
fydb
ld =
20 f c
(
60000 psi )(1.0 in )
=
= 47.4 in
20 f c
20 4000 psi

ld =
L
2
cover
c
2
144 in
2
3 in
18 in
2
= 60 in

ld
fy
db
f ydb
ld =
25 f c
25 f c
(
60000 psi )(0.75 in )
=
= 28.5 in
25 4000 psi

ld =
L
2
cover
c
2
102 in
2
3 in
18 in
2
= 39 in
Elastic Flexural Analysis for

Serviceability
August 11, 2003
CVEN444
Lecture Goals
Serviceability
Crack width
Moments of inertia
Introduction
Recall:
Lead to collapse
Disrupt use of Structures

but do not cause collapse
Introduction
Types of Serviceability Limit States
- Excessive crack width
- Excessive deflection
- Undesirable vibrations
- Fatigue (ULS)
Crack Width Control

Cracks are caused by tensile stresses due to loads
moments, shears, etc..
Crack Width Control

Cracks are caused by tensile stresses due to loads
moments, shears, etc..
Crack Width Control

Bar crack development.
Crack Width Control

Temperature crack development
Crack Width Control

Reasons for crack width control?
Appearance (smooth surface > 0.01 to 0.013
public concern)
Leakage
Corrosion
(Liquid-retaining structures)
(cracks can speed up occurrence
of corrosion)
Crack Width Control

Corrosion more apt to occur if (steel oxidizes
rust )
Chlorides ( other corrosive substances)

present
Relative Humidity > 60 %
High Ambient Temperatures (accelerates
chemical reactions)
Wetting and drying cycles
Stray electrical currents occur in the bars.
Limits on Crack Width

ACI Codes Basis
max.. crack width = 0.016 in.
for interior exposure
0.013 in.
for exterior exposure
Cracking controlled in ACI code by regulating the

distribution of reinforcement in beams/slabs.

Gergely-Lutz Equation
= 0.076 f s 3 d c A
= Crack width in units of 0.001 in.
= Distance from NA to bottom
(tension) fiber, divided by
distance to reinforcement.
=(h-c)/(d-c)
fs = Service load stress in
reinforcement in ksi

Gergely-Lutz Equation
= 0.076 f s 3 d c A
dc = Distance from extreme tension
fiber to center of reinforcement
located closest to it, (in.)
A = effective tension area of
concrete surrounding tension
bars (w/ same centroid)
divided by # bars. (for 1 layer
of bars A = (2dc b)/n

ACI Code Eqn 10-5 ( limits magnitude of z term )
z = fs 3 dc A
Note: = 0.076 z
( =1.2 for beams)
Interior exposure: critical crack width = 0.016 in.

( = 16 ) z = 175k/in
Exterior exposure: critical crack width = 0.013 in.
( = 13 ) z = 145k/in

Tolerable Crack Widths
Tolerable
Crack Width
Exposure Condition
Dry air or protective membrane
Humidity, moist air, soil
Deicing chemicals
Seawater and seawater spray
0.016 in.
0.004 in.
0.012 in.
0.007 in.
0.006 in.
wetting and drying

Water-retaining structures
(excluding nonpressure pipes)

Thin one-way slabs: Use =1.35
z = 155 k/in (Interior Exposure)

z = 130 k/in (Exterior Exposure)
fs = service load stress may be taken as
f s = 0.60 f y
fy
1.55
0.90
1.55 average load factor

strength reduction
.
factor for flexure
Example Crack
Given: A beam with bw= 14 in. Gr 60 steel 4 #8
with 2 #6 in the second layer with a #4 stirrup.
Determine the crack width limit, z for exterior
and interior limits (145 k/in and 175 k/in.).
Example Crack
Compute the center of the steel for the given bars.
As = 4 #8 bars + 2 # 6 bars
= 4 ( 0.79 in 2 ) + 2 ( 0.44 in 2 )
= 4.04 in 2
Example Crack
The locations of the center of the bars are
db
y1 = cover + d stirrup +
2
1.0 in.
= 1.5 in. + 0.5 in.+
2
= 2.5 in.
db
d b2
y2 = 2.5 in. + + d b +
2
2
1.0 in.
0.75 in.
= 2.5 in. +
+ 1.0 in.+
2
2
= 4.375 in.
Example Crack
Compute the center of the steel for the given bars.
yA
y=
A
i
( 2.5 in.) 4 ( 0.79 in
= 2.91 in.
) + ( 4.375 in.) 2 ( 0.44 in )
4.04 in 2
Example Crack
Compute number of equivalent bars, n. Use the
largest bar.
n=
Ai
Abar
4.04 in
=
= 5.11
2
0.79 in
Compute the effective tension area
2 yb 2 ( 2.91 in.)(14 in.)

2
A=
=
= 15.93 in
n
5.11
Example Crack
The effective service load stress is
fs = 0.60 f y = 0.6 ( 60 ksi ) = 36 ksi

Compute the effective tension area
z = fs d c A = ( 36 ksi )
3
= 122.9 k/in.
( 2.5 in.) (15.93 in
Example Crack
The limits magnitude of z term.
122.9 k/in. < 145 k/in. - Interior exposure
122.9 k/in. < 175 k/in. - Exterior exposure
Crack width is
w = 0.076 z
= 0.076 (1.2 )(122.9 )
= 11.2
or = 0.0112 in.
Deflection Control
Reasons to Limit Deflection
(1.)
Visual Appearance
1
>
* l are generally visible
250
( 25 ft. span 1.2 in. )
(2.)
Damage to Non-structural Elements

- cracking of partitions
- malfunction of doors /windows
Deflection Control
(3.)
Disruption of function
- sensitive machinery, equipment
- ponding of rain water on roofs
(4.)
Damage to Structural Elements

- large s than serviceability problem
- (contact w/ other members
modify
load paths)
Allowable Deflections
ACI Table 9.5(a) = min. thickness unless s are
computed
ACI Table 9.5(b) = max. permissible computed
deflection
Flat Roofs ( no damageable nonstructural elements
supported)
LL(inst )
l
180
Floors ( no damageable nonstructural elements
supported )
LL(inst )
l
180
Roof or Floor elements (supported nonstructural
elements likely damaged by
large s)
480
Roof or Floor elements ( supported nonstructural
elements not likely to be
damaged by large s )
l
240
Deflection occurring after attachment of

nonstructural elements
allow
Need to consider the specific structures

function and characteristics.
Moment of Inertia for Deflection

Calculation
For
Brandon
derived
I cr I e I gt
M
cr
Ie =
Ma
(intermediate values of EI)

a
M cr
* I gt + 1
* I cr

M a
Mcr = Cracking Moment =
fr Ig
Igt
yt
= Moment of inertia of transformed cross-section
fr
= Modulus of rupture = 7.5 f c

Calculation
M
cr
Ie =
Ma
M cr
* I gt + 1
* I cr

M a
yt = Distance from centroid to extreme tension fiber

Ma = maximum moment in member at loading stage for
which Ie ( ) is being computed or at any previous
loading stage
Ig = Moment of inertia of concrete section neglect
reinforcement

Calculation
M
cr
Ie =
Ma
M cr
I
* Ig + 1
*
cr
M a
or
M
cr
I e = I cr + (I g I cr )
Ma
Moment Vs curvature plot
M
EI
slope =
= EI
Moment Vs Slope Plot

The cracked beam starts to lose strength as the amount
of cracking increases
Moment of Inertia
For wc = 90 to 155 lb/ft3
Ec = 33 f c
1.5
c
(psi )
For normal weight concrete
Ec = 57000 f c
(ACI 8.5.1)
(psi )
Deflection Response of RC Beams

(Flexure)
A- Ends of Beam Crack
B - Cracking at midspan
C - Instantaneous
deflection under service
load
C - long time deflection
under service load
D and E - yielding of
Note: Stiffness (slope) decreases
reinforcement @ ends &
as cracking progresses
midspan

(Flexure)
M = wl
12
M = wl
24
M = wl
12
The maximum moments for distributed load acting

on an indeterminate beam are given.

(Flexure)
For Continuous beams
ACI 9.5.2.4
I e (avg ) = 0.50 I e (mid ) + 0.25(I e1 + I e2 )
2 ends continous :
Weight Average I e (avg ) = 0.70 I e (mid ) + 0.15(I e1 + I e2 )

1 end continous :
I e (avg ) = 0.85 I e (mid ) + 0.15(I e1 )

I e (mid ) = I e@ midspan
ACI Com. 435
I e1 = I e@ end 1
I e2 = I e@ end 2
Uncracked Transformed
Section
Part
Concrete
As
As
(n) =Ej /Ei

1
n
n
Area
bw*h
As
As
y *n A
y=
n A
i
*
i
*
i
n*Area
bw*h
(n-1)As
(n-1)As
n* A
yi
0.5*h
d
d
yi*(n)A
0.5*bw*h2
(n-1)*As*d
(n-1)*As*d
yi *n* Ai
Note: (n-1) is to remove area

of concrete
Cracked Transformed Section

Finding the centroid of singly Reinforced Rectangular
Section
y
y
2
+ nAs d
by
by + nAs y = by + nAs d

yi Ai
2
=
y=
by + nAs
Solve for the quadratic for
b 2
y + nAs y nAs d = 0

2
y +
2
2nAs
b
2nAs d
b
=0

Singly Reinforced Rectangular Section
2nAs
2nAs d
2
y +
y
=0
b
b
1 3
2
I cr = by + nAs (d y )
3
Note:
n=
Es
Ec

Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Section
y +
2
2(n 1)As + 2nAs
2(n 1)As + 2nAs d
=0
2
2
I cr = by + (n 1)As ( y d ) + nAs (d y )
3
Note:
n=
Es
Ec
Uncracked Transformed Section

Moment of inertia (uncracked doubly reinforced beam)
2
1 3
h
I gt = bh + bh y
12
1 4 4 4 2 4 4 423
concrete
2
2
+ (n 1)As ( y d ) + (n 1)As ( y d )
1 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 4 4 4 43
Note:
steel
Ig =
1
12
bh

Finding the centroid of doubly reinforced T-Section
y +
2
2t (be bw ) + 2(n 1)As + 2nAs
bw
(
be bw ) t 2 + 2(n 1)As + 2nAs d
bw
=0

Finding the moment of inertia for
a doubly reinforced T-Section
t
3
I cr = be y + bet y
+ bw ( y t )
12
1 4 4 4 2 4 4 423 13 4 2 4 3
1
beam
flange
+ (n 1)As ( y d ) + nAs (d y )
1 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 4 4 43
2
steel
Reinforced Concrete Sections Example

Given a doubly reinforced beam with h = 24 in, b = 12 in.,
d = 2.5 in. and d = 21.5 in. with 2# 7 bars in compression
steel and 4 # 7 bars in tension steel. The material
properties are fc = 4 ksi and fy= 60 ksi.
Determine Igt, Icr , Mcr(+), Mcr(-), and compare to the NA of
the beam.

The components of the beam
As = 2 ( 0.6 in 2 ) = 1.2 in 2
As = 4 ( 0.6 in 2 ) = 2.4 in 2
1k
Ec = 57000 f c = 57000 4000
1000 lb
= 3605 ksi

The compute the n value and the centroid, I uncracked
Es 29000 ksi
n=
=
= 8.04
Ec
3605 ksi
n
area (in2) n*area (in2)
y i (in)
y i *n*area (in2)
I (in4)
d (in)
d2*n*area(in4)
A's
7.04
1.2
8.448
2.5
21.12
-9.756
804.10
As
7.04
2.4
16.896
21.5
363.26
9.244
1443.75
Ac
288
288
12
3456.00
13824
-0.256
18.89
3840.38
13824
313.344
2266.74

The compute the centroid and I uncracked
yi ni Ai
3840.38 in
y=
=
= 12.26 in.
2
ni Ai 313.34 in
I = I i + di2 ni Ai =13824 in 4 + 2266.7 in 4

= 16090.7 in 4

The compute the centroid and I for a cracked doubly
reinforced beam.
2(n 1)As + 2nAs
2(n 1)As + 2nAs d
2
=0
y +
y
b 2
b
2
2 ( 7.04 ) (1.2 in ) + 2 ( 8.04 ) ( 2.4 in )
2
y +
y
12 in.
2
2
2 ( 7.04 ) (1.2 in ) + 2 ( 8.04 ) ( 2.4 in ) ( 21.5 in.)
s
=0
12 in.
2
y + 4.624 y 72.664 = 0

The compute the centroid for a cracked doubly
reinforced beam.
y 2 + 4.624 y 72.664 = 0
y=
4.624 +
= 6.52 in.
( 4.624 )
2
+ 4 ( 72.664 )

The compute the moment of inertia for a cracked
doubly reinforced beam.
1 3
2
2
I cr = by + (n 1)As ( y d ) + nAs (d y )
3
1
3
I cr = (12 in.)( 6.52 in.)
3
+ ( 7.04 ) (1.2 in
) ( 6.52 in. 2.5 in.)

+ ( 8.04 ) ( 2.4 in ) ( 21.5 in. 6.52 in.)
2
= 5575.22 in 4

The critical ratio of moment of inertia
4
I cr 5575.22 in
=
= 0.346
4
I g 16090.7 in
I cr 0.35 I g

Find the components of the beam
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.85 ) c = 34.68c
0.0075
c 2.5 in.
s =
( 0.003) = 0.003
c
c
0.0075
217.5
fs = Es s = 29000 0.003
= 87
c
c
217.5
Cs = As ( fs 0.85 f c ) = (1.2 in ) 87
261
= 100.32
c
2

Find the components of the beam
T = ( 2.4 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 144 k
T = Cc + Cs
261
144 k = 34.68c + 100.32
34.68c 2 43.68c 261 = 0
c
The neutral axis

c=
43.68 +
= 3.44 in.
( 43.68) + 4 ( 261)( 34.68)

2 ( 34.68 )
2

The strain of the steel
3.44 in. 2.5 in.
s =
( 0.003) = 0.0008 = 0.00207
3.44 in.
21.5 in. 3.44 in.

s =
( 0.003) = 0.0158 ? 0.00207
3.44 in.
Note: At service loads, beams are assumed to act

elastically.
c = 3.44 in.
y = 6.52 in.

Using a linearly varying and = E along the NA is
the centroid of the area for an elastic center
My
=
I
The maximum tension stress in tension is
f r = 7.5 f c = 7.5 4000
= 474.3 psi 0.4743 ksi

The uncracked moments for the beam
I
My
=
M =
I
y
M cr ( + )
M cr ( )
f r I 0.4743 ksi (16090.7 in

=
=
y
( 24 in. 12.26 in.)
f r I 0.4743 ksi (16090.7 in

=
=
y
12.26 in.
) = 650.2 k-in.
) = 622.6 k-in.
Calculate the Deflections

(1) Instantaneous (immediate) deflections
(2) Sustained load deflection
Instantaneous Deflections
due to dead loads( unfactored) , live, etc.

Equations for calculating inst for common cases



Sustained Load Deflections

Creep causes an increase
in concrete strain
Compression steel
present
Helps limit this
effect.
Curvature
increases
Increase in compressive
strains cause increase in
stress in compression
reinforcement (reduces
creep strain in concrete)

Sustain load deflection = i
1 + 50
Instantaneous deflection
ACI 9.5.2.5
As
at midspan for simple and continuous beams
bd
at support for cantilever beams

= time dependent factor for sustained load
5 years or more
12 months
6 months
3 months
2.0
1.4
1.2
1.0
Also see Figure 9.5.2.5 from ACI code

For dead and live loads
total = DL ( inst ) + LL ( inst )

+ DL ( L.T.) + LL ( L.T.)
DL and LL may have different factors for LT ( long

term ) calculations
after attachment of
total
N/S components
= total DL (inst )

The appropriate value of Ic must be used to calculate
at each load stage.
DL (inst )
Some percentage of DL (if given)
LL (inst ) + DL (inst )
Full DL and LL
Serviceability Load Deflections Example

Show in the attached figure is a typical interior span of a floor
beam spanning between the girders at locations A and C. Partition
walls, which may be damaged by large deflections, are to be
erected at this level. The interior beam shown in the attached
figure will support one of these partition walls. The weight of the
wall is included in the uniform dead load provided in the figure.
Assume that 15 % of the distributed dead load is due to a
superimposed dead load, which is applied to the beam after the
partition wall is in place. Also assume that 40 % of the live load
will be sustained for at least 6 months.

fc = 5 ksi
fy = 60 ksi

Part I
Determine whether the floor beam meets the ACI Code maximum
permissible deflection criteria. (Note: it will be assumed that it is
acceptable to consider the effective moments of inertia at location
A and B when computing the average effective moment of inertia
for the span in this example.)
Part II
Check the ACI Code crack width provisions at midspan of the
beam.

Deflection before glass partition is installed (85 % of DL)
l 35ft (12 in/ft )
be =
= 105 in
4
4
( 8t )( 2 ) + bw = 8 ( 4.5 in ) 2 + 12 in = 84 in
s = 10 ft = 120 in.

Compute the centroid and gross moment of inertia, Ig.
b
Flange
Web
h
84
15.5
4.5
12
Area
378
186
564
yi
17.75
7.75
Ai * yi
6709.5
1441.5
8151

The moment of inertia
yi Ai
8151 in
y=
=
= 14.45 in 14.5 in
2
Ai 564 in
1 3
2
I g = bh + Ad
12
1
3
2
2
= ( 84 in )( 4.5 in ) + ( 378 in ) (17.75 in - 14.45 in )
12
1
3
2
2
+ (12 in )(15.5 in ) + (186 in ) ( 7.75 in - 14.45 in )
12
= 16,950 in 4 16900 in 4

The moment capacity
f r = 7.5 f c = 7.5 5000 = 530 psi
E c = 57000 f c = 57000 5000 /1000 lbs=4030 ksi
( 530 psi ) (16900 in )

M cr ( -) =
=
= 1610 k-in
y t ( -) ( 5.55 in )(1000 lbs/kip )
4
( 530 psi ) (16900 in )
fr Ig
=
= 618 k-in
M cr ( + ) =
y t ( + ) (14.5 in )(1000 lbs/kip )
fr Ig

Determine bending moments due to initial load (0.85
DL) The ACI moment coefficients will be used to
calculate the bending moments Since the loading is not
patterned in this case, This is slightly conservative

The moments at the two locations
M A = ( 0.85wD )( ln ) /11
2
= 0.85*1.00k/ft* ( 33.67 ft ) /11

2
= 87.6 k-ft 1050 k-in

M B = ( 0.85wD )( ln ) /16
2
= 0.85*1.00k/ft* ( 33.67 ft ) /16

2
= 60.2 k-ft 723 k-in

Moment at C will be set equal to Ma for simplicity, as
given in the problem statement.
M A = 1050 k-in <M cr ( -)

= 1610 k-in Use Ig @ supports
M B = 723 k-in>M cr ( + )
= 618 k-in Use Icr @ midspan

Assume Rectangular Section Behavior and calculate the
areas of steel and ratio of Modulus of Elasticity
Es 29000 ksi
n=
=
= 7.2
Ec
4030 ksi
As = 3#5 = 3 ( 0.31 in 2 ) = 0.93 in 2

As = 4 # 7 = 4 ( 0.6 in
) = 2.40 in

Calculate the center of the T-beam
2 ( n 1) As + 2nAs
2 ( n 1) Asd + 2nAs d
2
y +
y
=0
b
b
2 ( 6.2 ) ( 0.93 in 2 ) + 2 ( 7.2 ) ( 2.4 in 2 )

2
y
y +
84 in.
2 ( 6.2 ) ( 0.93 in 2 ) ( 2.5 in.) + 2 ( 7.2 ) ( 2.4 in 2 ) (17.5 in.)

=0
84 in.
y 2 + 0.549 y 7.54 = 0
0.549 30.47
= 2.49 in.
y=
2

The centroid is located at the As < 4.5 in. = tf Use
rectangular section behavior
I cr ( + )
1 3
2
2
= by + ( n 1) As ( y d ) + nAs ( d y )
3
1
3
= ( 84 in )( 2.49 in )
3
+ ( 6.2 ) ( 0.93 in
+ ( 7.2 ) ( 2.4 in
) (17.5 in 2.49 in )
= 4330 in
) ( 2.5 in 2.49 in )

The moment of inertia at midspan
M
M cr
cr
=
I
+
1
g
Ma
Ma
I e( midspan )
I cr
618 k-in
4
=
(16900 in )
723 k-in
618 k-in 3
4
+ 1
4330 in )
723 k-in
4
= 12200 in

Calculate average effective moment of inertia, Ie(avg) for
interior span (for 0.85 DL) For beam with two ends
continuous and use Ig for the two ends.
I e( avg ) = 0.7 I e( mid ) + 0.15 ( I e1 + I e2 )

= 0.7 (12200 in
+0.15 (16900 in + 16900 in

4
= 13600 in

Calculate instantaneous deflection due to 0.85 DL:
Use the deflection equation for a fixed-fixed beam but use
the span length from the centerline support to centerline
support to reasonably approximate the actual deflection.
DL(inst ) =
384 EI
0.85 (1.00 k/ft )( 35 ft ) (12 in/ft )

4
= 0.105 inches
384 ( 4030 ksi ) (13600 in 4 )

Calculate additional short-term Deflections (full DL & LL)
( D + L ) l
(1.62 k/ft )( 33.67 ft )
=
MA =
11
11
= 167 k-ft = 2000 k-in
2
n
MB
D + L ) l
(
=
2
n
1.62 k/ft )( 33.67 ft )

(
=
16
= 115 k-ft = 1380 k-in
16

Calculate additional short-term Deflections (full DL & LL)
Let Mc = Ma = - 2000 k-in for simplicity see problem
statement
M c = M A = 2000 k-in > M cr ( -) = 1610 k-in

cracking at supports
M B = 1380 k-in > M cr ( + ) = 618 k-in
cracking at midspan

Assume beam is fully cracked under full DL + LL,
therefore I= Icr (do not calculate Ie for now).
n = 7.20
Icr for supports
As = 2 ( 4 ) ( 0.20 in 2 ) + 3 ( 0.6 in 2 )
= 3.40 in
d = 20 in - 2.5 in = 17.5 in
2
As = 3 ( 0.6 in 2 ) = 1.80 in 2
d = 2.5 in

Class formula using doubly reinforced rectangular
section behavior.
2 ( n 1) As + 2nAs
2 ( n 1) Asd + 2nAs d
2
y +
y
=0
b
b
2 ( 6.2 ) (1.80 in 2 ) + 2 ( 7.2 ) ( 3.4 in 2 )

2
y
y +
12 in
2 ( 6.2 ) (1.80 in 2 ) ( 2.5 in ) + 2 ( 7.2 ) ( 3.4 in 2 ) (17.5 in )

=0
12 in

Class formula using doubly reinforced rectangular
section behavior.
2 ( n 1) As + 2nAs
2 ( n 1) Asd + 2nAs d
y +
y
=0
b
b
y 2 + 5.94 y 76.05 = 0
2
5.94 340
y=
= 6.25 in.
2

Calculate moment of inertia.
I cr ( + )
1 3
2
2
= by + ( n 1) As ( y d ) + nAs ( d y )
3
1
3
= (12 in )( 6.25 in )
3
+ ( 6.2 ) (1.80 in
) ( 2.5 in 6.25 in )
+ ( 7.2 ) ( 3.4 in
) (17.5 in 6.25 in )
= 4230 in 4

Weighted Icr
I cr = 0.7 I cr ( mid ) + 0.15 ( I cr1 + I cr2 )

= 0.7 ( 4330 in
= 4300 in
) + 0.15 ( 4230 in
+ 4230 in

Instantaneous Dead and Live Load Deflection.
DL(inst ) =
LL(inst )
Dl
384 EI
1.00 k/ft )( 35 ft ) (12 in/ft )

(
=
4
384 ( 4030 ksi ) ( 4300 in )
= 0.390 inches
0.62 k/ft
= DL(inst ) *
1.00 k/ft
= 0.242 inches

Long term Deflection at the midspan
3 ( 0.31 in 2 )
As ( t )
=
= 0.00221
(t ) =
2bw d 2 (12 in )(17.5 in )
Dead Load (Duration > 5 years)
2.0
=
=
= 1.80
1 + 50 1 + 50 ( 0.00221)
DL( L.T.) = DL DL( inst ) = 1.8 ( 0.390 in ) = 0.702 in

Long term Deflection use the midspan information
3 ( 0.31 in )
As ( t )
(t ) =
=
= 0.00221
2bw d 2 (12 in )(17.5 in )
2
Live Load (40 % sustained 6 months)
1.2
=
=
= 1.08
1 + 50 1 + 50 ( 0.00221)
LL( L.T.) = LL LL( inst ) = 1.08 ( 0.242 in )( 0.40 )
= 0.105 in

Total Deflection after Installation of Glass Partition Wall.
total = DL( inst ) + LL( inst ) + DL( L.T.) + LL( L.T.)
after attachment
permissible
= 0.390 in + 0.242 in + 0.702 in + 0.105 in

= 1.44 in
= total DL(inst )
= 1.44 in 0.105 in = 1.33 in

l
=
480
35 ft (12 in/ft )
=
= 0.875 in < 1.33 in ( NO GOOD!)
480

Check whether modifying Icr to Ie will give an
acceptable deflection: 3
3
I e( midspan )
M
M cr
cr
=
I
+
1
Ma
Ma
I cr
618 k-in
4
=
(16900 in )
1380 k-in
618 k-in
+ 1
1380 k-in
4
= 5460 in
4
4330
in
(
)

Check whether modifying Icr to Ie will give an
acceptable deflection:
3
1610 k-in
4
16900
in
I e(support ) =
)
(
2000 k-in
3
1610 k-in
4
4230 in )
+ 1
2000 k-in
= 10800 in 4
I e( avg ) = 0.7 I e( mid ) + 0.15 ( I e1 + I e2 )
= 0.7 ( 5460 in 4 ) + 0.15 (10800 in 4 + 10800 in 4 )

= 7060 in 4

Floor Beam meets the ACI Code Maximum permissible
Deflection Criteria. Adjust deflections:
4300 in 4
DL(inst ) = 0.390 in
= 0.238 in
4
7060 in
LL(inst )
DL( L.T.)
LL( L.T.)
4300 in 4
= 0.242 in
= 0.147 in
4
7060 in
4300 in 4
= 0.702 in
= 0.428 in
4
7060 in
4300 in 4
= 0.105 in
= 0.064 in
4
7060 in

Adjust deflections:
total = DL(inst ) + LL( inst ) + DL( L.T.) + LL( L.T.)

= 0.238 in. + 0.147 in. + 0.428 in. + 0.064 in.
= 0.877 in.
after attachment = total DL( inst )
= 0.877 in. 0.105 in.
= 0.772 in. < permissible = 0.875 in.
( OKAY!)

Part II: Check crack width @ midspan
z = fs 3 dc A
d c = ds = 2.5 in
A e = 2dsb = 2 ( 2.5 in )(12 in ) = 60 in
Ae
60 in 2
2
A=
=
= 15 in
# bars
4

Assume
f s = 0.6 f y = 0.6 ( 60 ksi ) = 36 ksi
( ACI 10.6.4 )
( 2.5 in ) (15 in )
= 120 k/in < 175 k/in ( OK )
z = ( 36 ksi )
For interior exposure, the crack width @ midspan

is acceptable.
Draw the shear and bending moment diagram.
Draw the free-body diagram of the beam.
= 0 = RBx
RBx = 0 kips
= 0 = 8 kips + RBy 10 kips 12 kips + RE
RBy + RE = 30 kips
= 0 = 8 kips ( 5 ft ) 10 kips ( 6 ft )
12 kips (10 ft ) + RE ( 20 ft )
RE = 7 kips
RBy = 23 kips
Draw the shear and bending moment diagram with each component.
= 0 = RBx
RBx = 0 kN
= 0 = RA 1.5 kN/m ( 9 m ) 4 kN 4 kN + RB
RA + RBy = 21.5 kN
= 0 = RA ( 9 m ) + 1.5 kN/m ( 9 m )( 4.5 m )

+ 4 kN ( 6.5 m ) + 4 kN ( 2.5 m )
RA = 10.75 kN
RBy = 10.75 kN
Draw the moment diagram
= 0 = RAx
RAx = 0 kN
= 0 = RAy 3.0 kN/m ( 5 m ) + RBy
RA + RBy = 15.0 kN
= 0 = +10 kN-m 3.0 kN/m ( 5 m )( 2.5 m )

+ RB ( 5 m ) 2.5 kN-m
RBy = 6.0 kN
RAy = 9.0 kN
= 0 = RAx
RAx = 0 lb
= 0 = RAy 40 lb/ft (12 ft ) 800 lb + RBy
RAy + RBy = 1280 lb
= 0 = 40 lb/ft (12 ft )( 6 ft )
800 lb (14 ft ) + RBy (16 ft )
RBy = 880 lb
RAy = 400 lb
Since I did not cover this in class I will give you the answer and you can work out the
problem.
= 0 = RAx
RAx = 0 lb
= 0 = RAy 450 lb + RDy 150 lb/ft ( 4 ft )
RAy + RDy = 1050 lb
= 0 = 450 lb ( 4 ft ) + RDy (12 ft )

150 lb/ft ( 4 ft )(14 ft )
RDy = 850 lb
RAy = 200 lb

= 0 = RBx
RBx = 0 lb
= 0 = RAy 2 kips + RBy 100 lb/ft (18 ft )
RAy + RDy = 3.8 kips
= 0 = +2 kips ( 24 ft ) RAy (12 ft )

+ 0.100 lb/ft (18 ft )( 9 ft )
RDy = 3.5667 kips
RAy = 0.2333 kips
The singularity function for the beam from left to right. The brackets represent the
location of the singularity and if the value in the bracket is less than zero then the
component is not turned on.
V ( x ) = 2 kips x + 3.5667 kips x 6 ft 0.1 k/ft x 6 ft + 0.2333 kips x 24 ft
0
M ( x ) = 2 kips x + 3.5667 kips x 6 ft

1
0.1 k/ft
x 6 ft
2
Draw the shear and bending moment diagram and the singularity function
representation.
= 0 = RAx
RAx = 0 lb
= 0 = RAy 2 kips/ft ( 8 ft ) + qB ( 2 ft )
RAy + qB ( 2 ft ) = 16 kips
= 0 = 2 kips/ft ( 8 ft )( 5 ft ) + qB ( 2 ft )(10
qB = 4 kips/ft
RAy = 8 kips
The singularity function for the beam from left to right. The brackets represent the
location of the singularity and if the value in the bracket is less than zero then the
component is not turned on.
V ( x ) = 8 kips x 0.1 k/ft x 1 ft + 0.1 k/ft x 9 ft
0
M ( x ) = 8 kips x
1
2 k/ft
4 k/ft
2
x 1 ft +
x 9 ft
2
2
CVEN 444
Assignment 2
due 6/11/03
The assignment will be review problems and will not be covered in class. You
will need to show free-body diagrams, use an engineering format and be neat!
The free body diagram of the problem is.
= 0 = RAx
RAx = 0
L
= 0 = RAy w + RBy
2
wL
RAy + RBy =
2
L L
M A = 0 = M A w 2 4 + RBy ( L )
wL2
M A + RBy L =
8
Using superposition from the tables for a cantilever beam, distributed load
3
L
w
2
L
B = 4L
24 EI
2
7 wL4
=
384 EI
B =
RBy L3

3 EI
Solve the equation for RBy by setting the deflections equal to one another.
RBy L3
7 wL4
=
3 EI 384 EI
7
RBy =
wL
128
Solve for the other components
wL
57 wL
RAy =
2
128
2
9 wL2
wL
M A + RBy L =
MA =
8
128
RAy + RBy =
The shear and bending moment diagram
= 0 = RAx
RAx = 0
= 0 = RAy q ( L ) + RBy + RCy + RDy + REy
RAy + RBy + RCy + RDy + REy = qL
L
L
L
3 L
= 0 = qL + RBy + RCy + RDy
+ REy ( L )
2
4
2
4
q ( L )
L
L
3 L
RBy + RCy + RDy
+ REy ( L ) =
2
4
2
4
Set up the superposition tables for the beam
L
q
2
3
4
L
L L
= L3 2 L +
24 EI
4
4 4
19 qL4
=
2048 EI
5 qL4
384 EI
2
19 qL4
3L
=
2048 EI
4
L
Rc
2
4 2
L
L
=
3L 4
48EI
4
4
L3
11
Rc
=
768 EI
L

L3
= Rc
2
48
EI
L3
11
3L
=
768 EI
4
L L
Rd
2
2
4 4 2 L L
L
=
L
6 LEI
4
4 4
L3
7
Rd
768 EI
L L
Rd
2
2
4 2 2 L L
L
=
L
6 LEI
2
4 2
L3
11
Rd
768 EI
L 3L
Rd
2
2
4
4
3L
L 3L
= L2
6 LEI
4
4 4
L3
9
Rd
768 EI
L3
9
L
=
Rb
768 EI
4
L

11
L3
=
Rb
2
768
EI

L3
7
3L
=
Rb
768 EI
4
Put into a matrix form.
9 L3 11 L3 7 L3
19 qL4
768 EI 768 EI 768 EI

2048 EI
11 L3 1 L3 11 L3 Rb 5 qL4

Rc =
768 EI 48 EI 768 EI 384 EI
Rd
3
3
3
7
L
11
L
9
L
19 qL4
768 EI 768 EI 768 EI

2048 EI
Solve for the matrix with the L = 4L for the final results
2
2
8
7 qL 7 q ( 4 L ) 7 qL
Rb

13 13
13
Rc = qL = q ( 4 L ) = qL
R 56 56
14
d 2
2
8
7 qL 7 q ( 4 L ) 7 qL
L 2
L 13
L 2
3 L
= 0 = qL + qL + qL + qL
+ REy ( L )
2 7
4 56
2 7
4
11q ( L ) 11q ( 4 L ) 11qL
REy ( L ) =
=
=
112
112
28
11q ( L )
2
13
2
RAy + qL + qL + qL +
= qL
7
56
7
112
11q ( L ) 11q ( 4 L ) 11qL
RAy ( L ) =
=
=
112
112
28
L
= 0 = RAy q + RBy + RCy
2
qL
RAy + RBy + RCy =
2
L 3 L
L
M A = 0 = M A + RBy 2 q 2 4 + RCy ( L) + M C
3q ( L )
L
RBy + M A + M C + RCy ( L ) =
8
2
L L
q
2 2
L
L
= 3L +
12 EI
2
2
7 qL4
=
192 EI
q 4
L
L
( L) =
3L 4 L +
24 EI
2
2
3
41 qL4
=
384 EI
q 3 L
( L) =
L
6 EI
2
=
7 qL3
48 EI
3
L
RBy
L
2
=
3EI
2
L3
1
=
RBy
24
EI
2
L
RBy
2 3L L
( L) =

6 EI
2
3
L
5
=
RBy
48
EI
1
8
L2
EI
( L ) = RBy
L
RCy
L
2 3L L
=

6 EI
2
2
L3
5
RCy
=
48
EI
1
3
L3
EI
( L ) = RCy
L2
1
( L ) = RCy
2
EI
L2
= MC
2 8
EI
L2
1
( L) = MC
2
EI
L
EI
( L) = M C
Put into a matrix form.
1 L3

24 EI
5 L3

48 EI
3
1 L
8 EI
5 L3

48 EI
1 L3

3 EI
1 L2

2 EI
7 qL4
1 L2
8 EI
192 EI
RBy
4
1 L2
41 qL
R
=
Cy
2 EI
384 EI
M C
7 qL4
L

EI
48 EI
Solve for the matrix with the L = 2L for the final results
1
1
1
4 qL 4 q ( 2 L ) 2 qL
RBy

9
9
9
qL =
q ( 2 L ) = qL
RCy =
M 32
32
16
C 5
5
5
2
2
2
192 qL 192 q ( 2 L ) 48 qL
RAy =
qL
16
5q ( L )
qL L
L 3L 9qL
M A = 0 = M A + 4 2 q 2 4 + 32 ( L) + 192
11q ( L )
11q ( 2 L )
11qL2
MA =
=
=
192
192
48
2
= 0 = RAy 150 kN + RBy 24 kN/m (10 m ) + RCy

RAy + RBy + RCy = 390 kN
= 0 = 150 kN ( 4 m ) + RBy (10 m ) 24 kN/m (10 m )(15 m ) + RCy ( 20 m )

RBy (10 m ) + RCy ( 20 m ) = 4200 kN-m
Pbx 2 2
L b x2 )
(
6 LEI
(150 kN )( 4 m )(10 m )
=
6 ( 20 m ) EI
(10 m ) =
(( 20 m )
( 4 m ) (10 m
1
= 14200 ( kN-m3 )
EI
(10 m ) =
5qL4
768 EI
5 ( 24 kN/m )( 20 m ) 1
=

768
EI
1
= 25000 ( kN-m3 )
EI
4
(10 m ) =
RBy L3
48EI
5 ( 20 m )
500 m3
=
RBy =
RBy
48EI
3EI
3
Solve for Rby, use the two components
500 m3
1
1
+ 25000 ( kN-m3 )
RBy = 14200 ( kN-m3 )
EI
EI
3 EI
RBy = 235.2 kN
Solve for other components
235.2 kN (10 m ) + RCy ( 20 m ) = 4200 kN-m
RCy = 92.4 kN
RAy = 62.4 kN
= 0 = RAy 30 k + RBy 60 k + RCy 40 k + RDy

RAy + RBy + RCy + RDy = 130 k
= 0 = 30 k (15 ft ) + RBy ( 30 ft ) 60 k ( 60 ft ) + RCy ( 70 ft )

40 k ( 80 ft ) + RDy (100 ft )
RBy ( 30 ft ) + RCy ( 70 ft ) + RDy (100 ft ) = 7250 k-ft
Pbx 2 2
L b x2 )
(
6 LEI
( 30 k )(15 ft )( 70 ft )
=
6 (100 ft ) EI
( 30 ft ) =
((100 ft )
(15 ft ) ( 30 ft )
(15 ft ) ( 70 ft )
1
= 255937.5 ( k-ft 3 )
EI
( 30 k )(15 ft )( 30 ft )
( 70 ft ) =
6 (100 ft ) EI
((100 ft )
1
= 199687.5 ( k-ft 3 )
EI
Pbx 2 2
( L b x2 )
6 LEI
( 60 k )( 40 ft )( 30 ft )
=
6 (100 ft ) EI
( 30 ft ) =
((100 ft )
( 40 ft ) ( 30 ft )
2
( 60 ft ) ( 30 ft )
1
= 900000 ( k-ft 3 )
EI
( 60 k )( 60 ft )( 30 ft )
( 70 ft ) =
6 (100 ft ) EI
((100 ft )
1
= 990000 ( k-ft 3 )
EI
Pbx 2 2
L b x2 )
(
6 LEI
( 40 k )( 20 ft )( 30 ft )
=
6 (100 ft ) EI
( 30 ft ) =
((100 ft )
( 20 ft ) ( 30 ft )
2
1
= 348000 ( k-ft 3 )
EI
( 40 k )( 20 ft )( 70 ft )
( 70 ft ) =
6 (100 ft ) EI
((100 ft )
( 20 ft ) ( 70 ft )
2
( 70 ft ) ( 30 ft )
2
( 30 ft ) ( 30 ft )
1
= 438666.67 ( k-ft 3 )
EI
( 30 ft ) =
=
Pbx 2 2
( L b x2 )
6 LEI
RBy ( 70 ft )( 30 ft )
6 (100 ft ) EI
((100 ft )
1
= 14700 ( ft 3 ) RBy
EI
R ( 30 ft )( 30 ft )
( 70 ft ) =
6 (100 ft ) EI
((100 ft )
1
= 12300 ( ft 3 ) RBy
EI
( 30 ft ) =
=
Pbx 2 2
L b x2 )
(
6 LEI
RCy ( 30 ft )( 30 ft )
6 (100 ft ) EI
((100 ft )
( 30 ft ) ( 30 ft )
2
( 70 ft ) ( 30 ft )
1
= 12300 ( ft 3 ) RCy
EI
R ( 70 ft )( 30 ft )
( 70 ft ) = Cy
6 (100 ft ) EI
((100 ft )
1
= 14700 ( ft 3 ) RCy
EI
Solve the matrix format

14700 12300
255937.5 900000 348000 1503937.5
+
+
EI
By
EI
EI
EI
EI
EI
=
=
12300 14700 RCy 199687.5 + 990000 + 438666.67 1628354.1667

EI
EI
EI
EI
EI
EI

and
RBy 32.0853 k
=
RCy 83.9255 k
solve for the other reactions
RAy = 9.8626 k
RDy = 4.1264 k
CVEN 444
Assignment 3
due 6/13/03
[1]
Consider a simple rectangular beam( b x h ) reinforced
with steel reinforcement of As. Assume b = 8 in., d = 12
in., h = 14.5 in., As = 3.0 in2 and fc =4 ksi and fy = 60 ksi.
a) Determine the centroid (neutral axis, NA) and
moment of inertia, Ixx for an ideal beam (no
cracks).
b) Determine the NA and moment of inertia, Ixx, of
Find the modulus of elasticity of concrete using
Ec = 57000 f c = 57000 4000

= 3604996 psi 3605 ksi
Compute n
n=
Es 29000 ksi
=
= 8.044
Ec
3605 ksi
Set up a table to find the components for the uncracked beam.

Material
Concrete
Steel
niAi (in )
n'
1
116
7.044383 21.13315
yi (in)
7.25
12
137.1331
ybar
yiAi (in )
Ii (in )
1094.598 2032.417
403.335979
y n A = 1094.598 in = 7.982 in.

n A 137.1331 in
I = I + ( y y ) n A = 2032.417 in
3
i i
= 2435.753 in 4
62.15681037
341.1791686
The results are
y=
(yi-ybar) niAi (in )
841
2032.417 -0.7320072
253.5978
0
4.01799278
7.982007 in
4
2435.753 in
Itotal
(yi-ybar) (in)
+ 403.336 in 4
Compute the cracked center using the formulation from lecture.

2
2nAs
2nAs
y +
y
d = 0
b
b
2 ( 8.044 ) ( 3.0 in 2 )
2 ( 8.044 ) ( 3.0 in 2 )
2
y
(12 in.) = 0
y +
8 in.
8 in.
y + 6.033 y 72.396 = 0
y=
( 6.033)
6.033 +
4 ( 72.396 )
= 6.011 in.
or
2
y
y
+ ( 2n ) 2 ( n ) = 0
d
d
2
3.0 in
= 0.03125
=
( 8 in.)(12 in.)
y
=
d
=
( n )
+ 2n n
( (8.044 )( 0.03125) )
+ 2 ( 8.044 )( 0.03125 ) ( 8.044 )( 0.03125 )
= 0.5009144
y = 0.5009144* (12 in.) = 6.011 in.
Compute the cracked moment of inertia
I=
by 3
2
+ ( d y ) nAs
3
( 8 in.)( 6.011 in.)

=
3
= 1444.74 in 4
+ (12 in. 6.011 in ) ( 8.044 ) ( 3.0 in 2 )

2
[2]
For the given beam with fc = 5 ksi and fy = 60 ksi.
a) Determine the centroid (neutral axis, NA) and
cracks).
Ec = 57000 f c = 57000 5000

= 4030508 psi 4030.5 ksi
Compute n
n=
Es 29000 ksi
=
= 7.195
Ec 4030.5 ksi
The area of the steel is 4(0.79 in2) = 3.16 in2 Set up a table to find the components for the uncracked
beam.
2
niAi (in )
Material
n'
Concrete
1
264
Removed section
1
-24
Steel
6.195137 19.57663
259.5766
ybar
Ii (in )
(yi-ybar) (in)
11
2
20
2904
-48
391.5327
10648
-32
0
-1.5108821
-10.510882
7.48911786
602.6499166
-2651.48744
1097.9924
3247.533
10616
The results are
y n A = 3247.533 in = 12.511 in.

y=
n A 259.5766 in
I = I + ( y y ) n A = 10616 in 950.845 in
3
i i
= 9665.155 in 4
yiAi (in )
12.51088 in
4
9665.155 in
Itotal
yi (in)
-950.8451234
Bonus Problem (5 points)

The cracked form must take in the loss of area assume that the stress is linearly and A0 is removed area and
y0 is the depth
T =C
As fs =
y y0
1
1
f cby f c +
f c ( A0 )
2
2
y
by A0 A0 y0
fs =
+
fc
A
A
A
y
2
2
s
s
s
by A0 A0 y0
+
Es s =
Ec c
A
A
A
y
2
2
s
s
s
A A y
s by A0 A0 y0 Ec
d y by
=
+
=
0 + 0 0
y
c 2 As As As 2 y Es
2nAs nAs nAs 2 y
by 2 A0 y A0 y0
dy=
+

2nAs nAs nAs 2
0=
A y
A
b
y 2 + 1 0 y + 0 0 d
2nAs
nAs
2nAs
Solve the quadratic equation
A y
A
b
y 2 + 1 0 y + 0 0 d
2nAs
nAs
2nAs
( 24 in 2 ) ( 4 in.)
24 in 2 )
(
12 in.)
(
2
0=
y
1
y
20
in.
+
2
2
2 ( 7.195 ) ( 3.16 in 2 )
( 7.195 ) ( 3.16 in )
2 ( 7.195 ) ( 3.16 in )
0 = 0.2639 y 2 0.05559 y 17.8888

y = 8.34 in.
0=
Solve for the moment of inertia

2
1 3 1
2
h
3
I = by b ' h + y b ' h + ( d y ) nAs
3
2
12
2
1
( 4 in.)
1
3
3
= (12 in.)( 8.34 in.) ( 6 in.)( 4 in.) +
( 8.34 in.) ( 6 in.)( 4 in.)
3
12
+ ( ( 20 in.) ( 8.34 in.) ) ( 7.195 ) ( 3.16 in 2 )

2
= 2320.4 in 4 996.7 in 4 + 3091.1 in 4

= 4414.8 in 4
Compute the cracked center using the formulation from lecture.

[3]
Given: fc = 6 ksi and fy = 60 ksi. The dimensions are beff
= 36 in., bw = 9 in., d = 17 in., hf = 3 in., h=19.5 in. and As
6 # 9 bars. If the top is in compression and bottom is in
tension.
Determine the centroid (neutral axis, NA) and
cracks).
a)
Ec = 57000 f c = 57000 6000

= 4415201 psi 4415.2 ksi
Compute n
n=
Es 29000 ksi
=
= 6.568
Ec 4415.2 ksi
The area of the steel is 6(1.00 in2) = 6.0 in2 Set up a table to find the components for the uncracked beam.
2
niAi (in )
n'
1
148.5
1
108
5.568219 33.40931
Material
Web
Flange
Steel
yi (in)
11.25
1.5
17
289.9093
ybar
yiAi (in )
Ii (in )
2400.583 3450.094
8814.881515
y n A = 2400.583 in = 8.28 in.

n A 289.9093 in
I = I + ( y y ) n A = 3450.09 in
3
i i
= 12264.98 in 4
1309.495323
4965.265196
2540.120996
The results are
y=
1670.625 3369.094 2.96953706

162
81
-6.7804629
567.9583
0
8.71953706
8.280463 in
4
12264.98 in
Itotal
(yi-ybar) (in)
+ 8814.88 in 4
Bonus Problem (5 points)

The cracked form must take in the loss of area assume that the stress is linearly and A0 is removed area and
y0 is the depth
T =C
As fs =
1
1 y y0
f cby
f c ( A0 )
2
2 y
by
A A y
fs =
0 + 0 0 fc
2 As 2 As As 2 y
by
A A y
0 + 0 0 Ec c
Es s =
2 As 2 As As 2 y
A y
A A y E
A
s by
d y by
=
0 + 0 0 c
=
0 + 0 0
y
c 2 As 2 As As 2 y Es
2nAs 2nAs nAs 2 y
by 2
A y A y
dy=
0 + 0 0
2nAs 2nAs nAs 2
0=
A y
A
b
y 2 + 1 0 y + 0 0 d
2nAs
2nAs
2nAs
Solve the quadratic equation A0 = (36 in-9 in)(ybar 3in)
A y
A
b
y 2 + 1 0 y + 0 0 d
2nAs
2nAs
2nAs
( ( 27 in.) y 81 in 2 )
( ( 27 in.) y 81 in 2 ) ( 3 in.)
( 36 in.)
2
0=
1
17
in.
y
+
y
+
2 ( 6.586 ) ( 6 in 2 )
2 ( 6.586 ) ( 6 in 2 )
2 ( 6.586 ) ( 6 in 2 )
0 = 0.1139 y 2 + 3.0498 y 20.0747

y = 5.46 in.
0=
Solve for the moment of inertia

2
1 3 1
2
h
3
I = by b ' h + b ' h + ( d y ) nAs
3
2
12
2
1
( 2.36 in.)
1
3
3
= ( 36 in.)( 5.46 in.) ( 27 in.)( 2.36 in.) +

27
in.
2.36
in.
(
)(
)
3
2
12
+ ( (17 in.) ( 5.46 in.) ) ( 6.586 ) ( 6 in 2 )

2
= 1953.3 in 4 118.3 in 4 + 5262.4 in 4

= 7097.4 in 4
CVEN 444
Assignment 4
due 6/16/03
Problem 1
For the beam cross-section shown, determine
whether the failure of the beam will be initiated by
crushing of concrete or yielding of steel.
a)
b)
fc = 3500 psi As = 9 in2

fc =7500 psi As = 4.5 in2
Also determine whether the section satisfies ACI

Code requirement
a)
Assume that fy = 60 ksi, fc =3.5 ksi, As =9 in2 1= 0.85
Solve using equilibrium
C =T
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 9 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 3.5 ksi )(14 in.)
= 12.97 in.
Compute c
c=
12.97 in.
= 15.25 in.
0.85
Check the c/d ratio
c 15.25 in.
=
= 0.598 >/ 0.6
d 25.5 in.
therefore, the beam is transition zone, the steel will yield

before the concrete crushes..
Check the min of the beam
As
9.0 in 2
=
= 0.0252
bd (14 in.)( 25.5 in.)
Compute the minimum
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
=
3 f c = 3 3500 = 0.00296
fy
60000
0.00333
0.0252 > 0.00333 satisfies the ACI code.
b)
Assume fy = 60 ksi, fc =7.5 ksi, As =4.5 in2
Compute the 1 value.
f c 4000
1000
7500 4000
= 0.85 0.05
= 0.675
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05

C =T
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 4.5 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 7.5 ksi )(14 in.)
= 3.03 in.
Compute c
c=
3.03 in.
= 4.48 in.
0.675
Check the c/d ratio
therefore, tension controlled the steel before concrete

c 4.48 in.
=
= 0.176 < 0.375 crushes.
d 25.5 in.
As
4.5 in 2
=
= 0.0126
bd (14 in.)( 25.5 in.)
Compute the minimum
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
=
3 f c = 3 7500 = 0.00433
fy
60000
0.00433
Problem 2
Calculate the nominal moment strength of the beam
a)
b)
fc = 4500 psi
fc =7000 psi
Also determine whether the section satisfies ACI Code requirement.

a) Singly reinforced beam fy = 60 ksi, fc =4.5 ksi, As =4(1.0 in2 ) =4.0 in2
f c 4000
1000
4500 4000
= 0.85 0.05
= 0.825
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05

C =T
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 4 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(12 in.)
= 5.23 in.
Compute c
c=
5.23 in.
= 6.34 in.
0.825
Check the c/d ratio

c 6.34 in.
therefore, tension controlled =0.9
=
= 0.309 < 0.375
d 20.5 in.
As
4 in 2
=
=
= 0.0163
bd (12 in.)( 20.5 in.)
Compute the minimum, min
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
=
3 f c = 3 4500 = 0.00335
fy
60000
0.00335

Compute the nominal moment
a
M n = As f y d
2
5.23 in.
= ( 4 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 20.5 in.

= 4292.4 k-in
2
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 4292.4 k-in ) = 3863.16 k-in

b) Singly reinforced beam fy = 60 ksi, fc =7 ksi, As =4(1.0 in2 ) =4.0 in2
Compute the 1 value.
f c 4000
1000
7000 4000
= 0.85 0.05
= 0.70
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05

C =T
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 4 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 7 ksi )(12 in.)
= 3.36 in.
Compute c
3.36 in.
= 4.80 in.
1
0.7
Check the c/d ratio
c=
c 4.80 in.
=
= 0.234 < 0.375
d 20.5 in.
The does not change due to the increase in the strength of the concrete so = 0.0163
Compute the minimum, min
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
=
3 f c = 3 7000 = 0.00418
fy
60000
0.00418

a
M n = As f y d
2
3.36 in.
= ( 4 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 20.5 in.

= 4516.8 k-in
2
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 4516.8 k-in ) = 4065.12 k-in
b)For the l-beam use fy = 60 ksi, fc =4.5 ksi, As =6(0.79 in2 )= 4.74 in2 and 1 = 0.825.
Assume that the 12-in section is going to work, however if it does not need to use area
concrete = 4-in.*12-in. +16-in.*x Solve using equilibrium
C =T
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 4.74 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(12 in.)
= 6.20 in.
Therefore, the uniform distributed load extends beyond the 4 in segment, so rework the
problem.
T =C
As f y = 0.85 f c ( 4 in.)(12 in.) + 0.85 f c ( x )(16 in.)
x=
As f y 0.85 f c ( 4 in.)(12 in.)

0.85f c (16 in.)
( 4.74 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 0.85 ( 4.5 ksi ) ( 4 in.)(12 in.)

=
2
0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(16 in.)
= 1.65 in.
Compute c
a = 4.0 in. + 1.65 in. = 5.65 in.
a 5.65 in.
c=
=
= 6.85 in.
1 0.825
Check the c/d ratio
c 6.85 in.
therefore, tension controlled =0.9.
=
= 0.304 < 0.375
d 22.5 in.
Check the min of the beam, (use the larger value of b to give a smaller )
As
4.74 in 2
=
= 0.0132
bd (16 in.)( 22.5 in.)
So =0.0132 > 0.00335 so it satisfies the ACI standards.
Compute the nominal moment can be done by either solving for location of the center of
the compression zone to compute the moment or break the moment into two sections one
for the (4 in.)(12 in.) area and the other for (1.65 in.) (16 in.) area.
a
a
M n = 0.85 f c Ac1 d 1 + 0.85 f c Ac2 d 2

2
2
4.0 in.
= 0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )( 4 in.)(12 in.) 22.5 in.
1.65 in.
+0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(1.65 in.)(16 in.) 22.5 in. 4.0 in. +
= 3763.8 k-in. + 1784.8 k-in.

= 5548.6 k-in.
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 5548.6 k-in.) = 4993.8 k-in
b)For an L-beam use fy = 60 ksi, fc =7 ksi, As =6(0.79 in2 )= 4.74 in2 and 1 =0.7.
Assume that the 12-in section is going to work, however if it does not need to use area
concrete = 4-in.*12-in. +16-in.*x Solve using equilibrium
C =T
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 4.74 in ) ( 60 ksi )
=
2
0.85 ( 7 ksi )(12 in.)
= 3.98 in.
Compute c
3.98 in.
= 5.69 in.
1
0.7
Check the c/d ratio
c=
a <4 in. therefore using b=12-in. is ok.
c 5.69 in.
therefore, tension controlled =0.9.
=
= 0.253 < 0.375
d 22.5 in.
As
4.74 in 2
=
= 0.0176
bd (12 in.)( 22.5 in.)
So =0.0176 > 0.00418 so it satisfies the ACI standards.

a
M n = As f y d
2
3.98 in.
= ( 4.74 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 22.5 in.

= 5833.0 k-in.
2
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 5833.0 k-in.) = 5249.7 k-in
Problem 3
Calculate the safe distributed load intensity that the beam can carry. Assume that the
only dead load is the weight of the beam (use 150 lb/ ft3). Solve for a distributed load for
the live load.
wu = 1.2wDL + 1.6 wLL
Use
fc = 4000 psi
fy =60000 psi
fy = 60 ksi, fc =4 ksi, As =4(1.0 in2 ) =4.0 in2 1 =0.85

C =T
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 4 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(12 in.)
= 5.88 in.
Compute c
a 5.88 in.
=
= 6.92 in.
c=
1
0.85
Check the c/d ratio
c 6.92 in.
=
= 0.308 < 0.375
d 22.5 in.

As
4 in 2
=
=
= 0.0148
bd (12 in.)( 22.5 in.)
Compute the minimum
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
0.00333
min =
3 f c = 3 4000 = 0.00316
f
60000
y
a
M n = As f y d
2
5.88 in.
= ( 4 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 22.5 in.

= 4694.4 k-in
2
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 4694.4 k-in ) = 4224.96 k-in

Compute the maximum moment.
8M
wl 2
Mu =
w= 2u
8
l
8 ( 4224.96 k-in )
w=
= 0.4075 k/in. w = 4.89 k/ft
2
12 in
24 ft 1 ft
Assume that the load is a live load and the dead load is
2
1 ft
DL = 0.15 k/ft 3 (12 in.)( 25 in.)
12 in.
= 0.3125 k/ft.
Compute live load
wu 1.2wDL
1.6
4.89 k/ft. 1.2 ( 0.3125 k/ft )
= 2.822 k/ft
wLL =
1.6
wu = 1.2wDL + 1.6wLL wLL =
CVEN 444
Assignment 5
due 6/18/03
The assignment will be review problems and will not be covered in class.
You will need to show free-body diagrams, use an engineering format and
be neat!
Compute the stresses in the compression steel, fs, for the cross-sections. Compute the
nominal moment strength and determine the reduction factor for determining the ultimate
moment.
fc = 5000 psi
fy =60000 psi
a)
fy = 60 ksi, fc =5 ksi, As =3(1.0 in2 ) =3.0 in2 As =2(0.31 in2 ) =0.62 in2
f 4000
1 = 0.85 0.05 c
1000
5000 4000
= 0.85 0.05
= 0.80
1000
Assume the compression steel yields

A A) f
(
a=
s
0.85f cb
= 3.36 in.
( 3 in
=
0.62 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi )
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(10 in.)
Compute c
c=
3.36 in.
= 4.2 in.
0.8
Check the strain
c d
4.2 in. 2.5 in.
cu =
0.003 = 0.00121
4.2 in.
c
s =
Check the yield strain of steel is

f
60 ksi
y = y =
= 0.00207
Es 29000 ksi
Therefore 0.00121 is not greater than 0.00207 so the compression steel does not yield.
Use the equation for finding the c either by iterations or use
( c d )
As f y = As E s
cu + 0.85 f cb1c
c

A E
(
c +
s
s cu
As f y
0.85 f cb1
) c A E
s
s cu
0.85 f cb1
=0
Plug in to the equation and solve the quadratic equation.
A E
(
0=c +
2
s cu
As f y
0.85 f cb 1
) c A E
s
0=c
0.85 f cb 1
( ( 0.62 in ) (87 ksi ) (3.00 in ) ( 60 ksi ) ) c

+
2
s cu
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(10 in.)( 0.8 )
( 0.62 in ) (87 ksi )( 2.5 in.)
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(10 in.)( 0.8 )
0 = c 2 3.70765c 3.96618
Solve using a quadratic equation
c=
=
b b 2 4ac
2a
3.70765
c = 4.575 in.
( 3.70765)
2
4 ( 3.96618 )
Check the stress fs

c d
fs = Es s =
cu
c
4.575 in. 2.5 in.
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
4.575 in.
= 39.46 ksi
As As
bd bd
3 in 2
0.62 in 2
=
= 0.0136
(10 in.)(17.5 in.) (10 in.)(17.5 in.)
eff = =
Compute the minimum

200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
min =
3 f c = 3 5000 = 0.00354
fy
60000
0.00354
Determine the c/d ratio

c 4.575 in.
=
= 0.2614 < 0.375
d 17.5 in.
therefore, the beam is in the tension region

and = 0.9
M n = As f y As f s d + As f s( d d )
2
0.8 ( 4.575 in.)
= ( 3 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) ( 0.62 in 2 ) ( 39.46 ksi ) 17.5 in.
+ ( 0.62 in 2 ) ( 39.46 ksi )(17.5 in. 2.5 in.)
= 2804.21 k-in.
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 2804.21 k-in.) = 2523.8 k-in
b) For the doubly reinforced beam use fy = 60 ksi, fc =5 ksi, As =4(1.0 in2 ) =4.0 in2 As
=2(0.79 in2 ) =1.58 in2 and 1=0.8 Assume the compression steel yields
( A A) f
a=
s
( 4 in
=
1.58 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi )
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(12 in.)
0.85f cb
= 2.85 in.
Compute c
a 2.85 in.
c=
=
= 3.56 in.
0.8
1
Check the strain
c d
3.56 in. 2.5 in.
s =
cu =
0.003 = 0.00089
3.56 in.
c
Therefore 0.00089 is not greater than 0.00207 so the compression steel does not yield.
A E
(
0=c +
2
s cu
As f y
0.85 f cb 1
) c A E
s
0=c
0.85 f cb 1
((1.58 in ) (87 ksi ) ( 4.00 in ) ( 60 ksi ) ) c

+
2
s cu
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.8 )
(1.58 in ) (87 ksi )( 2.5 in.)
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.8 )
0 = c 2 2.51324c 8.42279
b b 2 4ac
c=
2a
=
2.51324
( 2.51324 )
4 ( 8.42279 )
c = 4.419 in.
Check the stress fs
c d
fs = Es s =
cu
c
4.419 in. 2.5 in.
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
4.419 in.
= 37.78 ksi

As As
bd bd
4 in 2
1.58 in 2
=
= 0.00938
(12 in.)( 21.5 in.) (12 in.)( 21.5 in.)
Compute the minimum
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
0.00354
min =
3 f c = 3 5000 = 0.00354
f
60000
y
eff = =

Determine the c/d ratio
c 4.419 in.
=
= 0.2055 < 0.375
d
21.5 in.
therefore, the beam is in the tension region

and = 0.9

a
M n = As f y As fs d + As fs( d d )
2
0.8 ( 4.419 in.)
= ( 4 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) (1.58 in 2 ) ( 37.78 ksi ) 21.5 in.
+ (1.58 in 2 ) ( 37.78 ksi )( 21.5 in. 2.5 in.)
= 4692.06 k-in.
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 4692.06 k-in.) = 4222.9 k-in
CVEN 444
Assignment 6
due 6/20/03
The assignment will be review problems and will not be covered in class. Use an
engineering format and be neat!
For the given sections (a),(b) and (c) assume fc = 4000 psi and fy =60000 psi
1. At failure determine whether the precast section will act similar to a

rectangular section or as flanged section and check to see if the tension
steel has yielded
2. Check whether the section satisfy ACI requirement.
3. Calculate the nominal moment of the section
a) For the T-Beam, use fy = 60 ksi, fc =4 ksi, As =6(1.0 in2 ) =6.0 in2 1 =0.85
Assume a rectangular section so that b= 30 in.
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 6 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 30 in.)
= 3.53 in.
The a value is greater than 3 in. therefore the beam must be analyzed as T-beam.
T =C
As f y = 0.85f c ( beff bw ) hf + 0.85f cbw a
a=
As f y 0.85f c ( beff bw ) hf
0.85f cb
( 6 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 30 in. 12 in.)( 3 in.)

=
2
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(12 in.)
= 4.324 in.
Compute c
4.324 in.
= 5.09 in.
1
0.85
Compute the c/d ratio
c=
c 5.09 in.
=
= 0.283 0.375 tension controlled = 0.9
d
18 in.
A
= s
bd
6 in 2
=
= 0.0111
(18 in.)( 30 in.)
Compute the minimum
200
200
=
= 0.00333
f
60000
y
min =
3 f c = 3 4000 = 0.00316
fy
60000
0.00333

h
M n = 0.85 f c ( beff bw ) hf d f
2
+ 0.85 f cbw a d
2
3.0 in.
= 0.85 ( 4.0 ksi )( 30 in. 12 in.)( 3 in.) 18 in.
4.324 in.
+0.85 ( 4.0 ksi )(12 in.)( 4.324 in.) 18 in.
= 3029.4 k-in. + 2794.1 k-in.

= 5823.5 k-in.
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 5823.5 k-in.) = 5241.2 k-in.
Compute the L-Beam using fy = 60 ksi, fc =4 ksi, As =5(1.0 in2 ) =5.0 in2 1 =0.85
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 5 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 28 in.)
= 3.15 in.
The a value is greater than 3 in. therefore the beam must be analyzed as L-beam.
T =C
As f y = 0.85f c ( beff bw ) hf + 0.85f cbw a
a=
As f y 0.85f c ( beff bw ) hf
0.85f cb
( 5 in ) ( 60 ksi ) 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 28 in. 15 in.)( 3 in.)

2
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(15 in.)
= 3.282 in.
Compute c
3.282 in.
= 3.86 in.
0.85
1
c=
c 3.86 in.
=
27 in.
d

A
= s
bd
5 in 2
=
= 0.0066
( 27 in.)( 28 in.)

h
M n = 0.85 f c ( beff bw ) hf d f
2
+ 0.85 f cbw a d
2
3.0 in.
= 0.85 ( 4.0 ksi )( 28 in. 15 in.)( 3 in.) 27 in.
3.282 in.
+0.85 ( 4.0 ksi )(15 in.)( 3.282 in.) 27 in.
= 3381.3 k-in. + 4244.6 k-in.

= 7625.9 k-in.
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 7625.9 k-in.) = 6863.3 k-in.
Compute the L-Beam using fy = 60 ksi, fc =4 ksi, As =4(0.79 in2 ) =3.16 in2 1 =0.85
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 3.16 in ) ( 60 ksi )
=
2
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(18 in.)
= 3.10 in.
The a value is less than 3.5 in. therefore the beam must be analyzed as rectangular beam.
Compute c
a 3.10 in.
c=
=
= 3.64 in.
0.85
1
c 3.64 in.
=
d
18 in.
A
= s
bd
3.16 in 2
=
= 0.00975
(18 in.)(18 in.)

Treat it as a rectangular section and compute the nominal moment
a
M n = ( As f y ) d
2
3.10 in.
= ( 3.16 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 18 in.
= 3118.9 k-in.
Mu = Mn
= 0.9 ( 3118.9 k-in.) = 2807.0 k-in.
CVEN 444
Assignment 7
due 6/23/03
1) What is the minimum thickness of a ribbed one-way slab, if one end is continuous
and length is 18 ft?
From table 9.5 a from ACI for a continuous slab
12 in.
18 ft
l
1 ft
=
= 11.68 in. Use 12.0 in.
18.5
18.5
2) What is the pattern loading to obtain the maximum moment at 1 (center of the beam)
for uniform dead load, wD, and a uniform live load, wL. Use the first figure to draw
the qualitative influence lines and the second figure to show the loading pattern.
3) What is the pattern loading to obtain the maximum shear at 2 (center of the beam) for
uniform dead load, wD, and a uniform live load, wL. Use the first figure to draw the
qualitative influence lines and the second figure to show the loading pattern.
4. Determine beff , if bw =10 in., L1 = 7 ft, and L2 = 24 ft. and hf = 4 in. for both the
spandrel beam(L-beam and T-beam)
For the spandrel beam (From 8.10.3 ACI code)

12 in.
24 ft
L
1 ft + 10 in. = 34 in.
beff
+ bw =
12
12
6hf + bw = 6 ( 4 in.) + 10 in. = 34 in.
bactual
Use 34 in.
clear distance
= bw + 0.5*
= 10 in. +
to next web
12 in.
7 ft
1 ft = 52 in.
2
For the T beam

12 in.
24 ft
L
1 ft = 72 in.
beff
=
4
4
16hf + bw = 16 ( 4 in.) + 10 in. = 74 in.
bactual
Use 52 in.
12 in.
7 ft
clear distance
1 ft = 52 in.
= bw + 0.5*
=
+
10
in.
2
to next web
5. Design the eight-span east west in figure. A typical 1-ft wide design strip is
shaded. A partial section through this strip is shown. The beams are assumed to
be 14 in. wide. The concrete strength is 4500 psi and the reinforcement strength
is 60 ksi. The live load is 140 psf and dead load of 80 psf.
Compute the 1 value for the concrete
4500 4000
= 0.825
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05
Design for 1-ft wide strip, as if it were a singly reinforced section From table 9.5a
12 in.
18 ft
l
1 ft. = 9.0 in. for an external bay
=
24
24
12 in.
18 ft
l
1 ft. = 7.7 in. for an internal bay
=
28
28
Use a h = 9 in. and assume that d ~8 in. (0.75-in cover and use a #4 bar d =0.5-in.)
Compute self-weight of the beam
1 ft.
1 ft.
3
wself = bh = (12 in.)
( 9 in.)
( 0.15 k/ft )
12
in.
12
in.
= 0.1125 k/ft
Compute the moment action on the beam or 1 ft strip.
wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL = 1.2 ( 0.080 k/ft + 0.1125 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 0.140 k/ft )
= 0.455 k/ft
w l 2 ( 0.455 k/ft )(18 ft.)
Mu = u =
10
10
= 14.742 k-ft. 176.9 k-in.
Assume the steel is tension controlled.

Mn
176.9 k-in.
0.9
= 196.56 k-in.
Mn =
Assume that d-a/2 ~0.9d =0.9(8 in.) = 7.2 in. Solve for As
a
Mn
M n = As f y d As =
a
2
fy d
2
196.56 k-in.
As =
( 60 ksi )( 7.2 in.)
= 0.455 in 2
Use 0.455 in2 per 1 ft strip. Check the minimum amount of steel
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
=
3 f c = 3 4500 = 0.003354
fy
60000
0.003354
The area of steel min*bd=0.003354*(12-in)(8-in) = 0.322 in2 therefore we will need to

use 0.455 in2 per 1 ft strip. Use #5 bar, which will result in a d=9 in-(0.75 in cover +
0.625 in/2) =7.93 in. The spacing between bars is
A
As
A
= b s = b (12 in.)
12 in. s
As
0.31 in 2
s=
12 in.)
2 (
0.455 in
= 8.17 in. Use s= 8 in.
Compute a with As = 0.31 in2 * (12 in./8 in.) = 0.465 in2 per foot
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 0.465 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(12 in.)
= 0.608 in.
Compute c
a 0.608 in.
c=
=
= 0.74 in.
1
0.825
The c/d = 0.74 in/7.93 in = 0.093 < 0.375, therefore tension controlled and = 0.9
Compute Mn for the strip.
a
M n = ( As f y ) d
2
0.608 in.
= ( 0.465 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 7.93 in.
= 212.77 k-in. 196.56 k-in. OK!

Check the thermal and shrinkage reinforcement requirement These bars are
perpendicular to the reinforcements for the one-way slab development.
As = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 (12 in.)( 9 in.) = 0.1944 in 2
Use 0.194 in2 per 1 ft strip. The maximum allowable spacing is

5h = 5 ( 9 in.) = 45 in.
smax =
18 in.
18 in.
Compute the spacing for the thermal bars using #4 bars
0.2 in 2
s=
12 in.)
2 (
0.194 in
= 12.35 in. Use s= 12.0 in.
Use #4 bar at 12.0 in spacing.
CVEN 444
Assignment 8
due 6/25/03
1. For the beam create a envelope for the shear and for the bending moment. If the
loads wL = 3.0 k/ft and wD =1.2 k/ft
You can compute the shear and bending moment diagrams using superposition
tables, Visual analysis to find the reactions, There were six loadings, I looked at
to obtain the envelope.
Uniform load (dead and live) over the entire beam: Ray = 46.38k Rby=156.42 k,
Rcy=156.42k and Rdy= 46.38k
Loading
7
6
kips
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
x (ft)
40
45
50
55
60
65
Shear
100
80
60
40
kips
20
0
-20 0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
40
45
50
55
60
65
-40
-60
-80
-100
x (ft)
Bending Moment
200
Moment (k-ft)
100
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
-100
-200
-300
-400
x (ft)
50
55
60
65
Uniform load (dead and live) over 2/3 of beam: Ray = 44.77k Rby=163.94 k,
Rcy=96.74k and Rdy= 4.155k
Load
7
6
kips
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
Shear and Bending Moment Diagrams

300
200
k & k-ft
100
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
-100
-200
-300
-400
x (ft)
Shear
Bending Moment
50
55
60
65
Uniform load (dead and live) over 2/3 of beam: Ray =4.155 k Rby=96.74k,
Rcy=163.94 k and Rdy= 44.77k
Load
7
6
kips
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
50
55
60
65
x(ft)
load
Shear and Bending Moment Diagrams

300
200
k & k-ft
100
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
-100
-200
-300
-400
x (ft)
Shear
Bending Moment
Uniform load (dead and live) split over the two outside sections of the beam:
Ray =54.53k Rby=88.27k, Rcy=88.27 k and Rdy= 54.53k
load
7
6
kips
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
50
55
60
x (ft)
load
Shear and Bending Moment Diagram

300
250
200
k & k-ft
150
100
50
0
-50 0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
-100
-150
-200
x (ft)
Shear
Bending Moment
65
Uniform load (dead and live) split over the center sections of the beam:
Ray =2.55k Rby=104.25k, Rcy=104.25 k and Rdy= 2.55k
load
7
6
kips
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
50
55
60
X (ft)
load
Shear and Bending Moment Diagram

300
200
k & k-ft
100
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
-100
-200
-300
x (ft)
Shear
Bending Moment
65
The shear envelope is defined as
Possible Shear
100
50
kips
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
-50
-100
-150
x (ft)
DL only
Split
DL+LL
Middle
DL+2/3LL
Max Shear
DL+2/3LL(2)
Min Shear
Shear Envelope
100
50
0
kips
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
-50
-100
-150
x(ft)
Maximum Shear
Minimum Shear
50
55
60
65
65
The moment envelope is defined as

All Possible Bending Moments
300
200
k-ft
100
0
-100
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
-200
-300
-400
x (ft)
DL only
DL+LL
DL+2/3LL
DL+2/3LL(2)
Split
Middle
Maximum
Minimum
Bending Moment Envelope

300
200
100
k-ft
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
-100
-200
-300
-400
x (ft)
Maximum Moment
Minimum Moment
55
60
65
65
5.5
Design the simply supported beam as rectangular sections.
Given
fc = 5000 psi normal weight concrete
fy =60000 psi
a) Compute the moment of the beam

wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL = 1.2 ( 0.50 k/ft ) + 1.6 (1.000 k/ft )
= 2.20 k/ft
w l 2 ( 2.20 k/ft )( 20 ft.)
Mu = u =
8
8
= 110 k-ft. 1320 k-in.
Compute the 1 value
5000 4000
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05
= 0.8
Assume a single layer of steel, so d = h. - 2.5 in.. Assume that the tension controlled so
that = 0.9 and Mu = 110 k-ft Assume a k=0.30 and 1= 0.80 k = 1*k =
0.80*(0.30)=0.24
1320 k-in
=
0.9
= 1466.67 k-in
Mn =
Mu
Find a from k = 0.24 and compute the Ru , needed for a singly reinforced beam.
k
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
( 0.24 )
Anet = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 0.24 ) 1
= 0.8976 ksi
Compute the size of the beam and assume b~0.55d, you can use any reasonable b
bd 2 =
M n 1466.67 k-in.
=
0.8976 ksi
Ru
= 1634.0 in 3 0.55d 3 = 1634.0 in 3

1634.0 in 3
= 14.37 in.
0.55
d = 14.5 in.
b 0.55d = 7.9 in. 8.0 in.
d=
Compute the total area of steel needed as if it were a singly reinforced beam.
c = kd = 0.3 (14.5 in.) = 4.35 in.
As( total) =
0.85 f cb1c 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 8 in.)( 0.8 )( 4.35 in.)

=
fy
( 60 ksi )
= 1.92 in 2
Select the steel so that tension steel is greater or equal to 1.92 in2
Select 2 # 9 bars (1.00 in2) for the tension steel (AT = 2.00 in2)
Compute the actual a

a=
( 2.00 in ) ( 60 ksi )
=
2
As f y
0.85f cb
0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 8 in.)
= 3.53 in.
Compute c
a 3.53 in.
c=
=
= 4.41 in.
0.8
1
Compute Mn.
a
M n = ( As f y ) d
2
3.53 in.
= ( 2.0 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 14.5 in.
= 1528.24 k-in.
The Mu for the beam and error is

M n = M n = 0.9 (1528.24 k-in.)
= 1375.4 k-in. 114.6 k-ft

114.6 k-ft 110 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 4.2 %
110 k-ft

A
= s
bd
2 in 2
=
= 0.01724
(8 in.)(14.5 in.)
Compute the minimum

200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
min =
3 f c = 3 5000 = 0.00354
fy
60000
0.00354
The beam is over-designed by 4.2. %, which is less than 10%. Check to see if the bars
will fit in the beam using 2 bars (#9 with #3 stirrups)
s=
b nd b 2 ( cover + dstirrup )
n 1
8 in. 2 (1.128 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
1
= 1.994 in.
and spacing will be 1.994 in. between bars.
b) Compute the moment of the beam. Assume that the beam has h=20 in. and b= 10 in.
so that the self-weight of the beam is
1 ft.
1 ft.
3
wself = bd = ( 20 in.)
(10 in.)
( 0.15 k/ft )
12 in.
12 in.
= 0.208 k/ft
Compute the factored loads
wu = 1.2wDL + 1.6 wLL = 1.2 ( 0.208 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 0.0 k/ft )

= 0.25 k/ft
PL = 1.6 (10 kips ) = 16 kips
The shear and bending moment diagrams, the reactions are 10.5 kips and Mmax =92.5 k-ft
Shear
15
10
kips
5
0
-5
10
15
20
15
20
-10
-15
ft
Bending Moment
100
k-ft
80
60
40
20
0
0
10
ft
Compute the 1 value

5000 4000
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05
= 0.8
that = 0.9 and Mu = 92.5 k-ft Assume a k=0.25 and 1= 0.80 k = 1*k =
0.80*(0.25)=0.2
92.5 k-ft
=
0.9
= 102.78 k-ft 1233.33 k-in.
Mn =
Mu
k
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
( 0.2 )
Anet = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 0.2 ) 1
= 0.765 ksi
bd 2 =
M n 1233.33 k-in.
=
Ru
0.765 ksi
= 1612.2 in 3 0.55d 3 = 1612.2 in 3

1612.2 in 3
= 14.31 in.
0.55
d = 14.5 in.
b 0.55d = 7.87 in. 8.0 in.
d=
Go back and recomputed the moment

1 ft.
1 ft.
3
( 8 in.)
( 0.15 k/ft )
12 in.
12 in.
= 0.142 k/ft

wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL = 1.2 ( 0.142 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 0.0 k/ft )
= 0.17 k/ft
The maximum factored moment will be 88.5 k-ft
88.5 k-ft
=
0.9
= 98.33 k-ft 1180 k-in.
Mn =
Mu
Compute d
bd 2 =
M n 1180 k-in.
=
Ru
0.765 ksi
= 1542.5 in 3 0.55d 3 = 1542.5 in 3

1542.5 in 3
= 14.10 in.
d=
0.55
d = 14.5 in.
b 0.55d = 7.76 in. 8.0 in.
3
Compute the total area of steel needed

c = kd = 0.25 (14.5 in.) = 3.625 in.
As( total) =
0.85 f cb 1c 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 8 in.)( 0.8 )( 3.625 in.)

=
fy
( 60 ksi )
= 1.64 in 2
Select the steel so that tension steel is around 1.64 in2


a=
(1.58 in ) ( 60 ksi )
=
2
As f y
0.85f cb
0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 8 in.)
= 2.79 in.
Compute c
a 2.79 in.
=
= 3.49 in.
c=
1
0.8
Compute Mn.
a
M n = ( As f y ) d
2
2.79 in.
= (1.58 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 14.5 in.
= 1242.44 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 (1242.44 k-in.)
= 1118.19 k-in. 93.2 k-ft
93.2 k-ft 88.5 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 5.3 %
88.5 k-ft

A
= s
bd
1.53 in 2
=
= 0.01362
(8 in.)(14.5 in.)
Compute the minimum
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
min =
3 f c = 3 5000 = 0.00354
fy
60000
0.00354
The beam is over-designed by 5.9. %, which is less than 10%. Check to see if the bars
will fit in the beam using 2 bars (#8 with #3 stirrups)
s=
n 1
8 in. 2 (1.00 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
1
= 2.25 in.
c) Compute the moment of the beam. Assume that the beam has h=20 in. and b= 10 in.
so that the self-weight of the beam is
1 ft.
1 ft.
3
wself = bd = ( 20 in.)
(10 in.)
( 0.15 k/ft )
12 in.
12 in.
= 0.208 k/ft

wu = 1.2wDL + 1.6 wLL = 1.2 ( 0.208 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 0.0 k/ft )
= 0.25 k/ft
PL = 1.6 ( 5 kips ) = 8 kips
The shear and bending moment diagrams, the reactions are 10.5 kips and Mmax =52.5 k-ft
Shear
15
10
kips
5
0
-5 0
10
15
20
15
20
-10
-15
ft
Bending Moment
60
50
k-ft
40
30
20
10
0
0
10
ft
Compute the 1 value

5000 4000
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05
= 0.8
that = 0.9 and Mu = 52.5 k-ft Assume a k=0.25 and 1= 0.80 k = 1*k =
0.80*(0.25)=0.2
52.5 k-ft
=
0.9
= 58.33 k-ft 700 k-in.
Mn =
Mu
k
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
( 0.2 )
Anet = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 0.2 ) 1
= 0.765 ksi
bd 2 =
M n 700 k-in.
=
Ru 0.765 ksi
= 915.0 in 3 0.55d 3 = 915.0 in 3

915.0 in 3
= 11.85 in.
0.55
d = 12.5 in.
b 0.55d = 6.52 in. 7.0 in.
d=
Go back and recomputed the moment

1 ft.
1 ft.
3
( 7 in.)
( 0.15 k/ft )
12 in.
12 in.
= 0.109 k/ft

wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL = 1.2 ( 0.142 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 0.0 k/ft )
= 0.17 k/ft
The maximum factored moment will be 46.5625 k-ft
46.5625 k-ft
=

0.9
= 51.74 k-ft 620.83 k-in.
Mn =
Mu
Compute d
bd 2 =
M n 620.83 k-in.
=
Ru
0.765 ksi
= 811.6 in 3 0.55d 3 = 811.6 in 3

811.6 in 3
= 11.38 in.
d=
0.55
d = 11.5 in.
b 0.55d = 6.26 in. 7.0 in.
3
Use d= 12.5 in and b= 7 in to save on re-computing the moment again. Compute the total
area of steel needed
c = kd = 0.25 (12.5 in.) = 3.125 in.
As( total) =
0.85 f cb 1c 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 7 in.)( 0.8 )( 3.125 in.)

=
fy
( 60 ksi )
= 1.24 in 2
Select the steel so that tension steel is around 1.24 in2


a=
(1.2 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
As f y
0.85f cb
0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 7 in.)
= 2.42 in.
Compute c
a 2.42 in.
=
= 3.03 in.
c=
1
0.8
Compute Mn.
a
M n = ( As f y ) d
2
2.42 in.
= (1.2 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 12.5 in.
= 812.87 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 812.87 k-in.)
= 731.59 k-in. 60.97 k-ft
60.97 k-ft 46.56 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 30.9 %
46.56 k-ft

A
= s
bd
1.2 in 2
=
= 0.01371
( 7 in.)(12.5 in.)
Compute the minimum
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
min =
3 f c = 3 5000 = 0.00354
fy
60000
0.00354
The beam is over-designed by 30.3. %, which is greater than 10%. If we were to use 3#5
bars we would get 3.9% over-design. Check to see if the bars will fit in the beam using 2
bars (#7 with #3 stirrups)
s=
n 1
7 in. 2 ( 0.875 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
1
= 1.5 in.
CVEN 444
Assignment 9
due 6/27/03
The assignment will be review problems and will not be covered in

class. Use an engineering format and be neat!
1. Design a beam to handle Mu= 350 k-ft fc = 5 ksi and fy =60 ksi.
Assume that the weight of the beam has been included in the ultimate
moment. Check that the beam has met the ACI standard. Sketch the
final design. Use b= 0.5d. You may want to use a double layer of
steel.
Compute the 1 value
5000 4000
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05
= 0.8
Assume that the tension controlled so that = 0.9 Assume a k=0.275 and
1= 0.8, because fc =5 ksi so that k = 1*k = 0.8*(0.275) =0.22
k '
Ru = 0.85 f c k ' 1
2
( 0.22 )
= 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 0.22 ) 1
= 0.83215 ksi
You can use various k value to design the beam as long as k < 0.375 Find
bd2 from b= 0.5 d
Mu

Mu
2
2
bd =
Ru bd =
Ru
350 k-ft 12 in.
0.9 1 ft.
2
bd =
0.83215 ksi
= 5608 in 3
Assume that b= 0.5 d and solve for d

0.5d 3 = 5608 in 3
d=
5608 in 3
= 22.38 in.
0.5
and
b= 0.5(22.38 in.) = 11.19 in.
Use d =22.5 in and b = 12.in.
The dimensions and maximum moment have been determined. Assume that
k = 0.22 and a = kd= 0.22*(22.5in.) = 4.95 in. and compute the amount of
steel needed.
f y As = 0.85 f cba As =
As =
0.85 f cba
fy
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(12 in.)( 4.95 in.)

( 60 ksi )
= 4.21 in 2
Select 4 # 9 bars, so that As = 4(1.00 in2) = 4.00 in2. Compute the new a and
c values.
( 60 ksi ) ( 4.00 in 2 )
=
a=
0.85 f cb 0.85 ( 5 ksi )(12 in.)
f y As
= 4.706 in.
a 4.706 in.
=
= 5.882 in.
c=
0.8
1
Check the min and the beam will meet the condition ACI 10.5.1
min
200
200
=
= 0.00333
f
60000
y
= larger of
min = 0.00354
3 f c = 3 5000 = 0.00354
fy
60000
Check the value.

=
As
4.00 in 2
=
bd (12 in.)( 22.5 in.)
= 0.0148 0.00354 OK!
Check to see if the steel is in the tension controlled.

c 5.882 in.
=
= 0.261 0.375 ok!
d
22.5 in.
or
d c
22.5 in. 5.882 in.

0.003
5.882 in.
= 0.008475 0.005 OK!
t =
0.003 =
c

a
4.706 in.
M n = f y As d = ( 60 ksi ) ( 4.00 in 2 ) 22.5 in.
2
2
= 4835.3 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 4835.3 k-in.)
= 4351.8 k-in. 362.65 k-ft
362.65 k-ft 350 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 3.61 %
350 k-ft
The beam is over-designed by 3.61 %, which is less than 10%. Check to see
if the bars will fit in the beam using 4 bars (#9 with #3 stirrups)
s=
n 1
12 in. 4 (1.128 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
3
= 1.25 in.
and spacing will be 1.25 in. between bars. If you use 7 #7 bars (4.20 in2) ,
which would result in 8.16% over-designed. However, you would need to
use a double layer of steel.
2. Design an interior span for a continuous beam, which will cover 8

bays (or spans). The beam has a clear distance of 26 ft and fc = 4 ksi
and fy =60 ksi. Design the beam for the positive and negative
moments with a SDL = 1.4 k/ft and LL= 2.5 k/ft. Check that the
beam has met the ACI standard. Sketch the final designs (You will
need to have two sketches, one for the positive moment and one for
the negative moment).
First you will need to compute the size of the beam. For a rough estimate
use 1-in per foot of clear span or h=26 in. and b = 0.55(26 in. 3.5 in.) =
12.375 in. Use b = 13 in.
wself-weight = bh
1 ft.
1 ft.
3
= (13 in.)
( 26 in.)
( 0.150 k/ft )
12 in.
12 in.
= 0.352 k/ft
Compute the factored load of the beam.

wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL
= (1.2 )( 0.352 k/ft + 1.4 k/ft ) + (1.6 )( 2.5 k/ft )

= 6.1 k/ft
The load for a continuous beam with (> 2 spans) and design for the interior
negative moment of the beam and 2.5 k/ft/1.75 k/ft < 3 (ACI 8.3.3). The
moment will have the largest magnitude so it will determine the dimensions
of the beam.
w l 2 ( 6.1 k/ft )( 26 ft.)
Mu = u n =
11
11
= 375.0 k-ft
Assume that the tension controlled so that = 0.9 Assume a k=0.3 and 1=
0.85, because fc =4 ksi so that k = 1*k = 0.85*(0.300) =0.255
k '
Ru = 0.85 f c k ' 1
2
( 0.255 )
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 0.255 ) 1
= 0.7565 ksi
You can use various k value to design the beam as long as k < 0.375
Find bd2 from b= 0.55 d
Mu

Mu
2
2
Ru bd =
bd =
Ru
375.0 k-ft 12 in.
0.9
1 ft.
bd 2 =
0.7565 ksi
= 6610 in 3

0.55d 3 = 6610 in 3
d=
6610 in 3
= 22.91 in.
0.55
and
b= 0.55(22.91 in.) = 12.6 in.
Use d =23.5 in and b = 13.in. Now go back and solve with the new area and
use a double layer of steel so h = 27 in. and dead load will be w = 0.366 k/ft
so that wu = 6.12 k/ft and Mu = 376.1 k-ft and using same assumptions, d =
22.93-in. and b=12.61-in. So stick with d= 23.5-in. and 13-in.
k = 0.255 and a = kd= 0.255*(23.5in.) = 5.99 in. and compute the amount
of steel needed.
As =
0.85 f cba
fy
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(13 in.)( 5.99 in.)

( 60 ksi )
= 4.41 in 2
Select 4#8 bars and 2#7 bars, so that As = 4(0.79 in2)+2(0.60 in2) = 4.36 in2.
Compute the new a and c values.
( 60 ksi ) ( 4.36 in 2 )
=
a=
0.85 f cb 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(13 in.)
f y As
= 5.919 in.
a 5.919 in.
=
= 6.963 in.
c=
0.85
1
min
200
200
=
= 0.00333
f
60000
y
= larger of
min = 0.00333
3 f c = 3 4000 = 0.00316
fy
60000
Check the value.

=
As
4.36 in 2
=
bd (13 in.)( 23.5 in.)
= 0.0143 0.00333 OK!

c 6.963 in.
=
= 0.296 0.375 ok!
d 23.5 in.
or
d c
23.5 in. 6.963 in.
0.003 =
0.003
6.963 in.
c
= 0.00713 0.005 OK!
t =

a
5.919 in.
M n = f y As d = ( 60 ksi ) ( 4.36 in 2 ) 23.5 in.
2
2
= 5373.5 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 5373.5 k-in.)
= 4836.1 k-in. 403.0 k-ft
403.0 k-ft 376.1 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 7.15 %
376.1 k-ft
if the bars will fit in the beam using 4 bars (#8 with #3 stirrups) per row
s=
n 1
13 in. 4 (1.0 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
3
= 1.75 in.
Compute the factored load of the beam for the positive moment
wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL
= (1.2 )( 0.366 k/ft + 1.4 k/ft ) + (1.6 )( 2.5 k/ft )

= 6.12 k/ft
The load for a continuous beam with (> 2 spans) and design for the interior
positive moment of the beam and 2.5 k/ft/1.77 k/ft < 3 (ACI 8.3.3). The
moment will have the largest magnitude so it will determine the dimensions
of the beam.
wu ln2 ( 6.12 k/ft )( 26 ft.)
Mu =
=
16
16
= 258.6 k-ft
Determine the Ru from the equation and find a

Mu

M
Ru bd 2 = u Ru = 2
bd
258.6 k-ft 12 in.
0.9
1 ft.
Ru =
2
(13.0 in.)( 24.5 in.)
= 0.4419 ksi
Compute k from
2 Ru
k '
Ru = 0.85 f c k ' 1 k 2 2k +
=0
2
0.85 f c
2 ( 0.4419 ksi )
2 Ru
k = 1 1
= 1 1
0.85 f c
0.85 ( 4 ksi )
= 0.140
The value for a = k*d = 0.140*24.5 in. =3.43 in. The area of steel can be
computed
As =
0.85 f cba
fy
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(13 in.)( 3.43 in.)

( 60 ksi )
= 2.52 in 2
Select 2#8 bars and 2#7 bars, so that As = 2(0.79 in2)+2(0.60 in2) = 2.78 in2.
a=
f y As
0.85 f cb
( 60 ksi ) ( 2.78 in 2 )
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(13 in.)
= 3.77 in.
a 3.77 in.
=
= 4.44 in.
c=
0.85
1
Check the value.

=
As
2.78 in 2
=
bd (13 in.)( 24.5 in.)
= 0.0087 0.00333 OK!

c 4.44 in.
=
= 0.181 0.375 ok!
d 24.5 in.
or
d c
24.5 in. 4.44 in.

0.003
4.44 in.
= 0.0136 0.005 OK!
t =
0.003 =
c

a
3.77 in.
M n = f y As d = ( 60 ksi ) ( 2.78 in 2 ) 24.5 in.
2
2
= 3771.9 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 3771.9 k-in.)
= 3394.7 k-in. 282.9 k-ft
282.9 k-ft 258.6 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 9.39 %
258.6 k-ft
if the bars will fit in the beam using 4 bars (2#8+2#7 with #3 stirrups) per
row
s=
n 1
13 in. 2 (1.0 in.) 2 ( 0.875 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
3
= 1.83 in.
CVEN 444
Assignment 10
due 7/2/03

1. Design a doubly reinforced concrete beam to handle Mu= 380 k-ft fc =
5 ksi and fy =60 ksi. Assume that the weight of the beam has been
included in the ultimate moment. Check that the beam has met the
ACI standard. Sketch the final design. Use b= 0.5d. Use a
compression steel, As = 0.4-0.5 Anet. You may want to use a double
layer of steel.
Compute the 1 value
5000 4000
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05
= 0.8
Assume a double layer of steel, so d = 24 in. - 3.5 in. = 20.5-in. Assume that
the tension controlled so that = 0.9 and Mu = 380 k-ft Assume a k=0.35
and 1= 0.80 k = 1*k = 0.80*(0.350) =0.28
380 k-ft
=
0.9
= 422.22 k-ft 5066.67 k-in
Mn =
Mu
Find a from k = 0.28 and compute the Ru , needed for a singly reinforced
beam.
k
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
( 0.28 )
= 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 0.28 ) 1
= 1.0234 ksi
Compute the size of the beam

bd 2 =
M n 5066.67 k-in.
=
Ru
1.0234 ksi
= 4950.8 in 3 0.5d 3 = 4950.8 in 3

4950.8 in 3
= 21.47 in.
0.5
d = 21.5 in. b 0.5d = 11 in.
d=
c = kd = 0.35 ( 21.5 in.) = 7.525 in.
As( total) =
0.85 f cb1c 0.85 ( 5 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.8 )( 8.575 in.)

=
fy
( 60 ksi )
= 4.69 in 3
Compute the Anet for the beam assume that 50% of the Anet is in the
compression.
Anet =
As( total)
1 + % Anet
4.69 in 2
1 + 0.5
= 3.13 in 2
As = 0.5 ( 3.13 in 2 ) = 1.56 in 2
Select the steel so that tension steel is greater or equal to 4.69 in2 and the
compression steel is greater than 1.56 in2 and the net steel is greater than
3.13 in2
Select 6 # 8 bars (0.79 in2) for the tension steel (AT = 4.74 in2) and 2#8 bars
(0.79 in2) for the compression steel (As=1.58 in2) and net steel of Anet = 3.16
in2.
Assume the compression steel yields and is at d= 2.5 in.
A A) f
(
a=
s
0.85f cb
= 4.06 in.
( 4.74 in
=
1.58 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi )
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(11 in.)
Compute c
c=
4.06 in.
= 5.07 in.
0.8
Check the strain
c d
5.07 in. 2.5 in.
cu =
0.003 = 0.001521
5.07 in.
c
s =
Check the yield strain of steel is

y =
fy
Es
60 ksi
= 0.00207
29000 ksi
Therefore 0.01521 is not greater than 0.00207 so the compression steel does
not yield.
Or check the values
1 0.85 f c d 87

fyd
87 f y
( 0.8 ) 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 2.5 in.) 87

= 0.021232
( 60 ksi )( 21.5 in.) 87 60
eff
Check the values.

=
As
4.74 in 2
=
bd (11 in.)( 21.5 in.)
= 0.02004
As
1.58 in 2
=
bd (11 in.)( 21.5 in.)
= 0.00668
The eff = 0.02004 0.00668 = 0.01336 is not greater than 0.021232 so the
compression steel has not yielded
Use the equation for finding the c either by iterations or use
( c d )
As f y = As E s
cu + 0.85 f cb1c
c

A E
(
c +
s
s cu
) c A E
As f y
0.85 f cb1
s cu
0.85 f cb1
=0

A E
(
0=c +
s
s cu
As f y
0.85 f cb 1
) c A E
s
s cu
0.85 f cb 1
((1.58 in ) (87 ksi ) ( 4.74 in ) ( 60 ksi ) ) c

+
2
0=c
d
2
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(11 in.)( 0.8 )
(1.58 in ) (87 ksi )( 2.5 in.)
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(11 in.)( 0.8 )
0 = c 2 3.92888c 9.1885

c=
=
b b 2 4ac
2a
3.92888
( 3.92888)
4 ( 9.1855 )
c = 5.577 in.
Check the stress fs

c d
fs = Es s =
cu
c
5.577 in. 2.5 in.
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
5.577 in.
= 48.00 ksi
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
= larger of
min = 0.003536
3
f
3
5000
c
=
= 0.003536
fy
60000
The eff = 0.01336 > 0.003536 so it is OK. Check to see if the steel is in the
tension controlled.
c 5.577 in.
=
= 0.259 0.375 ok!
d
21.5 in.
or
d c
21.5 in. 5.577 in.

0.003
5.577 in.
= 0.008566 0.005 OK!
t =
0.003 =
c
Compute the Mn , the nominal moment
M n = As f y As fs d + As fs( d d )
2
0.8 ( 5.577 in.)
= ( 4.74 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) (1.58 in 2 ) ( 48.00 ksi ) 21.5 in.
+ (1.58 in 2 ) ( 48.00 ksi )( 21.5 in. 2.5 in.)
= 5459.78 k-in

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 5459.78 k-in.)
= 4913.8 k-in. 409.5 k-ft
409.5 k-ft 380 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 7.76 %
380 k-ft
The beam is over-designed by 7.76. %, which is less than 10%. Check to see
s=
n 1
11 in. 3 (1.0 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
2
= 2.125 in.
and spacing will be 2.125 in. between bars. There are 2 #8 bars in the
compression zone.
Design a T-beam with a length of L1= 18-ft and spacing between beam, L=8
ft. The beam must be designed to handle a positive moment of 200 k-ft and a
negative moment of 300 k-ft (assume the weight of the beam is included in
the moments) with a maximum depth of 24-in and slab thickness of 3 in. Use
fc = 5 ksi and fy =60 ksi.
Design for the larger moment, 300 k-ft and the compression zone would be
in the web of the beam, So you can design the beam like a singly reinforced
beam.
Compute the 1 value
5000 4000
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05
= 0.8
k '
Ru = 0.85 f c k ' 1
2
( 0.24 )
= 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 0.24 ) 1
= 0.8976 ksi
bd2 from b= 0.6 d
Mu

Mu
2
2
bd =
Ru bd =
Ru
300 k-ft 12 in.
0.9 1 ft.
2
bd =
0.8976 ksi
= 4456 in 3

0.6d 3 = 4456 in 3
d=
4456 in 3
= 19.51 in.
0.6
and
b= 0.6(19.51 in.) = 11.71 in.
Determine beff in tension and compression
The compression width is
12 in.
18 ft
L
1 ft
=
= 54 in.
4
4
16hf + bw = 16 ( 3 in.) + 12 in. = 60 in.

beff
beff = 54 in.
12 in.
8 ft
b + 0.5* clear distance = 12 in. +

1 ft = 60 in.
w
2
to next web
The tension width is
12 in.
L 18 ft 1 ft
= 21.6 in.
beff =
beff ( tension ) = 21 in.
10
10
b eff ( comp.) = 54 in.
k = 0.24 and a = kd= 0.24*(19.5in.) = 4.68 in. and compute the amount of
steel needed.
As =
0.85 f cba
fy
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(12 in.)( 4.68 in.)

( 60 ksi )
= 3.98 in 2
Select 4 # 7 bars and 4 #6 bars, so that As = 4(0.6 in2)+4(0.44 in2) = 4.16 in2.
( 60 ksi ) ( 4.16 in 2 )
=
a=
0.85 f cb 0.85 ( 5 ksi )(12 in.)
f y As
= 4.894 in.
a 4.894 in.
=
= 6.118 in.
c=
0.8
1
Check the minimum area, min, and the beam will meet the condition ACI
10.5.1
Amin
6 fc
6 5000
bw d =
(12 in.)(19.5 in.) = 1.65 in 2
fy
60000
200
200
2
= smallest of
f beff d = 60000 ( 54 in.)(19.5 in.) = 3.51 in
y
larger of 3 f
3 5000
c
beff d =
( 54 in.)(19.5 in.) = 3.72 in 2
60000
fy
Amin = 1.65 in 2
Check the value.

=
As
4.00 in 2
=
bd (12 in.)( 22.5 in.)
= 0.0148 0.00354 OK!

c 6.118 in.
=
= 0.314 0.375 ok!
d 19.5 in.
or
d c
19.5 in. 6.118 in.

0.003
6.118 in.
= 0.006562 0.005 OK!
t =
0.003 =
c
Compute the Mn for the T-beam

a
4.894 in.
M n = f y As d = ( 60 ksi ) ( 4.16 in 2 ) 19.5 in.
2
2
= 4256.4 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 4256.4 k-in.)
= 3830.8 k-in. 319.23 k-ft
319.23 k-ft 300 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 6.41 %
300 k-ft
The beam is over-designed by 6.41 %, which is less than 10%. The bars
(4#7 and 4#6 bars) will fit into the 21 in.(beff in tension). The #7 bars would
fit into the 12-in
Compute the maximum capacity of the T-beam, where the flange is in

compression Mn. The value for d will be 21in- 2.5 in =18.5 in.
h
3 in.
M n = 0.85 f cbeff hf d f = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 54 in.)( 3 in.) 18.5 in.
2
2
= 11704.5 k-in. 975.4 k-ft.
So the T-beam can be designed as a single reinforced concrete beam. The

minimum amount steel required is
Amin
200
200
2
f beff d = 60000 ( 54 in.)(19.5 in.) = 3.51 in
y
= larger of
3 f c b d = 3 5000 ( 54 in.)(19.5 in.) = 3.72 in 2
eff
f
60000
y
Amin = 3.72 in 2
Use 5 #8 bars that As = 5(0.79 in2) = 3.95 in2.
( 60 ksi ) ( 3.95 in 2 )
=
a=
0.85 f cb 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 54 in.)
f y As
= 1.033 in.
a 1.033 in.
=
= 1.291 in.
c=
0.8
1
Using a double layer of steel for 5 bars in a12 in flange the d=21-in 3.5 in.=
17.5 in instead of 19.5 in.
a
1.033 in.
M n = f y As d = ( 60 ksi ) ( 3.95 in 2 ) 17.5 in.
2
2
= 4025.1 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 4025.1 k-in.)
= 3622.6 k-in. 301.88 k-ft
301.88 k-ft 200 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 50.9 %
200 k-ft
To match the minimum amount of steel will result in over-designing the

beam by 50%. The double layer of 3 #8 bars would fit into the 12-in
s=
n 1
12 in. 3 (1.0 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
2
= 2.625 in.
CVEN 444
Assignment 11
due 7/9/03

1. Calculate the basic development lengths in tension for the following
deformed bars embedded in normal weight concrete.
(a) For #6 and #9 bar. Given fc = 6 ksi and fy =60 ksi.
(b) For #14 and #18 bar. Given fc = 5 ksi and fy =60 ksi and fy =75 ksi.
Assume clear spacing =2db, clear cover = 1.5-in. on each side and bars
are not spliced.
(a) #6 bar, bar placement =1.0, coating, =1.0, size of the bar,
=0.8, and concrete, = 1.0. and db =0.75 in. and clear space
between bars is 2(0.75 in) =1.5 in.
clear d b
0.75 in.
= 1.875 in.
space + 2 = 1.5 in. +
2
c=
c = 1.125 in.
1.5 in. + d b = 1.5 in. + 0.75 in. = 1.125 in.
2
2
The bar is assumed be under no tension so Ktr =0.

c + K tr 1.125 in. + 0.0
=
= 1.5 1.5 Use 1.5
db
0.75 in.
Check the concrete fc

f c 100
6000 = 77.5 100 OK.
Compute the development length

ld 3 f y
=
d b 40 f c c + K tr
db
3 60000 (1.0 )(1.0 )( 0.8 )(1.0 )
=
= 30.98
(1.5)
40 6000
ld = 33.94d b = 30.98 ( 0.75 in.)
= 23.3 in.
or you can use 24 in. from table 10.2

(b) #9 bar, bar placement =1.0, coating, =1.0, size of the bar,
=1.0, and
concrete, = 1.0. and db =1.128 in. and clear space
between bars is 2(1.128 in) =2.256 in.
clear d b
1.128 in.
= 2.06 in.
space + 2 = 1.5 in. +
2
c = 1.692 in.
c=
2.256 in. + d b = 2.256 in. + 1.128 in. = 1.692 in.
2
2
The bar is assumed be under no tension so Ktr =0.

c + K tr 1.692 in. + 0.0
=
= 1.5 1.5 Use 1.5
db
1.128 in.
Check the concrete fc

f c 100
6000 = 77.5 100 OK.
Compute the development length

ld 3 f y
=
d b 40 f c c + K tr
db
3 60000 (1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 )
=
= 38.73
(1.5)
40 6000
ld = 38.73d b = 38.73 (1.128 in.)
= 43.69 in.
or you can use 44 in.

(c) #14 bar, bar placement = 1.0, coating, = 1.0, size of the
bar, = 1.0, and concrete, = 1.0.and db =1.693 in.
ld f y
=
d b f c 20
60000 (1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 )
=
= 42.43
20
5000
ld = 42.43d b = 42.43 (1.693 in.)
= 71.83 in.
Use ld = 72 in.
#18 bar, bar placement = 1.0, coating, = 1.0, size of the bar,
= 1.0, and concrete, = 1.0. and db =2.257 in.
ld f y
=
d b f c 20
75000 (1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 )
=
= 53.03
20
5000
ld = 53.03d b = 53.03 ( 2.257 in.)
= 119.70 in.
Use ld = 120 in.
2. Calculate the basic embedment lengths, if the bars are used as

compression reinforcement and the concrete is sand-lightweight.
(a) For #6 and #9 bar. Given fc = 6 ksi and fy =60 ksi.
(b) For #14 and #18 bar. Given fc = 5 ksi and fy =60 ksi and fy =75 ksi.
(a) #6 bar, concrete, = 1.3. and db =0.75 in. Compute the development
length
fy
60000
= 0.02
ldb 0.02
l
= 15.49
=
d = 18
f
6000
db
db
=
=
f
0.0003
0.0003
60000
18.0
(
)
y
ldb = 18d b = 18 ( 0.75 in.)
= 13.5 in.
The final development length is

ld = ldb
= 1.3 (13.5 in.)

= 17.55 in. Use 18.0 in.
#8 bar, concrete, = 1.3. and db =1.00 in. Compute the development

length
fy
60000
= 0.02
ldb 0.02
l
= 15.49
=
d = 18
fc
6000
db
db
=
=
f
0.0003
0.0003
60000
18.0
(
)
y
ldb = 18d b = 18 (1.128 in.)
= 20.304 in.

ld = ldb
= 1.3 ( 20.304 in.)

= 26.40 in. Use 27.0 in.
(b) #14 bar, , = 1.3.and db =1.693 in. . Compute the development length
fy
60000
0.02
= 0.02
ldb
l
= 16.97
f
=
d = 18.00
5000
db
db
0.0003 f y = 0.0003 ( 60000 ) = 18.0
ldb = 18.0d b = 18.0 (1.693 in.)
= 30.474 in.

ld = ldb
= 1.3 ( 30.474 in.)

= 39.62 in. Use 40.0 in.
#18 bar, concrete, = 1.3. and db =2.257 in. Compute the development
length
fy
75000
= 0.02
ldb 0.02
l
= 21.22
=
d = 22.50
f
5000
db
db
=
=
f
0.0003
0.0003
80000
22.5
(
)
y
ldb = 22.50d b = 22.50 ( 2.257 in.)
= 50.78 in.

ld = ldb
= 1.3 ( 50.78 in.)

= 66.02 in. Use 67.0 in.
CVEN 444
Assignment 12
due 7/14/03

1. Determine the development length required for the bars shown .fc =4ksi and fy = 60-ksi. Check the anchorage in the column. If it is not
satisfactory, design an anchorage using a 180o hook and check
adequacy.
Determine the development length for the bars.The bar coefficients are
(bar placement) = 1.3, (coating)= 1.0, and (light weight concrete) = 1.0
and #10 bar is db = 1.27 in..
ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
=
(1.3)(1.0 )(1.0 ) 60000 = 61.66
20 4000
ld = 61.66d b
ld = 61.66 (1.27 in.) = 78.3 in. Use 79 in.
The total length available in the column is l = 51 in. 1.5 in. = 49.5 in.,
therefore there is insufficient length for start development. We do not know
the transverse bars, spacing or strength of the bars. However,(c+Ktr)/db can
be no greater than 2.5. So use 2.5 and check and =1.0 (bar size)
ld
=
db
=
3 f y
c + K tr
40 f c
db
3 (1.3)(1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 ) 60000
40 4000 ( 2.5 )
= 37.0
ld = 37.0d b
ld = 37.0 (1.27 in.) = 46.98 in. Use 47 in.
So you could argue that there is sufficient space if the transverse loading is
enough to have, (c+Ktr)/db > 2.5. However, a hook would be a better method
to ensure that there is sufficient development length. The development
length is computed by
lhd 1200
=
db
fc
1200
= 18.97
4000
lhd = 18.97 d b
=
lhd = 18.97 (1.27 in.) = 24.1 in. Use 25 in.
There is no factor used in hooks and the other reduction factors are for
cover, yield strength of the steel fy = 60 ksi , = 1, concrete =1, and
excessive reinforcement is unknown so use = 1. and ties assume =1
So there is sufficient length for a hook
2. Problem 10.5 from the text --An 18-ft normal weight concrete
cantilever beam is subject to factored Mu =3500 k-in and a factored
shear Vu = 32.4 k at the face of the support. Design the top
reinforcement and the appropriate embedment of 90o hook into the
concrete wall to sustain the external shear and moment. Given fc =
4.5 ksi and fy =60 ksi.
Compute the 1 value
4500 4000
1000
1 = 0.85 0.05
= 0.825
Assume a single layer of steel, so d = h. - 2.5 in.. Assume that the tension
controlled so that = 0.9 and Mu = 3500 k-in Assume a k=0.30 and 1=
0.825, k = 1*k = 0.825*(0.30)=0.2475
3500 k-in
=
0.9
= 3888.89 k-in
Mn =
Mu
Find a from k = 0.2475 and compute the Ru , needed for a singly reinforced
beam.
k
Ru = 0.85 f c k 1
2
( 0.2475 )
Anet = 0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )( 0.2475 ) 1
= 0.8295 ksi
Compute the size of the beam and assume b~0.55d, you can use any
reasonable b
bd 2 =
M n 3888.89 k-in.
=
Ru
0.8295 ksi
= 4688.0 in 3 0.55d 3 = 4688.0 in 3

4688.0 in 3
= 20.43 in.
0.55
d = 20.5 in.
b 0.55d = 11.3 in. 12.0 in.
d=
c = kd = 0.3 ( 20.5 in.) = 6.15 in.
As( total) =
0.85 f cb1c 0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(12 in.)( 0.825 )( 6.15 in.)
=
fy
( 60 ksi )
= 3.88 in 2
Select the steel so that tension steel is greater or equal to 3.88 in2
a=
As f y
0.85f cb
( 4.00 in ) ( 60 ksi )
2
0.85 ( 4.5 ksi )(12 in.)
= 5.23 in.
Compute c
c=
5.23 in.
= 6.34 in.
0.825
The c/d = 6.34 in/20.5 in = 0.309 < 0.375, therefore tension controlled and
= 0.9
Compute Mn.
a
M n = ( As f y ) d
2
5.23 in.
= ( 4.0 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 20.5 in.
= 4292.4 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 4292.4 k-in.)
= 3863.2 k-in.
3863.2 k-in 3500 k-in
overdesigned =
100 % = 10.3 %
3500 k-in

=
=
As
bd
4 in 2
= 0.01626
(12 in.)( 20.5 in.)
Compute the minimum
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
=
3 f c = 3 4500 = 0.003354
fy
60000
0.003354
The beam is over-designed by 10.3. %, which is less than 10%. Check to see
if the bars will fit in the beam using 2 bars (#9 with #3 stirrups)
s=
n 1
12 in. 4 (1.128 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.375 in.)
=
3
= 1.246 in.

Check the embedment length of 90o hook. The basic development length
lhd 1200 1200
=
=
= 17.89
db
4500
fc
lhd = 17.89d b = 17.89 (1.128 in.)
= 20.18 in
Normal weight concrete, l = 1.0 and the area ratio

d =
Required As 3.88 in 2
=
= 0.97
Provided As 4.00 in 2
The final length

ldh = d lhb = 0.97 ( 20.18 in.)
= 19.58 in.
Use ldh = 20 in. Check to see it is greater 8db=8(1.128in.) = 9.024in. or 6

in, which is correct. The depth of the 12db = 12(1.128in.) = 13.536in. use
14in.
CVEN 444
Assignment 13
due 7/16/03

1. For a 28-ft simply supported beam (b=16 in. and d=26.5 in) with 8#8
bars (2 layers) and fc =4-ksi and fy = 60-ksi, carrying uniform loads of
wD =1.5 k/ft and wL=3.0 k/ft. Draw the moment capacity envelope if
total of 4-bars are terminated (2 at a time) and calculate theoretical
cutoff locations, actual cutoff locations, development length, moment
capacity of a bar and verify the beam will satisfy the design and meet
ACI standards.
Compute the loading on the beam
wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL
= 1.2 (1.5 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 3.0 k/ft )

= 6.6 k/ft
The load for a simply supported beam and design for the positive moment of
the beam and 4.8 k/ft
wu ln2 ( 6.6 k/ft )( 28 ft.)
Mu =
=
8
8
= 646.8 k-ft
Assume that the tension controlled so that = 0.9 and 1= 0.85, because fc
=4 ksi
c values.
( 60 ksi ) ( 6.32 in 2 )
=
a=
0.85 f cb 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.)
f y As
= 6.971 in.
a 6.971 in.
=
= 8.201 in.
c=
0.85
1
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
= larger of
min = 0.00333
3
f
3
4000
c
=
= 0.00316
f
60000
y
Check the value.

=
As
6.32 in 2
=
bd (16 in.)( 26.5 in.)
= 0.0149 0.00333 OK!

c 8.201 in.
=
= 0.309 0.375 ok!
d 26.5 in.
or
d c
26.5 in. 8.201 in.

0.003
8.201 in.
= 0.00669 0.005 OK!
t =
0.003 =
c

a
6.971 in.
M n = f y As d = ( 60 ksi ) ( 6.32 in 2 ) 26.5 in.
2
2
= 8727.1 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 8727.1 k-in.)
= 7854.4 k-in. 654.5 k-ft
654.5 k-ft 646.8 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 1.20 %
646.8 k-ft
The beam is over-designed by 1.2 %, which is less than 10%. Check to see if
the bars will fit in the beam using 4 bars (#8 with #4 stirrups) per row
s=
n 1
16 in. 4 (1.0 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.5 in.)
=
3
= 2.67 in.
and spacing will be 2.67 in. between bars

For both cutoff and splicing on needs to know the development length of the
bars.
ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
=
(1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 ) 60000 = 47.43
20 4000
ld = 47.43d b
ld = 47.43 (1.00 in.) = 47.43 in. Use 48 in.
Determine the capacity of 1 bar

a
M ubar = As f y d
2
6.971 in.
= ( 0.9 ) ( 0.79 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 26.5 in.
= 981.8 k-in. 81.82 k-ft.
So the Mu (1 bar) =81.82k-ft, Mu (2 bars) =163.6 k-ft, Mu (3 bars) =245.4 kft, and Mu (4 bars) =327.3 k-ft. Mu (5 bar) =409.1k-ft, Mu (6 bars) =490.9 kft, Mu (7 bars) =572.7 k-ft, and Mu (8 bars) =654.5 k-ft
Moment Diagram for Half Beam
700
600
Moment (k-ft)
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
10
11
12
13
x (ft)
Bending Moment
8 Bars
6 Bars
4 Bars
Determine the development length and la for the bars. The extension length
la is either 12db=12(1.0 in.) = 12.0 in. or d= 26.5 in. Use la = 26.5 in or 27 in.
Determine where the bar cutoff points meet the moment diagram.. Obtain
the equation for the moment
M u ( x ) = 92.4 k ( x )
( x)
6.6 k/ft
2
14
Set the moment equal to 490.9 k-ft and 327.3 k-ft

490.9 k-ft. = 92.4 k ( x )
( x)
6.6 k-ft
2
x 28 x + 148.76 = 0 7.13 ft. or 85.52 in. 85 in.
2
327.3 k-ft. = 92.4 k ( x )
( x)
6.6 k-ft
2
x 28 x + 98.182 = 0 4.16 ft. or 49.92 in. 49 in.
2
The location of the cut off for a two bars are 85 in.-27 in.= 58 in. (4-ft 10 in.)
and will be symmetrical about the centerline. The location for the bars to be
fully developed is 58 in + 48 in. =106 in.(8-ft 10 in.).
The location of the cut off for a 4 bar is 49 in.- 27 in.= 22 in. (1-ft 10 in.) and
The location for the bar to be fully developed is 22 in + 48 in. =70 in.(5-ft 10
in)
2. Design the compression lap splice for a column section 16-in. x 16-in.
reinforce with 8 #10 bars equally spaced around all faces
a. Given fc = 5-ksi and fy =60-ksi
b. Given fc = 7-ksi and fy =80-ksi
(a) #10 bar, bar placement =1.0, coating, =1.0, size of the bar,
=1.0, and concrete, = 1.0. and db =1.27 in.
fy
60000
= 0.02
ldb 0.02
l
= 16.97
=
d = 18
f
5000
db
db
0.003
f
0.003
60000
18.0
=
=
(
)
y
ldb = 18d b = 18 (1.27 in.)
= 22.86 in.
For fy =60 ksi and check to see that it is greater than 12-in.
ld = 0.0005 f y d b
= 0.0005 ( 60000 psi )(1.27 in.)
= 38.1 in. Use 39.0 in.
(b) #10 bar, bar placement =1.0, coating, =1.0, size of the bar,
=1.0, and concrete, = 1.0. and db =1.27 in.
fy
80000
= 0.02
ldb 0.02
l
= 19.12
=
d = 24.0
f
7000
db
db
0.003
f
0.003
80000
24.0
=
=
(
)
y
ldb = 24.0d b = 24.0 (1.27 in.)
= 30.48 in.
For fy =80 ksi and check to see that it is greater than 12-in.
ld = ( 0.0009 f y 24 ) d b
= ( 0.0009 ( 80000 psi ) 24 ) (1.27 in.)
= 60.96 in. Use 61.0 in.
A simply supported uniform loaded beam carries a total factored load of

4.8 k/ft (this includes the beam weight) on a clear span of 34-ft, fc =3ksi and fy = 40-ksi. Assume that the supports are 12-in wide and assume
the bars are available in 30-ft lengths
c. Design a rectangular beam (tension steel only)
d. Determine bar cutoffs.
e. Locate splices and determine lap length.
The load for a simply supported beam and design for the positive moment of
the beam and 4.8 k/ft
w l 2 ( 4.8 k/ft )( 34 ft.)
Mu = u n =
8
8
= 693.6 k-ft
k '
Ru = 0.85 f c k ' 1
2
( 0.2125 )
= 0.85 ( 3 ksi )( 0.2125 ) 1
= 0.4843 ksi
bd2 from b= 0.55 d
Mu

M
Ru bd 2 = u bd 2 =
Ru
693.6 k-ft 12 in.
0.9
1 ft.
bd 2 =
0.4843 ksi
= 19096 in 3

0.55d 3 = 19096 in 3
d=
19096 in 3
= 32.62 in.
0.55
and
b= 0.55(32.94 in.) = 17.94 in.
k = 0.2125 and a = kd= 0.2125*(32.5 in.) = 6.906 in. and compute the
amount of steel needed.
As =
0.85 f cba
fy
0.85 ( 3 ksi )(18 in.)( 6.906 in.)

( 40 ksi )
= 7.92 in 2
c values.
( 40 ksi ) (8.00 in 2 )
=
a=
0.85 f cb 0.85 ( 3 ksi )(18 in.)
f y As
= 6.972 in.
a 6.972 in.
=
= 8.202 in.
c=
0.85
1
min
200
200
=
= 0.005
f
40000
y
= larger of
min = 0.005
3
f
3
3000
c
=
= 0.00411
fy
40000
Check the value.

=
As
8.00 in 2
=
bd (18 in.)( 32.5 in.)
= 0.013675 0.005 OK!

c 8.202 in.
=
= 0.252 0.375 ok!
d 32.5 in.
or
d c
32.5 in. 8.202 in.

0.003
8.202 in.
= 0.00887 0.005 OK!
t =
0.003 =
c

a
6.972 in.
M n = f y As d = ( 40 ksi ) ( 8.00 in 2 ) 32.5 in.
2
2
= 9284.5 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 9284.5 k-in.)
= 8356.1 k-in. 696.3 k-ft
696.3 k-ft 693.6 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 0.39 %
693.6 k-ft
s=
n 1
18 in. 4 (1.128 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.5 in.)
=
3
= 3.16 in.
and spacing will be 3.16 in. between bars. So you could have bars next to
one another for splicing.
For both cutoff and splicing on needs to know the development length of the
bars.
ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
=
(1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 ) 40000 = 36.51
20 3000
ld = 36.51d b
ld = 36.51(1.128 in.) = 41.19 in. Use 42 in.
Determine the capacity of 1 bar

a
M ubar = As f y d
2
6.972 in.
= ( 0.9 ) (1.00 in 2 ) ( 40 ksi ) 32.5 in.
= 1044.5 k-in. 87.04 k-ft.
So the Mu (1 bar) =87.04k-ft, Mu (2 bars) =174.1 k-ft, Mu (3 bars) =261.2 kft, and
Mu (4 bars) =348.2 k-ft. Mu (5 bar) =435.2k-ft, Mu (6 bars)
=522.4 k-ft, Mu (7 bars) =609.3 k-ft, and Mu (8 bars) =696.3 k-ft
la is either 12db=12(1.127 in.) = 13.52 in. or d= 32.5 in. Use la = 32.5 in or
33 in.
Determine where the bar cutoff points meet the moment diagram.. Obtain
the equation for the moment
M u ( x ) = 81.6 k ( x )
( x)
4.8 k/ft
2

522.4 k-ft. = 81.6 k ( x )
( x)
4.8 k-ft
2
x 34 x + 217.67 = 0 8.55 ft. or 102.65 in. 102 in.
2
25.45 ft. or 305.4 in. 306 in.
348.3 k-ft. = 81.6 k ( x )
( x)
4.8 k-ft
2
x 34 x + 145.125 = 0 5.00 ft. or 60 in. 60 in.
2
29.0 ft. or 348 in. 348 in.
The location of the cut off for a single bar is 102 in.- 33 in.= 69 in. (5-ft 9
in.) and 306- in +33 in. = 339 in. (28.ft 3 in.) with a bar length of 22 ft. The
location for the bar to be fully developed is 69 in + 42 in. =111 in. and 339
in. 42 in. = 297 in.
The location of the cut off for a 4 bar is 60 in.- 33 in.= 27 in. (2-ft 3 in.) and
348- in +33 in. = 381 in. (31.ft 9 in.) with a bar length of 29.5 ft. The
location for the bar to be fully developed is 27 in + 42 in. =69 in. and 381 in.
42 in. = 339 in.
For lap splice to be a Class A splice in tension, the area ratio must be twice
be twice that of the required area. The cut-off of the 2 bars from 6 to 4 bars,
have a total length of 29.5 ft, so no splice on the bars were need. The
remaining 4 bars can be 30 ft long with an overlap of ld or 42 in., there is a
space of 24 in on either side of the bar for the full 34 ft. so the lengths of the
added bars are 24 in + 42 in. = 66 in. with splice length = 42 in.
CVEN 444
Assignment 14
due 7/18/03

1. Determine the length of the top and bottom bars for the external
span of the continuous beam. The concrete is normal weight
and the bars are Grade 60. The total uniformly distributed
factored gravity load on the beam is wu = 6.5 k/ft (including
self-weight). The beam has an fc = 4 ksi, fy = 60 ksi, b= 14-in.,
h= 28-in. and concrete cover=1.5-in.
a. Determine the singly reinforce beam needed for external
beams for both the positive and negative moments.
b. Draw the shear and bending moment diagrams for the
beam and determine the amount of steel need for
bending. Use the ACI code to find your moments. Hint:
There are more than one set of bending moment
diagrams.
Determine the load for the beam and design for the positive moment and
negative moments of the beam and 6.5 k/ft from ACI 8.3.3 with more than 2
spans
w l 2 ( 6.5 k/ft )( 25 ft.)
= 253.91 k-ft
M = un =
16
16
2
wu ln2 ( 6.5 k/ft )( 25 ft.)

=
= 290.18 k-ft
M =
14
14
2
+
u
wu ln2 ( 6.5 k/ft )( 25 ft.)

=
= 406.25 k-ft
M =
10
10
2
Assume that the tension controlled so that = 0.9 Assume a single layer of
steel and 1= 0.85, because fc =4 ksi and find Ru and k needed.
12 in.
406.25
k-ft
Mu
ft
0.9
Ru = 2 =
2
bd
(14 in.)( 25.5 in )
= 0.595 ksi
2 Ru
k '
Ru = 0.85 f c k ' 1 k = 1 1
2
0.85f c
k = 1 1
2 ( 0.595 ksi )
0.85 ( 4 ksi )
= 0.1938
The k value=k/1= 0.1938/ 0.85= 0.2280 which is less than 0.375 The area
of steel need is given as
As =
0.85 f cbdk
fy
0.85 ( 4 ksi )(14 in.)( 25.5 in.)( 0.1938 )

( 60 ksi )
= 3.92 in 2
c values.
( 60 ksi ) ( 4.00 in 2 )
=
a=
0.85 f cb 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(14 in.)
f y As
= 5.042 in.
a 5.042 in.
=
= 5.932 in.
c=
1
0.85
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
= larger of
min = 0.00333
3 f c = 3 4000 = 0.00316
fy
60000
Check the value.

=
As
4.00 in 2
=
bd (14 in.)( 25.5 in.)
= 0.0112 0.005 OK!

c 5.932 in.
=
= 0.233 0.375 ok!
25.5 in.
d
or
d c
25.5 in. 5.923 in.

0.003
5.923 in.
= 0.00992 0.005 OK!
t =
0.003 =
c

a
5.042 in.
M n = f y As d = ( 60 ksi ) ( 4.00 in 2 ) 25.5 in.
2
2
= 5515.0 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 5515.0 k-in.)
= 4963.5 k-in. 413.6 k-ft
413.6 k-ft 406.25 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 1.82 %
406.25 k-ft
if the bars will fit in the beam using 4 bars (#9 with #4 stirrups) in a row
s=
n 1
14 in. 4 (1.128 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.5 in.)
=
3
= 1.83 in.
and spacing will be 1.83 in. between bars. For the other two cross-section ,
you can follow the same procedure and the resulting set is
k=c/d
0.119
0.158
0.194
Mu
253.91 k-ft
290.18 k-ft
406.25 k-ft
As(req)
Bars
2
2.35 in
2
2.71 in
2
3.92 in
3 #8
2 #8 & 2 #7
4 #9
As(provided)
2
2.37 in
2
2.78 in
2
4.00 in
Overdesign
0.83%
2.37%
1.82%
You will need to draw the moment diagrams in order to find cutoff points
for the bars and also know how to find the inflection points. We have three
points 253.9 k-ft, +290.2 k-ft and 406.3. k-ft. One to find the cut-offs for
the negative and the positive moments, so we need to moment diagrams one
matching the smallest negative moment with the positive moment and one
matching the two negative moments.
Remember singularity functions can be used to write the moment function.

The problem is to match the moments. The shear and moment equations can
be written as
V ( x ) = P x 6.5 k/ft x
0
6.5 k/ft x
M ( x ) = 253.9 k-ft x + P x
2
0
Using the positive moment 290.2 k-ft, we need location and P value to
match the equations. The maximum moment will occur when the shear is
zero,
0 = P x 6.5 k/ft x P = 6.5 k/ft ( x )
0
6.5 k/ft ( x )
290.2 k-ft = 253.9 k-ft +
2
x = 12.94 ft P = 84.1 k
The plot of the shear and bending moment diagrams are

Shear Diagram
100
80
84.1 k
Shear Force (kips)
60
40
20
12.94 ft
0
-20 0
10
15
20
25
-40
-60
78.4 k
-80
-100
x (ft)
Bending Moment
400
290.2 k-ft
300
Moment (k-ft)
200
100
0
0
10
15
20
25
-100
-182.7 k-ft
-200
-253.91 k-ft
-300
x (ft)
Using the positive moment 406.25 k-ft @ 25 ft, we need location and P
value to match the equations.
6.5 k/ft ( 25 ft.)
406.25 k-ft = 253.91 k-ft + P ( 25 ft.)
2
P = 75.156 k

Shear Diagram
100
75.16 k
80
Shear Force (kips)
60
40
20
0
-20
10
15
20
-40
-60
-80
87.4 k
-100
x (ft)
25
Bending Moment
300
180.6 k-ft
200
Moment (k-ft)
100
0
0
10
15
20
25
-100
-200
-300
-253.91 k-ft
-406.3 k-ft
-400
-500
x (ft)
CVEN 444
Assignment 15
due 7/21/03

The concrete is normal weight and the bars are Grade 60. The
uniformly distributed load on the beam has wDL = 1.6 k/ft (including
self-weight) and wLL = 3.6 k/ft. The beam has an fc = 4 ksi, fy = 60 ksi,
b= 14-in., d= 25.5-in., concrete cover=1.5-in. and the strength of the
shear reinforcement is fsy = 40 ksi. Determine the shear
reinforcement for the beam. Draw the stirrup layout for the beam.
Note that the maximum shear will occur at the interior column.
Compute the loads of the beam

wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL
= 1.2 (1.6 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 3.6 k/ft )

= 7.68 k/ft
The dead load component is 1.92 k/ft and live load component is 5.76 k/ft.
The maximum shear at the inside beam is

7.68 k/ft ( 25 ft )
Vu(max) = 1.15
= 110.4 k
2
V 110.4 k
Vn(max) = u =
= 147.2 k
0.75
Using pattern loading, the maximum shear force at center will be

5.76 k/ft ( 25 ft )
Vu(center) =
= 18.0 k
8
V 18.0 k
Vn(max) = u =
= 24.0 k
0.75
Compute the strength of the concrete

Vc = 2 f c bd = 2 4000 (14 in.)( 25.5 in.)
1k
1000 lb
= 45.16 k
The maximum allowable shear force without shear reinforcement is (Vc/2 =

22.58 k) The equation for shear force is
V ( x ) = mx + b
24 k 147.2 k
= 9.856 k/ft
12.5 ft. 0 ft.
V ( x ) = 9.856 k/ft ( x ) + 147.2 k
m=
The shear diagram is

Shear Diagram
140
Shear (kips)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
2.5
7.5
10
12.5
x (ft)
V
Vc
Vc/2
The maximum design shear occurs at d (25.5 in or 2.125 ft)

V ( x ) = 9.856 k/ft ( 2.125 ft.) + 147.2 k
= 126.26 k
Determine the maximum shear force that the steel needs to provide
Vs= Vmax Vc = 126.26 k 45.16 k= 81.1 k. Determine the maximum
allowable spacing from the Vs 4 f c bd = 90.32 k so that
smax
d 25.5 in.
= 12.75 in.
=
2
smax 12.75 in.
2
24 in.
The minimum spacing for a # 4 bar is

s
Av f y
50bw
( 0.4 in ) ( 40000 psi ) = 22.86 in.

=
2
50 (14 in.)
So the absolute maximum spacing is 12.75 in.

Try #4 bar (0.2 in2) and Av = 2(0.2 in2) = 0.4 in2, the actual required spacing
is
Av f y d
Vs =
Av f y d
Vs
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 25.5 in )

s
2
81.1 k
s 5.03 in. Use s = 4.0 in.
Use 13 bars at 4-in spacing so that the distance will be (n-1)*4-in = 12*4-in
= 48-in or 4 ft.
Vs =
Av f y d
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 25.5 in )

=
2
4.0 in.
s
= 102.0 k
Vn = Vc + Vs = 45.2 k + 102.0 k
= 147.2 k
Compute the shear at 4-ft. and the shear strength the steel will need to
provide.
Vn ( x ) = 9.856 k/ft ( 4 ft.) + 147.2 k
= 107.78 k
Vs = Vn Vc = 107.78 k 45.2 k
= 62.6 k
Use a #4 bar (0.2 in2) and Av = 2(0.2 in2) = 0.4 in2, the actual required
spacing is
Av f y d
Vs =
Av f y d
Vs
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 25.5 in )

s
2
62.6 k
s 6.52 in. Use s = 6.0 in.
Use 7 bars at 6-in spacing so that the distance will be 48-in.+(n)*6-in = 48in.+7*6-in = 90-in or 7.5 ft.
Vs =
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 25.5 in )

=
2
Av f y d
s
= 68.0 k
6.0 in.
Vn = Vc + Vs = 45.2 k + 68.0 k
= 113.2 k
Compute the shear at 7.5-ft. and the shear strength the steel will need to
provide.
Vn ( x ) = 9.856 k/ft ( 7.5 ft.) + 147.2 k
= 73.3 k
Vs = Vn Vc = 73.3 k 45.2 k
= 28.1 k
spacing is
Vs =
Av f y d
Av f y d
Vs
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 25.5 in )

s
2
28.1 k
s 14.5 in. Use s = 12.0 in.
Use 5 bars at 12-in spacing so that the distance will be 90-in.+(n)*12-in =

90-in.+5*12-in = 150-in or 12.5 ft.
Vs =
Av f y d
s
= 34.0 k
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 25.5 in )

=
2
12.0 in.
Vn = Vc + Vs = 45.2 k + 34.0 k
= 79.2 k
The summary is given as

start (ft)
0
0.33
4.00
7.50
finish (ft)
0.33
4
7.5
12.5
bar
4
4
4
4
# of bars
2
11
7
5
Vs(req) (kips)
s(req) (in)
s(used) (in)
Vs(provided) (kips)
Vn (kips)
81.1
81.1
62.6
28.1
5.03
5.03
6.52
14.51
4
4
6
12
102
102
68
34
147.2
147.2
113.2
79.2
The shear envelope is given as
Shear Diagram
160
13#4 bars @ 4-in Vn=147.2 k
Shear Force (kips)
140
7#4 bars @ 6-in Vn=113.2 k
120
100
5#4 bars @ 12-in Vn=79.2 k
80
60
40
20
0
0
2.5
7.5
10
x (ft)
V
Vc
Vc/2
12.5
The final layout of the beam is
The bars would extend into the column on the left-hand side at 4-in. spacing.
CVEN 444
Assignment 16
due 7/23/03

The concrete is normal weight and the bars are Grade 60. The
uniformly distributed load on the beam has wDL = 1.8 k/ft (including
self-weight) and wLL = 3.6 k/ft. The beam has an fc = 5 ksi, fy = 60 ksi,
b= 15-in., d= 26.5-in., concrete cover=1.5-in. and the strength of the
shear reinforcement is fsy = 40 ksi. Design the beam.
Compute the loads of the beam

wu = 1.2 wDL + 1.6 wLL
= 1.2 (1.8 k/ft ) + 1.6 ( 3.6 k/ft )

= 7.92 k/ft
Determine the load for the beam and design for the positive moment and
negative moments of the beam and 7.92 k/ft from ACI 8.3.3 with more than
2 spans
w l 2 ( 7.92 k/ft )( 28 ft.)
= 388.08 k-ft
M = un =
16
16
2
wu ln2 ( 7.92 k/ft )( 28 ft.)

=
= 443.52 k-ft
M =
14
14
2
+
u
wu ln2 ( 7.92 k/ft )( 28 ft.)

=
= 620.93 k-ft
M =
10
10
2
Assume that the tension controlled so that = 0.9 Assume a single layer of
steel and 1= 0.80, because fc =5 ksi and find Ru and k needed.
12 in.
620.93
k-ft
Mu
ft
0.9
Ru = 2 =
2
bd
(15 in.)( 26.5 in )
= 0.786 ksi
2 Ru
k '
Ru = 0.85 f c k ' 1 k = 1 1
2
0.85f c
k = 1 1
2 ( 0.786 ksi )
0.85 ( 5 ksi )
= 0.2062
The k value=k/1= 0.2062/ 0.80= 0.2580 which is less than 0.375 The area
of steel need is given as
As =
0.85 f cbdk
fy
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(15 in.)( 26.5 in.)( 0.2062 )

( 60 ksi )
= 5.81 in 2
c values.
( 60 ksi ) ( 6.32 in 2 )
=
a=
0.85 f cb 0.85 ( 5 ksi )(15 in.)
f y As
= 5.948 in.
a 5.948 in.
=
= 7.435 in.
c=
1
0.8
min
200
200
f = 60000 = 0.00333
y
= larger of
min = 0.00354
3 f c = 3 5000 = 0.00354
fy
60000
Check the value.

=
As
6.32 in 2
=
bd (15 in.)( 26.5 in.)
= 0.0159 0.005 OK!

c 7.435 in.
=
= 0.281 0.375 ok!
26.5 in.
d
or
d c
26.5 in. 7.435 in.

0.003
7.435 in.
= 0.00769 0.005 OK!
t =
0.003 =
c

a
5.948 in.
M n = f y As d = ( 60 ksi ) ( 6.32 in 2 ) 26.5 in.
2
2
= 8921.0 k-in.

M n = M n = 0.9 ( 8921.0 k-in.)
= 8028.9 k-in. 669.1 k-ft
669.1 k-ft 620.93 k-ft
overdesigned =
100 % = 7.75 %
620.93 k-ft
if the bars will fit in the beam using 4 bars (#8 with #4 stirrups) in a row
s=
n 1
15 in. 4 (1.0 in.) 2 (1.5 in. + 0.5 in.)
=
3
= 2.33 in.
and spacing will be 2.33 in. between bars. For the other two cross-section ,
you can follow the same procedure and the resulting set is
k=c/d
0.154
0.178
0.258
Mu
388.08 k-ft
443.52 k-ft
620.93 k-ft
As(req)
Bars
2
3.47 in
2
4.00 in
2
5.81 in
6 #7
6 #8
8 #8
As(provided)
2
3.60 in
2
4.74 in
2
6.32 in
Overdesign
3.54%
16.72%
7.75%
You will need to draw the moment diagrams in order to find cutoff points
for the bars and also know how to find the inflection points. We have three
points 388.1 k-ft, +443.5 k-ft and 620.9. k-ft. One to find the cut-offs for
the negative and the positive moments, so we need to moment diagrams one
matching the smallest negative moment with the positive moment and one
matching the two negative moments.
Remember singularity functions can be used to write the moment function.

The problem is to match the moments. The shear and moment equations can
be written as
V ( x ) = P x 7.92 k/ft x
0
7.92 k/ft x
M ( x ) = 388.1 k-ft x + P x
2
0
Using the positive moment 443.5 k-ft, we need location and P value to
match the equations. The maximum moment will occur when the shear is
zero,
0 = P x 7.92 k/ft x P = 7.92 k/ft ( x )
0
7.92 k/ft ( x )
443.5 k-ft = 388.1 k-ft +
2
x = 14.49 ft P = 114.77 k

Shear Diagram
150
Shear Force (kips)
100
50
0
0
12
16
-50
-100
-150
x (ft)
20
24
28
Bending Moment Diagram

500
400
300
200
100
0
-100
12
16
20
24
28
-200
-300
-400
-500
x (ft)
Using the positive moment 620.93 k-ft @ 28 ft, we need location and P
value to match the equations.
7.92 k/ft ( 28 ft.)
620.93 k-ft = 388.08 k-ft + P ( 28 ft.)
2
P = 102.564 k

Shear Diagram
150
Shear Force (kips)
100
50
0
0
12
16
20
24
28
20
24
28
-50
-100
-150
x (ft)
Bending Moment Diagram

400
300
200
100
0
-100
12
16
-200
-300
-400
-500
-600
-700
x (ft)
For the positive cutoff needs to know the development length of the bars.
ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
=
(1.0 )(1.0 )(1.0 ) 60000 = 42.43
20 5000
ld = 42.43d b
ld = 42.43 (1.00 in.) = 42.43 in. Use 43 in.
Determine the value of a and the capacity of 1 bar

a=
As f y
0.85 f cb
( 4.74 in ) ( 60 ksi )
=
2
0.85 ( 5 ksi )(15 in.)
= 4.46 in.
a
M ubar = As f y d
2
4.46 in.
= ( 0.9 ) ( 0.79 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) 26.5 in.
= 1035.3 k-in. 86.28 k-ft.
So the Mu (1 bar) =86.28k-ft, Mu (2 bars) =172.6 k-ft, Mu (3 bars) =258.8 kft, and Mu (4 bars) =345.1 k-ft. Mu (5 bar) =431.4k-ft, and Mu (6 bars)
=517.7 k-ft
Bar Cutoff - Bending Moment
600
6 bars
500
400
4 bars
300
2 bars
200
100
0
0
12
16
20
24
28
-100
-200
-300
-400
-500
x (ft)
Determine where the bar cutoff points meet the moment diagram. Cut off
only two bars . Obtain the equation for the moment
M u ( x ) = 388.1 k-ft + 114.1 k ( x )
( x)
7.92 k/ft
2

345.1 k-ft. = 388.1k-ft. + 114.77 k ( x )
( x)
7.92 k-ft
2
x 28.983x + 185.152 = 0 9.507 ft. or 19.476 ft 114 in. or 234 in.
2
The location of the cut off for a two bars are 114 in.-27 in.= 87 in. (7-ft 3 in.)
and 234 in.+27 in.= 261 in. (21-ft 9 in.). The location for the bars to be fully
developed is 87 in + 43 in. =130 in.(10-ft 10 in.) and 261 in-43 in. =218
in.(18-ft 1 in.).
For the negative cutoff needs to know the development length of the bars.
ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
=
(1.3)(1.0 )(1.0 ) 60000 = 55.15
20 5000
ld = 55.15d b
ld = 55.15 (1.00 in.) = 55.15 in. Use 56 in.
For a #7 bar db=0.875 in.

ld f y
=
d b 20 f c
=
(1.3)(1.0 )(1.0 ) 60000 = 55.15
20 5000
ld = 55.15d b
ld = 55.15 ( 0.875 in.) = 48.26 in. Use 49 in.
Look at the interior wall and components of 8 #8 bars

Negative Cutoff at Interior Wall
400
200
0
0
12
16
2 bars
20
24
28
-200
4 bars
-400
6 bars
-600
8 bars
-800
x (ft)
Determine where the inflection points are
0 k-ft. = 388.1k-ft. + 102.564 k ( x )
( x)
7.92 k-ft
2
x 25.9 x + 98.005 = 0 4.602 ft. or 21.298 ft 55.2 in. or 255 in.
2
The inflection point on the right side is at 21.3 ft or 6.7 ft from the wall, so it
is impractical to cutoff the first set of two bars because the development
length is 56 in or 4.67 ft + la, so end all of the bars at the inflection point and
la = 255-in. 27 in. = 228. in.(19 ft) and the development length is 228-in +
56 in.= 284 in(23 ft 8 in)
The inflection point on the left side is at 4.6 ft from the wall, so it is
impractical to cutoff the first set of two bars because the development length
is 49 in or 4.1 ft + la, so end all of the bars at the inflection point and la = 56in. + 27 in. = 83. in.(6 ft 11-in) and the development length is 83-in + 49
in.= 34 in(2 ft 10 in)
The #7 bar does not have the development length in the column, therefore it
will need either a 90o hook or 180o hook.
Check the embedment length of 90o hook. The basic development length
lhd 1200 1200
=
=
= 16.97
db
5000
fc
lhd = 16.97d b = 16.97 ( 0.875 in.)
= 14.85 in.
Use ldh = 15 in. Check to see it is greater 8db=8(0.875in.) = 7.0in. or 6in,

which is correct. The depth of the 12db = 12(0.875in.) = 10.5in. use 12
in. There is sufficient length with 18-in column.
Compute the stirrup components.
The maximum shear at the inside beam is
7.92 k/ft ( 28 ft )
Vu(max) = 1.15
= 127.5 k
2
V 127.5 k
= 170.0 k
Vn(max) = u =
0.75
Using pattern loading, the maximum shear force at center will be

5.76 k/ft ( 28 ft )
Vu(center) =
= 20.16 k
8
V
20.16 k
= 26.9 k
Vn(max) = u =
0.75
Compute the strength of the concrete

Vc = 2 f c bd = 2 5000 (15 in.)( 26.5 in.)
1k
1000 lb
= 56.21 k
The maximum allowable shear force without shear reinforcement is (Vc/2 =

28.11 k) The equation for shear force is
V ( x ) = mx + b
26.9 k 170 k
= 10.221 k/ft
14 ft. 0 ft.
V ( x ) = 10.221 k/ft ( x ) + 170.0 k
m=
The shear diagram is

Shear Diagram
160
140
Shear (kips)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
10
12
14
x(ft)
V
Vc
Vc/2
The maximum design shear occurs at d (26.5 in or 2.208 ft)

V ( x ) = 10.221 k/ft ( 2.208 ft.) + 170.0 k
= 147.44 k
Determine the maximum shear force that the steel needs to provide
Vs= Vmax Vc = 147.44 k 56.21 k= 91.23 k. Determine the maximum
allowable spacing from the Vs 4 f c bd = 112.42 k so that
smax
d 26.5 in.
= 13.25 in.
=
2
smax 13.25 in.
2
24 in.
The minimum spacing for a # 4 bar is

s
Av f y
50bw
( 0.4 in ) ( 40000 psi ) = 21.33 in.

=
2
50 (15 in.)
So the absolute maximum spacing is 13.25 in.

Try #4 bar (0.2 in2) and Av = 2(0.2 in2) = 0.4 in2, the actual required spacing
is
Av f y d
Vs =
Av f y d
Vs
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 26.5 in )

s
2
91.23 k
s 4.65 in. Use s = 4.0 in.
Use 16 bars at 4-in spacing so that the distance will be (n-1)*4-in = 15*4-in
= 60-in or 5 ft.
Vs =
Av f y d
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 26.5 in )

=
2
s
= 106.0 k
4.0 in.
Vn = Vc + Vs = 56.2 k + 106.0 k
= 162.2 k
Compute the shear at 5-ft. and the shear strength the steel will need to
provide.
Vn ( x ) = 10.224 k/ft ( 5 ft.) + 170.0 k
= 118.9 k
Vs = Vn Vc = 118.9 k 56.2 k
= 62.7 k
spacing is
Vs =
Av f y d
Av f y d
Vs
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 26.5 in )

s
2
62.7 k
s 6.76 in. Use s = 6.0 in.
Use 6 bars at 6-in spacing so that the distance will be 60-in.+(n)*6-in = 60in.+6*6-in = 96-in or 8.0 ft.
Vs =
Av f y d
s
= 70.7 k
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 25.5 in )

=
2
6.0 in.
Vn = Vc + Vs = 56.2 k + 70.7 k
= 126.9 k
Compute the shear at 8.0-ft. and the shear strength the steel will need to
provide.
Vn ( x ) = 10.22 k/ft ( 8.0 ft.) + 170.0 k
= 88.2 k
Vs = Vn Vc = 88.2 k 56.2 k
= 32.0 k
spacing is
Vs =
Av f y d
Av f y d
Vs
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 26.5 in )

s
2
32.0 k
s 13.25 in. Use s = 12.0 in.
Use 6 bars at 12-in spacing so that the distance will be 96-in.+(n)*12-in =

96-in.+6*12-in = 168-in or 14-ft.
Vs =
Av f y d
s
= 35.3 k
( 0.4 in ) ( 40 ksi )( 26.5 in )

=
2
12.0 in.
Vn = Vc + Vs = 56.2 k + 35.3 k
= 91.5 k
The summary is given as

start (ft) finish (ft)
0
0.33
0.33
5
5.00
8
8.00
14
bar
4
4
4
4
# of bars
2
14
6
6
Vs(req) (kips)
91.2
91.2
62.7
32.0
s(req) (in) s(used) (in) Vs(provided) (kips) Vn (kips)

4.65
4
106
162.2
4.65
4
106
162.2
6.76
6
70.66666667
126.9
13.25
12
35.33333333
91.5
The shear envelope is given as

Shear Design
180
16 #4 @ 4-in. Vn =162.2 k
160
140
6 #4 @ 6-in. Vn =126.9 k
Shear (kips)
120
6 #4 @ 12-in. Vn =91.5 k
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
10
Vc/2
x(ft)
V
Vc
12
14
CVEN 444
Assignment 17
due 7/30/03

Calculate the axial load strength Pn for columns having the crosssection. Assume zero eccentricity for all cases. Case (a), (b) (c), and
(d) are tied, case (e) is spirally reinforced.
Case (a)
Ag = bh = (10 in.)(14 in.) = 140 in 2
As = 4 #8 = 4 ( 0.79 in 2 ) = 3.16 in 2
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag As ) + f y As
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) (140 in 2 3.16 in 2 ) + ( 60 ksi ) ( 3.16 in 2
= 654.86 k
Pn = rP0 = 0.8 ( 654.86 k ) = 523.88 k
Pu = Pn = 0.65 ( 523.88 k ) = 340.53 k
Case (b)
Ag = bh = (15 in.)(15 in.) = 225 in 2
As = 8#9 = 8 (1.00 in 2 ) = 8.00 in 2
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag As ) + f y As
= 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ( 225 in 2 8.00 in 2 ) + ( 50 ksi ) ( 8.00 in 2 )
= 1322.25 k
Pn = rP0 = 0.8 (1322.25 k ) = 1057.8 k
Pu = Pn = 0.65 (1057.8 k ) = 687.57 k
Case (c)
Ag = bh = (12 in.)( 20 in.) = 240 in 2
As = 6 #10 = 6 (1.27 in 2 ) = 7.62 in 2
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag As ) + f y As
= 0.85 ( 9 ksi ) ( 240 in 2 7.62 in 2 ) + ( 60 ksi ) ( 7.62 in 2 )
= 2234.91 k
Pn = rP0 = 0.8 ( 2234.91 k ) = 1787.9 k
Pu = Pn = 0.65 (1787.9 k ) = 1162.2 k
Case (d)
2
18 in.
2
Ag = r =
= 254.47 in
2
2
As = 6 #8 = 6 ( 0.79 in 2 ) = 4.74 in 2
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag As ) + f y As
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ( 254.47 in 2 4.74 in 2 ) + ( 60 ksi ) ( 4.74 in 2 )

= 1133.48 k
Pn = rP0 = 0.85 (1133.48 k ) = 963.46 k
Pu = Pn = 0.70 ( 963.46 k ) = 674.42 k
Case (e)
2
25 in.
2
Ag = r 2 =
= 490.87 in
2
As = 8#8 = 8 (1.27 in 2 ) = 10.16 in 2
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag As ) + f y As
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ( 490.87 in 2 10.16 in 2 ) + ( 60 ksi ) (10.16 in 2 )
= 2244.03 k
Pn = rP0 = 0.85 ( 2244.03 k ) = 1907.42 k
Pu = Pn = 0.70 (1907.42 k ) = 1335.2 k
CVEN 444
Assignment 18
due 8/1/03

1. Construct the load moment interaction diagram for the cross-sections
shown
The first point is pure compression

Ag = bh = (10 in.)(14 in.) = 140 in 2
As = 4 #8 = 4 ( 0.79 in 2 ) = 3.16 in 2
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag As ) + f y As
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) (140 in 2 3.16 in 2 ) + ( 60 ksi ) ( 3.16 in 2 )
= 654.86 k
Pn = rP0 = 0.8 ( 654.86 k ) = 523.88 k
Pure tension is
Pn = ( 60 ksi ) ( 3.16 in 2 )
= 189.6 k
The value of d = 14 in 2.5 in. = 11.5 in. and the yield strain of steel is 60
ksi/29000 ksi = 0.00207. Determine where the balanced value of c is
cu
0.003
cb =
d =
(11.5 in.) = 6.80 in.
0.003 + 0.00207
cu + s
a = 1c = 0.85 ( 6.8 in.) = 5.78 in.
The compression strain is

( c d )
( 6.80 in. 2.5 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.00190
6.8 in.
c
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00190 ) = 55.07 ksi
s =
For the tension steel
(d c)
(11.5 in. 6.8 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.00207
6.8 in.
c
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00207 ) = 60.0 ksi
s =
Compute the individual components of the equilibrium and the moment

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(10 in.)( 5.78 in.) = 196.5 k
Cs = As f s = (1.58 in 2 ) ( 55.07 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ) = 81.6 k

Ts = As fs = (1.58 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 94.8 k
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 196.5 k + 81.6 k 94.8 k = 183.3 k
The moment is
h
h a
h
M n = Cc + Cs d + Ts d
2
2 2
2
5.78 in.
= (196.5 k ) 7 in.
+ ( 81.6 k )( 7 in. 2.5 in.) + ( 94.8 k )(11.5 in. 7 in.)
2
= 1601.3 k-in.
Determine the eccentricity of the point

e=
M n 1601.3 k-in.
=
Pn
261.9 k
= 8.05 in.
Select a c value for the problem one in the compression-controlled region

c/d >0.6 Chose c= 10 in. so c/d = 0.87
a = 1c = 0.85 (10 in.) = 8.5 in.

( c d )
(10.0 in. 2.5 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.00225
10.0 in.
c
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00225 ) = 65.25 ksi Use 60 ksi
s =
(d c)
(11.5 in. 10 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.00045
10 in.
c
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00045 ) = 13.05 ksi
s =

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(10 in.)( 8.5 in.) = 289 k
Cs = As f s = (1.58 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ) = 89.4 k

Ts = As fs = (1.58 in 2 ) (13.05 ksi ) = 20.6 k
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 289 k + 89.4 k 20.6 k = 357.8 k
The moment is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
8.5 in.
= ( 289.0 k ) 7 in.
+ ( 89.4 k )( 7 in. 2.5 in.) + ( 20.6 k )(11.5 in. 7 in.)
2
= 1290.0 k-in.

e=
M n 1290.0 k-in.
=
Pn
357.8 k
= 3.61 in.
Select a c value for the problem one in the tension-controlled region c/d
<0.375 Chose c= 3.5 in. so c/d = 0.304
a = 1c = 0.85 ( 3.5 in.) = 2.975 in.

( c d )
( 3.5 in. 2.5 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.000857
c
3.5
in.
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.000857 ) = 24.86 ksi
s =
(d c)
(11.5 in. 3.5 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.00686
3.5 in.
c
s =

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(10 in.)( 2.975 in.) = 101.15 k
Cs = As f s = (1.58 in 2 ) ( 24.9 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ) = 33.9 k
Ts = As fs = (1.58 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 94.8 k
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 101.2 k + 33.9 k 94.8 k = 40.3 k
The moment is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
2.975 in.
= (101.2 k ) 7 in.
+ ( 33.9 k )( 7 in. 2.5 in.) + ( 94.8 k )(11.5 in. 7 in.)
2
= 1136.8 k-in.

e=
M n 1136.8 k-in.
=
Pn
40.3 k
= 28.24 in.
The other values are computed in a similar fashion. The factor is

computed using
compression
c
0.6
= 0.65
d
controlled
transition
c
0.25
= 0.375 < 0.6

= 0.23 + c
d

region
tension
c
0.375
= 0.9
d
controlled
The resulting numbers are given in the spreadsheet for increments of 0.25 in.
The plot is positive under compression and negative under tension. The
final figure is given as:
Interaction Diagram
600
500
400
Load (k)
300
200
100
0
-100 0
50
100
-200
-300
Moment (k-ft)
Unfactored loads
factored loads
150
Using the interaction diagram, design a column with h = 28 in., = 0.83 and
b = 18 in., PD = 280 k and PL = 520 k and Mu = 744 k-ft. Determine the
amount of reinforcement and type of ties and their spacing for fy = 60 ksi
and fc =5 ksi
From the design loads are
Pu = 1.2 PD + 1.6 PL = 1.2 ( 280 k ) + 1.6 ( 520 k ) = 1168 k
Pn =
Pu
1168 k
= 1796.9 k
0.65
12 in.
744 k-ft
M
1 ft = 13735.4 k-in.
Mn = u =
0.65
Obtain the dimensionless parameters

Kn =
Pn
1796.9 k
=
= 0.713
f c Ag ( 5 ksi )( 28 in.)(18 in.)
Rn =
Mn
13735.4 k-in.
=
= 0.195
f c Ag h ( 5 ksi )( 28 in.)(18 in.)( 28 in.)
Using the interaction diagrams from the book, figures B15 and B16.
=0.038
=0.033
Interpolate between the two values

0.9 0.8
( 0.8)
0.9 0.8
0.033 0.038
= 0.038 +
( 0.83 0.8) = 0.0365
0.1
= 0.8 +
The total area of steel is going to be

As = bd = 0.0365 (18 in.)( 25.5 in.)
= 16.75 in 2
Use 6 #11 bars (9.36 in2) for each side of the column.
The coefficient for concrete is
5 ksi 4 ksi
= 0.8
1 ksi
1 = 0.85 0.05
The eccentricity of the column

e=
M u 13735.4 k-in.
=
= 7.64 in.
Pu
1796.9 k
The assume that the compression steel has yielded and the stress in the
tension steel is
(d c)
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
( 25.5 in. c )
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
c
2218.5
87
c

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )(18 in.)( 0.8c ) = 61.2c
Cs = As f s = ( 9.36 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 561.6 k
Ts = As fs = ( 9.36 in 2 ) fs = 9.36 fs
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 61.2c + 561.6 k 9.36 fs
Take the moment about the tension steel, the distance from the center to the
tension steel is (28 in 5 in.)/2 =11.5 in. and Mu= Pu*e so e = e +11.5 in.
=7.64-in +11.5 in. =19.14 in. is
h
h a
h
M n = Pn e = Cc + Cs d + Ts d
2
2 2
2
Pn e = Cc d + Cs ( d d )
2
0.8c
Pn =
( 61.2c ) 25.5 in.
+ 561.6 k ( 25.5 in. 2.5 in.)
19.14 in.
2
= 81.536c 1.279c 2 + 674.859
Set the two equations equal to one another.

61.2c + 561.6 9.36 f s = 81.536c 1.279c 2 + 674.859
f s = 0.136645c 2 2.17265c 12.100
Iterate between the two equations

c
10
20
23
22.5
23
22.9
22.91
22.9088
fs (Eqn 1) fs (Eqn 2)
134.8500
23.9250
9.4565
11.6000
9.4565
9.8777
9.8354
9.8405
-20.1620
-0.8950
10.2143
8.1919
10.2143
9.8043
9.8452
9.8403
Check the stress in the compression steel

( c d )
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
( 22.91 in. 2.5 in )
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
22.91 in.
= 77.51 ksi Use f s = 60 ksi
Plug in for the stress in the tension steel and c for the values
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )(18 in.) ( 0.8 ( 22.91 in.) ) = 1402.1 k
Cs = As f s = ( 9.36 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 561.6 k
Ts = As f s = ( 9.36 in 2 ) ( 9.84 ksi ) = 92.1 k

Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 1402.1 k + 561.6 k 92.1 k
= 1871.6 k
The moment is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
0.8 ( 22.91 in.)
= 1402.1 k 14 in.
+ 561.6 k (14 in. 2.5 in.) + 92.1 k ( 25.5 in. 14 in.)
2
= 14298.1 k-in.
The eccentricity of the column is

e=
M n 14298.1 k-in.
=
Pn
1871.6 k
= 7.64 in.
Check the values

Pu = Pn = 0.65 (1871.6 k )
= 1216.5 k 1168 k OK!
M u = M n = 0.65 (14298.1 k-in.)
= 9293.8 k-in. 774.5 k-ft 744 k-ft OK!
Design the ties, the bars are less than a #11 bar therefore use a #4 tie and the
spacing will be the minimum of
48dstirrup = 48 ( 0.5 in.) = 24 in.
s = 16d bar = 16 (1.41 in.) = 22.56 in. Use s = 18 in.
b = 18 in.
CVEN 444
Assignment 19
due 8/4/03

The section of a short tied column is
16 x 24 in. and is reinforced with 8
#10 bars as shown. Determine the
allowable ultimate load on the section
Pn if its acts at ex = 8 in. and ey =
12 in. Use fc = 5 ksi and fy = 60 ksi.
Note: the Pnx & Pny include the
corner steel bars in both calculations a
more conservative solution would be
to use 1/2 the steel in each direction so
As= 2(1.27 in2) which would reduce
Pu . (Remember fs can not be greater
than 60 ksi, so that Pnx = 620.3 k
and Pny= 578.4 k Pn = 360.7 k and
Pu= 234.5 k )
Go back and prove the numbers for
the last assumption for biaxial loaded
column
The pure compression is

Ag = bh = (16 in.)( 24 in.) = 384 in 2
As = 8#10 = 8 (1.27 in 2 ) = 10.16 in 2
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag As ) + f y As
= 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ( 384 in 2 10.16 in 2 ) + ( 60 ksi ) (10.16 in 2 )
= 2198.4 k
Pn = rP0 = 0.8 ( 2198.4 k ) = 1758.7 k
Assume that the central set of steel is not going to contribute to the points and that the
compression steel and tension steel are =1.27 in2 +0.5*1.27 in2 +0.5*1.27 in2 = 2.54 in2
Look at about the x x axis.
The assume that the compression steel has yielded and the stress in the tension steel is
(d c)
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
( 21.5 in. c )
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
c
1870.5
=
87
c

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )(16 in.)( 0.8c ) = 54.4c
Cs = As fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ) = 141.6 k

Ts = As fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) fs = 2.54 f s
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 54.4c + 141.6 k 2.54 fs
Take the moment about the tension steel, the distance from the center to the tension steel
is (24 in 5 in.)/2 =9.5 in. and Mu= Pu*e so e = e +9.5 in. =12-in +9.5 in. =21.5 in. is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
2
Pn =
1
0.8c
( 54.4c ) 21.5 in.

+ 141.6 k ( 21.5 in. 2.5 in.)
21.5 in.
2
= 54.4c 1.012c 2 + 125.139

54.4c + 141.6 2.54 f s = 54.4c 1.012c 2 + 125.139
f s = 0.398c 2 + 6.481

c
10
12
12.25
12.227
f s (Eqn 1) f s (Eqn 2)
100.05
46.281
68.875
63.793
65.69388 66.20588
65.98111 65.98181
The tension steel has yielded so we need to go back and recompute the c value with the
last equation.
60 = 0.398c 2 + 6.481
c = 11.60 in.
( c d )
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
(11.6 in. 2.5 in )

= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
11.6 in.
= 68.25 ksi Use fs = 60 ksi

The load is
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )(16 in.) ( 0.8 (11.6 in.) ) = 631.0 k
Cs = As f s = ( 2.54 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ) = 141.6 k
Ts = As f s = ( 2.54 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 152.4
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 631.0 k + 141.6 k 152.4 k
= 620.2 k
Check the center steel

(d c)
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
(12 in. 11.6 in.)

= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
11.6 in.
= 3 ksi
This stress is less than the strength of the concrete so it can be neglected.
Look at about the y y axis.

(d c)
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
(13.5 in. c )
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
c
1174.5
=
87
c

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 24 in.)( 0.8c ) = 81.6c

Ts = As fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) fs = 2.54 f s
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 81.6c + 141.6 k 2.54 fs
is (16 in 5 in.)/2 =5.5 in. and Mu= Pu*e so e = e +5.5 in. =8-in +5.5 in. =13.5 in. is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
2
Pn =
1
0.8c
( 81.6c ) 13.5 in.

+ 141.6 k (13.5 in. 2.5 in.)
13.5 in.
2
= 81.6c 2.418c 2 + 115.378

81.6c + 141.6 2.54 f s = 81.6c 2.418c 2 + 115.378
f s = 0.952c 2 + 10.324

c
6
7.5
7.65
7.6642
108.75
44.596
69.6
63.874
66.52941 66.03742
66.24496 66.24444
The tension steel has yielded so we need to go back and recompute the c value with the
last equation.
60 = 0.952c 2 + 10.324
c = 7.22 in.
( c d )
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
( 7.22 in. 2.5 in )

= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
7.22 in.
= 56.92 ksi
Go back and recompute with the assumption that the tension steel has yielded
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 24 in.)( 0.8c ) = 81.6c
Cs = As f s = ( 2.54 in 2 ) ( f s 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ) = 2.54 f s 10.8 k

Ts = As fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 152.4 k
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 81.6c +2.54 f s 163.2 k
The moment is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
2
Pn =
1
0.8c
( 81.6c ) 13.5 in.

+ ( 2.54 f s 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ) (13.5 in. 2.5 in.)
13.5 in.
2
= 81.6c 2.418c 2 + 2.070 f s 3.463
The two equation

81.6c 163.2 + 2.54 f s = 81.6c 2.418c 2 + 2.07 fs 3.463
f s = 339.866 5.145c 2
and
( c 2.5 in )
fs = ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
c
217.5
= 87
c
Compute the two equations.

c
7
7.2
7.4
7.4065
87.761 55.92857
73.1492 56.79167
58.1258 57.60811
57.63063 57.6339
Check to the tension steel

(d c)
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
(13.5 in. 7.407 in )
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
7.407 in.
= 71.57 ksi Use 60 ksi
Compute the load

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 24 in.) ( 0.8 ( 7.407 in.) ) = 604.4 k
Cs = As f s = ( 2.54 in 2 ) ( 57.63 ksi 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ) = 135.6 k
Ts = As f s = ( 2.54 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 152.4 k
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 604.4 k +135.6 k 152.4 k
= 587.6 k
The original had not check the compression steel otherwise it would have been
Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 5 ksi )( 24 in.) ( 0.8 ( 7.22 in.) ) = 589.2 k
Cs = As f s = ( 2.54 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 5 ksi ) ) = 141.6 k
Ts = As f s = ( 2.54 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 152.4 k
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 589.2 k + 141.6 k 152.4 k
= 578.4 k
(d c)
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
( 8 in. 7.407 in.)
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
7.407 in.
= 7.0 ksi
This stress less the strength of the concrete would be small and can be neglected.
Compute the allowable load
1
1
1
1
=
+
Pn Pnx Pny Pn0

=
1
1
1
+
620.2 k 587.6 k 1758.7 k
Pn = 364.2 k
Pu = Pn = 0.65 ( 364.2 k ) = 236.7 k
Determine the load capacity of the

column, if the eccentric loading is at
ex= 5.5 in. and ey = 8 in. and fc = 4
ksi and fy= 60 ksi
Determine the axial load

Ag = bh = (16 in.)( 24 in.) = 384 in 2
As = 12 #10 = 12 (1.27 in 2 ) = 15.24 in 2
P0 = 0.85 f c ( Ag As ) + f y As
= 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ( 384 in 2 15.24 in 2 ) + ( 60 ksi ) (15.24 in 2 )
= 2168.2 k
Pn = rP0 = 0.8 ( 2168.2 k ) = 1734.5 k
Assume that the central sets of steel is not going to contribute to the points and that the
compression steel and tension steel are =2*1.27 in2 +0.5*1.27 in2 +0.5*1.27 in2 = 3.81 in2
Look at about the x x axis.
(d c)
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
( 21.5 in. c )
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
c
1870.5
=
87
c

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.)( 0.8c ) = 43.52c

Ts = As fs = ( 3.81 in 2 ) fs = 3.81 fs
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 43.52c + 215.6 k 3.81 f s
is (24 in 5 in.)/2 =9.5 in. and Mu= Pu*e so e = e + 9.5-in. =8-in +9.5 in. =17.5 in. is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
2
Pn =
1
0.8c
( 43.52c ) 21.5 in.

+ 215.6 k ( 21.5 in. 2.5 in.)
17.5 in.
2
= 53.467c 0.995c 2 + 234.08

43.52c + 215.6 3.81 fs = 53.467c 0.995c 2 + 234.08
fs = 0.26115c 2 2.6108c + 4.8504

c
15
17
16.5
16.7488
14.74635
37.7
26.23835 23.02941
23.16949 26.36364
24.68023 24.67964

( c d )
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
(16.75 in. 2.5 in )
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
16.75
in.
= 74.01 ksi Use fs = 60 ksi

(16.75 in. 9.16 in.)
fs1 = ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
16.75
in.
= 39.4 ksi
(16.75 in. 15.16 in.)
fs2 = ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
16.75 in.
= 8.26 ksi
Unfortunately the first center steel is significant so it must be included.

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.)( 0.8c ) = 43.52c
Cs1 = As f s = ( 3.81 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi 0.85 ( 4 ksi ) ) = 215.6 k

1951.25
8.83 in.
Cs2 = As2 fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) 87 ksi 1
0.85 ( 4 ksi ) = 212.34 k
c
c
3350.06
15.16 in.
Cs3 = As3 fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) 87 ksi 1
0.85 ( 4 ksi ) = 212.34 k
c
c
Ts = As fs = ( 3.81 in 2 ) fs = 3.81 fs
Pn = Cc + Cs1 + Cs2 + Cs3 Ts = 43.52c + 640.28 k
5301.31
3.81 fs
c
h
h a
h
M n = Pn e = Cc + Cs1 d1 + Cs2 d 2 + Cs3 d3 + Ts d

2
2 2
2
Pn e = Cc d + Cs ( d d ) + Cs2 ( d d 2 ) + Cs3 ( d d3 )
2
0.8c
( 43.52c ) 21.5 in. 2
+215.6 k ( 21.5 in. 2.5 in.)
Pn =
1951.25
17.5 in. + 212.34 k

( 21.5 in. 8.83 in.)

c
3350.06

( 21.5 in. 15.16 in.)

+ 212.34 k
c
3332.18
= 53.467c 0.995c 2 + 464.74
c
Set the two equations
43.52c + 640.28
5301.31
3332.18
3.81 fs = 53.467c 0.995c 2 + 464.74
c
c
516.83
fs = 0.26115c 2 2.6108c + 46.0735
c
The iteration of two equations

c
15
16
15.4
15.4142
31.21492
37.7
38.85323 29.90625
34.24112 34.46104
34.34924 34.34915
The Pnx value is

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )(16 in.) ( 0.8 (15.41 in.) ) = 670.6 k
8.83 in.
Cs2 = As2 fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) 87 ksi 1
0.85 ( 4 ksi ) = 85.7 k
(15.41 in.)
15.16 in.
0.85 ( 4 ksi ) = 5.06 k Set to 0
Cs3 = As3 f s = ( 2.54 in 2 ) 87 ksi 1
(15.41 in.)
Ts = As f s = ( 3.81 in 2 ) ( 34.35 ksi ) = 130.9 k
Pn = Cc + Cs1 + Cs2 + Cs3 Ts = 670.6 k + 215.6 k + 85.7 k 130.9 k

= 841.0 k
Look at about the y y axis.

(d c)
fs = Es s = Es
0.003
c
(13.5 in. c )
= ( 29000 ksi )
0.003
c
1174.5
=
87
c

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 24 in.)( 0.8c ) = 65.28c

1363.45
6.17 in.
Cs2 = As2 fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) 87 ksi 1
0.85 ( 4 ksi ) = 212.34 k
c
c
2174.44
9.84 in.
Cs3 = As3 fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) 87 ksi 1
0.85 ( 4 ksi ) = 212.34 k
c
c
Ts = As fs = ( 3.81 in 2 ) fs = 3.81 f s
Pn = Cc + Cs1 + Cs2 + Cs3 Ts = 65.28c + 640.28 k
3537.89
3.81 f s
c
is (16 in 5 in.)/2 =5.5 in. and Mu= Pu*e so e = e + 5.5-in. =5.5-in +5.5 in. =11.0 in. is
h
h a
h
M n = Pn e = Cc + Cs1 d1 + Cs2 d 2 + Cs3 d3 + Ts d

2
2 2
2
Pn e = Cc d + Cs ( d d ) + Cs2 ( d d 2 ) + Cs3 ( d d3 )
2
0.8c
( 65.28c ) 13.5 in. 2
+215.6 k (13.5 in. 2.5 in.)
Pn =
1363.45
11.0 in. + 212.34 k

(13.5 in. 6.17 in.)

c
2174.44

(13.5 in. 9.84 in.)

+ 212.34 k
c
1632.05
= 80.116c 2.374c 2 + 427.94
c
Set the two equations
65.28c + 640.28
3537.89
1632.05
3.81 fs = 80.116c 2.374c 2 + 427.94
c
c
500.22
fs = 0.6231c 2 3.894c + 55.7323
c
The iteration of two equations

c
8
10
10.1
10.0545
1.92995 59.8125
29.0793
30.45
30.43761 29.28713
29.81925 29.81337
Plug in and find Pny

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 4 ksi )( 24 in.) ( 0.8 (10.05 in.) ) = 656.1 k
6.17 in.
0.85 ( 4 ksi ) = 76.7 k
Cs2 = As2 fs = ( 2.54 in 2 ) 87 ksi 1
(10.05 in.)
9.84 in.
Cs3 = As3 f s = ( 2.54 in 2 ) 87 ksi 1
0.85 ( 4 ksi ) = 4.02 k Set = 0
(10.05 in.)
Ts = As f s = ( 3.81 in 2 ) ( 29.82 ksi ) = 113.6 k
Pn = Cc + Cs1 + Cs2 + Cs3 Ts = 656.1 k + 215.6 k + 76.7 k 113.6 k

= 834.8 k
Compute the allowable load
1
1
1
1
=
+
Pn Pnx Pny Pn0

=
1
1
1
+
841.0 k 834.8 k 1734.5 k
Pn = 552.4 k
Pu = Pn = 0.65 ( 552.4 k ) = 359.0 k
CVEN 444
Assignment 20
due 8/6/03

1. Problem 9.13 A rectangular unbraced exterior column of a multibay, multi-floor frame system is subjected to Pu =500 kips, factored
end moments M1- = 2500 k-in and M2 = 3500 k-in. The unbraced
length, lu, of the column = 18ft. Design this column if it is subjected
to gravity loads with side-sway considered as negligible. Use fc =
6.5 ksi and fy= 60 ksi, A=2 and B=1.2 and d=2.5-in. (Try a 20 in
square column and sustained load of 50 %)
Since the frame has no applicable side sway, the entire moment, M2 is taken as M2ns and
the magnification factor, s taken equal to zero.
Try a 20in x20 in section, d= 20-in. 2.5-in = 17.5 in. and Pu =500 k, M1u =2500 k-in,
and M2u= 3500 k-in.. From figure 9.32 A=2.0 and B = 1.2
Use a k value of 1.5 or we can use the equation for m=(A+B)/2 =(2.0 +1.2) /2=1.6
k=
20 (1.6 )
20 M
1 + M =
1 + (1.6 ) = 1.484
20
20
Compute the slenderness ratio for the column. The radius of gyration for a rectangular
column is 0.3 h.
12 in.
1.484 18 ft
klu
1 ft
=
= 53.4
r
0.3 ( 20 in.)
The slenderness ratio is greater than 22, therefore slenderness must be considered.
Compute the minimum M2
M 2 = Pu ( 0.6 + 0.03h ) = ( 500 k ) ( 0.6 + 0.03 ( 20 in.) )
= 600 k-in
therefore use M2 = 3500 k-in.
Compute the modulus of elasticity for the concrete
Ec = 33w1.5 f c = 33 (150 lb/ft 3 ) 6500 psi

= 4.89 x 106 psi ( 4.89 x 103 ksi )
The moment of inertia of the column is
Ig =
1 3 1
3
bh = ( 20 in.)( 20 in.) = 13333 in 4
12
12
Compute the stiffness constant for the column

3
4
0.4 Ec I c 0.4 ( 4.89 x 10 ksi )(13333 in )
EI =
=
1 + d
1 + 0.5
= 1.738 x 107 k-in 2
Compute the buckling load, Pcr

Pcr =
2 EI
( klu )
2 (1.738 x 107 k-in 2 )
12 in
1.484 18 ft
1 ft
= 1669 k
Compute the moment factor for the design moment
M
2500 k-in.
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4 1 = 0.6 + 0.4
3500 k-in.
M2
= 0.89 0.4 OK.
Compute the factor
ns =
Cm
Pu
1
0.75Pcr
= 1.482
0.89
500 k
1
0.75 (1669 k )
The design moment is Mc = nsM2 = 1.482 (3500 k-in) = 5187 k-in

The design parameters are
Pu = 500 k
M u = 5187 k-in.
e=
M u 5187 k-in.
=
= 10.37 in.
Pu
500 k
Assume a between 0.01 and 0.08, set , = 0.0125 or (0.025 for entire beam). The
area of steel is going to be
As = As = bd = 0.0125 ( 20 in.)(17.5 in.)
= 4.375 in 2
Use 5 #9 bars (5.00 in2) for the column. The coefficient for concrete is
6.5 ksi 4 ksi

= 0.725
1 ksi
1 = 0.85 0.05
The column should be under compression control, therefore the (c/d) ratio should be
greater than 0.6. Check c/d =0.6
c = 0.6d = 0.6 (17.5 in.) = 10.5 in.
a = 1c = 0.725 (10.5 in.) = 7.61 in.
( c d )
(10.5 in. 2.5 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.00229
10.5 in.
c
s =

(d c)
(17.5 in. 10.5 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.002
10.5 in.
c
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.002 ) = 58.0 ksi
s =

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 6.5 ksi )( 20 in.)( 7.61 in.) = 840.9 k
Cs = As f s = ( 5.0 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 300 k
Ts = As fs = ( 5.0 in 2 ) ( 58 ksi ) = 290 k
Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 840.9 k + 300 k 290 k = 850.9 k
The moment is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
7.61 in.
= ( 840.9 k ) 10 in.
+ 300 k (10 in. 2.5 in.) + 290 k (17.5 in. 10 in.)
2
= 9634.4 k-in.

e=
M n 9634.4 k-in.
=
Pn
850.9 k
= 11.32 in.
Since the eccentricity, e, is less than 11.32 in (10.37 in.) than the compression limit,
therefore it is in compression try using a c/d ratio=0.625
c = 0.62d = 0.625 (17.5 in.) = 10.94 in.
a = 1c = 0.725 (11.025 in.) = 7.93 in.
( c d )
(10.94 in. 2.5 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.00231
10.94 in.
c
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00231) = 67.12 ksi Use 60 ksi
s =

(d c)
(17.5 in. 10.94 in.)
0.003 =
0.003 = 0.00180
10.94 in.
c
fs = Es s = ( 29000 ksi )( 0.00180 ) = 52.17 ksi
s =

Cc = 0.85 f cba = 0.85 ( 6.5 ksi )( 20 in.)( 7.93 in.) = 876.3 k
Cs = As f s = ( 5.0 in 2 ) ( 60 ksi ) = 300 k
Ts = As fs = ( 5.0 in 2 ) ( 52.17 ksi ) = 260.8 k

Pn = Cc + Cs Ts = 876.3 k + 300 k 260.8 k = 915.5 k
The moment is
h
h a
h
2
2 2
2
7.93 in.
= ( 876.3 k ) 10 in.
+ 300 k (10 in. 2.5 in.) + 260.8 k (17.5 in. 10 in.)
2
= 9495.5 k-in.

e=
M n 9494.5 k-in.
=
Pn
915.5 k
= 10.37 in.
Check the values

Pu = Pn = 0.65 ( 915.5 k )
= 595.1 k 500 k OK!
M u = M n = 0.65 ( 9494.5 k-in.)
= 6171.4 k-in. 5187 k-in. OK!
Design the ties, the bars are less than a #10 bar therefore use a #3 tie and the spacing will
be the minimum of
48dstirrup = 48 ( 0.375 in.) = 18 in.
s = 16d bar = 16 (1.128 in.) = 18 in. Use s = 18 in.
h = 20 in.
2. Problem 11.1 Compute the slab thickness only and assume a beam
depth of 22-in. An end panel of a floor system supported by beams on
all sides carries a uniform service load wL = 75 psf and an external
dead load wD =20 psf in addition to its self-weight. The centerline
dimensions of the panel are 18-ft x 20-ft (the dimension of the
discontinuous side is 18-ft). Design the panel and the size and
spacing of the reinforcements using the ACI Code direct design
method. Given fc =4 ksi fy=60 ksi. The column size is 20-in x 20-in.
The width of the beam is 12-in.
Check the geometry of the direct design
l
20 ft.
= 1.11 2.0
Aspect ratio -- 2 =
l1 18 ft.
More than 3 panels in each direction
Assume a slab thickness of 7-in.
1 ft.
2
wD = 20 lb/ft 2 + ( 7 in.)
(150 lb/ft )
12 in.
2
= 107.5 lb/ft
2 wD = 215 lb/ft 2 > wL = 75 lb/ft 2
Compute the length between the columns

12 in. 20 in.
l1 = (18 ft.)
2
= 196 in.
1 ft. 2
12 in. 20 in.
l2 = ( 20 ft.)
2
= 220 in.
1 ft. 2
220 in.
= 1.12
=
196 in.
Compute the moment of inertia of the beams. The depth of the web is 22-in7- in= 15-in.
The sketch of the T- beam and L beam are
Compute the moment of inertia of the two sections. Start with the T beam.
Component
Flange
Web
n'
1
1
Itotal
yi (in)
yiAi (in )
Ii (in )
(yi-ybar) (in)
294
180
3.5
14.5
1029
2610
1200.5
3375
-4.1772152
6.82278481
5130.043262
8379.070662
3639
4575.5
474
ybar
niAi (in )
13509.11392
7.677215 in
4
18084.61 in
The moment of inertia of the T-beam is 18084.6 in4 and the L beam is
Component
Flange
Web
n'
1
1
Itotal
yi (in)
yiAi (in )
Ii (in )
(yi-ybar) (in)
189
180
3.5
14.5
661.5
2610
771.75
3375
-5.3658537
5.63414634
5441.760857
5713.848899
3271.5
4146.75
369
ybar
niAi (in )
8.865854 in
4
15302.36 in
The moment of inertia of the L-beam is 15302.4 in4.
11155.60976
The panel has center-to-center measurements of 20-ft and 18-ft with 20-in.x 20-in.
columns.
Compute the slab moment of inertia for the section A, B, C, and D. The 10-in in the
calculation of IA is due to the edge from the center of the column.
I A(slab ) =
1 3 1
3
12 in.
4
bh = 10 in. + 10 ft.
( 7 in.) = 3716 in
12
12
1 ft.
I B&D(slab ) =
1 3 1
3
12 in.
4
bh = 18 ft.
( 7 in.) = 6174 in
12
12
1
ft.
I C(slab ) =
1 3 1
3
12 in.
4
bh = 20 ft.
( 7 in.) = 6860 in
12
12
1 ft.
Compute the coefficients.
A =
B&D =
C =
I A( beam )
I A( slab )
I B&D( beam )
I B&D( slab )
I C( beam )
I C( slab )
15302.4 in 4
= 4.12
3716 in 4
=
18084.6 in 4
= 2.93
6174 in 4
18084.6 in 4
=
= 2.64
6860 in 4
The mean m is
m =
A + B + C + D
4
4.12 + 2.93 + 2.64 + 2.93

4
= 3.155
The m is greater than 2, therefore hmin is computed with a maximum clear space of 220
in. and = 1.12 = 220-in./196-in.
hmin
fy
( 60000 )
ln 0.8 +
( 220 in.) 0.8 + 200000
200000
=
=
36 + 9
36 + 9 (1.12 )
= 5.25 in.
So 7 in. will work.
CVEN 444
Assignment 21
due 8/8/03

1. Determine the shear reinforcement required for an interior flat panel

considering the following: Vu= 159k, slab thickness = 8 in., d = 6.5
in., fc = 4 ksi, fy= 60 ksi, and column is 18 x 18 in.
Compute the column perimeter b0 for two-way shear.
column
b0 = 4
+ d
width
= 4 (18 in. + 6.5 in.)

= 98.0 in.
Compute the two-way shear capacity of the column
Vu = 4 f c b0 d
1 kip
= 0.75 4 4000 ( 98 in.)( 6.5 in.)
1000 lb
= 120.86 k
The design shear Vu =159 k > 120.9 k, therefore need to provide two-way shear
reinforcement for the column. The maximum allowable shear that can be provided is
Vu = 6 f c b0 d
1 kip
= 0.75 6 4000 ( 98 in.)( 6.5 in.)
1000 lb
= 181.29 k
Compute the size of the shear cage, which is
column
b0 = 4
+2 a
width
The shear calculations are
Vu = 4 f c b0 d
((
159 k = 0.75 4 4000 4 18 in. + 2 a
1 kip
)) ( 6.5 in.)) 1000
lb
a = 50.63 in.
add the d to the distance 50.63 in + 6.5 in. = 57.13 in. Determine the shear reinforcement
of the steel.
Vu = Vn = Vc + Vs
Vs = Vu Vc = 159 k 120.86 k
Vs = 38.14 k
So the Vs per side is going be 38.14 k / 4 = 9.535 k. Determine the spacing and
reinforcement in the beam.
Vs =
9.535 k
= 12.71 k
0.75
Using a #3 stirrup, Av = 0.22 in2 and fy = 60 ksi

Vs =
Av f y d
s
s=
Av f y d
Vs
( 0.22 in ) ( 60 ksi )( 6.5 in.) = 6.75 in.

=
2
12.71 k
The maximum allowable spacing is d/2 = 3.25 in. So use a 3-in spacing on the shear cage
for the column.
# of stirrups =
57.13 in.
= 19.04 Use 20 stirrups
3 in.
So the distance is going to be 20(3 in.)= 60-in. a= 60-in 6.5 in. 53.5 in.
Vu = 4 f c b0 d
((
= 0.75 4 4000 4 18 in. + 2 53.5 in.

= 161.0 kips 159 kips OK!
1 kip
)) ( 6.5 in.)) 1000
lb
The final layout is

Reinforced Concrete Design PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Reinforced Concrete Design PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

Building system primary functions

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

1. Basic Building System

Vertical deflection (sag)

Dead, Live, etc.

Lateral deflection (sway)

Performance-Based Design: Control displacements

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

Flat Plate Floor System

Flat Plate Floor System

Flat Plate w/Spandrel Beam

Flat Plate w/Spandrel Beam

Increased gravity and lateral load resistance

Increased torsional resistance

Decreased slab edge displacements

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

Flat Plate w/Beams Floor

Gravity and lateral

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

Flat Plate w/Beams Floor

Flat Slab Floor System

Flat Slab Floor System

One-Way Joist Floor System

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

One-Way Joist Floor System

Lateral space frame

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

One-Way Joist Floor System

14-24 for 66 Modules .

One-Way Joist Floor System

Two-Way Joist Floor System

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

Two-Way Joist Floor System

Floor System Effective Cost

Live Load, psf

B. Lateral Load Systems

Coplanar system of beam (or slab)

2D vs. 3D Frames (Plan)

Floor joists, type

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

Frame Lateral Load Systems

Frame Lateral Load Systems

Frame Lateral Load Systems

Frame Lateral Load Systems

Shear Wall Lateral Load

Shear Wall Lateral Load

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

Dual Lateral Load Systems

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

CVEN 444 Structural Concrete

= My/I (normal stress)

v = VQ/Ib (shear stress)

b = f (load, support conditions, L, E, I) (bending)

a = F/A (normal stress)

b = My/I (normal stress)

v = VQ/Ib (shear stress)

b = f (load, support conditions, L, E, I, A) (normal)

Mx, My, and Vz

Develop possible layouts